piping guid

The 'PIPING GUIDE' ...... .... Discusses in detail the design and drafting of piping systems

Describes pipe, piping components most commonly used, valves, and equipment -

Presents charts, tables, and examples for daily reference

Provides a design reference for companies and consultants . Supplements existing company standards, information, and methods

Serves as an instructional aid

PART I -TEXT: explains.. . . . . . .m Techniques of piping design

Assembling of piping from components, and methods - for connecting to equipment

. Office organization, and methods to translate concepts into finished designs from which plants are built

rn Terms and abbreviations concerned with piping

PART II -TABLES: provide...... Frequently needed data and information, arranged for quick reference

* Factors for establishing widths of pipeways

Spacing between pipes, with and without flanges, and for 'jumpovers' and 'rununders'

Principal dimensrons and welghts for plpe fittings, flanges, valves, structural steel, etc.

Conversion for customary and metric units

Direct-reading metric qonverslon tables for dimensions

and ...... .... . . ..m A metric supplement with prrncipal dimensional data

in millimeters

David R. Sherwood Msmbsr, Arnencan Soaety of Machanlcal Eng~neers Member, lnstiluiion of Prcduction Engineers (UK)

Dennis J. Whistance BS, MS

Capyr~ght 1973, David R. Sherwmd and Denn~s J. Whistanca Second Edition. Capyrlght 1991, Syentek Books Company. Inc.

All rights reserved. No part of this bmk may be reprcduced or transmitted by anv means whatsoever

Printed in the United States of America

Published and distributed by: Syentek Inc. PO Box 26588 San Francisco, CA 94126 USA ISBN 0-914-08219-1

Distributed oumde the USA and Canada by: E. & F.N. Spon

Chapman and Hall 216 Boundary Row

Q London SE1 8HN. UK ISBN 0419-16860-5

The contribution of the companies, designers and engineers who assisted in the development of the Piping Guide 1s gratefully acknowledged. Apart from source material and assistance with production, acknowledged elsewhere, individual acknowledgments are not made, because neither contributors nor the authors or publisher assume liability or responsibility for designs using information presented herein. The user is responsible for complying with the various codes, standards and regulations, National, Federal, State and Municipal, and other legal obligations which may pertain to the construction and safe operation of plants. industrial installations, etc., including modifications to existing facilities.

Due to economic conditions, demand, manufdcturing philosophy, business mergers and acquisitions, the availability of items from manufacturers may change, and components obtained from domestic suppliers may not be of domestic origin. Discussion of products does not necessarily imply endorsement.

Chapter

PIPING: Uses, and Plant Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I

PIPE, FITTINGS, FLANGES, REINFORCEMENTS: In-line Equipment and Support Equipment . . . . . .2 VALVES, PUMPS, COMPRESSORS, and Types of Process Equipment.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

ORGANIZATION OF WORK: Job Responsibilities, Drawingoffice Equipmentand Procedures.. . . . . . .4

DRAFTING: PROCESS AND PIPING DRAWINGS including Drawing Symbols, Showing Dimensions, Showing Instrumentation, and Bills of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

DESIGN OF PIPING SYSTEMS: Including Arrangement, Supporting, Insulation, Heating, Venting and Draining of Piping, Vessels and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

STANDARDS AND CODES: for Piping Systems, Pipe, Pipe Supports, Flanges. Gaskets. Fining,,Valves, Traps, pumps, Vessels, Heat Exchangers, Symbols and Screwthreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

ABBREVIATIONS: for Piping Drawings and Industrial Chemicals.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

INDEX/GLOSSARY/ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Sections, figures, charts and tables in Part I are referred to numerically, and are located by the margin index. Charts and tables in Part II are identified by letter.

The text refers to standards and codes, using designations such as ANSI 831.1, ASTM A-53, ISA S5.1, etc. Full titles of these standards and codes will be found in tables 7.3 thru 7.14.

FOR TERMS NOT EXPLAINED IN THE TEXT, REFER TO THE INDEX. ABBREVIATIONS ARE GIVEN IN CHAPTER 8. I

USESOF PIPING 1.1

Piping is used tor industrial (process), marme, transportation, civil engineering, and tor 'commercial' (plumbing) purposes.

This book IS primarily concerned with industrial piplng tor processing and service systems. Processpiping is used to transport fluids between storage tanks and processing units. Service piping IS used to convey steam, air, water, etc., tor processing. Piping here defined as 'service' piping IS sometimes reterred to as 'utility' piping, but, in the Guide, the term 'utility piplng' is reserved tor major lines supplying water, tuel gases, and tuel oil [that IS, tor commodities usually purchased trom utilities companies and bulk suppliers).

Marme pipmg tor ships IS otten extenswe. Much ot i t is tabricated trom welded and screwed carbon-steel piping, using pipe and fittings described in this book.

Transportation pmping is normally large-diameter piping used to convey liquids, slurries and gases, sometimes over hundreds ot miles. Crude oils, petroleum products, water, and solid materials such as coal (carried by water) are transported thru pipelines. Different liquids can be transported consecu- tively in the same pipeline, and branching arrangements are used to divert flows to different destinations.

Civil p ip~ng IS used to distribute public utilities (water, tuel gases), and to collect rainwater, sewage, and industrial waste waters. Most piping ot this type i s placed underground.

Plumbing (commercial piping) is piping Installed in commercial buildings, schools, hospitals, residences, etc., tor distributing water and fuel gases, tor collecting waste water, and tor other purposes.

COMMISSIONING. DESIGNING, &BUILDING A PLANT

When a manutacturer decides to build a new plani, or to expand an existlno one,the manutacturerwill either employ an engineering company to undertake design and construction, or, if the company's own engineering department is large enough, they will do the design work, manage the project, and employ one or more contractors to do the construction work

In either procedure, the manutacturer supplies Intormation concerning the purposes o: buildings, processes, productm rates, design criteria tor specific requirements, details ot existing plant, and site surveys, if any

Chart 1.1 shows the pr~ncipals involved, end the flow at intormation and material.

SCHEMATIC FOR PLANT CONSTRUCTION CHART 1.1

FINISHED PLAN1

ORDER FOR PLANT. 5 DATA FOR PLANT

DESIGN DESIGN

ENGINEERS

. A

REQUESTS FOR EQUIPMENT. HARDWARE 5 MATERIALS

CONSULTANTS rn SUPPLIERS u

.sluejd 104 sufiisap Buidid 40 luaudolanap aql u! pafiefiua slenpin!pu! 40 saimp a q l 01 a3ualata1 leuads q 1 1 ~ '6u11aauiBua u61sap 40 sail!l!q!suodsa~ pue uo~~ezluef i lo aq l ~ ' b U I s a q p s a p ap!n3 a q l

PROCESS PlPE

PIPE & TUBE

Tubular products are termed 'tuba' or 'pipe'. Tube is customarily specified by its outside diameter and wall thickness, expressed either in BWG (Birmingham wire gage) or in thousandths ot an inch. Pipe is customarily identified by 'nominal pipe size', with wall thickness defined by 'schedule number', 'API designation', or 'weight', as explained in 2.1.3. Non-standard pipe i s specified by nominal size with wall thickness stated.

The principal uses tor tube are in heat exchangers, instrument lines, and small interconnections on equipment such as compressors, boilers, and retrigerators.

SIZES & LENGTHS COMMONLY USED FOR STEEL PlPE

ANSl standard B36.10M establishes wall thicknesses tor pipe ranging trom 118 to 80-inch nominal diameter('nominal pipe size'). Pipe sizes normally stocked include: 1/2,3/4, 1, 1~,1%,2,2%,3,3%.4,5.6,8,10,12,14, 16. 18, 20 and 24. Sizes 1%. 2%. 3%. and 5 inch are seldom used (unusual sizes are sometimes required tor connecting to equipment, but piping is normally run in the next larger stock size atter connection has been made). 118. 114. 318 and 112-inch pipe i s usually restricted to instrument lines or to service and other lines which have to mate with equipment. 112-inch pipe i s extensively used for steam tracing and tor auxiliary piping at pumps, etc.

Straight pipe is supplied in 'random' hg ths (17 to 25 i t) , and sometimes 'double random' lengths (38 to 48 it), if preterred. The ends ot these lengths are normally either plain (PE), beveled tor welding (BE), or threaded and supplied with one coupling per length ('threaded and coupled', or 'T&C'). If pipe is ordered 'T&C', the rating ot the coupling isspecified-see chart 2.3. Other types ot ends, such as grooved tor special couplings, can be obtained to order.

DIAMETERS & WALL THICKNESSES OF PIPE 2.1.3

The size ot all pipe is identified by the nominal pipe size, abbreviated 'NPS', which i s seldom equal to the true bore (internal diameter) of the pipe-the difference in some instances is large. NPS 14 and larger pipe has outside diameter equal to the nominal pipe size.

131

Pipe in the various sizes is made in several wall thicknesses tor each size, which have bean established by three different sources:-

(1) The American National Standards Institute, thru 'schedule numbers'

(2) The American Society ot Mechanical Engineers and the American Society tor Testing and Materials, thru the designations 'STO' (standard), 'XS' (extra-strong), and 'XXS' (double-extra-strong), drawn trom dimensions established by manutacturers. In the Guide, these designat~ons are termed 'manufacturers' we~gbts'

(3) The American Petroleum Institute, through its standard 5L, tor 'Line pipe'. Dimensions in this standard have no references tor individual sizesand wall thicknesses

'Manutacturers' weights' (second source) were intended, as long ago as 1939, to be superseded by schedule numbers. However, demand tor these wall thicknesses has caused the~r manutacture to continue. Certain fittings are available only in manufacturers' weights.

Pipe dimensions trom the second and third sources are incorporated in American National Standard B36.10M. Tables P-i list dimensions tor welded and seamless steel pipe in this standard, and give derived data.

IRON PIPE SIZES were initially established torwrought-iron pipe,with wall thicknesses designated by the terms 'standard (weight)'. 'extra-strong', and 'double-extrastrong' Betore the schedule number scheme tor steel pipe was first published by the Amerrcan Standards Arsociation in 1935, the iron pipe

sizes were modified for steel pipe by slightly decreasing the wall thicknesses (leaving the outside diameters constant) so that the weights per toot (Iblft) equalled the iron pipe weights.

Wrought-iron pipe (no longer made) has been completely supplanted by steel pipe, but schedule numbers, Intended to supplant iron pipe designations did not. Users continued to specify pipe in iron pipe terms, and as the mills responded, these terms are included in ANSl standard B36.10M tor steel pipe. Schedule numbers were introduced to establish pipe wall thicknesses hy tormula, but as wall thicknesses in common use continued t o depart trom those proposed by the scheme, schedule numbers now identify wall thicknesses ot pipe in the different nominal sizes as ANSl B36.10M states "as a convenient designation system tor use in ordering"

STAINLESS-STEEL SIZES American National Standard 835 19 established ran5 h~n-w ;izes ~ n l e s ppe, t i f ie l hedu'

5S and 10s

MATERIALS FOR PIPE 2.1.4

STEEL PIPE Normally reters to carbon-steel ptpe. Seam-welded steel pipe is made trom plate. Seamless pipe is made using dies. Common finishes are 'black' ('pla~n' or 'mill' finish) and galvan~zed.

Correctly selected steel plpe offers the strength and durability required tor the application, and the ductility and machinability requ~red to loin it and torm it into piplng ('spools' -see 5.2.9). The selected pipe must withstand the conditions ot use. especially pressure, temperature and corrosion conditions. These requirements are met by selecting pipe made to an appropriate standard; in almost ell instances en ASTM or API standard bee 2.1.3 and table 7.5).

The most-used steel pipe tor process lines, end tor welding, bending, and coiling. IS made to ASTM A-53 or ASTM A-106, principally i n wall thicknesses defined by schedules 40, 80, and manutacturers' weights, STD and XS. Both ASTM A-53 and ASTM A-106 pipe IS tabricated seamless or seamed, by electrical resistance welding, in Grades A and B. Grades B have the higher tensilestrength. Three grades ot A-306 areevaileble-Grades4 8, and C, in order ot increasing tensile strength.

The most widely stocked pipe is to ASTM A-120 which covers welded and seamless pipe tor normal use in steam, water, and gas (including air) service. ASTM A-120 is not intended tor bending, coiling or high temperaturesewice. I t is not specified tor hydrocarbon process lines.

In the oil and natural gas tndustries, steel pipe used to convey oil and gas is menutactured to the American Petroleum lnstitute'sstandard API 5L, which applies tighter control a t composition end more testlng then ASTM-120.

Steel specifications in other countries may correspond with USA specifications. Some corresponding european standards tor carbon steels and sta~nless steels are listed in table 2.1.

IRON pipe is made from cast-iron and ductileiron. The principal uses are for water, gas, and sewage lines,

OTHER METALS & ALLOYS Pipe or tube made tr0m copper, lead, nickel, brass, elum~num and varlous sta~nless steels can be readily obtained. These materials are relatively expensive and are selected usually either because ot their particular corrosion resistance to the process chemical, their good heat transter, or tor their tensile strength at high temperatures. Copper and copper alloys are tradit~onal tor instrument lines, toad processing, end heat transter equipment, but stainless steels are increasingly being used tor these purposes.

PLASTICS ripe maoe trom plastics may tie used to convey activeiy corrosive and I :ially tor ng cr 3 or I 3us g ~d

dilute mineral acids. Plastics are employed in three ways: as all-plastic plpe, as 'filled' plastic materials iglesfiber-reinforced, carbon-filled, etc.1 and as lining or coating materiels. Plastic pipe is made from polypropylene, poly- ethylene IPE), polyburylene (PB), polyvinyl chloride IPVC), acrylonitrile butadiene-styrene (ABS). cellulose acera ieb~ t~ ra te (CAB), polyolefins, end polyesters. Pipe made trom polyester and epoxy reslns is trequently glass- fiber-re~ntorced I'FRP') and commerc~al products ot this type have good resistance to wear and chemical attack.

65 3601 HFS 22 CDS 22 HFS 27 C O S ? I

653601 ERW22 GRR27

6S3601 SW22

6s 35m HFS13 WFS27 HFS35 65 3601 EFW 65 3601 I R W 2 2 I R W 2 I

6s 3661 EFB 22 E F W 7 I

65 3662

E W 2 B

EFW2BS

6% 3601 SF522 & C02 22 HE527 L CD521

6S3501 ERW2Z ERW27 I

Tho 4mer1~9" hiatlonpl q w d a r d ~ in~ t l tu te b-r e-,rodur-.' ".'veral ?"h"4+s bur pipe maoe irom vdrlous plasrics. These ANbI standardsand orners for plastic pipe are listed in table 7.5.

GLASS All-glass piplng is used tor its chemical resistance, clanlines and transparency. Glass pipe is not subject to 'crazing' otten tound in glass-lined pipe and vessels subiect to repeated thermal stresses. Pipe, fittings, and hardware are available both tor process piping and for drainage. Corning Glass Works offers a Pyrex 'Conical' system tor process lines in 1, I%, 2. 3, 4 and &inch sizes (ID) with 450 F as the maximum operating temperature. and pressure ranges 0-65 PSlA (1 in. thru 3 in.), 0-50 PSlA 14 in.) and 0-35 PSIA (6 in.). Glass cocks, strainers and thermowellsareavailable. Pipe fittings and equipment are lolned by flange assemblies which bear on the thickened conical ends ot pipe lengths and fittings. Corning also offers a Pyrex Acid-Waste Drainline system in 1%' 2, 3, 4 and 6-inch sizes (10) with beaded ends loined by Teflon-gasketed nylon compression couplings. Both Corning systems are made trom the same borosilicate glass.

LININGS & COATINGS Lining or coating carbon-steel pipe with a material able to withstand chemical attack permits its use to carry corrosive fluids. Lengths of lined pipeand fittings are ioined by flanges, and elbows, tees, etc., are available already flanged. Linings (rubber, tor example) can be applied atter fabricating the piping, but pipe is otten prelined, and manutacturers glve instructionsfor making pints. Linings ot various rubbers, plastics, metals and vitreous(g1assy) materialsareavailable. Polyvinyl chloride, polypropylene and copolymers are the most common coating materials. Carbon-steel pipe zinc-coated by immersion into molten zinc (hot-dip galvanized) is used tor conveying drinking water, instrument air and various other fluids. Rubber lining is often used to handle abrasive fluids.

TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE LIMITS 2.1.5

Carbon steels lose strength at high temperatures. Electr~c-resistance-welded pipe is not considered satisfactory tor service above750 F, and turnace-butt- welded pipe above about 650 F For higher temperatures, pipe made from stainless steels or other alloys should be considered.

Pressure ratings tor steel pipe at different temperatures are calculated according to the ANSI 831 Code tor Pressure Piping (detailed i n table 7.2). ANSI 031 glves strass/tamperature values t o r the varlous steels t rom which pipe is fabricated.

M E T H O D S F O R J O I N I N G PIPE 2.2

The ioints used tor most carbonsteel and stainless-steel pipe are:

~ ~ BUTT"NELOE0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEE 2.3

~~~ SOCKET.WELOE0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEE 2 4

SCREWED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEE 2 5

BOLTED FLANGE. ~ , , SEE 2.3.:. 24.1 & 2.5.1

BOLTED OUICK COUPLINGS I . , , . , .SEE 28.2

WELnC" 9 SCpClOt"D JOl%lTC 2,- '

Lines NPS 2 and larger are usually butt-welded, this being the most economic leakproot way ot joining larger-diameter piping. Usually such lines are subcontracted to a piping tebricator tor prefabrlcatlon in sections termed 'spools', then.transported to the site. Lines NPS 1% and smaller are usually elther screwed or socket-welded, and are normally field-run by the piping contractor trom drawings. Field-run and shop-tabricatad piping are discussed in 5.2.9.

SOCKET-WELDED JOINTS 2.2.2

Like screwed piping, socket welding IS used tor lines ot smaller sizes, but has the advantage that absence ot leaking is assured: this is avaluable tactor when flammable, toxic, or radioactive fluids are bemg conveyed-the use ot socket-welded toints is not restr~cted to such fluids, however.

BOLTED-FLANGE JOINTS 2.2.3

Flanges are expensive and tor the most pan are used to mate with flanged vessels, equipment, valves, and tor process lines which may require periodic cleaning.

Flanged iointsaremade by bolting together two flanges with a gasket between them to provide a seal. ReFEr to 2.6 for standard torged-steel flanges and gaskets.

FITTINGS 2.2.4

Fittings permit a change in direction of plping, a change in diameter of pipe, or a branch to be made from the main run ot pipe. They are tormed trom plate or pipe, machined trom torged blanks, cast, or molded trom plastlcs

Chart 2.1 shows the ratlngs o f butt-welding fittings used with pipe ot various schedule numbers and manutacturers' weights. For dimensions of butt- welding fittings and flanges, see tables 0-1 thru 0-6, and tables F-1 thru F-7. Dratting symbols are given in chams 5.3 thru 5.5.

Threaded fittings have Pressure Class designations of: 2000, 3000 and 6000. Socket-welding fittings have Pressure Class designations ot: 3000, 6000 and 9000. How these Pressure Class designations relate to schedule numbers and manutacturers' weights tor pipe isshown in table 2.2.

CORRELATION OF CLASS OF THREADED & SOCKET-LYELOING FITTINGS LVITH SCHEOULESII'.EIGHTS OF PlPE

TABLE 2.2

Pressure Class Threaded fittings Socketed fimings

PlPE DESIGNATION SCHIMFR'S

ZOO0

8OlXS

3000

160 80lXS

6000

XXS

160

9000

XXS

ELBOWS & RETURNS FIGURE Z Z

90° LONG-RADIUS ELBOW 90° SHORT-RADIUS

ELBOW

4 S ELBOW LONG-RADIUS (LR I RETURN

I L 3 x NPS

I 4

REDUCING ELBOW

SHORT-RADIUS RETURN

I

I ' h x NPS

(Of 1rrgcr Dlpel

I 2 x NPS

I 4

REDUCER lor INCREASER) loins a larger plpe t o a smaller one. The t w o available types, concentric and eccentrlc, are shown. The eccentric reducer is used when it is necessary t o keep e~ther the top or the bot tom o t the line level-offset equals % x llarger I D minus smaller ID).

REDUCERS FIGURE 2.3

CONCENTRIC ECCENTRIC

SWAGE IS employed t o connect butt-welded plplng to smaller screwed or m k e 3d p . In b lded used I a l t ~ . a t o . . TiT reducer when greater reductions i n line size are required Regular swages MI .3.1

i n concentric o r eccentric f o rm give abrupt change o t line m e , as do reducers. The 'venturi' swage allows smoother flow. Refer t o table 2.3 for specifymg swages f o r jolnlng t o socket-welding items, and t o table 2.4 f o r specifying swages f o r loining t o screwed piping. For offset, see 'Reducer'.

SWAGES. or SWAGED NIPPLES FIGURE 2 4

CONCENTRIC

ECCENTRIC VENTURE TYPE

MITERED ELBOWS are fabricated as required t rom plpe-they are no t j 2.1

fittings. The use o t miters t o make changes i n direction is practically restricted t o low-pressure lines 10-inch and larger if the pressure d rop is unimportant; fo r these uses regular elbows would be costlier. A 2-p~ece, 90-degree miter has-tour t o SIX tlmes the hydraulic resistance a t t h e corresponding regular long-radius elbow, and should be used w i th caution. A Spiece 90-degree miter has about double the resistance t o f low of the regular l o n g radius elbow-reter t o table F-10. Constructions tor 3.4.. and 5-piece miters are shown i n tables M-2.

3.PIECE & 2-PIECE MITERS FIGURE 2.5 FIGURES

2.1 -2.5 3.PIECE MITER 2-PIECE MITER I

1 l B TIMES NPS I THE 2.PIECE MITER HAS HIGH M FLOW RESISTANCE 1SceTABLE F-10)

171

I ne toliowlng rive rlange types are usen ror nun-welaeo mes. I ne oinerent "ange ' s avai' ' ' Ire di d in : "

WELDING-NECK FLANGE, REGULAR & LONG Regular welding-neck flanges are used with butt-welding f;ttmgs. Long welding-neck flanges are primarily used for vessel end equipment nozzles, rarely tor plpe. Sultable where extreme temperature, shear, Impact and vibratory stresses apply. Regw larlty of the bore IS ma~ntalned. Refer to tables F tor bore diameters of these flanges.

WELDING-NECK FLANGE FIGURE 2 6

SLIP-ON FLANGE is properly used to flange plpe. Slip-on flanges can be used with iong-tangent elbows, reducers, and swageshot usual practice). The internal weld is slightly more subject to corrosion thsn the b u n weld. The flange has poor resistance toshock and vibration. It introduces irregularity In the bore. It IS cheaper to buy then the welding-neck flange, but ~scostlier to assemble. It is easier to align than the welding-neck flange. Calculated strengths under internal pressure ere about one third that of the corresponding welding-neck flanges. The pipe or fitt ing is set back from the tace of ihe flange a distance equal to the wall thickness - 0 + 1 / 1 6

SLIP-ON FLANGE FIGURE 2 7

REDUCING FLANGE wltaole ror cnanging line size, out snoulo not oe if ab ransit ould ! und e tur e, as , n p

connections. Amilable to order In welding-neck end eccentric types, and usually trom stock in slip-on type. Speciiy by nominal pipe sizes, stating the size ot the larger pipe first. Example: a slip-on reduclng flange to connect a NPS4 plpe to a Class 150 NPS 6 line-s~zeflange ~sspecified:

R E 0 FLG NPS 6 x 4 Class 1% SO For a welding-neck reduclng flange, correct bore IS obtained bv givlng the pipe schedule number or manufacturers' welght ot the pipe to be welded on.

REDUCING SLIPON FLANGE FIGURE 2 8

EXPANDER FLANGE Applicetlon as tor weldlng-neck tlange-see above. Increases pipe size to first or second larger size. Alternetlve to uslng reducer and welding-neck flange. Usetul for connecting to valves, compressors and pumps. Pressure ratings and dimensions are in accord with ANSI 016.5.

EXPANDER lor INCREASER1 FLANGE FIGURE 2.9

LAPJOINT. or 'VAN STONE', FLANGE Frnnomicai if rnstly pine w h i. ..-..lless hi useL, d e f la i~~ . LOO be 01 caiuon steel and only me lap- p i n t stub end need be of the line material. A stub end must be used in a lap joint, and the cost of the two items must be considered. I f both stub and flange are ot the same material they will be more expensive than a welding- neck flange. Useful where alignment of bolt holes is difficult, as with spools t o be attached to flanged nozzles of vessels.

LAPJOINT FLANGE l w i h Stub-end1 FIGURE 210

BUTT-WELDING FITTINGS FOR BRANCHING FROM BUTT-WELDED SYSTEMS

STUB-IN Term for a branch pipe welded directly into the side ot the main plpe run-lt is not a fitting. This is the commonest and least expenslve method ot welding a full-size or reduclng branch for pipe 2-inch and larger. A stub-in can be reintorced by means set out in 2 11.

BUTT-WELDING TEES, STRAIGHT or REDUCING, are employed to make 90-degree branches from the maln run ot plpe. Stra~ght tees, wlth branch the same size as the run. are readily available. Reducing tees have branch smaller than the run. Bullhead tees have branch larger than the run, andare very seldom used but can be made to special order. None of these tees requires reinforcement. Reducing tees are ordered as follows:-

BUTT-WELDING TEES FIGURE 2.12

STRAIGHT BUTT-WELDING TEE REDUCING BUR-WELDING TEE

The next tour branching fittings are made by Bonney Forge. These fittings offer an alternate means ot connectmg into the main run, and do not requlre reinforcement. They are preshaped to the curvature ot the run pipe.

WELDOLET makes a 90-degree branch, tull-size or reduclng, on straight plpe. Closer manifolding 1s possible than w ~ t h tees. Flat-based weldolets are available for connecting to pipe caps and vessel heads.

WELDDLET FIGURE 213

I

UUTTWELDING ELBOLET makes a reduclng tanoent branch on longradius a d sthuz I-,.dius t , ~ ~ . . ~ .

ELBOLET

FiGURE 214

BUTT-WELDING LATROLET

FiGURE 215

BUTT-WELDING LATRDLET makes a 45-degree reducing branch on straight pipe.

SWEEPOLET makes a 90-degree reduc~ng branch trom the main run of pipe. Primarily developed for highyield pipe used in oil and gas transmission lines. Provides good flow pattern, and optimum stress distribut~on.

MEEPOLET FIGURE 2.16

vamp' work. ~ & f o r & n e n t is kt needed. [I01

The next three fittings are usually used for specla1 deslgns:

CROSS, STRAIGHT or REDUCING StraightcrOSSesareusually stock items. Reduclno crosses mav not be readily available. For economy, availability and to minimize the number of items in inventory, it is preferred to use tees, etc., and not crosses, except where space i s restricted, as in marlne piptng or 're-

BUTTJNELOING CROSS FIGURE 217

LATERAL, STRAIGHT or REDUCING, permlts odd-angled entry into the pipe run where low resistance to flow is important. Stralght laterals with branch bore equal to run bore are available in STD and XS weights. Reducing laterals and laterals at angles other than 45 degrees are usually available only to special order. Reinforcement is required where i t IS necessary to restore the strength ot the joint to the full strength ot the plpe. Reducing laterals are ordered similarly to butt-welding tees, except that the angle between branch and run IS also stated.

LATERAL FIGURE 2.18

SHAPED NIPPLE Now rarely used, bur can be obtained trom stock in 90- and 45-degree angles, and i n any size and angle, including offset, to special order. The run IS field-cut, uslng the n~pple as template. Needs reinforcement if it 1s necessary to brmg the strength ot the jomt up to the full strength of the plpe.

SHAF'ED NIPPLE FIGURE 2.19

CLOSURES 2.3 3

CAP IS used to seal the end of plpe. (See figure 2.20(a).)

- FLAT CLOSURES Flat plates are normally cut especially trom platestock by the tabrlcator or erector. (See figure 2.20 (bl and ic).)

T H R E E W E L D E D CLDSURES F I G U R E 2.20

la) B U T T - W E L D I N G CAP (b) FLAT CLOSURE L E I F L A T C L O S U R E

ELLIPSOIDAL, or DISHED, HEADS are used to close plpes of large diameter, and are similar to those used for constructmg vessels.

COMPONENTS FOR SOCKET-WELDED PIPING SYSTEMS

WHERE USED: For lines conveying flammable, toxlc, or expenswe material, where no leakage can be permltted. For steam: 300 to600 PSI. and sometimes 150 PSI steam. For corros- Iveconditions, see Index under 'Corrosion'

ADVANTAGES OF JOINT: ( I ) Easler alignment on small linesthan butt welding. Tack welding IS unnecessary

(2) No weld metal can enter bore (3) Jolnt will not leak, when properly

made

DISADVANTAGES OF JOINT: (1) The 1116-inch recess In lO1nt (see chart 2.2) pockets liquid

(2 ) Use not permltted by ANSI 031.1 - 1989 if severe vibration or crevlce corrosion IS antmpated

HOW JOINT IS MADE: The end of the pipe IS finlshed flat, as shown in chart 2.2. It IS located In the fittmg, valve, flange, etc., and a continuous fillet weld i s made around the clrcum- terence

SOCKET-WELDED P I P I N G C H A R T 2 2 JE U I

Chart 2.2 shows the ratlngs ot pipe, fittings and valves that are commonly combined, or may be used together. The chart is a gu~de only, and not a substitute tor a projec! specification.

. - - . . - . . . - - - - .

CARBOI-STEEL PlPE E

END PREPARATION OF PIPE. AND METHOD OF JOiNlNG TO FITTING, FLANGE. VALVE. OR EOUIPMENT

MrZXIMUhl LINE SiZE NORbtALLY SOCKET WELDED

AVAILABILITY OF FORGEO.STEEL SOCKETWELDING FITTINGS

NEIGHTSOF PlPE AND PRESSURE CLASSES OF FITTINGS WHICH ARE COMPATIBLE

SCHEDULE NUMBER

MFRS WEIGHT

F lWlNG

FITTING u. BORED

TO:

NPS 118 mNPS4

SCH 60 SCH 150 -

XS - xxs

30W 6000 9000

SCH 40 SCH 160 XXS

MOST CDMMON COPIIBINATION: CHOICE OF MATERIALOR HEAYIERWEIGHT PlPE AND FITTING WILL DEPEND ON PRESSURE. TEMPERATURE AND/OR CORROSTON ALLOW. ANCE REOUIRED. PlPE NPS Ih AND SMALLER IS USUALLY ORDERED TO ASTM SPECIFICATION A-106 Grrdc8. REFER 1 0 2 1 . 4 . UNOER 'STEELS

VALVES CONTROL VALVES

h1lNMUh5 (USUALLY FLANGED) USUALLY 3~ (SEE 3.1.101 PRESSURE IRATINGI CLASS

VALVES OTHER THAN GW IAN811 CONTROL VALVES BW IAPII

T soc~e t -ended t l l t l n g s r r e now only madem clrrrcs 3 0 0 0 6000 and 9000 (ANSI 816.11)

SOCKET-WELDED SYSTEMS

Dimensions of f i t t ings and flanges are given in tables 0 -8 and F-1 t h ru F-6 - FULLCOUPLING {termed 'COUPLINGI joins plpe t o pipe, or t o a nlpple, swage, etc.

FULLGOUPLING FIGURE 2.21

REDUCER j o ins two di f ferent diameters o i plpe.

REDUCER FIGURE 2.22

REDUCER INSERT A reduclng f i t tmg used for connecting a small p ipe t o a larger fittlng. Socket-ended reducer inserts can be made in any reduet~on by borlng standard forged blanks.

SOCKET-WELDING REDUCING INSERTS FIGURE 223

SOCKET-ENDED

FITTING, FLANGE,

OR EQUIPMENT

THREE FORMS

OF REDUCER INSERT.

,CO"ETLIIL.Pll"ELIYIAN",

- . - . - --- ,.,. .-, az~r~azrririv~n vutpux* I t ub !:,d - sd l o jlgner ise h cket- 1 p ~ p ,.terns. -.- ex-

planation i n 2.5.1 of uses given under 'threaded union'. Union should be screwed t ight beiore the ends are welded.to mlnlmlze warping of the seat.

SOCKETYUELD1NG UNION FIGURE 2.24

SWAGED NIPPLES According t o type, these al low joining: (1) Socket- ended items o t different sizes-this type o i swaged nipple has bo th ends plain IPBE) i o r insertion into socket ends. (2) A socket-ended item t o a larger butt iwelding pipe or fitting-thistype of swaged nipple has the larger end beveled (BLE) and the smaller end plain (PSE) f o r insertion Into asocket-ended item. A swaged nipple is also referred t o as a 'swage' (pronounced 'wedge') abbreviated on draw~ngs as 'SWG' or 'SWG NIPP' When ordering a swage. state the weight designations o f the pipes t o be ~omed. For example, NPS 2 (SCH 40) x NPS 1 (SCH 80). Examples o t the different end termmations that may be specified are as tallows:-

SPECIFYING SIZE & END FlNlSH OF S0CKET.WELDING SWAGES

TABLE 2.3

I SWAGE FOR JOINING- i EXAMPLE NOTE ON DRAWING LARGER to SMALLER

SWG 1% x l PEE

ASBREI~IATIONS:

SWAGE (PEE) FIGURE 2.25

ELBOWS make YU- or 4s-oegree cnanges or olrecrlurl !TI trm lul>. u~ pap=.

SOCKETYVELDING ELSOWS FIGURE 226

SOCKET-WELDING FLANGE Regular type IS available f rom stock. Reduc- Ing type a available t o order. For example, a reduc~ng flange t o connect a NPS 1 plpe t o a Class 150 NPS 1% line-s~ze flange ~sspecified:

RED FLG NPS 1 % ~ 1 C I ~ S S ~ ~ O S W

SOCKET-WELDING FLANGE FIGURE 2.27

Fl lT lNGS FOR BRANCHING FROM SOCKET-WELDED SYSTEMS

BRANCH FROM SOCKET-WELDED RUN

TEE. STRAIGHT or REDUCING, makes 90-degree branch f r o m the main

run o t ptpe. Reduc~ng tees are custom-fabricated b y bormg standard forged blanks.

SPECIFYING SIZE OF SOCKET-WELDING TEES

u a l

LATERAL makes full-size 45-degree branch f rom the maln run of plpe.

SOCKET-WELDING LATERAL FIGURE 229

CROSS Remarks f o r bun-welding cross apply-see 2.3.2. Reducing crosses are custorn-fabricated b y boring standard forged blanks.

SOCKETJNELOING CROSS FIGURE 2.30

HALF-COUPLING The full-coupling 1s not used for branching orforves. sel connections, as the half-coupling is the same length and is stronger. The half-coupling permits 90-degree entry Into a larger pipe or vessel wall. The sockolet is more pract~cable as shaping 1s necessary with the coupling.

SOCKET-WELDING HALF-COUPLING FIGURE 231

The next tour fitlings aremade by Bonney Forge and offer an alternate method ot enterlng the main plpe run. They have the advantage that the beveled welding ends are shaped to the cuwature of the run pipe. Remforcement tor the hurt-welded ptping or vessel is not required.

SOCKOLET makes a 90-degree branch, full-slze or reducing, on straight pipe. Flat-based sockolets are available for branch connections on pipe caps and and vessel hbads.

SOCKOLET FIGURE 2.32

I SOCKET.WELDING ELBOLET makes a reducing tangent branch on long- radius and short.radius elbows.

SOCKET-WELDING ELBOLET FIGURE 233

SOCKET-WELDING UTROLET FIGURE 2.34

NIPOLET A variant of the sockolet, having ~ntegral plaln n~pple. Primarily developed for small valved connections-see figure 6.47.

STUB-IN See comments in 2.32 .Not preferred for lines under 2-inch due to risk of weld metal entering line and restricting flow.

CLOSURE 2.4.4

SOCKET-WELDING CAP seals plain-ended pipe

SDCKETYVELD~NG CAP FIGURE 236

COMPONENTS FOR SCREWED 2.5 JGS' MS

- WHERE USED: For lines conveying services, and for smaller process p w g

ADVANTAGES: (1) Easily made from pipe and fittings on site (2) Minimizes fire hazard when installing piping in

areas where flammable gases or liquids are present

DISADVANTAGES: (I)' Use not permitted by ANSI 831.i-1989, if severe erosion, crevice corrosion, shock, or vibration is anticipated, nor a t temperatures over 925 F. (Also see footnote table F-9)

(2) Possible leakage of joint (3)' Seal welding may be required-see tootnote to

chart 2.3 14) Strength o t the pipe is reduced, as torming the

screwthread reduces the wall thickness * ~ n e s c remarks apply to systems using forged-rme~ fltt ingi.

FITTINGS & FLANGES FOR SCREWED SYSTEMS

Screwed pipmg is piping assembled from threaded pipeand fittmgs.

Threaded malleableiron and cast-iron f i t t t n g s a r e extensively used for plumb- ling in buildings. In industrial applications, Class 150 and 300 galvanized malleableiron fittings and similarly rated valves are used for drinking water and alr lines. Dimensions ot malleable-iron fittings are given in table D-11.

In process piplng, forged-steel fittings are preferred over cast-iron and malleableiron fittings (although their pressureltemperature ratings may be suitable),for their greater mechanical strength.To simplify material specificatlons, drafting, checking, purchasing and warehousing, the overall economics are in favor of utilizing as tew different types of threaded fittings as possible. Dimens~ons of forged-steel threaded fittings are glven in table D-9.

FULL-COUPLING (termed 'COUPLING'I loins plpe or items with threaded ends.

FULL-COUPLING F I G U R E 2.37

SCRFWED PIP ING CHAPT 9 e

Chart 2.3 show the ratings of plpe, fittings and valves that are commonly combined, or may be used together The chart is a gutde only, and not a substitute tor a prolect specificat~on.

END PREPARATION OF PIPE. AND METHOD OF JOINING TO FITTING. FLANGE. VALVE OR EQUIPMENT

MAXlhlUhl LINE SIZE NORMALLY THREADED

AVAILABILITY OF FORGEOSTEEL THREADED FlTliNGS

SCHEDULE

WEIGHTS OF PlPE AN0 PRESSURE CLASSES OF MFR?

FITTINGS WHICH WEIGHT

ARE COMPATiBLE FITTING

I CLASS

'ORGED-STEEL FITTINGS

THREAD ENGAGEMENT TCL

P

ITEhl SUCH AS YUYE. COUPLING. EWIPLIENT. ETC.

0 s

NPS 1%

NP5 118 mNPS 4

SCH 40 SCH 80

2OW 3WO 60W

MOST COMMON COMBINATION: THE MINIMUM CLASS FOR FITTINGS PREFERRED IN h10ST INSTANCES FOR MECHANICAL STRENGTH 16 30W. CHOICE OF MATERIAL OR HEAVIER-WEIGHT PlPE & FITTING WILL DEPEND ON PRESSURE. TEMPERATURE AND /OR CORROSION ALLOWANCE REQUIRED. PIPE NPS I % AND SMALLER IS USUALLY ORDERED TO ASTM SPECIFICATION 11-106 GrrdeB. REFER TO 2.1.4, UNDER 'STEELS'

VALVES CONTROL VALVES

MIN'h'UM IUSUALLY FLANGED1 USUALLY 300 ISEE 31.101

PRESSURE IRATINGI CLASS VALVES OTHER THAN GW IANS1i

CONTROL VALVES GW IAPII

A N S l 831.1.0 nuts that real welding shall nor be conridcred %a contribute to the ~lrenglh,ol the lo#",

SEAL WELDING WPLICATIONI

On-pbt: On all mewed connecf8onlwithin bvicew iimlu, wirh the exreprion ot p ~ p ~ n g carrywg air or mher men gar. and water 01f.piiot: On amwed liner for hydrocarbon rervlce and for !in- convcy~ng dangerous. toac. ronolive or vrlvablc fluid%

1151

CHART

..- -."". -.,.-, ". ,YII.ll LI I I *YY-Y vl)lra Yi ~ , , ~ r u r i a t v s r w a v rrmnc3 o ruwt NHL~O p ~ . r t m ~ > raby i ~ i u a ~ i a ~ i u r i . remuvai ur repiacemen1 _' I". sizes. Can h~ made in any rerh~rt6nn by h n r ~ n g and t=nnSng s t ~ A - ? " i o g " ~ qths " 3, val vess ' screv ping : s. E es:

",anks. to remove a valve it nust have at least one ediacent union, and t o remove piping trom a vessel with threaded connections, each outlet trom the vessel

REDUCING COUPLING FIGURE 2.38 should have one union between valve and vessel. Ground-taced jolnts are ureterred. althouoh other tacinas are available.

NIPPLES loin unions, valves, strainers, fitt~ngs, etc. Basically a short length ot pipe either tully threaded lclose n~pple) or threaded both ends (TEE), or p lan oneend and threaded one end (POE-TOE). Available i n vartous lengths -refer to table 0-11. Nipples can be obtained with a Victaulic groove at one end.

THREADED UNION FIGURE 2.40

NIPPLES FOR THREADED ITEMS FIGURE 2.39 PIPE-?O.TUBE CONNECTOR For loining threaded plpe to tube. Figure 2.41

la] CLOSE NIPPLE ra) LONG or SHORT ICI NIPPLE IPOE-TOE) shows a connector f itted to specially-flaied tube. Other types are available NIPPLE ITBE]

(dl TANK NIPPLE

Wall ot

Locknut thread INPSLI

NPT

TANK NIPPLE IS used tor making a screwed connection t o a non-pressure vessel or tank i n low-pressure service. Overall length IS usually 6 Inches with a standard taper pipe thread at each end. On one end only, the taper pipe thread runs Into a ANSI lock-nut thread.

PIPE-TO.TUBE CONNECTOR FIGURE 2.41

HEXAGON BUSHING A reducing fitt ing used tor connecting a smaller plpe into a larger threaded fitt ing or nozzle. Has many applications to Instrument connections. Reduc~ng fittings can be made i n any reduction by borlng and tapping standard iorged blanks. Normally not used tor high-pressure service.

HEXAGON BUSHING FIGURE 2.42

SWAGED NIPPLE This is a reducmg fi t tmg, used-tor lolnlng larger diameter . . to "?r dia plpe. retert as a ' . (pro ad 'sv - 1 and abbrev~ated as 'SWG' or 'SWG NIPP' on drawmgs. When ordering a swage, state the weight des~gnations o t the plpes t o be jomed: fo r example, NPS 2 (SCH 40) x NPSI (SCH 80).Aswage may be used to rp in ing : (1) Screw ed plplng t o screwed pipmg. 12) Screwed plptng t o butt-welded p i p i ng (3) 0un.welded pip~ng t o a threaded nozzle on equipment l t isnecessary t o specify on the plpmg drawmg the termmations required.

SPECIFYING SIZE & END FINISH OF THREADEOSWAGES TABLE 2.4

I SWAGE FOR JOINING-

LARGER to SMALLER I EXAMPLE NOTE ON DRAWING

I t THRD ITEM I THRD ITEM 1 SWG 1% x 1 TBE I BW ITEMorPlPE / THRD ITEM I SWG2 x 1 BLE-TSE

I THRD ITEM' 1 BW ITEM' I SWG3 x 2 TLE-BSE I BW = Butt welding TLE = Threaded large end

ABIIREIIATIONS: THRD =Threaded TOE = Threaded one end TBE =Threaded both ends BLE = Beveled large end TSE = Threaded small end BSE = Beveled small end

' A larger threaded item 1s seldom jo~ned to a smaller bumelding Item. However, the connection ot a bunwelded line to a threaded nozzle on a vessel i s an example.

SWAGED NIPPLES. TBE and BLE-TSE FIGURE 243

ELBOWS make 90- or 45-degree changes i n d i rect~on a t the run ot pipe. Street elbows havlng a mtegral n~pp le at one end (see table D- l l ) ,are available

THREADED ELBOWS. 45 and 90 DEGREE FIGURE 244

THREADED FLANGES are used t o connect threaded plpe t o f lawed items. egula . :educ .., ., pes a. - lable i tock. . ,. axamp.,. , a d u c l ~ , ~

flange t o connect a NPS 1 pipe t o a Class 150 NPS 1% linesize flange is specified: 7

R E D F L G NPS 1% x 1 Class 150 THRD

THREADED FLANGE FIGURE 2.45

FITTINGS FOR BRANCHING FROM SCREWED SYSTEMS

BRANCH FROM SCREWED MAIN RUN

TEE, STRAIGHT or REDUCING, makes a 90-degree branch t rom the run o l pipe. Reducmg tees are made b y boring and tapping standard forged blanks.

SPECIFYING SIZE OF THREADED REDUCING TEES

E THREADED TEES.STRAIGHT and REDUCING FIGURE 2 4 6 i 1

1 / STRAIGHT TEE REDUCING TEE / /

I .

LATERAL makes tull-size 45-degree branch trom the maln run ot ptpe.

THREADED LATERAL FIGURE 2.47

CROSS Remarks for butt-welding cross apply - see 2.3.2. Reductng crosses are made by boring and tapping standard torged blanks.

THREADED CROSS FIGURE 2.48

FITTINGS FOR SCREWED BRANCH FROM VESSEL OR BUTT-WELDED MAIN RUN

HALF-COUPLING can be used to make 90-degree threaded connections to ptpes for instruments, or for vessel nozzles. Welding heat may cause em- brittlement ot the threads of thisshort fitting. Requiresshaping.

THREADED HALFEDUPLING & FULLEDUPLING FIGURE 249

FULL.COUPLING Superior to half-coupling. Also requtres shaping for connecting to pipe.

TANK NIPPLE See 2.5.1, figure 2.39(d).

The next tour fitttngs for branching are made by Bonny Foroe. These fitttngs a mL -t jotr ...., .:rewe.. ..,ing t, .. ..aided ,,,,, and tv, ,,,.mg

Instrument connectlons. The advantages are that the welding end does not requlre remtorcement and that the ends are shaped to the curvature of the run pipe.

THREDOLET makes a 90-degree branch, tul l or reduc~ng, on stra~ght plpe. Flat-based thredolets are available tor branch connectlons on plpe caps and vessel heads.

THREDOLET FIGURE 250

THREADED ELBOLET makes reducing tangent branch on long-radius and short radius elbows.

THREADED ELBOLET FIGURE 2.51

THREADED LATROLET makes a45-degree reducmg branchon astra~ght pipe.

THREADED LATROLET FIGURE 2.52

F L A N G E FACINGS, B O L T S & G A S K E T S - 2.6

FLANGE FACINGS & FINISHES -~

2.6.1

Many lacings tor flanges are offered by flange manufacturers, including various 'tongue and groove' types which must be used in pairs. However, only tour types of facing are widely used, and these are shown in figure 2.56.

The raised face is used tor about 80% ot all flanges. The ring-]olnt tacing. employed wlth either an oval-section or octagon-section gasket, IS used mainly in the petrochemical industry.

THE MOSTLISED FLANGE FACINGS

RAISED-FACE

RlNG JOINT

FIGURE 2.56

FLAT-FACE

LAP JOINT

The RAISE0 FACE e I I lB inch high for Classes 150 and 300 flanges, and 114-inch high tor all other classes. Class 250 cast-iron flanges and flanged fittingsalso have the 1116-inch raised tace.

0.06.inch ra~sed face on flanges in Classes 750 and 300, but exclude the 0.25-inch ramd face on flanges In Classes 400 thru 2500. Tables F ~ncluda the ra~sed face forall flange Classes.

FLAT FACE Most common uses are tor mating wlth non-steel flanges on bodies ot pumps,etc. and formatlngwith Clan125 cast-lronvalves and fittings. Flat-taced flanges are used with a gasket whose outer diameter equals that ot the flange -this reduces the danger of cracking a cast-iron, bronze or plastic flange when the assembly is tightened.

RINGJOINT FACING is a more expensive tacing, and considered t h ~ most . .tent f- .. I-temc ....- ream .,.,.. press,... .,me ,u,se flang,, a palr are alike The ring-jolnt facmg is not prone to damage in handling as thesur- faces in contact wlth the gasket are recessed Use ot facings of thls type may increase as hollow metal O-rings gain acceptance tor process chemlcal seals

LAPJOINT FLANGE is shaped to accommodate the stub end. The combination ot flange and stub end presents similar geometry m the raised-tace flange and can be used where severe bending stresses wi l l not occur. Advant- ages ot this flange are stated in 2.3.1.

The term 'finah' refers to the type o f surtace produced by machining the flange tace which contacts the gasket. Two principal types ot finlsh arepro- duced, the 'serrated' and 'smooth'.

Forgedsteel flanges with raised-tace are usually machined to give a 'serrated- concentr~c' groove, or a 'serrated-spiral' groove finish to the ralsed-tace ot the flange. The serrated-spiral finish is the more common and may be termed the 'stock' or 'standard finish' available from suppliers.

The pitch ot the groovaand the surtaca f in~sh vary depending on the sizeand class ot the flange. For ralsed-taca steel flanges, the pitch varies trom 24 to 40 per inch. It is made using a cutting tool having a mlnimum radius at the tip ot 0.06-inch. The maximum roughness of surface finlsh a 125-500 microinches.

'Smooth' finlsh is usually specially-ordered, and is available in two qualities. (1) A fine machined finish leaving no definite tool marks. (2) A 'mirror-finlsh', primarily intended tor use without gaskets.

BOLT HOLES I N FLANGES 2.6.2

Bolt holes in flanges are equally spaced. Specifying the number of holes. diameter of the bolt circle and hole size sets the bolting configuration. Number of bolt holes per flange is given in tables F

Flanges are positioned so that bolts straddle vertical and horizontal centerlines. This 1s the normal position ot bolt holes on all flanged items.

BOLTS FOR FLANGES 2.6.3

Two types ot bolting are available: the studbolt using two nuts, and the machine bolt uslng one nut. Both boltings are illustrated in figure 2.57. Studbolt thread lengths and diameters are given in tables F

Studbolts have largely displaced regular bolts tor bolting flanged piping pints. Three advantages ot using studbolts are:

(1) The studbolt is more easily removed i f corroded (2) Contusion with other bolts at the site is avoided (3) Studbolts in the less traquently used sizes and materials can be readily

made from round stock

5PE. .-E PLATE BLIND

SIDE VIEW.

I t should be noted that lack screws may sieze in corrorwe candltlanl

DOUBLE-BLOCK-AND-BLEED FIGURE 2.60

'BLOCK VALVE

VALVES IS LESS EXPENSIVE BLEED CONNECTlON THAN EMPLOYlNGA

BLEED RING

REMOVABLE SPOOL FIGURE 2.61

111 must be pOIIlble to move one or both of the adlacent flanges away from the moo1 to effect removal+nlS IS erpecmw important wlfh rinppbnt flungcrl

I f a line is to be temporarily closed down with double-block-and-bleed, both valves are closed, and the fluid between drawn off with the bleed valve. The bleed valve is then left open to show whether the other valves are tightly shut.

rigure LOU snows me oleeo nng connecteo to a oleea valve-see 3.1.1 I. i he je of ped athel- a ble g shc con: ., as I. .

a more economic arrangement, and usually can be specified merely by adding a suffix to the valve ordering number.

A lineblind valve is not illustrated as construction varies. This type ot valve incorporates a spectacle plate sandwiched between two flanges which may be expanded or t~ghtened (by some easy means), allowing the spectacle plate t o be reversed. Constant-length lineblind v a l k are also available, made to ANSI dimens~ons tor run length.

Table 2.6 compares the advantages of the four in-line temporary closures:

IN-LINE CLOSURES TABLE 2.6

CLOSURE 7;cgy DOUBLE REMOVABLE

VALVE CRITERION LINE BLIND BLEED

SPOOL

MEDIUM EXPENSE.

CLOSURES FOR PIPE ENDS & VESSEL OPENINGS 27.2

Temporary bolted closures Include blind flanges using flat gaskets or ring joints, T-bolt closures, welded-on closures with hinged doors - including the boltless manhole cover (Robert Jenkins, England) and closures primarily intended for vessels, such as the Lanape range (Bonney Forge) which may also be used with pipe of large diameter. The blind flange i s mostly used with a view to future expansion of the piping system, or tor cleaning, inspection, etc. Hinged closures are often installed on vessels; infrequently on pipe.

QUICK CONNECTORS & COUPLINGS 2.8

QUICK CONNECTORS 2.8.1

Two forms ot connector specifically des~gned for temporary use are. ( 1 ) Lever type w ~ t h double lever clamping, such as Evertlte 'Standard' and Victaulic 'Snap Jo~nt'. 12) Screw type w ~ t h captive nut - 'hose connector'

Typlcal use i s for connecting temporarily to tank cars, trucks or processves. sels. Inter-trades agreements permit plant operators t o attach and uncouple these boltless connectors Certa~n temporary connectors have builtm valves. Evertlte manutactures a double shut-off connector for liquids, and Schrader a valved connector for alr lines.

1221

IOLT JICK 'LIN 2.P 7

Connections of this type may be suitable tor either permanent or temporan/ use, depending on the joint and gasket, and service conditions. Piping can be built rapidly with them, and they are especially useful tor making repairs to lines, for constructing short-run process installations such as pilot plants, and for process modification.

COUPLINGS FOR GROOVED COMPONENTS PIPE

Couplings of this type are manufactured by the Victaulic Company Of America tor use wlth steel, cast-iron. FRP or plastic pipe, either having grooved ends, or with Victaulic collars welded or cemented t o the pipe ends.

The tollowing special fitt~ngs with grooved ends are available: elbow, tee (all types), lateral, cross, reducer, nlpple, and cap. Grooveended valves and valve adaptors are also available. Advantages: ( 1 ) Qu~ck fining and removal. (2) Jornt can take up some deflection and expansion. (3) Suitable for many uses, with correct gaskets.

The manufacturer states that the biggest uses are tor permanent plant air, water (drinking, service, process, waste) and lubricant lines.

COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS are extensively used tor air, water. oil and gas. Well-known manufacturers include Victaulic, Dresser and Smith- Blair. Advantages: (1) Quick fitting and removal. (2) Joint may take up some deflection and expansion. (3) End preparatron of pipe 1s not needed.

VICTAULIC COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLING FIGURE 262

EXPANSION JOINTS & FLEXIBLE PIPING

EXPANSION JOINTS

r l \ Re-routinn r re-nnactng the line. (2) Expansion loops-see tigure b. I. n 11 7.1 8 ~ a l c u l a ~ ~ u p,acemt#ct " 8 anch,,,. ,-.I Col- .,... tging- .-. ..I. Bt type

expansion ~oints of the type shown in figure 2.63 are also used to absorb vibration.

SIMPLE BELLOWS FIGURE 2.63 I I

ARTICULATED BELLOWS FIGURE 2.64

ARTICULATED TWIN-BELLOWS ASSEMBLY

F I G U R E S

FIGURE 2.65 2.59-2.65 I

Figures 2.63 thru 2.66 show methods of accommodating movement in piping due to temperature changes, i f such movement cannot be taken up by:

1231

Inserted in lines immediately upstream ot sensitive equipment, strainers collect solid particles in the approximate size range 0.02-0.5 inch, which can be separated by passing the fluid bearmg them thru the strainer's screen. Typical locations for strainers are before a control valve, pump, turbine, or traps on steam systems. 20-mesh strainers are used for steam, water, and heavy or medium oils. 40mesh is su~table for steam, air, other gasis, and light oils.

The commonest stralner is the illustrated wye type where the screen is cylin- dric and retains the part~cies within. This type ot strainer is easily dismant- led. Some strainerscan be fitted wlth a valve to facilitate blowmg out collected material without shutt~ng the line down-see figure 6.9, tor example. Jacketed stramers are available.

FLEXIBLE PIPING 2.9.2 SEPARATOR FIGURE 267

For filling and emptylng railcars, tankers, etc., thru r ig~d plpe, it 1s necessary to design artlculated pip~ng, using 'sw~veling' [ o m , or 'ball' io~nts (the latter is a 'universal' joint). Flexible hose has many uses espec~ally where there is a need tor temporaw connections, or where vibration or movement occurs. Chemical-resistant and/or armored hoses are available in regular or lacketed forms (see figure 6.39).

SEPARATORS, STRAINERS. SCREENS & DRIPLEGS 2.10

COLLECTING UNWANTED MATERIAL FROM THE FLOW 2.10.1

Devices are included in process and service lines to separate and collect undesirable solid or liquid material. Pipe scale, loose weld metal, unreacted or decomposed process material, precipitates, lubricants, oils. or water may harm either equipment or the process.

Common forms of line-installed separator are illustrated in figures 2.67 and 2.68. Other more elaborate separators mentioned in 3.3.3 are available, but these tall more into the caregow o t process equipment, normally selected by the process engineer.

Air and some other gases in liquid-bearing lines are normally self-collecting at piping high points and at the remote ends ot headers, and are vented by discharge valves - see 3.1.9.

SEPARATORS 2.10.2

These permanent devices are used t o collect droplets from a gaseous stream, tor example, to collect oil droplets trom compressed air, or condensate droplets from wet steam. Figure 2.67 shows a separator in which droplets in the stream collect in chevroned grooves i n the barr~er and drain to the small well. Collected liquid is discharged via a trap-see 3.1.9 and 6.10.7.

' DRIER STEAM

VREMOVED WATER PIPED TO TRAP

STRAINER FIGURE 2.68

SCREENS 6. ow...

Simple temporary strainers made from pertorated sheet metal andlor wlre mesh are used tor startup operations on the suctton s~de of pumps and comp- pressors, especially where there IS a long run of piping before the unlt that may contain weld spatter or material inadvertently left In the pipe. After startup, the screen usually IS removed

It may be necessary to arrange for a small removable spool to accommodate the screen. It IS Important that the flow In suction lines should not be restricted. Coneshaped screens are therefor preferred, w ~ t h cylindrc types as second choice Flat screens are better reserved for low-suction heads

SCREEN BETWEEN FLANGES FIGURE 2.69

USUAL DIRECTION OF FLOW THRU THE SCREEN

DRIPLEG CONSTRUCTION FIGURE 2.70

BLOWOOWN CONNECTION

Often made from pipe and fittings, the drlpleg is an Inexpensive means of collecting condensate. Figure 2.70 shows a drtpleg fitted to a horizontal pipe. Removal of condensate trom steam lines IS discussed in 6.10. Recommended stzesfor drlplegsare given In table 6.10.

BRANCH CONNECTIONS

'Reintorcement' is the addition of extra metal at a branch connection made from a pipe or vessel wall.The added metal compensates tor thestructural weakening due to the hole.

Stub-ins may be reintorced with regular or-wraparound saddles, as shown In figure 2.71. Rings made from platestock are used to reintorce branches made with welded laterals and butt-welded connections to vessels. Small welded connections may be reinforced by adding extra weld metal to the p n t .

Relntorclng pleces are usually provlded with a small hole to vent gases produced by welding; these gases would otherwise be trapped. A vent hole also serves to indicate any leakage trom the pint.

STRAIGHT PIPE

I f a butt weld loining two sections at straight pipe is sublect to unusual external stress. it may be relntorced by the add i tm ot a 'sleeve' (formed trom two units, each resembling the lower member in figure 2.71 (b)).

The code applicable to the piping should be consulted tor relntorcement requiiements. Backing rings are not considered to be reintorcements-see the tootnote to chart 2.1.

REINFORCING SADDLES FIGURE 2.71

,a) REGULAR SADDLE

VENT HOLE IIn raodle only)

Ib) WRAPAROUNDSAOOLE

SECTION ROO

. .,, ..

-7. SECTION

ORORIIPHCTE SLIDE PLATES

I 2. VARIABLE L O A D TYPE

Symbols for draftlng various types ot support are shown in chart 5.7. For destgntng support systems, see 6.2.

-

PIPE SUPPORTS 2.12.1

Pipe supports shnuld be as simple as conditions allow. Stock items are used where practicable, especially tor piplng held trom above. To support piping trom below, supports are usually made to suit trom platestock, plpe, and pieces ot structural steel.

A selection of available hardware tor supporting is illustrated in figures 2.72A and 8.

TERMS FOR SUPPORTS 2.12.2

SUPPORT The weight of piping is usually carried on supports made from structural steel, or steel and concrete. (The term 'support' IS also used In reterence to hangers.)

HANGER Device which suspends piping (usually a smgle line) from structural steel, concrete or wood. Hangers are usually adiustable tor height.

ANCHOR A rigid supportwhich preventstransmission ot movement (thermal, vibratory, etc.) along piping. Construction may be trom steel plate, brackets, flanges, rods, etc. Attachment ot an anchor to plpeshould preferably encircle the pipe and be welded all around as this gives a better distribution ot stress in the plpe wall.

TIE An arrangement ot one or more rods, bars, etc., to restrain movement ot piping.

DUMMY LEG An extension piece lot plpe or rolled steel section) welded to an elbow In order to support the line-see figure2.7ZA and table 6.3.

The following hardware is used where mechanical andlor thermal movement is a problem:

GUIDE A means ot allowing a plpe to move along i t s length, but not sideways.

SHOE A metal piece attached to the underside ot a pipe which rests on supporting steel. Primarily used to reduce wear from sliding for lines subject to movement. Perm~ts insulation t o be applied to pipe.

SADDLE A welded attachment tor pipe requiring insulation, and subject t o longitudinal or rolling movement tresulting trom temperature changes other than climatic). Saddles may be used wlth guldes as shown in 6.2.8.

1281

,, -..-- ,,,-.. .urru,z a u u a ~ m ~ r u ~ I I airure L. IW. rlgure 728 :' applii ot 'I lraph le p k itch i . !red t,

Union Carbide Inc. The two plates used in a support are made from or faced with a material of low frict~on able to withstand mechan~cal stress and temperature changes. Plates are often made from graphite blocks. Steel plates with a teflon faclng are available and may be welded to steel.

Spring hangers or supports allow variations i n the length of plpe due t o changes In temperature, and are otten used tor vertical lines. Reter to 6.2.5 figure 6.16. There are two types of spring hanger or support:

'CONSTANT LOAD' HANGER This device consists ot a coil spring and lever mechanism in a housing. Movement ot the piping, within limits, will not change the spring force holding up the piplng; thus, no additional torces will be introduced to the piping system.

'VARIABLE SPRING' HANGER, and SUPPORT These devices Consist Of a coil spring in a houslng. The weight of the piping rests on the spring in compression. The spring permits a limited amount at thermal movement. A variable spring hanger holding up a vertical line will reduce its lifting force as the line expands toward it. A variable spring support would increase its lifting torce as the line expands toward it. Both placea load on the piping system. Where this is undesirable, a constant-load hanger can be used instead.

HYDRAULIC DAMPENER, SHOCK, SNUBBER, or SWAY SUPPRESSOR One end of the unit is attached to piping and the other to structural steel or concrete. The unit expands or contracts to absorb slow movement of piping, but is rigid to rapid movement.

SWAY BRACE, or SWAY ARRESTOR, 1s essentially a helical spring in a housing which is fined between piping and a rigid structure. Its function is t o buffer vibration and sway.

WELDING TO PIPE 2.12.3

I f the applicable code permits, lugs may be welded t o pipe. Figure 2.72A illustrates some common arrangements using welded lugs, rolled steel sections and pipe, tor:-

(1) Fixing hangers to structural steel, etc. (2) Attaching to pipe (3) Supporting pipe

Welding supports to prelined pipe will usually spoil the lining, and therefor lugs, etc., must be welded to pipe and fittmgs before the lining is applied. Welding ot supports and lugs to pipes and vessels to be stress-relieved should be done before heat treatment.

VALVES 3.1

FUNCTIONS OF VALVES 3.1.1

Table 3.1 gives a basis tor classifyingvalvesaccording to function:

USES OF VALVES TABLE 3.7

3.1.5,3.1.6 and3.1.10

CHECKING IN ONE DIRECTION

SWITCHING FLOW SWITCHING ALONG DIFFERENT 3.1.8

ROUTES I DISCHARGING FLUID

D'SCHARGING FROM ASYSTEM 3.1.9 I

Types ot valve suitable tor on/off and regulating functions are listed in chart 3.2. The suitability ot a valve tor a requ~red purpose depends on its construction, discussed in 3.1.3.

PARTS OF VALVES 3.32.

Valve manutacturers' catalogs offer a seemingly endless variety ot constructions. Classific3tion is possible, however, by considering the basic parts that make UP a valve:

(1) The 'disc' and 'seat' that directly affect the flow

(2) The 'stem' that moves the disc - in some valves, fluid under pressure does the work ot a stem

(3) The 'body' and 'bonnet' that house the stem

(4) The 'operator' that moves the stem (or pressurizes fluid for squeeze valves, etc.)

Figures 3.1 thru 3.3 show three common types of valve w ~ t h the~r parts labeled.

DISC, SEAT, & PORT

Chart 3.1 illustrates various types ot disc and port arrangements, and mech- anisms used tor stopping or regulating flow. The moving part directly affect- ing the flow i s termed the 'disc' regardless of its shape, and the non-moving part it bears on is termed the 'seat'. The 'port' is the maximum internal opening tor flow (that IS. when the valve is tully open). Discs may be actuated by the conveyed fluid or be moved by a stem having a linear, rotary or helical movement. The stem can be moved manually or be driven hydraulically, pneumatically or electrically, under remote or automat~c control, or mech- anically by weighted lever, spring, etc.

The size ot a valve IS determined by the size of its ends which connect t o the pipe, etc. The port size may be smaller.

STEM

There are two categories of screwed stem: The rising stem shown in figures 3.1 and 3.2, and the non-rising stem shown in figure 3.3.

Rising stem (gate and globe) valves are made either with 'inside screw' (IS) or 'outside screw' (0s). The OS type lias a yoke on the bonnet and the assembly is reterred to as 'outside screw and yoke', abbreviated to 'OS&Y' The handwheel can either rise with the stem, or the stem can rise thru the handwheel.

GATE

SOLID-WEDGE GATE

SPLIT.WEDGE GATE

SINGLE-DISC SINGLESEATGATE

OPERATED VALVES GLOBE

GLOBE

ANGLE GLOBE

NEEDLE

ROTARY

I

-

! DIAPHRAGM

BUTTERFLY

63

PLUG or COCK

DIAPHRAGM LSAUNDERS TYPE)

PINCH

PRFSIURIZING FLUID

SELF-OPERATED VALVES CHECK

SWING CHECK

BALL CHECK

TILTING DISC CHECK

REGULATING

PRESSURE REGULATOR

PISTON CHECK

STOPCHECK

Nor - - - ? ster - I .es arr -' -58 gal- ' --. Thr ~--'wtiee' -"-' stem "-" '" 00NNr7

tne same position whether the valve is open or closed. The screw is lnslae .1.2 There are three basic types ot attachment tor valve bonnets screwed

the bonnet and in contact with the conveyed fluid. Oncluding union), bolted, and breechlock.

A 'floor stan$ is a stern extension tor use with both types of stem, where it A screwed bonnet may occasionally stick and turn when a valve is opened. is necessary to operate a valve thru a floor or plattorm. Alternately, rods Although sticking is less a t a problem with the union type bonnet, valves fitted universal joints may be used to bring a valve handwheel within with screwed bonnets are best reserved for services presenting no hazard to an operator's reach. personnel. Union bonnets are more suitable for small valves requirin~ fie-

quent dismantling than the simple screwed type. Depending on the size ot the required valve and availabilities, selection 0t stem type can be based on: The bolted bonnet has largely displaced screwed and union bonnet valves in

hydrocarbon applications. A U-bolt or clamp-type bonnet is offered on some 1 Whether i t is undesirable for the conveyed fluid to be in contact with small gate valves tor moderate pressures, to tacilitate frequent cleaning and ,,, ~

the threaded bearing surtaces inspection.

(2) Whether an exposed screw is liable to be damaged by abrasive spheric dust The 'pressure seal' is a variation ot the bolted bonnet used for high-pressure

(3) Whether it i s necessary to see i f the valve is open or closed valves, usually combined with OS&Y construction. I t makes use of line pressure to t i~h ten end seal an internal metal ring or gasket against the body.

In addition to the preceding types of stem used with gate and globe valves, most other valves have a simple rotary stem. Rotan/-ball, plug and butterfly The breechlock is a heavier infrequently-used and more expensive construc-

mlves have a rotaw stem which ismoved by a permanent lever,or tool applied tion, also tor high-pressure use, and involves seal-welding ot the bonnet with

to a square bossat'the end of the stem.

FIGURE 3.1

GATE VALVE IOSEY. baled bonnet, ndng stem)

the body

FIGURE 3.2

GLOBE VALVE (OS&Y. bolted bonnm, rising =om)

FIGURE 3.3

GATE VALVE its. bolted bonnm. non-riring *em)

stem Lare has to oe t a m in me s e i e ~ r i u ~ ~ u~ I J ~ L K U E Y , YIOIIY YzxYII,

chol-- - - A appl,""-." ., ot l,.Lmy,t. )- -- optlo" '8." bonn"' --', lncl..'- - 'lantern ring' which serves two purposes - either to act as a collection point to dra~n off any hazardous seepages, or as a point where lubricant can be injected.

LANTERN RING

BODY

Selection at material to tabricate the tnterlor of the valve body is important wlth a valve used tor process chem~cals. There is otten a choice with regard to the body and trim, and some valves may be obtained with the entire interior ot the body lined wlth corros~on-resistant mater~al.

Valves are connected to pipe, fittings or vessels by their body ends, which may be flanged, screwed, butt- or socket-welding, or finished tor hose,Victaulic coupling, etc. Jacketed valves are also available-see 6.8.2.

SEAL

In most stem-operated valves, whether the stem has rotary or lineal movement, packing or seals are used between stem and bonnet (or body). If high vacuum or corrosive, flammable or toxic fluid 1s to be handled, the disc or stem may be sealed by a metal bellows, or by a flexible diaphragm (the latter is termed 'packless' construction). A gasket i s used as a seal between a bolted bonnet and valve body.

BELLOWSSEAL VALVE

'PACKLESS VALVE

MANUAL OPERATORS

HANDLEVER IS used to actuate the stems of small butterfly and rotaryball valves, and small cocks. Wrench operation is used tor cocks and small plug valves.

HANDLEVERS ON SMALL VALVES

COCK

WRENCH U5EO A5 OPERATOR ON COCK --

WRENCH

- . . -. 2

HANDWHEEL IS the most common means for rotating the stem on the majority of popular smaller valves such as the gate, globe and diaphragm types. Additional operating torque tor gate and globe valves is offered by 'hammarblow' or 'impact' handwheels which may be subst~tuted for normal handwheels if easter operation is needed but where gearing is unnecessary.

CHAIN operator i s used where a handwheel would be out at reach. Thestem is fitted with a chainwheel or wrench (for lever-operated valves) and the loop ot the chain is brought within 3 ft ot working floor level. Universal-type chainwheels which attach to the regular handwheel have been blamed tor accidents: in corrosive atmospheres where an intrequentlvoperated valve has stuck, the attaching bolts have been known to tail. This problem does not arise with the chainwheel that replaces the regular valve handwheel.

GEAR operator is used to reduce the operating torque. For manual operation, consists ot a handwheel-operated gear train actuating the valve stem. As a guide, gear operators should be considered for valves of the toilowing SIZE

and classes: 125. 150, and 300, 14-inch and larger; 400 and 600. 8-inch and larger; 900 and 1500. 6-inch and larger; 2500.4-inch and larger.

POWERED OPERATORS

Electric, pneumatic or hydraulic operation is used: (1) Where a valve 1s remote from the main working area. (2) I f the required frequency ot operation would need unreasonable human effort. (3) I f rap~d opening and/or closing ot a valve is required.

ELECTRIC MOTOR The valve stem i s moved by the electric motor, thru reducing gears.

SOLENOID may be used with fast-acting check valves, and wlth ontoff valves rn light-duty instrumentation applications.

ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATOR PNEUMATIC OPERATOR

PNEUMATIC & HYDRAULIC OPERATORS may be used where flammable vapor 1s likely to be present. They take the tollowing forms: (1) Cylinder with double-acting piston drrven by air, water, oil, or other liquid which usually actuates the stem directly. (2) Air motor which actuates the stem thru

~sa r~ng - thw motnrc i r e commonly piston-and-cylinrlpr radial tvnes. (31 A ~ ~ ~ u b l e - a ~ i s ~ ~ g vane WL,, limitcu ,~kary r n ~ ~ ~ d n t in o ..dr ~ c t u a t ~ , , ~ the stem directly. (4) Squeeze type (reter to 'Squeeze valve').

QUICK-ACTING OPERATORS FOR NON-ROTARY VALVES IManually-operated valves)

-. . -. -. -. ~- . . Ou~ck-act~ng operators -are used with gate and globe valves. Two stem movements are employed:- -

(1) Rotating stem, rotated by a lever (2) Sliding stem, i n which the stem i s ra~sed and lowered-by lever

OUICK-ACTING LEVERS ON VALVES

Steam and air whistles are examples of the use ot sliding-stem quick-acting operators with globe valves.

SELECTING DNIDFF & REGULATING VALVES 3.1.3

The suitability of a valve for a particular service is decided by its materials of construction in relation t o the conveyed fluid as well as i t s mechanical design. Referring to the descriptions in 3.1.2, the steps in selection are t o choose: (1) Materialls) of construction. (2) The disc type. (3) Stem type. (4) Means ot operatrng the stem - the 'operator'. 15) Bonnet type. (6) Body ends - welding, flanged, etc. (7) Delivery tlme. (8) Price. (9) Warranty ot performance tor severe condit~ons.

- . .

Chart 3.2 is a guide to valve selection, and indicates valves which may be chosen tor a given service. The chart should be read trom left to right. First. ascertain whether a liquid, gas or powder is to be handled by the valve. Next. consider the nature ot the fluid-whether i t is toodstuffs or drugs to be handled hygienically, chemicals that are corrosive, or whether the fluld is substantially neutral or non-corrosive.

Next consider the functron of the valve - simple open-or-closed operatron ('onloff'), or regulating for control or for dosing. These tactors decidedJhe chart will then indicate types of valves which should pertorm satistactorily in the required service.

I f the publication is available, reterence should also be made to the Crane Company's 'Choos~ng the right valve'

WEUIRAL

WATER. OIL. E l d

CORROSIVE

IALXALINE. ACID. ElC.1

GATE NONE ROTARY BALL NONE

NONE ON~OFF L%RAGM I F O ~ oil: NO nmme X U D ~ C I

BUTTERFLY NONE PLUGGiiiE NONE

SLURRY BUmERFLI ABRASION RESIST. DISC. RESILENT SEAT LllAPHRAGM LINED.

SINGLE SEAT. NOTCHED D1SC

FIBROUS SUSPENSIONS REGULATING SOUEEZE

GLOBE ICom...l,,m O,%l.lPb*,~. 0-1

NONE. IUnYliubte ilxncrm -mi NEUIRAL # M R . STEAM. E l d GLOBE

NEEDLE NONE, ISrnail flnm only1

SlNGLE SEAT

SINGLE SEAT ICENTRALSEATI

KEY; LVE: TION

CHART 3.2

( 1 ) Determine type of conveyed fluid-liqu~d, gas slurry, or powder

(2) Determine nature of fluid: s Substant~ally neutral-not noticeably-acid or alkaline,

such as various oils, drinking water, nitrogen, gas, ar,etc. a Corrosive-markedly acid, alkaline, or otherw~se chemi-

cally reactlve e 'Hygienic'-rnaterjals for the food, drug, cosmetlc or

other tndustrtes Sijrry-s~s~ension or solid par[ cles in a Kq id csn ha,e an abrasive eiiccl on valves. etc. Non-abras ve s J r rm s.cn 35 ~vood -p~ io s uriles can cnoke vave mcchaolsms

(3) Determine operatlo":

'On/off'-fully open or fully closed 8 Regulatmg-tncluding close reguiatton {throttling)

(4) Look lnto other factors affectmg cholce: Pressure and temoerature of conveved fluid

o Method ot operating stem-consider closmg tune e Cost a Availability 8 Spectal installat6on problems-such as welding valves Into

lines. Welding heat will sometmes distort the body and affect the sealing of small valves.

VALVES MAIN1 Y FOR ONlOFF SELIVIPE 7 1 4

In ~ndustrial piping, onloff control ot flow i s most commonly effected with gate valves. Most types of gate valve are unsuitable tor regulatlng: erosion ot the seat and disc occurs in the throttling position due to vibration ot the disc ("chattering"). With some fluids, ~t may be desirable to use globevalves for onloff service, as they offer tighter closure. However, as the principal function of globe valves is regulation, they are described in 3.1.5.

SOLID WEDGE GATE VALVE has either a solid or flexible wedge disc. In addition to onloff servlce, these valves can be used tor regulatlng, usually in sizes 6-inch and larger, but will chatter unless disc is tully guided throughout travel. Suitable for most fluids including steam, water, oil, alr and gas. The flexible wedge was developed to overcome sticking on cooling in high- temperature service, and to minimize operating torque. The flexible wedge is not illustrated-it can be likened to two wheels set on a very short axle.

SOLID WEDGE GATE VALVE

DOUBLE-DISC PARALLELSEATS GATE VALVE has two parallel discs wh~ch are torced, on closure, against parallel seats by a 'spreader' Used for liquids and gases at normal temperatures. Unsuitable tor regulation. To prevent lamming, ~nstallatlon is usually vertical wlth handwheel up.

DOUBLE-DISC (SPLIT-WEDGEIWEDGE GATE VALVE Discs Wedge against inclined seats wlthout use of a spreader. Remarks tor double-disc parallel seats gate valve apply, but smaller valves are made for steam service. Often. construction allows the discs to rotate, distributing wear.

SINGLE-DISC SINGLE-SEAT GATE VALVE, or SLIDE VALVE, i s used tor handling paper pulp slurry and other fibrous suspensions, and for low- pressure gases. Will not function properly with inflow on the seat side. Suitable tor regulating flow i f tight closure is not required.

SlhlGLE-nlSC PAR41 I ELSE4TS GATF V4LVE l lnl~ke the slnnleseer >ltue valbc. WIS valv, .h80rds b k u ~ ~ t e w1t11 wvv in e9tsav~ Jirect~m. ~rresseb on stem and bonnet are lower than w ~ t h wedge-gate valves Primarily used for liquid hydrocarbons and gases.

SINGLE-DISC PARALLEL- PLUG GATE VALVE SEATS GATE VALVE -

PLUG GATE VALVE This valve has a round tapered disc which moves up and down. Suitable tor throttling and tull-flow use, but only available in the smaller slzes.

PLUG VALVE Mechanm IS shown in chart 3.1, but the disc may be cylind- ilc as well as tapered. Advantages are compactness, and rotary 90-degree stem movement. The tapered plug tends to jam and requires a high operating torque: this is overcome to some extent by the use ot a lowtriction iteflon, etc.) seat, or by lubr~cation 1 ~ 1 t h the drawback that the conveyed fluid is contaminated). The friction problem 1s also met by mechanlsms raising the disc tram the seat before rotatlng it, or by using the 'eccentric' design !see rotary-ball valve). Principal uses are for water, oils, slurries, and gases.

LINE-BLIND VALVE This isa positlve shutoff devicewhich basically consists of a flanged assembly sandwiching a spectacle-plate or blind. This valve is described and compared wlth other closures in 2.7.1.

VALVES MAINLY FOR REGULATING SERVICE 3.1.5

GLOBE VALVE, STRAIGHT & ANGLE TYPE These are the valves most used tor regulatlng. For line sizes over Binch, choice ot a valve tor flow control tends to go to suitable gate or butterfly valves. For more setisiactory service, the directlon of flow thru valve recommended by manufacturers is trom stem to seat, to assist closure and to prevent the disc chattering against the seat in the throttling position. Flow should be trom seat to stemside (1) if there is a hazard presented by the disc detaching tram the stem thus closing the valve, or (2) i f a composition disc is used, as this direction of flow then gives less wear.

ANGLE V A L V t I nls is a glooe valve wliil uuuy msuh OE $#gist miye>, ~ V U I ~

the I.-- -' a gO.A----? elbc. "3weve- 'h- -' - 'ping; - -"en su' ' - -,

to higher stresses than straight runs, which must be cons~dered with th~s type ot valve.

GLOBEVALVES

REGULAR-DISC GLOBE VALVE Unsuitable for close regulation as disc and seat have narrow (almost line) contact.

PLUG.TYPE DISC GLOBE VALVE Used tor severe regulating service with gritty liquids, such as boiler teedwater, and for blowoff service. Lesssubject to wear under close regulation than the regularseared valve.

wYE-BODY GLOBE VALVE has in-line pons and stem emerging at about 45 degrees; hence the 'Y' Preferred for erosive fluids due to smoother flow pattern.

WYE.SODY GLOBE VALVE Ilnsorporsting composition disc1

COMPOSITION-DISC GLOBE VALVE Suitable tor coarse regulation and tight shutoff. Replaceable composition-disc construction is similar to that of a faucet. Grit will imbed in the soft disc preventmg seat damage and ensuring good closure. Close regulating will rapidly damage the seat.

DOUBLE-DISC GLOBE VALVE teatures two discs bearing on separate seats spaced apart on a single shatt, which trees the operator trom stresses set up by the conveyed fluid pressing into the valve. Prmclple is used on control valves and pressure regulators tor steam and other gases. Tight shutoff i s not ensured.

1361

l Y L L " L L V n L I L I2 Y = l l i " l i . i Y i " r YILY .", I.Y.. *- , , L , ". ".." .". "" .... jds ar es R x e tc " i s p f cor d by tively

large seat area and the ad~ustment afforded by fine threading ot the stem.

NEEDLE VALVE

SQUEEZE VALVE is well-suited to regulating the flow of difficult liqu~ds, slurr~es and powders. Maximum closure is about 80%. which lim~ts the range ot regulation, unless the variation of th~s type of valve with a central core (seat) is used, offering tull.closure.

PINCH VALVE Also suited to regulating flow of difficult liquids, slurries and powders. Complete closure i s possible but tends to rapidly wear the flexible tube, unless ot special des~gn.

VALVES FOR BOTH REGULATING & ONlOFF SERVICE 3.1.6

ROTARY-BALL VALVE Advantages are low operating torque, availability in large sizes, compactness, rotary %.degree stem movement, and 'in-line' replaceability ot all wearing parts in some designs. Possible disadvantages are that fluid is trapped within the body (and within the disc on closure), and that compensation for wear is effected only by resilient material behind the seats: the latter problem 1s avoided in the singleseat 'eccentric' verslon, which has the ball slightly offset so that i t presses into the seat, on closure. Principal uses are for water, oils, slurries, gasesand vacuum. Valve is available with a ball having a shaped port tor regulation. ROTARY-BALL VALVE

BUTTERFLY VALVE dffers the advantaws ot rotary stem movement ($0 deg .,"" -r less,, pact ,.-..,. m d a ,",.,., ot @ ,,,,. ,ng. .; .. -vailaL.+ ..- all sizes, and can be produced in chemcal-resistant and hygienic forms. The valves are used tor gases, liquids, slurries, powders and vacuum. The usual resilient plastic seat has a temperature limitation, but tight closure at high temperatures is available with a version having a metal ring seal around the disc. I f the valve is flanged, rt may be held between flanges ot any type. Slip-on and screwed flanges do not torm a proper seal with some wafer forms ot the valve, In which the resilient seat a extended to serve also as line gaskets.

BUlTERFLY VALVE

VALVES FOR CHECKING BACKFLOW 3.1.7

All valves in this category are designed to permit flow of liquid or gas in one direction and close if f low reverses.

SWING CHECK VALVE The regular swing check valve is not suitable i f there is frequent flow reversal as pounding and wearing ot disc occurs. For gritty liquids a composition disc 1s advisable to reduce damage to the seat. May be mounted vertically with flow upward, or horizontally. Vertically-mounted valve has a tendency to remain open i f the stream velocity changes slowly. An optional lever and outside werght may be offered either to assist closing or to counterbalance the disc in part, and allow opening by low-pressure fluid.

SWING CHECK VALVES

TILTING-DISC VALVE Suitable where trequent flow reversal occurs. Valve closes rapidly with better closure and less slamming than the swing check valve, which it somewhat resembles. It has higher pressure drop with large

flow velocit~es and lower-pressure drop with small velocities tnan a compar- 1 - 1 1 --.e sw ack b. ... May .. ... s t a l k ically ...... flow -,. ,rd, c . hornontally. Disc movement can be controlled by an integral dashpot or snubber.

LIFT-CHECK VALVE resembles the piston-check valve. The disc e guided, but the dashpot teature is absent. Springloaded types can operate at any orientation, but unsprung valves have to be arranged so that the disc will close by gravity. Composit~on-disc valves are available tor gritty liqurds.

PISTON-CHECK VALVE Surtable where trequent change ot direction of flow occurs as these valves are much less subiect to pounding with pulsatrng flow due to the integral dash-pot. Sprrng-loaded types can operate at any onentatlon. Unsprung valves have t o be orientated tor gravity closure. Not suitable for grrtty liquids.

STOP CHECK VALVE

PIST0N.CHECK VALVE

STOP.CHECK VALVE Principal example ot use is in steam generation by multiple boilers, where a valve is inserted between each boiler and the main steam header. Basically, acheck valve that optionally can be kept closed auto- matrcally or manually.

BALL-CHECK VALVE IS suitable for most services. The valve can handle gases, vapors and liquids, including those torming gummy deposits. The ball seats by gravity and/or back pressure, and is iree to rotate, which distributes wear and aids in keeping contacting surtaeesclean.

WAFER CHECK VALVE effects C ~ O S U ~ ~ by two ~ e m l c i r ~ ~ l a r 'doors', both hinged to a central post in a ring-shaped body which i s installed between flanges. Frequently used tor nowfouling liquids, as i t IS compact and ot relatively low cost. A single disc type i s also available.

FOOT VALVE Typical use is to maintar a head ot water on the suction side ot a sump pump. The valve is basically a lift-check valve wrth a stralner integrated.

1371

VALVES FOR SWITCHING FLOW 3.: .8

MULTIPORT VALVE Used largely on hydraulic and pneumatic control cir- cuits and sometimes used directly i n process pipmg, thesevalves have rotaryball or plug-type discs with one or more ports arranged to switch flow.

DIVERTING VALVE TWO types of 'divert~ng' valve are made. Both switch flow trom a line Into one ot two outlets. One type is of wye pattern with a hinged disc at the lunctlon which closes one ot the two outlets, and IS used to handle powders and other solids. The second type handles l iqu~d only, and has no movmg parts-flow 1s switched by two pneumatic control lines. It is available in s m to Ginch.

VALVES FOR DISCHARGING 3.1.9

These valves allow removal of fluld trom wlthin a piping system elther to atmosphere, to a drain, or to another plplng system or vessel at a lower pressure. Operation IS otten automatic. Reliet and safety valves, steam traps, and rupture discs are included in this section. Pressurerelieving valves are usually spring loaded, as those worked by lever and we~ght can be easily rendered Inoperatwe by personnel. The first three valves are operated by system pressure, and are usually mounted directly onto the plplng or vessel to be protected, in a vert~cal, upright position. Reter to the governing code tor the applicatbon ot these valves, including the need tor an external lifting device (handlever, etc.).

__0__

SAFETY VALVE A rapid-openmg (popping action) tull-flow valve for air and other gases.

RELIEF VALVE Intended to relieve excess pressure in liquids, in swations where tull-flow discharge is not required, when release of a small volume of liquid would rapidly lower pressure. Mountmg is shown In figure 6.4.

SAFETY VALVE RELIEF VALVE

SAFETY-RELIEF VALVE Relieves excess pressure of e~ther gas or l iqu~d which may suddenly develop a vapor phase due to rap~d and uncontrolled heatlng trom chem~cal reaction in liquid-laden vessels. Reter to figure 6.4.

BALL FLOAT VALVE 1 hese automatic valves are ussu. I I, wb

.nave .. . iron . iymer . ! To .e alr liqui ems and act as vacuum breakers or breather valves. 13) To control liquid level in tanks. They are not mended to remove condensate.

BALL FLOAT VALVE BLOWDFF VALVE

[For fir% ure above1

FROM DRIPLEG

WATER RELEASED

BLOWOFF VALVE A varlety of globe valve contorming with boiler code requirements and espec~ally des~gned for boiler blowoff service. Sometlines sultable also tor blowdown servlce. Wyepettern and angle types often used. Used to remove alr and other gases from bollerr, etc Manually-operated.

FLUSH-BOTTOM TANK VALVE Usually a globe type, designed to mmr- mlze pocketmg, prlmarity tor conveniently discharg~ng liqu~d trom the low polnt of a tank.

FLUSH.BOTTOM TANK VALVE (GLOBE TYPE1

EXTERNAL ViEW SECTIONAL VIEW

RUPTURE DISC Asafeiydevicedeslgned to burst at a cenam excess pressure and rapidly discharge gas or liquid trom a system. Usually made rn the torin of a replaceable metal disc held between flanges. Disc may also be of graphlte or, for lowest bursting pressures, plastic film.

SAMPLING VALVE A valve, usually ot needle or globe pattern, placed in a branch line tor the purpose ot drawmg off samples ot process mater~al thru the branch. Sampling trom very high pressure lines IS best done thru a double valved collecting vessel. A cooling arrangement may be needed tor sampling trom high-temperature lines.

C381

F L ~ D SIALVL: A nOn.r"+..r- valvr h-.,lng a h ; - -4 di-- - rubb-. -

leatner ilap, use0 ror lowpressure ilnes.

HEADER VALVE A n lsolat~ng valve installed in a branch where 11 ioms a header. HOSE VALVE A gate or globe valve havmg one ot 11s ends externally threaded to one ot the hose thread standards in use in the USA. These valves are used tor vehicular and firewater connections.

ISOLATING VALVE An onloff valve ~solating a piece ot equipment or a process trom piping.

KNIFE-EDGE VALVE A single-disc single-seat gate valve (slide gate) with a knifeedged disc. MIXING VALVE regulates the propoit~ons ot two infiows to-produce a controlled outflow.

NON-RETURN VALVE Any type ot stopcheck valve-see 3.1.7.

PAPER-STOCK VALVE A s~ngle-disc single-seat gate valve (slide gate) w ~ t h knifeedged or notched disc used to regulate flow ot paper slurry or other fibrous slurry.

PRIMARY VALVE See 'Root valve', this sectlon.

REGULATING VALVE Any valve used to adiust flow.

ROOT VALVE ( 1 ) ~ V a ~ v e used to Isolate a pressure element or instrument from a line or vessel. (2) A valve placed at the beginnmg ot a branch trom a header. SAMPLING VALVE Small valve prov~ded for draw~ng off fluid. See 3.1.9.

SHUTOFF VALVE An onloff valve placed in lines to or trom equipment. tor the purpose ot stoppmg and startlng flow.

SLURRY VALVE A knife-edge valve used to control f low ot nowabrasive slurries. SPIRAL-SOCK VALVE A valve used to control f low ot powders by means ot a tw~stable fabr~c tube or sock.

STOP VALVE A n onioff valve, usually a globe valve.

THROTTLING VALVE Any valve used to closely regulate flow In the iust-open posltlon.

VACUUM BREAKER A special self-actlng valve, or any valve su~table tor vacuum service, operated manually or automat~cally, lnstalled to adm~t gas (usually atmospher~c a ~ r ) Into a vacuum or low-pressure space. Such valves are lnstalled on high polnts ot p w n g or vessels to permlt dra~nlng, and sometimes to prevent siphon~ng.

UNLOAOING VALVE See 3.2.2, under 'Unloading', and figure 6.23.

OulCK-ACTING VALVE Any onloff valve rapidly operable, e~ther by manual lever, spring, or by plston, solenoid or lever with heat-fusible link releasing a we~ght which in talling operates the valve. Quick-act~ng valves are desirable in linesconveylngflammable liquids. Unsu~table tor water or tor l iqu~d service In general wlthout a cushionmg devlce (hydraulic accumulator, 'pulsat~on pot' or 'standp~pe') to protect plping trom shock. See 3.1.2, under 'Quick-acting operators tor non-rotary valves'.

PUMPS 3.2.1

DRIVERS

Electric motors are the most trequently used drivers. Larger pumps may be driven by steam-, gas-, or diesel-engines, or by turbines.

'HEADS IPRESSURESI IN PUMP PIPING FIGURE 3.5

A - CENTERLINE OF PUMP

NOTES

Thetotal heud, H . which man be provided by the pump m Vle airsngementrhown. 0s:-

H = hd-h, = H,, + Vild + hl,l + Wd-P.l

Heads may bc cipicned either ai l in ohroiuie unm ai ail in guge u n W but not in mlxed unlu.The vsrious heud terms in this equmon are. with rclerence la the illurlraf~on:-

hd = tom1 diwhaqe head h, = total suction head

H,, = naoc head ldiffcmniiull = D - S hfd = f r i c i m head lorr ,n di~chvrgr pqmg. mlvding cmr l o a iasliquid diwhrrgcr mioucuei. e t d

end 1 0 s at mcrearer l w i e d at pump outlet'

hlr = l i i m o n head 101sm .ilction piping. miuding enmanee lo- is liquid cnrsri line from hrrdcr. eic.1 md l o n rr reducer locrtcd ar pump inlet'

P, = prenurc head shove liquid iwel in dichanje vessel or hcrdcr

P, = pressure head above liquid lwe l in lvcllon headcr or vcrwl

NET POSITIVE SUCTION HEAD INPSHI 'NPSH' i s dclinsd by:- 5 - h,, +P,-Pw.whcrc P,, = vrpoi prcrivrc a1 liquid at lempcmrurc of liquid ai rucf8an header. ctc. Vapor Drairurel

are givcn in rbralvle vnltr

.Table F.10 gwcr cnlirnce loo, ex,, 10s. flow rertrtance of redvcerr and rwrgcr. eic.,~xprened an equwlenl lenglhl of prpc.

TYPES O F PUMP VELOCITY HEAD

A pump is a device tor moving a fluid trom one place to another thru plpes or channels. Chart 3.3, a selection gu~de tor pumps, puts various types ot pump used industrially into five catagorles, based on operating princ~ple. I n common reterence, the terms centrifugal, rotary, screw, and reclprocatlng are used. Chart 3.3 is not comprehensw pumps utilizmg other princ~ples are in use. Abour n~ne out of ten pumps used m ~ndustry are of the centrl- fuyal type.

The tollow~ng information IS glven to enable an estmate to be made of required total head, pump size, capacity, and horsepower tor plannmg purposes. Data in the Guide permlt estmating pump requirements for water systems.

PUMP 'TOTAL HEAD'

A pump imparts energy to the pumped liqu~d. This energy is able to raise the liquid to a height, or 'head'. The 'total head' ot a pump (in f t l IS the energy (in ft-lbl imparted by the pump to each pound ot liquid. I n piped systems. part of the total head is used to overcome trlction in the plplng, which'results in a pressure drop (or 'headloss').

For a centrifugal pump, the same total head can be lmparted to all liqulds ot comparable viscosity, and is Independent ot the liquld's density: the requlred driving power increases wlth density. Figure 3.3 relates the total head provided by the pump to the headlosses in the pumped system.

PRESSURE & 'HEAD'

In US customary unlts, pressure i p 1 In PSI is related to head ( h ) in t t p IPS11 = (d)(hIll1441 = (S.G.I(h)112.311, where d is liquid density In lblft! and S.G. is specific gravity. Atmospheric pressure at sea level is equal to 14.7 PSIA, the pressure generated by a 3441 height ot water.

Usually the liquid being pumped is stationary betore entermg the suction piping, and some power 1s absorbed in accelerating it to the suction line velocity. This causes a small 'velocity head' loss (usually about 1 i t ) and may be tound trom table 3.2, which is applicable to liquid ot any density, if the velocity head is read as feet ot the liquid concerned.

VELOCITY & VELOCITY HEAD TABLE 3.2

Flow rate. liquid velocity and cross-sectional area (at right angles to flow) are related by the formulas:

Flow rate in cubic teet per second = ( v ) ( a Il(144) Flow rate in US gallons per minute = i3.1169)( v )( a 1 where: v = liquid velocity in teet per second

a = cross-sectional area in square inches (table P-1)

POWER CALCULATIONS

I f S.G. = specific gravlty of the pumped liqutd. H = total head in teet o t the pumped liquld, andp = pressure drop in PSI, then:

Hydraulic horsepower = (GPM)(HI(S.G.I - - (GPM)(p) 3960 1714

FIGURE I l l

Th- ---hanic-I "f+ienc. 3t a r.8,- IS def 1 s the L . . . ' - l ~ I ~ C h^.""

power (power transferred to tne pumped tiquid) divided by the make horsepower (power applied t o the driv~ng shatt ot the pump)

If-the pump is driven by an electric motor which has a mechanical efficiency em, the electrtcity demand is:

Often, estimates of brake horsepower, electricity demand, etc., must be made without proper knowledge ot the efficiencies.To obtain estimates, the mechanical effic~ency ot a centrifugal pump may be assumed to be 60% and that ot an electric motor 80%.

COMPRESSORS, BLOWERS & FANS 3.2.2

REFERENCES

'Compressed air and gas data'. Editor Gibbs C.W. (lngersoll-Rand) 'Air receivers'. Section 1910.169 ot the Code ot Federal Regulations: CFR

Occupat~onal Satety and Health Administration (OSHA)

Compressors are used to supply .high-pressure air tor plant use, to pressurize retrigerant vapors tor cooling systems, to liquefy gases, etc. They are rated by their maximum output pressure and the number ot cubic feet per minute ot a gas handled at a specified speed or power, stated at 'standard conditions', 60 F and 14.7 PSlA (not at compressed volume). 60 F is accepted asstandard temperature by the gas industry.

The term 'compressor' is usually reserved tor machines developing high pressures in closed systems, and the terms 'blower' end 'fan' for machines working at low pressures in open-ended systems.

COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RANGES T A B L E 3.3

COMPRESSOR 15 thru 20,000 PSIG, and higher

1 thru 15PSlG

Up to 1 PSIG labout30in. water)

COMPRESSING I N STAGES

Gases (including air) can be compressed in one or more operations termed 'stages'. Each stage can handle a practicable increase in pressure-betore temperature increase due to the compression necessitates cooling the gas. Cooling between stages a effected by passtng the gas thru an intercooler. Staging permits high pressures, and lower discharge temperatures, with reduced stresses on the compressor.

RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR Air Or other gas is pressurized in cylinders by reciprocating prstons. I f the compressor is lubricated, the outflow may be contaminated by oil. I f en oil-tree outflow is required, the pistons may be fitted with graphite or teflon piston rings. Flow is pulsating.

ROTARY SCREW COMPRESSOR Air or other gas enters pockets tormed between mating rotors and a castng wall. The pockets rotate away from the inlet, taking the gas toward the discharge end. The rotors do not touch each other or the casing wall. Outflow is uncontaminated in the 'dry type' ot machine, in which power is applied to both rotors thru external timing gears. In the 'wet type', power is applied to one rotor, and both rotors ere separated by an oil film, which contaminates the discharge. Flow is uniform.

ROTARY VANE COMPRESSOR resembles the rotary vane pump shown in chart 3.3. Variation in the volume enclosed by adjacent vanes as they rotate produces compression. Ample lubrication is required, which may introduce contamtnation. Flow is uniform.

ROTARY LOBE COMPRESSOR consists 01 two synchronized lobed rotors turning within a casing, In the same way as the pump shown tn chart 3.3 (under 'spurgear' type). The rotors do not touch each other or the casing. No lubrication i s used within the casing,and the outflow is not contaminated. Flow i s uniform. This machine is often reterred to as a 'blowei'.

D ~ N A M I C COMPRESsoRS resemble gas turbines acting In reverse. Both axtal-flow machines and centrifugal machines (with radial flow) are available. Centrifugal compressors commonly have either one or two stages. Axial compressors have at least two stages, but seldom more then 16 stages. The outflow is not contaminated. Flow is uniform. - . -. LIQUID RING COMPRESSOR This type at compressor consists ot a single multi-bladed rotor which turns within a casing ot approximately elliptic cross section. A controlled volume ot liquid in the casing ts thrown to the casing wall with rotation ot the vanes. This liquid serves both to compress and to seal. Inlet and outlet ports located in the hub communicate with the pockets formed between the vanes end the liquid ring. These compressors have special advantages: wet gases and liquid carryover including hydrocarbonswhich are troublesome with other compressors are easily handled. Additional cooling is seldom required. Condensible vapor can be recovered by using liquid similar to that in the rlng. Flow IS uniform.

EQUIPMENT FOR COMPRESSORS

INTERCOOLER A heat exchanger used tor cooling compressed gas between stages. Air must not be cooled below the dew point (at the higher pressure) as moisture will tnterfere with lubrtcatton and cause wear in the next stage.

AFTERCOOLER A heat exchanger used tor cooling gas after compression is completed. I f air is being compressed, chilling permits removal ot much ot the moisture.

DAMPENER or SNUBBER; VOLUME BOTTLE or SURGE DRUM Recip- rocating compressors create pulsations in the air or gas which may cause the

I~scharns aodlor ?llrteon plplnn to resonnti. and dmmne the rnmnressor or ~ t s valve:, H d a m p ~ w , or Srwu~e,. IS a udvwd vesei wiiich S I ~ I U U ~ ~ I S DUIao.

tions in flow. A volume bottle or surge drum has thesame purpose, but lacks baffles These devices are not normally part ot the compressor package, and are otten bought separately h t h the compressor maker's recommendations). Large compressors may require an arrangement of 'choke tubes' irestrictions) and 'bottles' (vessels), contormrng to a theoretrcal design and located near the compressor's outlet, upstream ot the attercooler.

The locatlon of the tollow~ng tour rtems at equipment rsshown rn figure 6.23:

SEPARATOR lnormally used only wlth alr compressors) A water separator is otten prov~ded tollow~ng the attercooler, and, sometrmes, also at the rntake to a compressor havmg a long suctlon line, i f water 1s likely to collect in the line. Each separator IS provided with a dram to allow continuous removal ot water.

RECEIVER Refer to 'Discharge (supply) lines' and 'Stor~ng compressed air', this sectlon.

SILENCER IS used to suppress obiectionable sound which may radiate from an air intake.

FILTER IS provided in the suctlon line to an alr compressor to collect particulate matter.

The following informat~on isg~ven as a guide for engineering purposes

LINE SIZES FOR AIR SUCTION & DISTRIBUTION

SUCTION LINE Suction lines and manifolds should be large enough to prevent excessive noise and starvation of the alr supply. I f the first compression

stage is remprocatlng, the suctlon line should allow a 10 to 23 tilsec flow: i f a smgle-stage reclprocatlng compressor is used, the intake flow should not be taster than 20 ftisec. Dynamic compressors can operate wrth iaster intake velocities, but 40 ttlsec is suggested as a maximum. The mlet reducer tor a dynamrc compressor should be placed close to the inlet nozzle.

DISCHARGE (SUPPLY) LINES are sized for 150 to 175% ot average flow. depending on the number ot outlets m use at any tme. The pressure loss in a branch should be limited to 3 PSI. The pressure drop in a hose should not exceed 5 PSI. The pressure drop in distribution piplng, trom the compressor to the most remote part ot thesystem, should not be greater than 5 PSI (not including hoses). These suggested pressure drops may be used to select line sizes w ~ t h the aid of table 3.5. From the requlred SCFM flow in the line to be wed, find the next higher flow i n the table. Mult~ply theallowed pressure drop (PSI) i n the line by 100 and divide by the length ot the line in teet to obtam the PSI drop per 100 it-find the next lower figure to this in the table, and read required line slze. Equipment drawmg alr at a high rate tor a short perlod is best served by a recekver close to the polnt ot maximum use-lines can then be srzed on average demand. A minlmum receiver size ot double the SCF used in intermlt- tent demand should l im~r the pressure drop at the end ot the perrod of use to about 20% in the worst Instances and keep it under 10% in most others.

COMPRESSOR CHARACTERISTICS TALIL~ 1.9

- - - - - - IInIlor, CFMI

MAXIMUM CONTAM INFLOW ECONOMICRANGE

COMPRESSIIRNPE :i:[&E INANT IN ICFMIHPI

(PSIGI OUTPUT DATA FOR 100 PSI0 OUTFLOW

Lubicated I 1 35,000 1 OIL 1 4 t a 7 1 10,000 Nnn-lt~hncated 700 NONE I

ROTARY LOBE 1 30 / NONE / 1 50,000 I

DYNAMIC Centrifugal Axial

ROTARYVANE

ROTARY SCREW I 125 1 NONE/ 1 4 1 30 to 150 I

4.000 90

125

TABLE 3.5

-ON-LUBEDILUBED / OIL I I

NONE NONE

OIL

LlOUlO RING

FREE AIR NOMINAL PIPE SIZE IINCHES) -SCHEDULE 40 PI^ 1 INFLOW

POWER CONSUMPTION

4 4%

4

or other 1 1.6 to 2.2

ISCFM)

100 400 700 900

1.000 4,000 7,000 9.000

10,000 40,000

The power consumption ot the different compressor types is characteristic. Table 3.4 gives the horsepower needed at an output pressure ot 100 PSIG. Power consumptlon per CFM rlses with rising output pressure. Air cooling adds 3.5% to power consumption (including fan drive). 'FAD' power con- sumptcon figures tor compressors ot 'average' power consumption are glven. - 'FAD' denotes 'free air delivered corresponding to standard cubic t t per rn~nute (SCFM) or liters per minute measured as set out in ASME PTC9. ~~GZES~ BS 1571 or DIN 1945.' i3.3-3.5 -

500 to 110.000 5.000 to 13,000.000

150 to 6,000

20 to 5,000 75'

% 1 1 % 2 2 % 3 4 6

WATER

7.53 2.09 32.2

40 1.24 70 3.77 90 6.00

0.24 3.59

10.8 17.9 22.0

0.37 1.05 1.69

11.9

P m w e drop larger rhan 35PSl per I00 /I

0.12 Preiwre drop smaller rhan 0.18 than a I PSlpei 100 fr

0.98 2.92 4.78 5.90

33.8

2.90 8.77

14.6 16.0 -

0.41 1.14 1.97 2.43

0.35 1.06 1.75 2.13

0.13 ' 0.38 0.62 0.76

0.10 0.15 0.19 -

Process equipment IS a term used t o cover the many types ot equipment used to pertorm one or more o t these basic operations on the process material:

11) CHEMICAL REACTION

I21 MIXING

13) SEPARATION

(4) CHANGE OF PARTICLE SIZE

I51 HEAT TRANSFER

Equipment manufacturers give al l Intormanon necessary tor ~nstal lat ion and p w n g -

This section 1s a quick reterence to the function o t some Items 01 equipment used in processwork. I n table 3.7, the tunction o t the equipment IS expressed in terms ot the phase (solid, l iquid o r gas) o t the process materials mixed. Examples: 11) A blender can mlx two powders, and i ts tunct ion IS tabulated as "SiS' ( 2 ) A n agitator can be used t o stir a l iquid into another Iiqurd-this tunction is tabulated "LiL" Another large and varied group ot equipment achieves separations, and a similar method o t tabulating tunction is used i n table 3.R.

Chemical reactions are carried out i n a widevariety of specialized equipment. termed reactors, autoclaves, turnaces, etc. Reactions involving liquids, suspensions, and sometimes gases, are ot ten performed in 'reaction vessels'.The vessel and i ts contents trequently have to be heated or cooled, and piplng t o a lackei or internal system ot coils has t o be arranged. I f reaction takes place under pressure, the vessel may need t o comply wrth the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Reter also t o 6.5.1, under 'Pressure vessels', and t o the standards listed i n table 7.10.

MIXING 3.3.2

A varlety ot equlpment is made t o r rnlxing operations. The principal types ot equipment are listed i n table 3.7

MIXER (RIBBON. SCROLL. OR OTHERTYPEI S+S ,S+L

PROPORTIONING PUMP 1 L + L I

MIXING EOUIPMENT TABLE 3.7

EQUIPMENT

AGITATOR BLENDER ITUMBLER TYPE)

EDUCTOR

SEPARATION -.-." jn' i -7 --

PHASES MIXED

S + L . L + L

S * S . S + L

L IL ,L+G,G+G

PROPORTIONING VALVE

.'.

Equ~pment tor separation IS even more vaned. Equipment separatlng solids Id 11 3.5 on the basis o t partlcle size or specific gravlty alone are m general termed - classifiers. The broader range o t separation equipment separates phases (solid, liquid, gas) and some o t the types used are listed i n the table below:

L + L

SEPARATION EQUIPMENT

I

EQUIPMENT

CENTRIFUGE CONTINUOUS CENTRIFUGE

CYCLONE

DEAERATOR

DEFOAMER DISTILLATION COLUMN DRYER

ORY SCREEN

EVAPORATOR

FILTER PRESS

FLOTATION TANK FRACTIONATION COLUMN

SCRUBBER SETTLING TANK

STRIPPER

seonrate 110-I

S + L L l l t + L121 S+G L + G L + G L111' 1121 S + L

St l t +Sl2i

L + S L i l t + LIZ1 S + L S C L

L i t ) + LIZ1 + L13l + etc.

S+G S + L

L i l t + LIZ1

- ElAlNEO ATERIAL -

S

None

None

L

L

LIII

5

S11) L + S Li11 S s None

S

5 L i l l

TABLE 3.8

OUTFLOW MATERIAL

L

Ll l t . L12t.f

G . S f

G

G

Liz1 ' L.

Sl2t L ' Liz1 ' L L Li11. L121. Li31, e8c.t

G

L

LIZ1

CHANGE OF PARTICLE S IZE 3.3.4

Reductron a t particle size a a common operation, and can be termed 'attrition'. Equipment used includes crushers, rod-, ball- and hammer-mills. and-to achieve the finest reductions-energy mills, which run on compressed alr. Emulsions I'creams' o r 'milks'), which are liquid-in-liquid dispersions. are stabilized by homogenizers, typical ly used on mi lk t o reduce the slze ot the tat globules and thus prevent cream f rom separatlng.

Occasionally, particle or lump size a t the product is increased. Equ~pment tor agglomerating, pelletizing, etc., IS used. Examples: tablets, sugar cubes, p o w dercd beverage and food products.

PROCESS HEAT TRANSFER 3.3.5

Adding and removing heat is a s~gnif icant part ot chemical processing. Heating or cooling ot process material 1s accomplished w l t h heat exchangers. iacketed vessels, or other heat transter equipment. The prolect and piping groups specify the duty and mechanical arrangement, bu t the detail design IS normally lett to the manutacturer.

exchanging heat between two f lu~ds which are kept s~narated.Th~ om&-^* torn. ,. .!eat L..,,,,.iger I, 'shel~-.,,~-~ube' u ~ ~ d i g e r , wnristlng or a bundle ot tubes held inside a 'shell' (the vessel part). One fluid passes inside the tubes, the other thru the space between the tubes and shell. Exchanged hearhas to flow thru the tube walls. Reter to 6.8 ('Keeping process material at the right temperature') and to 6.6 for p~ping shell-and-tube heat exchangers.

Heat exchange w ~ t h process mater~al can take place in a variety ot other equipment, such as condensers, evaporators, heaters, chillers, etc.

MULTIFUNCTION EQUIPMENT 3.3.6

Sometimes, items of equipment are designed to pertorm more than one ot the tunctions listed at the beg~nning ot 3.3.

Mix~ng and heatmg (or cooling) may be simultaneously carried out i n mixers hav~ng blades prov~ded w ~ t h lnternal channels to carry hot (or cold) f lu~d.

Separat~on and attrition may be achieved in a s~ngle mill, des~gned to output part~cles ot the requ~red degree of fineness and recycle and regrmd part~cles which are still too coarse.

THE PIPING GROUP 4.1

Plan: design 1s divided I n t o several areas, each the responsibility ot a 'design

g r o u p ' Chart 4. l(a) shows the m a l n groups ot people cooperating on the plant design, and the types ot draw~ngs tor which they are responsible. Other groups, involved with ins t rumenta t ton , stress analysrs, pipesupport, etC.. con. tribute to the deslgn at appropriate stages.

The personnel responsible tor the p l p i n g des~gn may be part ot an engineering

department's mechan~cal deslgn group, or they may tunctm as a separate sectcon or department. For slrnpliclty, this design group 1s reterred to as the 'p lp lng group', and i t s relationship with the organization and baslc actlvkties

are ~ndicated in chart 4.lia).

Char t 4 . l i c l shows the structure ot a design group.

RESPONSIBlLlTlES OF THE PIPING GROUP 4.1.1

The plplng group produces des~gns in the torrn ot drawings and modelisl. showlng equipment and piping.

The tollowing are provided by the p l p m g group as i t s contribution to the p lan t des~gn:-

171 A N EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT DRAWING, USUALLY

TERMED T H E 'PLOT PLAN'

121 PIPING DESIGN (DRAWINGS OR MODEL)

131 PIPING DETAILS FOR FABRICATION A N D CONSTRUCTION

(41 REOUISITIONS FOR PURCHASE OF PIPING MATERIEL

JOB FUNCTIONS 4.1.2

On io l n i ng a design off ice it 6s i m p o r t a n t that the new member should know w h a t line ot a u t l i o r l t y exlsts. This IS especially Important when l n t o r m a t i o n

IS required and 11 saves the wrong people trom belng interrupted. Chart 4.2 shows two typical lines o t authority. (Different companies will have diiierent set-ups and job titles.)

JOB FUNCTIONS

DESIGN 17) RESPONSIBLE FOR A L L PERSONNEL I N GROUPS

SUPERVISOR INCLUDING HIRING I21 COORDINATING WITH OTHER GROUPS ( A N D

THE CLIENT1

131 O V E R A L L PLANNING A N D SUPERVISING THE GROUP'S WORK

I L iA150N WSTH PROJECT ENGINEERISI

GROUP LEADER 171 SUPERV~S~NG DESIGN a DRAFTING IN AREAIS) ALLOCATED BY DESIGN SUPERVISOR

NOTE: I .,..

FINISHED DRAWINGS I41 COORDINATES MECHANICAL. STRUCTURAL.

ELECTRICAL.AN0 C l V l L DETAILS FROM OTHER GROUPS

(51 CHECKING a MARKING VENOORS DRAWINGS

I61 OBTAINING INFORMATION FOR MEMBERS O F T H E GROUP

CHECKER

DESIGNER

DRAFTER

1471

191 ESTABLISHING A DESIGN GROUP F IL ING SYS. T E M FOR ALL INCOMING &OUTGOING PAPER- WORK

110) KEEPING A CURRENT SCHEDULE A N D RECORD O F HOURS WORKED

(1) ) RECWISITIONING V I A PURCHASING DEPART. MENT A L L PIPING MATERIALS

111 PRODUCING STUDIES AND LAYOUTS OF EQUIP- M E N T A N D PIPING WHICH MUST BE ECONOMIC. SAFE, OPERABLE AND EASILY MAINTA INED

I21 M A K I N G A N Y NECESSARY ADDITIONAL CALC. ULATIONS FOR THE DESIGN

131 SUPERVISING DRAFTERS

MIN IMUM RESPONSIBILITIES ARE:- 11) PRODUCING DETAILED DRAWINGS FROM DE-

SIGNERS' OR GROUP LEADERS' STUDIES OR SKETCHES

1>1 SECONDARY DESIGN WORK

[a] PROJECT ORGAHIZATION HEAVY LIRTSSHOYIFL0YlI)F IWFI IRPAI IOW plsUINr"/ L E X E C Y T I V ~ 5IL.f 0 s INT l "5 lR l "T C0Y.l""

L lOHi LlREB iNll iELii hUIHORITY CLIENT

a HELD OF ,l'i0"..~1,10* 10"

msz,G:#, ~sc",Rz~.9z,~:s,a c 3 a " ~ ~ > a ~ ' c ~ . ~ c s

LO">S..,ilii o z m m s oEteGaI5m ,o n E t 0 *

PROJECT GROUP

llNCLUDlNG PROCESS ENGINEERING1

a

-

I

3 1 -

SPECIFIC&TCON CONSULTANT GROUP -

PROIECT I & DESIGN GROUPS SHOWING

I FLOW OF i:

I -

INFORMATION a * 3

RECORDS

icl OESlGN SUPERVISOR

DESIGN GROUP SHOWING

LINES OF

AUTHORITY

DESIGNERS

+ DRAFTERS

s I r tE DECICLt4T10hl SHFETS hr TABLES 4.L.J

These sheets con tan tabulated data showing nominal pipe slze, materlal specificat~on, design and operatmg conditions. Llne numbers are assigned i n sequence of f low, and a separate sheet IS prepared tor each conveyed f lu id -see 5.2.5.

The tol lowlng ~n tormat ion is requ~red b y the plplng group'-

'JOB SCOPE. DOCUMENT. WHICH DEFINES PROCEDURES TO BE USE0 IN PREPARING OESiGN SKETCHES AND DIAGRAMS DRAWING CONTROL (REGISTER) 4.2.4 - PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM (PBIIO-SEE 5.2.41

A drawing number relates the drawlng t o the proiect, and may be coded t o show such intormation as prolect (or 'job') number, area ot plant, and originating group (which may be ~ndicated 'M' tor mechanical, etc.). Figure 5.15 shows a number ldentifyng part ot a plpkng system.

L I S T OF MAJOR EOUIPMENT (EOUIPMENT 1 ~ 0 ~ x 1 SPECIAL EOUIPMENT AND MAT. ERIAL~ ' OF FABRICATION

LINE DESIGNATION SHEETS OR TABLES, lNCLUOlNG ASSIGNATION OF LINE Nub%- BERS-SEE 4.2.3 A N 0 5.2.5

SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS USED IN PIPING SYSTEMS-SEE 4.2.)

FROM THE

PROJECT GROUP

The drawing control shows the drawing number, t~t le, and progress toward complet~on.The status ot revision and issues is shown-see 5.4.3.The drawing control is kept up-to.date b y the group leader.

SCHEDULE OF COMPLETION DATES SUP- DATED ON FED-BACK INFORMATION> CONTROLS IMETHOOS OF WORKING.ETC.I TO BE AOOPTEO FOR EXPEDITING THE JOB

DESIGN GROUP-TWO TYPICAL LINES OF AUTHORITY CHART 4.2 FROM OTHER GROUPS

FROM SUPPLIERS

ORAWINGS-SEE 5.2.7

VENDORS' PRINTS-SEE 8.2.1 Exomple 2 Example 1

HEADOF DESIGN.

C H E F ENGINEER

DESIGN SUPERVISOR

SPECIFICATIONS

These consst of separate specifications tor plant layout, piplng materiels. supporting, tabricatlon, ~nsulatron, welding, erection, palntlng and testmg. The piping designer is mostly concerned w l t h plant layout and materlei specificat~ons, which detail the deslgn requirements and materials tor plpe. flanges, fittings, valves, etc., t o be used tor the particular prolect.

The plping materials specification usually has an index t o the various services or processes. The part o f the specification dealing w i th a particular service can be identified t r o m the piping drawing line number or P&ID line number- see 5.2.4 under 'F low lines'. A l l pipmg specificat~ons must be s t r~c t l y adhered t o as they are compiled f r om lntormetion supplied b y the prolect group. Although the fittings, etc.. described i n the Guide are thosc most irequently used, they wi l l n o t necessarily be seen i n every plping specification.

On some pro~ects [such as 'revamp' work) where there IS no specificatlon. the des~gner may be responsible t o r selecting materials and hardware, and it is cmportant tog~vesuf f ic ient ~n tormat ion t o specify the hardware i n ell essential details. Nan-standard items are otten listed b y the Item number andlor model specificatlon tor ordering taken t rom thecatalogot theparticular manutacturer.

LIST O F EQUIPMENT, or EOUIPMENT INDEX 4.2.2

This shows, tor each i tem o t equipment, the equrpment number, equipment tltle, and status-that IS whether the Item has been approved, ordered, end whether certified vendor's prints have been recewed.

F I L I N G DRAWINGS 4.3 FILING SYSTEM CHAHi 4.J

There are two types ot drawlngs to iile-those produced by the group and those received by the group. The tormer are iiled in numerical order under plant or unit number in the drawing oifice on a 'stlck file' or in a drawer- see 4 4 1O.Theiiling ot the latter. 'ioreign', prints is otten poorly done, causing tlme to be wasted and information to be lost. These printsare commonly filed by equipment index number, placing all intormation connected with that Item ot equipment in the one file.

A suggested method tor filing these incoming prlnts is illustrated in chart 4.3, which cross-reterences process, tunction, or area with the group originallng the drewlng, and with associated vessels, equipment, etc. All correspondence between the protect and design groups, client, vendors, and field would be filed under 'zero', as shown.

M A T E R I A L S & TOOLS F O R THE D R A F T I N G ROOM 4.4

PAPER 4.4.1

Vellum paper and mylar film are used tor drawings. Drawing sheets must be translucent to the light used in copyingmachines. Mylarwithacoateddrawing surtace a more expenwe than vellum, but is pretereble where durability and dimensional stabilitv are important. Sheets can be supplied printed with border and title block and with a 'fade-out' ruled grid on the reverse side. 'Isometric' sheets with t a d e a t 30-degree grid are available tor drawing isos.

ANSI 14.1 deiinesthe tollowing flat drawing-sheet sizes (in inches): [A) 8'/2x11, (0) 11x17, [ C ) 17x22. ID) 22x34. iE) 34x44.

International drawing sheet sizes ot approximately the same dimens~ons are defined (ininches) as: (A4) 8.27x11.69, (A31 11.69x16.54. (A2) 16.54~2339. [A t ) 23.39x33.11. (AO) 3311~46.81.

PAPERS FOR COPYING MACHINES Photosensitive paper is used tor making prints tor checking, issuing and filing purposes. 'Sepia' photocopying paper (Ozalid Company, etc.) gives brown positive prints which may be amended with pencil or ink, and the revision used as an original tor photocopying in a diazo machine. Sepias may also be used to give a taint background print tor drawing other work over, such as ducting or pipesupports. The quality ot sepia prints is not good. Positive photocopies ot superior quality are made on clear plastic film, which may have either continuous emulsion to give heavy copies, or screened emulsion to yield taint background prints (emulsion should preterably be water-removable).

LEADS & PENCILS 4.4.2

Pencil leads used in the drawing office are available in the tollowing grades, beginning with the sottest : B (used tor shading), HB lusually used tor writing only). F (usually sottest grade used for dratting), H (grade most otten used tor dratting), 2H (used tor drawing thinner lines such as dimension lines), 3H and 4H (used tor faint lines tor layout or background). Softer penciling is prone

Papwwofk c l ~ s i f i ~ d according to o wnem of th is type may be l oe led in a filing cabinet fisted with numbered dividers ar shown :-

STANDARD DIVIDERS FOR FlLlNG CABINE?

to smearing on handling. Grades harder than 3H tend to cut paper making lines diiiicult to erase. Conventional leads are 2 mm in diameter and requlre frequent repointing. 0.5 mm and 0.3 mm leads speed work, as they need no repainting. Conventional leadsare not suitable tor use on plastic iilms as they smear and are diiiicult to erase. 'Film' leads and pencils are available in the same sizes as conventional leads, and in diiferent grades o i hardness.

Clutch pencils [lead holders) suitable tor use with either type ot the smaller diameter leads have a push-button advance.

SCALES 4.4.3

The architect's scale IS used tor plping drawings,and is d~vided into tractions ot an inch to one toot-tor example. 318 inch per toot. The eng~neer's scale is used to draw site plans, etc., and is d~vided into one inch per stated number oi teet. such as 1 inch per 30 teet.

ERASERS & ERASING SHIELDS 4.4.4 are limited in appiicati~n. out areuserul ror manirlg U ~ ~ W I I I ~ ~ IUI ~ I I U L U ~ O / I I I I L

jduct ~ c h a ?I bo harts speci, ]its-' 13, Several types ot eraser and erasing methods are available-use ot each is given under 'Photographic layouts'.

in table 4.1: Rubber in various hardnesses trom pure gum rubber (artgum) tor soit pencilling and cleaning lead smears, to hard rubber tor hard pencelling TEMPLATES 4.4.7

and ink; 'plast~c' is cleaner to use, as i t has less tendency to absorb graphite; 'magic rub' tor eraslng pencil trom plastic films. Most types ot eraser are Templates having c~rcular end rectangular openlngs are common. Orthogonal

available tor use with electric erasing machines. and isometric dratt~ng templates are available tor making process piping drawings and flow diagrams. These piplng templates give thewt l ines tor

An erasing shield is a thin metal plate with holes ot various shapes and sizes so ANSI valves, flanges, fittings and pipe diameters to 318 Inch per tool, or that parts o t the drawing not to be erased may be protected. l/4-inch per toot.

ERASING GUIDE TABLE 4.1

MACHINES 4.4.8

The first two machines are usually used in drawing offices in place ot the slower teesquare:

DRAFTING MACHINE allows parallel movement of a pair ot rules set at right angles. The rules ere set on a protractor, and their angle on the board may be altered. The protractor usually has 15-degree clickstops and vernler scale.

PARALLEL RULE, or SLIDER, permits drawing ot long horizontal lines

Chemical bleach tor rernovmy black phoioyraphie rilvilr deposit only, and is used with a fixed or adjustable triangle.

PLANIMETER A portable machine tor measuring areas. When set to the

CLEANING POWDER 4.4.5 scale ot the draw~ng, the plenlmeter will measure areas ot any shape.

Fine rubber granules are supplied in 'salt-shaker' drums. Sprinkled on a PANTOGRAPH System ot articulated rods permltting reduction or eniarge-

drawing, these granules reduce smearing ot pencil lines during working. The ment at a drawing by hand. Application is limited.

use ot cleaning powder is especially helptul when using a teesquare. The powder is brushed off after use. LIGHT BOX 4.4.9

LETTERING AIDS 4.4.6 A light box has a translucent glass or plastlc working surtace f ined under-

7itle blocks, notes, and subr,tles on drawings orsect,onsshould be in neath with electric lights. The drawing to be traced is placed on the illumina-

Capitals, either upright or sloped, are preterred. Pencilled lettering is normally fed surtace.

used. Where ink work is required on drawings tor photography, charts. r e ports, etc., ink stylus pens (Technos, Rapidograph, etc.) are available for FILING METHODS 4.4.10 stencil lettering (and for line drewlng in place ot ruling pens). The Leroy equipment is also used tor mked lettering. Skeleton lettering templates are used tor lettering section keys. The parallel line spacer is a small, inexpensive Original drawlngs are best filed flat in shallow drawers. Prints filed in the tool usetul for ruling guide lines tor lettering. drawlng office are usually retained on a 'stick', which is a clamp tor holding

several sheets. Sticks are housed in a special rack or cabinet.

As alternatives to hand-inked letter~ng, machines such as Kroy which print Original drawings wi l l eventually create a storage problem, as it is inadvisable onto adhes~ve-backed transparent fi lm which is later pos~t~oned on the to scrap them. I f these drawings are not sent to an archive, after a period of drawing. Adhes~ve or transterable letters and numbers are available in sheets, about three years they are photographed to a reduced scale tor filing, and only and special patterns and panels can be supplied to order tor t ~ t i e blocks or the film is retained. Equipment is available tor reading such films, or large detailing, symbolism, abbrev~ations, specla1 notes, etc. Printed adhesive tapes photographic prints can be made.

(511

TABLE

--. . ...- . -.-. . . 'LP~LU or 'ayeit id processes reproouce to tne same scale as the original draw~ng asa posltive copy or print. Bruning and Ozalid machines are otten employed. The drawing that is to be copied must be on traclng paper, linen or film, and the copy is made on light-sensitive papers or films. The older reversed-tone 'blueprint' is no longer i n use.

SCALED PLANT MODELS 4.4.12

Plant models are otten used in design~ng large installations involving much piping When deslgn ot the plant is completed, the model 1s sent to the site as the basis ot construction in the place ot orthographic drawings Some engineering companies strongly advocate the~r use, which necessitates maintaining a model shop and retaining trained personnel Scaled model piping components are available in a wide range ot sizes The tollowing color coding may be used on models -

PIPING . . . YELLOW, RED or BLUE

EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . GREY

INSTRUMENTS . . ~ . . ~ , ORANGE

ELECTRICAL . . . . . ~ ~ ~ . . . ~ , . GREEN

ADVANTAGES

0 Available routes tor piplng are easily seen a lnterterences are easily avoided

o Piping plan and elevation drawings can be eliminated; only the model, plot plan, P&ID's, and piping tabricatlon draw~ngs (isos) are required

II The model can be photographed -see 4.4.13.

8 Provides a superior visual aid for conterences, tor constructlon crews and tor training plant personnel

DISADVANTAGES

a Duplication of the model is expensive

o The model 1s not easily portable and IS liable to damage dur~ng transportation

a Changes are not recorded in the model itself

PHOTOGRAPHIC AIDS 4.4.13

'DRAWINGS' FROM THE MODEL

The lack ot portability at a scaled plant model can be partially overcome by photographing it. To do this it must be designed so that it can be taken apart easily. Photographs can be made to correspond closely to the regular plan, elevation and isometric proiections by photographing the model from 40 t t or more away w ~ t h long tocal length lenses-'vanishing points' (converging lines) in the picture are effect~vely eliminated.

1 8 8 ~ ca i i~ouvr 12 /IIUWLIW L L ~ ~ U U ~ I I a cuui!aLl screen arm a prim mane on '-epro ' ? f i r 'men: notes are i to thi , jduciL.. film which can be pr~nted by a diazo process-see 4.4.11. These prlnts are used as working drawings, and distributed to those needing ~ntormation.

REVAMP WORK FOR EXISTING PLANTS

A Polaroid (or video) camera can be used to supply views ot the plant and unrecorded changes. Filed drawings ot a plant do not always include alterations, or dev~ation tram original design.

Photographs otsections ot a plant can be combined with drawings to tacil~tate installation at new equipment, or to make turther changes to the exrsting plant. To do this, photographs are taker, or the required views, uslng a camera fitted with a w~de-angle lens (to obtain a wider view)

The negatives obtained are printed onto screened positive films which are attached to the back a t a clear plastic drawing sheet. Alterations to the piping system are then drawn on the tront tece ot thissheet, linking the photographs as desired. Reproductions of the composite drawing are made in the usual way by diazo process.

Alternately, positives may be marked directly tor minor changes or instructions to the field.

PHOTOGRAPHIC LAYOUTS

The tollowing technique produces equipment layout 'drawings', and is especially usetul tor areas where method study or investigattonal reports are required.

First, equipment outlines are produced to scale on photographic film, e~ther in the regular way or by xerography. Next, a drawing.sizedsheet ot clear fi lm is laid on a white backing sheet having a correctly-scaled grid marked on it.

The building outline and other teatures can be put onto the film using the variety ot printed transparent tapes and decals available. The pleces ot film with equipment outlines may then be positioned with clear tape, and any other parts ot the 'drawing' completed. Alterations to the layout may be rapidly made with this technique, which photographs well tor reports, and allows prints to be made in the usual ways tor marking and comment. The fi lm layout should be covered with an acetate or other protective sheet betore lnsertlon in a copying machine.

REDUCTlON BY PHOTOGRAPHY

I t is trequently required to include reproductions ot diagrams and draw~ngs in reports, etc. Photographic reduction to less than half-s~ze Ion lengths) is not recommended because normal-sized print~ngand details may not be legible. A graphic scale should be included on draw~ngs to be reduced-see chart 5.8.

PIPING SYMBOLS 5.1

SHOWING PIPE & JOINTS 5.1.1

Hand-drawn piping layouts depict pipe by smglelines iorclarityand economy. Pipe and flanges are sometimes drawn partially 'double line' to display clearances. Computer drawn layouts can show piplng in plan, elevational and isometric vrews i n single line, or lwrthout additional eiiorr or expense) in double line. Double line representation 1s best resewed tor threedimens~onal views, such as isos. - In doubleline draw~ng. valves are shown by the symbols in chart 5.6 (refer t o the panel 'Dratt~ng valves'). Double-line representation is not used tor entlre ptping arrangements, as i t is very time-consuming, difficult to read, and not pstif ied techn~cally.

OOUBLE-LINE PRESENTATION

SINGLE.LINE PRESENTATION

In presenting piplng 'single line' on plping draw~ngs, only the centerline o l the pipe is drawn, using a solid tine (see chart 5.1), and the line size is written. Flanges are shown as thick lines drawn to the scaled outside diameter of the flange. Valves are shown by special symbols drawn to scale. Pumps are shown by drawrng the pads on which they rest, and their nozzles: figure 6.21 illustrates this simplified presentation. Equipment and vessels are shown by drawmg their nozzles, outlines, and supporting pads.

I f there is a piping specification. ~t is not necessary to Indicate welded or screwed writs, except to remove ambiguities-tor example, t o differentiate between a tee and a stub-in. I n most current practice, the symbols tor screwed joints and socket welds are normally om~tted, although bun welds are often shown.

The ways ot show~ng loints set out in the standard ANSI Y32.2.3 are not typ~cal ot current mdustrial practice. The standard's symbol tor a bun-weld asshown i n table 5.1 1s commonly used to Indicate a butt-weld to be made 'in the field' (field weld)

SHOWING NON.FLANGE0 JOINTS AT ELBOWS

SIMPLIFIED PRACTICE.

CONVENTIONAL PRACTICE

ANSI Y32.2.3 (Not current p r . c t d

BUTT WELD SOCKET WELD

TABLE 5.1

SCREWED JOIN;

LINE SYMBOLS WHICH MAY BE USED ON ALL UHAWINt iS 3 .1 .L

Cha~. shun. .man,, --.:pled ot 0. ... ; variL.. .., es. L .-,,, other line symbols have been devlsed but most ot theseare not readily recop nlzed, and 11 1s better to state In words the tunctlon ot speclal lines, particularly on process flow diagrams and P&lD's. The desrgner or drattsman should use his currant employer's symbols.

VALVE & EQUIPMENT SYMBOLS FOR PEID's & 5.1.3 PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS

Pract~ce in showing equipment IS not uniform. Chart 5.2 1s based on ANSI Y32.11, and applies to P&ID's and process flow diagrams.

REPRESENTING PIPING ON PIPING DRAWINGS 5.14

Charts 5.3-6 show symbols used In burr-welded, screwed and socket-welded systems. The various aspects ot the fittlng, valve, etc., are given. These symbols ere based on conventional practlce rather than the ANSI standard 232.2.3, tltled 'Graphic symbols tor plpe fittmgs, valves and plplng'.

REPRESENTING VALVES ON PIPING DRAWINGS 5.1.5

Chart 5.6 shows ways ot denotlng valves, ~ncluding stems, handwheels and other operators. The symbols are based on ANSI i32.2.3, but more valve types are covered and the presentarm 1s updated. Valve handwheelsshould to be drawn to scale wlth valve stem shown tully extended.

I Y 1 1 3 C ~ L L F . I V E " " ~ .,I I V I D V C ~ run I r , t l"" u..n...l.rr -.

_, lbols . jre sh-.. .I a SI . . Nay I . , .ysten., -.. xllec.+, ... chart 5 7.

GENERAL ENGINEERING SYMBOLS 5.1.7

Char! 5.8 glves some symbols, signs,-etc., whlch are used generally and are likely to be found or needed on plping drawlnos. -

_i

Solid from solid

Solid from solid + gas

P E S O , - +-

CHART 5.6 GIVES THE BASIC SYMBOLS FOR VALVES THESE FOLLOWS: E ~ S I C SYMBOLS ARE USED OR ADbPTED AS

HOSE J-uwL-

HOSECONNECT~ON 0 I-

PIPE @ w @ PLUG

W i R TOP

STRAIGHT or REDUCl

I -

I

>UPLING. SHOIY FOR BRANCH COPINECTIONS ONLY- FULL.. HALF. SEE 'COUPLING' iN CHI-RT 5.3

I I

HOSE 4fub

PIPE @ + 3 @ REDUCER.

I SIYAGE.

CONCENTRIC TOPVIEW @

TEE. STRAIGHT or REDUCING

P & I 0's USE THE RELEVANT YALVE SYMBOL TO SHOWTHE TYPE hWNUAL 0FVALVE.DRAW OPERATORS ARE MOSTSYMBOLS NOT SHOWN. I M n . LONG

PIPING DRAWINGS OPERATOR %SHOWN IF IMPORTrZNT

I,, Y R E W E D VALVES USE THE B A S K VALVE SYNBDL. ORAWTHE iENGTP OF THE VALVE TO YALE.

121 SOCIET.ENDED VALVES I F THE PROJECT HAS A PiPbNO SPECIFICATION. US1 THE B A S E YALVE SYMBOL. IF NOT. SHOW SOCKn ENDS TO THE VALVES:

I / :::% / @ q i ~ 3 f t DRAW THE LENGTH OF THE BASIC VALVE SYMBO TOSCALE OVERSOCKETENDS.

191 FLkNGECI VALVES

USE THE BASIC YALVE SYMBOL, WITH OPERA705 AN0 SHOW MATlNG FLANGES AS DETAILED BELOL'

SINGLE-LINE I DOUBLELINE

1. Drawing the symbol

C r i b IB i Show Omr the IirnnE b l i c OD n i v c to wr'E Vmbal kiwm IlrnEn

ICb D n u Ulue lennihs urld to the flrngebreio ti2ngel.c" *C ursve. 0, ren,.r.,o ,,rngr,r, dimen%lonr tor

END' -

JACKETED P!PE WET" lWULJITlON

VENT FOR TANK

FLOOR BUPPDR

. LeJeune Road, M i a m i F l o r l d a 33126. Telephone (305) 443-9353.

s y p p n l + FOP WFI DING nFTAILS 5.1.8

Standard welding symbols are published by the American Welding Society. These symbols should be used as necessary on details of attachments, vessels. piping supports, etc. The practice ot writing on drawings instructions such as 'TO BE WELDED THROUGHOUT', or 'TO BE COMPLETELY WELDED' transters the design responsibility for all attachments and connections trom the designer to the weider, which the Society considers to be a dangerous and uneconomic practice.

The 'welding symbol' devised by the Amerlcan Welding Society has e~ght elements. Not all of these eiements are necessarily needed by piplng designers. The assembled welding symbol which gives the welder ail the necessary in- structlon, and locations ot its elements, is shown in chart 5.9. Theelements are:

s REFERENCE LINE

8 ARROW

0 BASIC WELD SYMBOLS

a DIMENSIONS & OTHER DATA

a SUPPLEMENTARY SYMBOLS

0 FINISH SYMBOLS

9 TAIL

e SPECIFICATIONS. PROCESS or OTHER REFERENCE

The tollowmg is a qulck guide t o the scheme:Full details will be found m the current revision ot 'Standard Welding Symbois' available from the American Welding Society.

ASSEMBLING THE WELDING SYMBOL

Reterence line and arrow: The symbol begins with a reterence line and arrow pointing to the joint where the weld is to be made. The reterence line has two 'sides': 'other side' (above the line) and 'arrow side' (below the line)-reter to the tollowing examples and to chart 5.9.

BASIC WELDING ARROW FIGURE 5.1

BASIC WELDING SYMBOLS

la) The weld rymbai

EXAMPLE USE OF THE FILLET WELD SYMBOL

If a continuous fiilet weld is needed, hke thls

the filletweld symbol is placed on the 'arrow side' of the reference line, thus: L

If the weid i s required on the far side from the arrow, thus.

the weld symbol 1s shown on the 'other side ot the reference line

If a continuous fillet weld is needed on both sides ot the joint,

A the fillet weld symbol is placed on both sides of the

a reference line.

EXAMPLE USE OF THE BEVEL GROOVE SYMBOL

I f a bevel groove i s required, like this: The 'qroove' symbol +nr a - - - bevei is shown, wlth the illlet

/Cl_ weld symbol, and a break is made in the arrow toward the - v member to be beveled, thus: -KT

Only the bevel and 'J' groove symbols require a break ~n the arrow -see 15.9 chart 5.9.

DIMENSIONING THE WELD CROSS SECTION

Suppose the weld is requlred to be 114 inch in sm, and the bevei is to be 3/16 inch deep:

These dimensions are shown to the lett of the weld sym I

Alternatively, the bevel can be expressed in degrees of arc:

and be ndicated thus on the symboi.

I f a root gap i s required, thus:

the symbol is

- U Y I ~ I ~ u o ~ n iu r w r m a ~ l l p l c ut a xnqnc 9mr~ wwu, l i r tw wriu i~ I ~ ~ U I I B U

311 ar ' a me L,,.., back ,, ,,le fillc, ~ l d !omt wjthout a orval, if ma weld needs to be 114-inch in slze and 6 inches long, like this:

r

& m'' like t i : I @ . / or like this: 1 @ 1 the weld symbol may be drawn:

- 3 d

____j

alternately: Fm it IS shown In this way:

If a sertes ot 6-inch long welds IS requ~red with 6-inch gaps between them

% If this same 'all around' weld has to be made in the field. i t i s shown thus:

(that is, the pitch ot the welds is 12 inches), thus: &*~ 6"

The contour at the weld i s shown by a contour symbol on the weld symbol:

FLUSH CONTOUR CONVEXCONTOUR CONCAVECONTOUR

the symbol is: k alternately: YA 6-12 like this: like this: or:

< i i

1:. , .

. I f these welds are requlred staggered on both sides- The method of finishing the weld contour is indicated by adding a finish notatlon letter, thus.

like this: t : ; , i

I

I Ud 6-12 ".. .. .

.""' $ the symbol is: V. V 6 - 1 2

, .- I n m n

,I I 1 I ! i , where M = machining, G =grinding, and C = chipping.

/ I SUPPLEMENTARY SYMBOLS

1 1 i 1 ; These symbols give instructions tor making the weld and define the requ~red

countour: FULL WELDING SYMBOL i

1 i ml~l l l l C l l U l O U R I A W ~ riimmto UEIT.~IIRU

Occasionally it is necessary to give other instruct~ons in the weldingsymbol. , . F i Y I X EDl lV l l l C D l f l i V t

. . ~1 The symbol can be elaborated tor this as shown in 'Locat~on at elements ot a . . . welding symbol' in chart 5.9. ' : , .

Chart 5.9, reproduced by permission ot the American Welding Society, summarizes and amplifies the explanations of this section.

1641

Bls~

DRAWINGS

All intormation for constructing piping systems IS contained In drawings, apart trom the specifications, and the possible use ot a model and photographs.

THE MAIN PURPOSE OF A DRAWING ISTO COMMUNICATE INFORMATION IN ASIMPLE AND EXPLICIT WAY. 1

PROCESS & PIPING DRAWINGS GROW FROM THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

To deslgn process plplng, three types ot drawing are developed in sequence trom the schematic diagram (or 'schemats') prepared by the process engmeer.

These three types of drawing are, in order ot development:-

(11 FLOW DIAGRAM (PROCESS. or SERVICE)

(21 PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM, or ?&ID'

(31 PIPING DRAWING

EXAMPLE DIAGRAMS

Figure 5.2 shows a simple example ot a 'schematic'. A solvent recovery system is used as an example. Based on the schematic diagram of figure 5.2, a developed process flow diagram IS shown in figure 5.3. From this flow diagram, the P&ID (figure 5.3) is evolved.

As tar as practicable, the flow of material(s) should be trom left to right. Incoming flows should be arrowed and described down the lett-hand edge of the drawing, and exltttng flows arrowed and described at the right at the drawing, without Intruding into the space over the tltle block.

Intormation normally Included on the process drawings is detailed In sections 5.2.2 thru 5.2.4. Flow diagrams and P&ID's each have thelr own tunctions and should show only that information relevant to thelr functlons. as set out in 5.2.3 and 5.2.4. Extraneous intormatlon such as piping, structural and mechanical notes should not be included, unless essentlai to the process.

SECURITY

A real or supposed need tor industrial or national security may restrlct lntoi- mation appearing on drawings Instead ot naming ckmlcals, indeterminate or traditional terms such as 'sweet water', 'brine', 'leach acid'. 'chemical B', may be used. Data Important to the reactionssuch as temperatures, pressures and flow rates mav be withheld. Sometimes certeln key drawings are locked away when not in use.

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 5.2 7 r i r , - 1.8 [JJI .2.3

Commonly referred to as a 'schematic', this diagram shows paths of flow by slngle lines, and operattons or process equipment are represented by simple figures such as rectangles and circles. Notes on the process will oiten be included.

The diagram IS not to scale, hut relationships between equrpment and prping wlth regard to the process are shown. The desired spatial arrangement ot equipment and piping may be broadly indicated. Usually, the schematic is not used after the inltial planning stage, but serves to develop the process flow diagram which then becomes the primary reterence.

FLOW DIAGRAM 5.2.3

This is an unscaled drawing describing the process. I t is also reterred to as a 'flow sheet'.

It should state the materials to be conveyed by the plping, conveyors, etc., and specify their rates of flow and other information such as temperature and pressure, where of interest. This intormation may be 'flagged' (on lines) within the diagram or be tabulated on a separate panel-such a panel is shown at the bottom left ot figure 5.3.

LAYOUT OF THE FLOW DIAGRAM

Whether a flow diagram 1s to be In elevation or plan view should depend on how the P&ID is to be presented. To easily relatethe two drawings, both should be presented in the same vlew. Elevations are suitable tor slmple systems arranged vertically. Installations coverlng large horizontal areas are best shown in plan vlew.

Normally, a separate flow diagram is prepared tor each plant process. I f a slngle sheet would be too crowded, two or more sheets may be used. For slmple processes, more than one may be shown on a sheet. Process lines should have the rate and direction of flow, and other required data, noted. Main process flows should preterably be shown going trom the lett of the sheet to the rtght. Llne s~zes are normally not shown on a flow diagram. Critical internal parts of vessels and other Items essential to the process should be indicated.

Al l tactors considered, it is advisable to write equipment tltles either near the top or near the bottom o f the sheet, either directly above or below the equipment symbol. Sometimes 11 may be directed that a l l pumps be drawn at a common level near the bottom of thesheet, although this practice may lead to a complex-looking drawing. Particularly with flow diagrams, simplicity in presentatlon is ot prime Importance.

SEPARATOR WATER SEPARATOP -

SIZE, DLirr IOLVENT VAPORIZOR SOLVENT COOLER SIZE, SIZE, DUTY EOUIPNO---

EQUIP NO-- SIZE, D U N EQUIP NO--- EQUIP NO---

SOLVENT PREHEATER SIZE, DUTY

SHOW SIZE AND DUTY SOLVENT RETWN PUMP

EQUIP NO--- FOR ALL EOUIPMENT SIZE, DUTY

EQUIP NO---

STREAM NO/ LB/HR 1 PSlG 1 SG / DEG F

I I I I I I I I

c *ALTERNATE hlETHODOF 2 1 SHOWING SlREAM DATA

FLOW LINES

d i rec tus dt ilob" w ~ n i n tlw wgram d ~ e m w n uy m i d arrowiieads. 111e use of arrowheads at all iunctions and corners aids the rapid reading ot the diagram. The number o i crossings can be minmzed by good arrangement Suitable line thicknesses are shown at full size in chart 5.1. For photographic reduction, lines should be spaced not closer than 318 inch.

Process and service streams entering or leavlnq the flow diagram are shown by large hollow arrowheads, w ~ t h the conveyed iluid written over and the continuation sheet number within the arrowhead, as in figure 5.3.

ARROWS ON FLOW DIAGRAMS

SHOWING VALVES ON THE FLOW DIAGRAM

lnstrument-controlled and manual valves which are necessary to the proces are shown. The tollowing valves are shown i f required by a governing code or regulation, or i f they are essential to the process: ~solating, bypassing, ventlng, draining, sampling, and valves used for purging, steamout, etc., tor relieving excess pressure o i gases.or :liquids (including rupture discs), breather valves and vacuum breakers.

SHOW ONLY SPECIAL FITTINGS

Piping fittings, strainers, and flame arrestors should not be shown unless of specla1 importance to the process.

ESSENTIAL INSTRUMENTATION

Only instrumentation essent~al to process control should be shown.Simplified representation 1s suitable. For example, only instruments such as controllers and indicators need be shown: items not essential to the drawing (trans- mltters, tor example) may be omitted.

EQUIPMENT DATA

Capacities ot equipment should be shown. Equipment should be drawn schemat~cally, using equipment symbols, and where teasible should be drawn in proportion to the actual sizes ot the items. Equipment symbols should neither dominate the drawmg, nor be too small tor clear understanding.

STANDBY & PARALLELED EQUIPMENT

Standby equlpment is not normally drawn. If ~dent~cal units of equipment are provided tor paralleled operatlon (that is, all unlts on stream), only one unit need normally be drawn. Paralleled or standby units should be indicated by noting the equipment number and the servlce tunctlon ('STANOBY'or 'PARALLEL OF).

PROCESS DATA FOR EQUIPMENT

The basic process information required for designing and operating maior items ot equipment should be shown. This intormation is best placed immediately below the title ot the equipment.

IDENTIFYING EOUIPMENT

Difierent types of equipment may be reterred to by a classification letter (or letters). There is no generally accepted coding -each company has its own scheme if any standardization is made at all. Equipment classed under a certain letter is numbered in sequence from '1' upward. l i a new installation is made in an existing plant, the method at numbering may tallow previous practice tor the plant.

Also, it IS useful to divide the plant and open part ot the slte as necessary into areas, givlng each a code number. An area number can be made the first part of en equipment number. For example, i f a heat exchanger is the 53rd item of equipment listed under the classifrcatron letter 'E', located in area '1'. (see 'Key plan' In 5.2.7) the exchanger's equlpment number can be 1-E-53.

Each Item ot equlpment should bear the same number on all drawings, diagrams and listings. Standby or identical equipment, i f in the same servlce. may be identified by adding the letters, A. 8. C, and so on, to the same equipment identification letter and number. For example, a heat exchanger and itsstandby may be des~gnated 1-E-53A, and 1-E-538.

SERVICES ON PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS

Systems for providing services should not be shown. However, the type of service, flow rates, temperatures and pressures should be noted at consumption rates corresponding to the material balance-usually shown by a 'flagr to the line-see iigure 5.3.

DISPOSAL OF WASTES

The routes ot disposal tor all waste streams should be indicated. For example, arrows or dram symbols may be labelled with destmation, such as 'chemical sewer' or 'dr~ps recovery system'. In some instances the disposal or wastetreatment system may be detailed on one or more separate sheets. See 6.13 where 'effluent' is discussed.

MATERIAL BALANCE

The process material balance can be tabulated on separate 8% x 11-inch sheets, or along the bottom of the process flow diagram.

Thtr Amwing sc mqmoni- mhrred *- -- the 'P" '"' Its 0: :to I1

all IJiuLass anu aalvice liries, instruments and controls, equipment, and data necessary tor the design groups. The process flow diagram is the primary source ot lntormat~on tor developing the P&ID Symbols su~table tor P&ID's are given in charts 5.1 thru 5.7.

The P&ID should define piping, equipment and instrumentation well enough for cost estimat~on and for subsequent design, construction, operation and modification of the process. Material balance data, flow rates, temperatures, pressures, etc., and piping fitting details are not shown, and purely mechanical piping detailssuch as elbows, pints and unlons are Inappropriate to P&ID's.

INTERCONNECTING P&iD

This drawing shows process and service lines between buildings and units, etc., and serves to link the P&ID's for the indiv~dual processes, units or buildings. Like any P&ID, the drawing is not to scale. I t resembles the layout of the site plan, which enables line sizes and branching points trom headers to be established, and assists in planning plpeways.

P&ID LAYOUT

The layout ot the ?&ID shou!dresemb!e as tar as practlceble that ot the process flow diagram. The process relationship ot equipment should correspond exactly. Often it is useful to draw equlpment in proportion vertically, but to reduce horizontal dimensions to save space and allow room tor flow lines between equipment. Crowding intormation is a common dratting fault - i t is desirable to space generously, as, more often than not, revisions add intormation. On an elevational P&ID, a base line indicating grade or first-floor level can be shown. Crltlcal elevations are noted.

For revision purposes, a P&ID is best made on a drawing sheet having a grid system-this is a sheet having letters along one border and numbers along the adiacent border. Thus, reterences such as 'A6'. 'BV, etc., can be glven to an area where a change has been made. (A grid system IS applicable t o P&ID's more complicated than the simple example of figure 5.4.)

DRAFTING GUIDELINES FOR P&ID'n

o Suitable line thicknesses are shown at full s1ze in chart 5.1

B Crossing lines must not touch-break lines going in one direction only. Break Instrument lines crossing process and service lines

Keep parallel lines at least 318 inch apart

o Preterably draw ail valves the same size-114-inch long is suitable-as this retalns legibility for photographic reduction. Instrument isolating valves and drain valves can be drawn smaller, i f desired

e Draw Instrument ~dentificat~on balloons 7116th-inch diameter-see 5.5

e Draw trap symbols 318th-inch square

II flo !s ani . .conn ....... s she,., ,, shovv4b U L ~ P&IL s. w r y h ie should show direction ot flow, and be labeled to show the area ot project, conveyed fluid, line size, piping material or specification code number (company code), and number ot the line. This intormation is shown in the 'line number'.

EXAMPLE LINE NUMBER: (74/82161412j23) may denote the 23rd line in area 74, a &inch p~pe to company specification 412. 'BZ' identifies the conveyed fluid.

This type ot tull deslgnat~on tor a flow line need not be used, provided identification is adequate.

Pip~ng drawings use the line numbering ot the P&IO, end the tollowlng points apply to piplng drawings as well as P&ID's.

a For a system of lines conveying the same f lu~d, allocate sequential numbers to lines, beginning wlth '1' for each system

e For a continuous line, retaln the same number ot line (such as 23 in the example) as the line goes thru valves, strainers, small filters, traps, venturls, orifice flanges and small equlpment generally -unless the line changes in s1ze

6 Termmate the number ot a line at a maror item ot equipment such as a tank, pressure vessel, mixer, or any equipment carrylng an individual equipment number

s Allocate new numbers to branches

As with the process flow diagram, directions of flow within the drawing are shown by solid arrows placed at every junction, and all corners except where changes of direction occur closely together. Corners should be square. The number of crossingsshould be kept minimal by good arrangement.

Process end servicestreams entering or leavlng the process are noted by hollow arrows with the name ot the conveyed fluid wrrtten over the arrowhead and the continuation sheet number within it. No process flow data will normally be shown on a ?&ID.

FLOW LINES ON P&IWs

NOTES FOR LINES

Special points tor des~gn and operating procedures are noted-such as lines which need to be sloped tor gravity flow, lines which need careful cleanlng before startup, etc.

(681

:he PUev " hou l~ a ~ , u . ~ all r t . ~ , ~ , 2 q u i p ~ , , ~ , ~ and i i , , ~~n~d t i on MOL reievo*>~ to the process, such as equipment names, equlpment numbers, the slzes, ratings, capacities, endlor duties of equipment, end ~nstrumentation.

Standby and paralleled equlpment is shown, including all connected lines. Equipment numbers end service functions ('STANDBY' or 'PARALLEL OF1 are noted.

'Future' equlpment, together with the equipment that will service it, is shown in broken outline, and labeled. Blind-flange term~nations to accommodate future piping should be Indicated on headers and branches. 'Future'additions are usually not antichpated beyond a 5-year period.

Pressure ratings tor equipment are noted if the rating is different trom the plping system. A 'typical' note may be used to describe multiple pieces ot identical equipment in the same service, but all equipment numbers are written.

CLOSURES

" 'e iter ' ~ u l d t ' Nn u n of nent ' .aces: !ding protection, end ere discussed in 2.10.

STEAM TRAPS ON THE P&ID

I f the locat~ons of traps erqknown they are indicated. For example, the trap required upstream ot a pressure-reduc~ng statlon teeding a steam turbine should be shown. - Steam traps on steam piping are not otherwise indicated, as these trap positions are determined when making the piping drawings. They can be added later to the P&lO if desired, after the piping drawmgs have been completed.

DRIPLEGS

Oriplegs are not shown.

VENTS & DRAINS

Vents end drains on high and low points of lines respectively, to be used tor hydrostatic testing, are not shown, as they are established on the plping

Temporary closures tor process operation or personnel protection are shown. arrangement drawings. Process vents and drains are shown.

SHOW INSTRUMENT NUMBERS SHOWSIZE ANDPRESSURE RATING ON ALL INSTRUMENTATION OF CONTROLVALVES. AN0 SIZE OF SPACE OVER TlTLE BLOCK FOR NOTES. S M ~ L S IREFERTOS.+~I ALLOTHER VALVES TO ATM SPECIAL NMBOL IDENTIFICATION.^^

COOLING WATER

CONDENSATE

ON ALL LINES WATER SEPAPATOR -

SEPAPATOR SOLVENT PaEHEATER SOLVENT VAPO?IZER SOLVENT COOL^ EOUiP - EQUIP NO EQUIP NO EQUIP NO EOUlP NO

SOLVENTRETURN PUM?

- St,,.. ..id te4 ..,.ass ar,, ..,dice v ~ , . . ~ ~ t h sbre aiid idenuiyiiig number i f applicable. Give pressure ratlng i f different trom line specification

a Indicate any valves that have to be locked open or locked closed

n Indicate powered operators

SHOWING INSTRUMENTATION ON THE P&ID

Signal-lead dretting symbols shown tn chart 5.1 may be used, and the ISA scheme tor designat~ng tnstrumentetion ts described in 5.5. Details ot tnstrument piping and conduit are usually shown on separate instrument tnstallation drew~ngs.

B Show all instrumentation on the P&IO, tor and including these items: element or sensor, signal lead, orifice flange assembly, transmitter, controller, vacuum breaker,flame arrestor, level gage,s~ght glass, flow indicator, relief valve, rupture disc, safety valve. The las t three items may be tagged w ~ t h set pressure(s) also

a lndicate local- or board-mounting ot instruments by the symbol-reter to the labeling scheme in 5.5.4

INSULATION & TRACING

lnsulat~on on piping end equipment is shown, together with the thickness required. Tracing requirements are indicated. Reter to 6.8.

CONTROL STATIONS

Control stations are discussed in 6.1.4. Control valves are indicated by pressure rating, instrument identifying number and size-see figure 5.15, for example.

P&ID SHOWS HOW WASTES ARE HANDLED

Dratns, tunnels, reliet valves and other equipment handling wastes are shown on the P&lD. I f an extenslve system or waste-treatment tacility 1s involved, tt should be shown on e separate P&ID. Wastes and effluents are discussed in 6.13.

SERVICE SYSTEMS MAY HAVE THEIR OWN P&ID

Process equipment may be provided with vartous servtces, such as steam for heating, water or retrigerant tor cooling, or alr tor oxidizing. Plant or equipment prov~ding these services is usually described on separate 'service P&lD's'. A service line such as a steam line entering e process P&ID is given a 'hollow arrow' line designailon taken from the servlce P&ID. Returning servtce lines are des~gnated in the same way. Reter to figure 5.4.

UTILITY STATIONS

Stations providing steam, compressed air, and water, are shown. Reier to 6.1.5.

-

Inese sheets are tabulated lists ot hnes and intormatton about them. The numbers ot the l~nes are usually listed at the rtght of the sheet. Other columns l is t h e we, material ot construction (using company's specif~cation code, if there 1s one), conveyed fluid, pressure, temperature, flow rate, test pressure, insulation or lacket~ng (if required), and connected hnes (which will usually be branches)

The sheets are compiled and kept up-to-date by the project group, taking all the tntormation trom the P&ID. Copies are supplied to the piptnggroupfor reference.

On smell pro~ects involving only a tew lines line designation sheets may not be used. It is useful to add a note on the P&IO statlng the numbers ot the last line and lest valve used.

VIEWS USED FOR PIPING DRAWINGS 5.26

Two types of view are used:

(1) ORTHOGRAPHIC -PLANS AND ELEVATIONS

I21 PICTORIAL - ISOMETRIC VIEW AND OBLIQUE PRESENTATION

Figure 5.5 shows how a building would appear in these different vlews

PRESENTATIONS USED IN PIPING DRAWINGS FIGURE 5.5

INS i OSLIOUE

I I I

PLANS & ELEVATIONS

Plan vlews are morecommon than elevational views. Piping layout is developed in plan view, and elevational vtews and section details ere added tor clarity where necessary.

PICTORIAL VIEWS

In complex ptping systems, where orthographic vlews may not easily illus- trate the design, pictor~el presentatton can be used tor clar~ty. In e~ther isometrtc or oblique presentations, lines not horizontal or vertical on the drawtng are usually drawn at 30 degrees to the horizontal.

oblique Dresentatlon has theadvantage that 11 can he distorted nr ~ x p a n d ~ d tn she,. as ot I v,u,~t, etc. .,,u, 2 cleb.,, d a n a,, ~ w n e t r l c vtavv. It l a t w r

commonly used, but can be useful tor diagramat~c work

Figure 5.6 illustrates how clrcular shapes vlewed at different angles are ap- proxlmated by means ot a %-degree ellipse template. lsometr~c templates to r valves, etc., are available and neat drawlngs can be rapldly produced wlth them. Orthographic and lsometrlc templates can be used to produce an oblique presentation.

ISOMETRIC PRESENTATION OF CIRCULAR SECTIONS

FIGURE 5.6

PIPING ARRANGEMENT IN DIFFERENT PRESENTATIONS

LJ ELEVATION

Figure 5.7 IS used to show the presentations used In drattlng. lsometr~c and oblique drawlngs bqth clearly show the plptng arrangement, but the plan vlew fails to show the bypass loop and valve, and the supplementary elevation IS needed. -

PIPING DRAWINGS ARE BASED ON OTHER DRAWINGS 5.2.7

The purpose of piplng drawlngs IS to supply detailed mtormation to enable a plant to be built. Prlor to making plpmg drawlngs, the site plan and equipment arrangement drawlngs are prepared, and from these two drawings the plot plan IS derlved. These three drawlngs are used as the basis for developing the plplng drawlngs.

SITE PLAN

The plplng group produces a 'site plan' to a small scale (1 inch to 30 or lOOft tor example). It shows the whole slte Including the boundaries, roads. railroad spurs, pavement, buildings, process plant areas, large structures, storage areas, effluent ponds, waste disposal, shlpplng and loading areas. True' (geographic) and 'assumed' or 'plant' nonh are marked and their angular separation shown-see figure 5.1 1.

ISOMETRIC

FIGURE 5.7

__---_

_---__

OBLIQUE

KEY PLAN

A 'kel p ~ Y I ~ ' IS P I U U U ~ ~ ~ by ~~.$ t lng tw. sure plau, u ~ v ~ d ~ n g uie drea of me slte into smaller areas identified by key letters or numbers A small simplified inset ot the key plan is added to plot plans, and may be added to plping and othecdrawings for reterence purposes The subiect area ot the part~cular drawmg is hatched or shaded, as shown in figure 5.8.

DRAWING SHEETSHOWING KEY PLAN & MATCHLINE FIGURE 5.8

PIPING PLAN, AREA'?'

EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT DRAWING

Under prolect group supervision, the piping group usually makes several viable arrangements ot equlpment, seeking an optimal design that satisfies process requtrements. Often, prelimmary piping studies are necessary in order to establish equipment coordinates.

A design aid tor pos~tioning equipment is to cut out scaled outlines of equipment trom stiff paper, which can be moved about on a plan vlew ot the area involved. (If multiple units ot the same type are to be used, xeroxing the equipment outlines is faster.) Another method which is usetul tor areas where method study or investigat~onal reports are needed IS described in 4.4.13 under 'Photographic layouts'.

PLOT PLAN

When the equipment arrangement drawings are approved, they are developed rnto 'plot plans' by the addit~on ot dimensions and coordinates to locate all malor Items ot equipment and structures.

North and east coordinates of the extremities of buildings, and centerlines ot steelwork or other architectural constructions should be shown on the plot plan, preterably at the west and south ends ot the installation. Both 'plant north' and true north should be shown-see figure 5.11.

. Eauioment coordinat~s are usuallw n i~~en to t h ~ wner"m== Coord;n=t'$ tor .u,,.$ are ,,,,,I to t h ~d i t e r l i i ~e u! the pu11tp shatt ano either to me face ot the pump toundat~on, or to the centerline ot the discharge port.

Up-dated copies of the above drawings are sent to the civil, structural and electr~cal or other groups ~nvolved in the design, to intorm them ot require ments as the des~gn develops.

VESSEL DRAWINGS

CVhen the equipment arrangement has been approved and the piping arrange ment determined, small dimensioned drawngs at process vessels are made (on sheets 8% x 11 or 11 x 17 inches) in order to fix nozzles and their orientations, manholes, ladders, etc. These drawings are then sent to the vendor who makes the shop detail draw~ngs, wh~ch are exam~ned by the project engineer and sent to the pipmg group for checking and approval. Vessel drawings need not be to scale. (Figure 5.14 i s an example vessel drawing.)

DRAWINGS FROM OTHER SOURCES

Pipmg drawmgs should be correlated with the tollowing drawlngs trom other desrgn groups and from vendors. Poms to be checked are listed:

Architectural drawtngs: s Our ines of v.alls or sldings, lnoicarlng tnickress 8 F our penerimons rur stairrA.~ys. I:frr, e eaors, oilcrs, dralns, erc a Positions ot doors and wmdows

Civil engtneertng drawmgs: Foundations, underground piptng, drams, etc.

Structural-steel drawmgs: 6 Positions of steel columns supporting next higher floor level s Supportmg structures such as overhead cranes, monorails, plattorms

or beams (i Wall bracmg, where pipes may be taken thru walls

Heating, ventilatmg & ar-condittonmg (HVACJ drawmgs: o Paths ot ducting and rismg ducts, fan room, plenums, space heaters,etc.

Eiectrtcal drawtngs: e Positions ot motor control centers, sw~tchgear, l unc tm boxes and

control panels s Major condun or wirmg runs (including buried runs) o Positions of lights

lnstrumentat~on drawings: n instrument panel and console locations

Vendors' drawtngs: o Oimens~ons ot equipment o Positions of nozzles, flange type and pressure rating, mstruments, etc.

Mechanical drawings: s Pos~tions and dimensions ot mechanical equipment such as conveyors,

chutes, etc. o Piped services needed tor mechanical esuioment.

PIPING DRAWINGS 5.2.8

Process equipment and piping systems have priority. Draw~ngs listed on the preceding page must be reviewed for compatibility with the developing prping design.

Pertinent background details (drawn faintly) trom these drawings help to avoid interferences. Omission ot such detail trom the piping drawing often leads to the subsequent discovery that pipe has been routed thru a brace, stairway, doorway, toundat~on, duct, mechan~cal equipment, motor control center, fire-fight~ng equipment, etc.

Completed piping drawings will also show spool numbers, i f this part ot the lob is not subcontracted - see 5.2.9. Electr~cal and instrument cables are not shown on piping drawings, but trays to hold the cables are indicated-tor example, see figure 6.3, point (8).

I t is not always possible tor the piping drawing to tollow exactly the logicai arrangement ot the ?&ID. Sometimes lines must be routed with different iunction sequence, and line numbers may be changed. During the preliminary piping studies, economiesend practicable improvements may be found, and the P&ID may be modified to take these into account. However, it is not the piping designer's job to seek ways to change the P&iD.

SCALE

Piping is arranged in plan view, usually to 318 in.lft scale.

ALLOCATING SPACE ON THE SHEET

a Obtain the drawing number and fi l l in the utle block at the bottom right corner ot the sheet

ALLOCATING SPACE ON A DRAWING SHEET FIGURE 5.9

W ' _I I ii 8

x l 0 1 s 1 e I ? I ELEVATION - 5 L L ----------- i GZ I C I PLAN - 5 1 3 1 I , , , 1 r--- - -------

1 I 0 1 j i

L J 1 g : 1 1 , L ---------- i

8 ELEVATION

8 a

On nnn-vtandard rhnnts, lewn - 1%- t- .--h mr-- - ' the ' ' 'ge ot the w e i , to ailow i~ l ing on a stick' htandard draw~ng sheets usually have this margin

On drawings showing a plan view, place a north arrow at the top left corner ot the sheet to indicate plant north-see figure 5.1 1

Do not draw in the area above the title block, as this space is allocated to the bill of materiel, or to general notes; briet descriptions of changes, and the titles and numbers ot reference drawings

If plans and elevations are small enough to go on the same sheet, draw the plan at the upper left side ot the sheet and elevations to the right and bottom of it, as shown in figure 5.9

BACKGROUND DETAIL

Show background detail as discussed in 5.2.8 under 'Piping drawings'. I t IS sometimes convenient to draw outlines on the reverse side ot the draw~ng sheet

I After background details have been determined. it i s best to make a print on which nozzles on vessels, pumps, etc., to be pped can be marked in red pencil. Utility stations can also be established. This will indicate areas ot malor usage and the most convenient locat~ons for the headers. Obviously, at tlmes there will be a number ot alternate routes offering comparable advantages

PROCESS & SERVICE LINES ON PIPING DRAWINGS

I Take line numbers from the P&ID. Refer to 5.2.4 under 'Flow lines on P&ID's' tor intormation on numbering lines. Include line numbers on all views, and arrowheads showing direction of flow

s Draw all pipe 'single line' unless special lnstructlons have been given tor drawing 'double line'. Chart 5.1 gives line thicknesses (full size)

a Line numbers are shown against lines, thus:

LINE NUMBER H e Take lines cont~nued on another sheet to a matchline, and there code -

with line numbers only. Show the continuation sheet numbers on matchlines-see figure 5.8

e Show where changes in line material specification occur. The change is usually indicated immediately downstream of a flange of a valve or equipment

SPEC .A' SPEC '8.

VALVE. ctc.

e Show a definite break in a h e crossmg behind another he-see 'Rolled ell', under 'Plan view piping drawmgs', this section

be sle e rec thru : . indir ' +ere 1' ,e nec '- ' ol 2~ Vl=ul DIPIN(: nRAWlNGS a and intorm the group leader for transmitting this intormetion to the s Draw plan views tor each floor of the plant. These views should show group(s) concerned what the layout will look like between adjacent floors, viewed from

0 Indicate insulation, and show whether lines are electrically or steam above, or at the elevation thru which the plan view i s cut

tmced-see chart 5.7 I f the plan view will not f i t on one sheet, present it on two or more sheets, using matchlines to link the drawings. See figure 5.8

FITTINGS, FLANGES, VALVES & PUMPS ON PIPING DRAWINGS a Note the elevation below which a plan view is &own-tor example,

The tollowrng items should be labeled in one view only: tees and ells rolled at 45 degrees (see example, this page), short-radius ell, reducing ell, eccentric reducer and eccentric swage (note on plan views whether 'top flat' or 'bottom flat'), concentric reducer, concentric swage, non-standard or companion flange, reducing tee, special items of unusual material, ot pressure rating different trom that ot the system. etc. Reter to charts 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5 tor symbol usage

Drew the outside diameters ot flanges to scale

Showvalve identification number trom P&ID

Label control valves to show: size, pressure rating, dimension over flanges, and valve instrument number, trom the P&ID-see figure 5.15

Draw valve handwheels to scale with valve stem tully extended

If a valve is chatn-operated, note distance ot chain from operatkng floor, which for satety should be approximately 3 f t

For pumps, show outline o t foundation and nozzles

DRIPLEGS & STEAM TRAPS

'PLAN BELOW ELEVATION 15-0" ' For clarity, both elevations can be stated 'PLAN BETWEEN ELEVATIONS 30'-0" & 15-0" '

n i f a tee or elbow is 'rolled' at 45 degrees, note as shown in the view where the fitting is rolled out ot the plane ot the drawing sheet

'ROLLED' ELL 'ROLLED' TEE

ROLL ELL / AT 45'

ROLL TEE / AT 45'

Driplegs are indicated on relevant plping drawlng plan views. Unless identical, a separate detail is drawn for each dripleg. The trap is indicated on the dilp-

0 Figure 5.10 shows how linescan be broken t o give sufficient intormation

leg pipkng by a symbol, and referred to a separate trap detail or data sheet. without drawing other wews

The trap detail drawing should show all necessary valves, strainers, unions; a Indicate required field welds etc., requlred at the trap-see figures 6.43 and 6.44.

ELEVATIONS (SECTIONS) & DETAILS The piping shown on the dripleg details should indicate whether condensate is to be taken to a header tor reuse, or run to waste. The design notes in a Draw elevations and details to clarify complex piping or piping hidden 6.10.5 discuss dripleg details for steam lines in which condensate torms in the plan view cont~nuously. Refer t o 6.10.9 also. s Do not drew detail that can be described by a note

INSTRUMENTS & CONNECTIONS ON PIPING DRAWINGS 8 Show only as many sections as necessary. A section does not have to be

a complete cross section of the plan B Show locationforeachinstrument connection with encircled instrument

number taken from the P&ID. Reter to 5.5.3 and chan 6.2 a Draw to a large scale any part needing tuller detail. Enlarged details

are preferably drawn i n available space on elevational drawings, and P Show similar isolating valve arrangements on instrument connections as should be cross-referenced by the applicable detail and draw~ng num-

'typical' detail, unless covered by standard company detail sheet beds)

VENTS & DRAINS

Reter to 6.1 1 and figure 6.47.

PIPE SUPPORTS

Reter to 6.2.2, end chert 5.7. tor symbols

D Identify sections indicated on plan views by letters (see chert 5.8) and details by numbers. Letters I and 0 are not used as this can lead to contusion w ~ t h numerals. If more than twentyfour sectlons are needed the letter Identification can be broken down thus: Al -Al , A2-A2, 84-84 ,....... and so on

P DO not sectkon planv~ewslookingtoward the bottom ot thedrawingsheet C7d,

s Figure 5.10 shows how to break lines t o give sufficient intormation t avo1 - rawir- .her k sect1

SHOWING 'HIDDEN' LINES ON PIPING ORAIVINGS

FIGURE 5.10

IDENTIFY BY LINE NUMBER

P L A N lor ELEVATION)

Correrponding E L E V A T I0 N lor PLAN1

PIPING FABRICATION DRAWINGS-'ISOS' 5 'SPOOLS 5.2.9

The two most common methods tor producing piping designs tor a plant are by making either plan and elevation drawings, or by constructing a scaled model. For fabricating welded piping, plans and elevations are sent directly to a subcontractor, usually referred to as a 'shop tabricatoi'-if a model is used, isometric drawings (reterred to as 'isos') are sent instead.

Isometric vlews are commonly used in pretabricating parts of butt-welded piping systems. lsos showing the piprng to be pretabricated are sent to the shop tabricator. Figure 5.15 is an example of such an !so.

The pretabricated parts ot the piping system are termed 'spools', described under 'Spools', this section. The plping group either produces isos showing the required spools, or marks the piping to be spooled on plans and elevations, depending on whether or not a model is used (as shown in chert 5.10). From these drawin@, the subcontractor makes detail drawings termed 'spool sheets'. Figure 5.17 is an example spool sheet.

ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS, or 'ISOS'

An is0 usually shows a complete line trom one piece of equipment to another-see figure 5.15. It gives all intormat~on ?ecessary tor tabrication and erection ot piping.

lsos are usually drawn treehand, but the various runs ot pipe, fittings and valves should be roughly in proportion tor easy understanding. Any one line (that is, all the ptping with the same line number) should be drawn on the minimum number ot iso sheets. If continuation sheets are needed, break the line at natural breakpoints such as flanges (except orificeflanges), welds at fittings, or field welds required tor installation.

ltemsand intormetion to be shown on an is0 include:

North arrow (plant north)

Dimensions and angles -- .- Reterence number ot plan drawing from whlch is0 is made (unless FIGURE

model is used), line number, direction ot flow, insulation end tracing 5.10 i

Equ~pment numbers and locations ot equipment (by centerlines)

Identify all items by use ot an understood symbol, and amplify by a description, as necessary

Give details ot any flanged nozzles on equipment to which piping has to be connected, i f the flange is different from the specification tor the connected piping

Size and type ot every valve

Size, pressure ratlng and instrument number ot control valves

Number, location and orientat~on for each instrument connection

. . ~ . F _ ...... . _-. - . . - r - . . - . . ..--.. ".. 0 1"- sheet ---'.iuatir - ibers

s Un~ons required tor installation and matntenance purposes

o On screwed and socket-welded assemblies, valve handwheel posttions need not be shown

o Matertals of construction

P Locations ot vents, drains, and traps

m Loeations ot supports, ~dentified by prpesupport number

The tollowing intormation may also be given:

I Requirements tor stress relieving, seal welding, p~ckling, lining, coating. or other special treatment ot the line

Drawing style to be tollowed is shown in the example iso, figure 5.15, which displays some ot the above points, and gives others as shaded notes. An iso may show more than one spool.

SPOOLS

A spool is an assembly ot fittings, flanges and pipe that may be prefabricated. I t does not include bolts, gaskets. valves or instruments. Straight mill-run lengths ot pipe over 20 tt are usually not lncluded in a spool, as stich lengths may be welded in the system on erection Ion the tso, this 1s ind~cated by notlng the length, and stating 'BY FIELD').

The size ot a spool is limtted by the tabrtcator's available means ot trans- portailon, and a spool is usually contained w~thin a space ot dimensions 40 f t x 10 t t x 8 tt. The maximum permtssible dimensions may be obtained trom the tabricator.

FIELD-FABRICATED SPOOLS

Some States in the USA have a trades agreement that 2-inch and smaller carbon-steel piptng must be fabricated at the site. This rule IS somettmes extended to piping larger than 2-inch.

SHOP-FABRICATED SPOOLS

All allovspools, and spools with 3 or more welds made trom 3-inch (occasionally 4-inch) and larger carbon-steel pipe are normally 'shop-fabricated'. This is, tabricated in the shop fabricator's workshop, etther at his plant or at the site. Spools with tewer welds are usually made In the field.

Large-diameter piping, being more difficult to handle, often necessttates the use ot iigs end templates, and is more economically produced in a workshop.

SPOOL SHEETS

A spool sheet is an orthographic drawing of a spool made by the plping contractor either trom plans and elevattons, or trom an iso-see chart 5.10.

(2) Lists the cut lengths ot plpe, fittings and flanges, etc. needed to make the spool

(3) Gives materials of construction, and any special treatment of the fin~shed piping

(4) Indicates how many spools of the same type are required

NUMBERING ISOS, SPOOL SHEETS, & SPOOLS

Spool numbers are allocated by the pip~ng group, and appear on all plplng draw~ngs. Vartous methods of number~ng can be used as long as ~dentification IS easily made. A suggested method toIlor6.-

Iso sheets can be Identified by the line number ot thesectton of line that is shown, tollowed by a sequential number. For example, the tourth is0 sheet showing a spool to be part of a line numbered 74/BZ/6/412/23 could be identified. 74/B2/6/412/23-4

Both the spool and the spool sheet can be identified by number or letter ustng the is0 sheet number as a prefix. For example, the numbering of spool sheets relating to tso sheet 74/BZ/6/412/23-4 could be

74/BZ/6/412/23-4-1, 74/BZ/6/412/23-4-2, ........ etc.,

or 74/82/6/412/23-4-A, 74/BZ/6/412/23-4-5, ........ etc.

The tull line number need not be used i f a shorter to rn would suffice for identification.

Spool numbers are also reterred to as 'mark numbers'. They are shown on lsos and on the tollowing:-

(1) Spool sheets-as the sheet number (2) The tabrtcated spool-so i t can be related to draw~ngs or isos (3) Pip~ng drawtngs-plans and elevations

DIMENSIONING 5.3

DIMENSIONING FROM REFERENCE POINTS 5.3.1

HORIZONTAL REFERENCE

When a proposed plant site is surveyed, a geographic reterence point is utilized trom which measurements to boundaries, roads, buildings, tanks, etc., can be made. The geographic reterence point chosen is usually an offictally-established one.

The lines ot lat~tude and longitude which define the geographic reterence point are not used. as a 'plant north' (see figure 5.11) is established, parallel to structural steelwork. The direct~on closest to true north 1s chosen for the 'plant north'.

The coordinatPs of the snuihwest rn rnw ot t h ~ nlant in f ~ n t ~ r e 5.11 ac rett,,,, ,o 'pl,,,, liYrth', ,, l l O . Y U E ~ U U W

Sometimes coordinates such as those above may be written N l + l O and E 2+00. The first coordinate is read as "one hundred plus 10 tt north" and the second as "two hundred plus zero tt east" This e a system used tor traverse survey, and IS more correctly applied to highways, railroads, etc.

Coordinates are used to locate tanks, vessels, malor equipment and structural steel. I n the open, these Items are located directly wlth respect to e geographic reference point, but In buildings and structures, can be dimensioned lrom the building steel.

HORIZONTAL REFERENCE FIGURE 5.11

VERTICAL REFERENCE

Before anv building or erectlng begins , the site IS leveled ('graded') w ~ t h earth-movmg equipment. The ground is made as flat as practicable, and atter leveling IS termed 'finished grade'.

The highest graded poini is termed the 'high polnt ot finished grade', IHPFG), and the horizontal plane passing thru-it is made the venical reference plane or 'datum' from which plant elevations are glven. Figure 5.12 shows that this horizontal plane is given e 'false' or nominal elevat~on, usually 100 tt. and is not reterred to mean sea level.

The 100 It nominal elevation ensures that foundations, basements, buried pipes and tanks, etc., wi l l have posltive elevations. 'Minus' elevations, whlch would be a nuisance, are thus avo~ded.

Large plants may have several areas, each having Its own high polnt ot finished grade. Nominal grade elevation is measured trom a benchmark, as illustrated in figure 5.12.

VERTICAL REFERENCE FIGURE 5.12

,. , 1 ELEVAilON 712 ABOVE SEA LEVEL

The US Department ot Commerce's Coast and Geodetic Suwey has estab- DIMENSIONING PIPING DRAWINGS

lished e large number of reterences tor latltuda and long~tude, and tor elevations above sea level. These are termed 'geodetic control stations'. DRAWING DIMENSIONS-& TOLERANCES

MAINTAINED IN ERECTED PIPING

Control stations tor horizontal reterence (latitude and longitude) are referred On plot: Dimensions on piping drawings are normally mainta~ned within 15.11&5.12 .

to as 'triangulation stations' or 'traverse stations', etC. Control StatlOnS tor the l m t s ot plus or minus 1116th inch. How t h ~ s tolerance is met does not vert~cal reterence are reterred to as 'benchmarks'. Latitude and long~tude concern the des~gner. Any necessary allowances to ensure that dimensions have not been established for all benchmarks. are mainta~ned are made by the tabricator and erector (contractor).

A geodetic control station IS marked with e metal disc showing ~ d e n t ~ t y Offplot: D~mensans are rnainta~ned as closely as practicable by the erector. and date at establishment. To provlde stable locations tor the discs, they are set into tops ot 'monuments', mounted in holes drilled in bedrock or WHICH DIMENSIONS SHOULD BE SHOWN? ~~~~~~ ~

large firmly-imbedded boulders, or affixed to a solid structure, such as a building, bridge, etc. Suffic~ent dimensions should be glven for positioning equipment, tor tabri-

catinn snnnls and tor erectlno oioino. Duolication ot dimensions in different . . . . . . > . 7 . . . - - - ~ " , . - . The oeoaraphic positions ot these stations can be obtamed trom the Director, views should be avoided, as this may easily lead to error i f alterations are - - . . US Coast and Geodetic S u ~ e y , Rockville, Maryland 20852. made.

1771

Basically the dimensions to snow are.

PUMPS I 1 I R E F E R E N C E LINE' TO C E N T E R L I N E I EoU,PMENT

2 / C E N T E R L I N E TO C E N T E R L I N E I ~ ~ , " o A R o v A L V E s I VESSELS

3 C E N T E R L I N E TO F L A N G E F A C E t NOZZLESON EOUlPMENT

J

4 F L A N G E F A C E T O F L A N G E F A C E t

INSTRUMENTS

. REFERENCE LINE CAN BE EITHER A N ORDINATE (LINE OF LATITUOE OR LONGITUDE1 OR A CENTERLINE OF BUILDING STEEL

T I T IS NECESSARY TO SHOW THESE DIMENSIONS FOR ITEhlS LACKING STANOARO DIMENSIONS IOEFINEO BY ANY RECOGNIZED STANOARDI

Figure 5.13 illustrates the use ot these types ot dimens~ons

PLAN VlEW OlMENSlONS

Plan views convey most of the dimens~onal intormation. and may also show dimensions tor elevat~ons in theabsence ot an elevatlonal vlew or sectlon.

E X A M P L E D I M E N S I O N S F O R PLAN V I E W F I G U R E 5.13

On plping draw~ngs, elevat~ons may be given as in table 5.2

SINGLEPIPE: SHOIVCENTERLlNE ELEVATION

SINGLE PIPE TO NOZZLE: SHOW CENTERLINE ELEVATION OF PIPE ATNOZZLE

SEVERAL PIPES SHhRING ACOhlMON SUPPORT: SHOW ELEVATION OF BOTTOMSOF PIPES

BOP EL w- SEVERALPIPESON APIPERACb SHOW 'TOP OF SUPPORT'ELEVATION

TOS EL 1

FINISHED FLOOR: WOWELEVATION OF HIGH POINT OF FLOOR

TOUNOATION: SHOWTOP OF CONCRETE'. lNCLUOiNG GROUT

TOC EL

...... ' ,...- ' . ' " .... .,.. .. . , .. ;.\'":;.i:;:. ~.

SHOE: DIMENSION ASSHOViN INTHE PIPERACKSKETCH ABOVE

BUR#ED LINCSIIN ATRENCHI: SHOW ELEVATION OF BOTTOMS OF PIPES

v , , BOP EL @ @ @ @ / -

FOR h!lNlMUhlCOVER. REFER TOP OF PiPE TO GRADE ELEVATION:

EL

DRAINSAND SEWERS: SHOW'INVERT ELEVATION'llEl

CLEARANCES:

@-

/ERTIC&L NOZZLE: ;HOW ELEVATION OF FLANGE FACE

GUIDELINES FOR DIMENSIONING ALL PIPING ORAWlNtiX 3.J.J

Shuvv a , , key b,,,,v6sions, , , ,~,J ing 6 , ~ ~ ~ d n s ar," buurdina.bd

e Show dimensionsoutsideotthedrawn view unless unavoidable - do not clutter the picture

a Draw dimension lines unbroken with a fine line. Write the dimension just above a horizontal line. Write the dimension ot a vertical line sideways, preferably at the lett. I t is usual to terminate the line with arrowheads, and theseare preterable for isos. The oblique dashes shown are qulcker and are suitable tor plans and elevations, especially i f the dimer~sions are cramped

DIMENSION L, DIMENSION

1 I

o I f a series o t dimens~ons is to be shown, strlng them together asshown in the sketch. (Do not dimension from a common reterence line as in machine drawing.) Show the overall dimension of the string ot dimenslons i f this dimension will be ot repeated interest

DIMENSIONS ON MACHINE DRAWINGS

. DIM - - t

DIM - DIM

T DIMENSIONSON PIPING DRAWINGS

o Do not omit a s~gnificanr dimension other than 'fitting makeup', even though it may be easily calculated - see 'fittmg makeup', this section

DIM

"0"" P>V"" YU..l-. - ... .- -. ..- ~-~ ~ ~

:he si' "' Id rul ' "ierefl ~e on' " :e dim IS nec to route such piping clear of equipment, other obstructions, and thru

. . walls, and to locate only those items whose sate positioning or access- ability IS important to the process

Most lengths wlll be stated t o the nearest sixteenth ot an inch. Dimen- sions which cannot or need not be stated to this precislon are shown with a plus-or-minus sign: 8'-7"+, 15'-3+, etc.

Dimensions under two feet are usually marked in inches, and those over two feet in feet and inches. Some companies preter to mark all dimensions over one foot i n feet and inches

Attempt to round off non-critical dimensions to whole feet and inches. Reserve tractions of inches for dimensions requ~ring this precision

DIM

PLANS & ELEVATIONS-GENERAL DIMENSIONING POINTS

a Reserve horizontal dimensions for the pian view

o Underline all out-ofscale dimensions, or show as in chart 5.8 r I f a certain piping arrangement is repeated on the same drawing, it is suf-

ficient to dimension the piping in one Instance and note the other appearances as 'TYP' (typical). This situation occurs where similar pumps are connected to a common header. For another example, see the pump base i n figure 6.17

8 Do not duplicate dimensions. Do not repeat them in different views

DIM

DIMENSIONING TO JOINTS

DIM

e Do not terminate dimensions at a welded or screwed joint

P Unless necessary, do not dimension to unions, d i n e couplings or any other items that are not critical to construction or operation of the piping

8 Where flanges meet i t 1s usual to show a small gap between dimension lines t o Indicate the gasket. Gaskets should be covered in the piping specification, with gasket type and thickness stated. Reter to the panel 'Dratting valves', preceding - chart 5.6.

F I G U R E

. ::

a As nearly all flanged p ints have gaskets, a tlmesavlng procedure 1s to note flanged loints without gaskets (for example, see 3.1.6 under 'Butterfly valve'). The fabricator and erector can be alerted to the need tor gasketselsewhere by a general note on all plping drawings:

"GASKETS ASSPECIFICATION EXCEPT AS NOTED" 1791

If ~ber ' ' ns ot ard t ions i . ,uped - ier it necessary to dimension each item, as the tabricator knows the sizes ot standard fittings and equipment. I t is necessary, however, to Indicate that the overall dimension is 'fitting makeup' by the special cross symbol, or preterably by writing the overall dimension. Any nonstandard Item inserted between standard items should be dimensioned.

FITTING MAKEUP SYMBOL * Q

DIMENSIONING TO VALVES

D Locate flanged and welding-end valves with ANSI standard dimensions by dimensioning to their centers. Most gate and globe valves are standard-see table V-1

s Dimension non-standard flanged valves as shown in the panel opposite chart 5.6. Although a standard exists tor control valves, tackto-tace dimensions are usually given, as it i<possible to obtain them in non- standard sizes

I Standard flanged check valves need not be dimensioned, but i f location IS Important, dimension to the flange tace(s)

r Non-flanged valves are dimensioned to their centers or stems

DIMENSIONING TO NOZZLES ON VESSELS & EQUIPMENT

a In plan view, a nozzle is dimensioned to its tace trom the centerline ot the equipment it i s on

I In elevation, a nozzle's centerline is either given its own elevation or is dimensioned trom another reterence. In the absence ot an elevational view, nozzle elevations can be shown on the plan view

DIMENSIONING ISOS 5.3.4

In order to clearly show all dimensions, the best aspect ot the piping must be determined. Freedom to extend linesand spread the piping without regard to scale is a great help In showing isometric dimensions. The basic dimensions set out in 5.3.2. 5.3.3, and the guidelines in 5.2.9 apply.

Figure 5.15 illustrates the main requirements of an isometric drawing, and in- includes a dimensioned offset. Figure 5.16 shows how other offsets are dim. ens~oned.

o Dimension in the same way as plans and elevations s Give sufficientdimensionstor the tabricator to make the spool drawings

-see figure 5.17

ANGENT LINE

SPACED. FROM SCH 40 PIPE

PLAN - w

FACES OF FLANGED NOZZLES SHALL PROlECT THE FOLLOWNG DISIIINCES FRDU INTERNAL SURFACE OF VESSEL. FA",'iCEL ~ ~ ~ c , " ' , " ~ ~ R ~ ~ U N I E S DTHERiYISE SPSC1FIED:-

1 Y m 8 O N : I . /r / WERlEZTO BE I\WWEREDUYTHEOPlGNER OZZLESZE: 3"&iru 4"thiu 22" 14"Blrrgci )R ORDER To pnovloEm~n rN~onMarloa

NE#XSS&RI FOR DESIOH W D FABRICATION OF THE VESSEL I NOZZLE LISTING 1

OZZLE 51ZE RATING B DESCRIPTION 8

EXAMPLE SPOOL No. W-1.E

FROM FIGURE 5.15

THIS ISOMETRIC VIEW IS SHOWN

HERE FOR EXPLANATION ONLY.

AND i S NOT A PART OF THE SPOOL DRAWING AT RIGHT I

Allowance tor weld spacing (root gap) IS ;,shop set-up prnblem and should not be considered in making assembly drawings or detailed sketches. The Pipe Fabr~cation Institute recommends that an overall dimension is shown which IS the sum ot the nominal dimensions ot the component parts.

A spool sheet deals w ~ t h only one des~gn ot spool, and shows complete dimens~onal detail, lists material tor making the spool, and specifies how many spools of that type are requ~red. Figure 5.17 shows how a spool trom figure 5.15 would be dimensioned.

RESPONSIBILITIES 5.4.1

P&IDZs, process flow diagrams and line designation sheets are checked by engineers in the project group.

Except for spool drawings, all piping drawingsare checked by the prplng group.

Orthographic spool drawings produced by the piping fabricator are not usually checked by the piping group, except for 'critical' spools, such as spools tor overseas shipment and intricate spools.

Usually an experienced designer within the piping group is given the task ot checking. Some companies employ persons specifically as design checkers.

The checker's responsibilities are set out in 4.1.2

CHECKING PIPING DRAWINGS 5.4.2

Prints ot drawings are checked and corrected by marking with colored pencils. Areas to be corrected on the drawing are usually marked in red on the print. Correct areas and dimensions are usually marked in yellow.

Checked drawings to be changed should be returned to their originator when- ever possible, tor amendment. A new print is supplied to the checker with the original 'marked up' print tor 'backchecking'.

ISSUING DRAWINGS 5.4.3

Areas ot a drawing awaiting further rntormation or decision are ringed clearly on the reverse side and labeled 'HOLD'-reter to chart 5.8. (A black, red, or yellow china marker is suitable tor film with a slick finish on the reverse srde.)

Changes or revisions are indicated on the fronts ot the sheets by a small triangle in the area ot the revision. The revision number is marked inside the triangle, noted above the title block (or in an allocated ane el) with a description ot the revision, required initials, and date. The reviscon number may be part ot the drawing number, or i t may tollow the drawing number (preferred method-see figure 5.17). The drawing as first issued is numbered the 'zero' revtsion.

A drawing i s issued in three stagas.The first Issue is 'FOR APPROVAL', by management or client. The second issue is'FOR CONSTRUCTION BID', when vendors are invrted to bid tor equipment and work contracts. The third issue i s 'FOR CONSTRUCTION' tollowing awarding at all purchase orders and contracts. Drawings may be reissued at each stage i f significant changes are made. Minor changes may be made attar the third stage (by agreement on cost and extent ot work) but major changes may involve all three stages ot issue.

(PLANS, ELEVATION>, C1 IXJaI

Points to be checked on all piping drawings include the tollowing

Title ot drawing

Number of issue, and revrsion number

Orientation: North arrow against plot plan - Inclusion ot graphic scale (if drawing i s to be photographically reduced)

Equipment numbers and their appearance on piping drawings

That correct identification appears on all lines in all views

Line material specification changes

Agreement with specifications and agreement with other drawings

That the drawing includes reterence numbeds) and title(s) to any other relevant drawings

That all dimensions are correct

Agreement with certified vendors' drawings tor dimensions, nozzle orientation, manholes and ladders That face-to-face dimensions and pressure ratings are shown for all nun-standard flanged items

Location and identification ot instrument connections

:Provision of line vents, drains, traps, and tracing. Check that vents are at all high points and drains at all low points ot lines for hydrostatic test. Driplegs should be indicated and detailed. Traps should be identified, and piping detailed

The following rtems should be labeled in one view only: tees and ells rolled at 45 degrees (see example in 5.2.8), short-radius ell. reducing ell, eccentric reducer and eccentric swage [note on plan views whether 'top flat' or 'bottom flat'), concentric reducer, concentric swage, non-standard or companion flange, reducrng tee, special items of unusual material, ot pressure rating different from that of the system, etc. Reter to charts 5.3, 5.4 and 5.5 tor symbol usage

That insulation has been shown as required by the P&IO

Pipe support locations with support numbers

That all anchors, dummy legs and welded supports are shown

That the stress group's requirements have been met

That all field welds are shown

Correctness of scale

Coordinates of equipment against plot plan

Piping arrangement against P&ID requirements

Possible interferences

Adequacy ot clearances ot piping trom steelwork,doors, windows and braces, ductwork, equipment and malor electric apparatus, including control consoles, cables trom motor control centers (MCC's), and firefighting equipment. Check accessibility tor operation and maintenance

noles, natcnes, covers, dropout and handling areas, etc. have been provided

R Foundation drawings with vendors' equipment requirements

8 List ot materiel, ~f any. Listed items should be Identified once, either on the plan or the elevation drawings

I That section letters agree with the section markings on the plan vlew

s That drawings include necessary matchline intormation

a Appearance ot necessary continuation sheet numberls)

e That spool numbers appear correctly

o Presence ot all requ~red signatures - This turther point should be checked on ~sos:

a Agreement with model

These turther points should be checked on spool sheets:

I That materiel is completely listed and described

6 That the required number at spools of identical type is noted

INSTRUMENTATION (As shown on P&ID's) 5.5

This sectlon briefly describes the purposes ot instruments and explains how instrumentatlon may be read trom P&ID's. Piping drawings wil l also show the connection icoupling, etc.) to line or vessel. However, piping drawings should show only instruments connected to (or located in) plplng and vessels. The only purpose in adding instrumentation to a plplng drawing is to identify the connection, orifice plate or equipment to be installed on or in the piplng, and to correlate the piping drawing to the ?&ID.

INSTRUMENT FUNCTION ONLY IS SHOWN 5.5.1

Instrumentation isshown on processdiagramsand piping drawings by symbols. The tunctions of intruments are shown, not the instruments. Only the primary connection to a vessel or line, or dev~ces installed in a line (such as orifice plates and control valves) are indicated.

There is some uniformity, among the larger companies at least, in the way'in which instrumentatlon is shown. There is a willingness to adopt the recommendat~ons ot the InstrumentSociety ot America, but adherence is not always complete. The ISA standard is S5.1, t~ t led 'Instrumentat~on symbols and identification'.

Compliance with the ISAscheme is to some extent internat~onal. This is bene- ficial when drawings go from one country to another, as there is then no difficulty in understanding the instrumentation.

Although Instruments are used tor many purposes, their basic tunctions are tew in number.

(1) To sense e 'condition' of the process material, most commonly its pressure, temperature. flosw rate or level. These 'conditions' are termed process variables. The piece of equipment that does the sensing is termed a 'prlmary element'. 'sensor', or 'detector'.

(2) To transmlt a measure ot the process var~able trom a prlmary element.

(3) To indicate a measure of a process variable to the plant operator, by showing the measured value by a dial and pointer, pen and paper roll or digital display. Anothertorm of indicator isen alarm which glves audible or visual warning when a processvariablesuch as temperature approaches an unsate or undes~red value.

(4) To record the measure ot a process variable. blost recorders are electrically-operated pen-and.paper-roll types which record either the instantaneous value or the average over a time period.

(5) To control the process var~able. An instrument initiating this tunct~on IS termed a 'controller' A controller sustains or changes the value of the process variable by actuating a 'final control element' ithis element is usually a valve, In process piping).

Many instruments combine two or more ot these five tunctions, and may also have mechanical parts integrated - the commonest example ot this is the selfmntained control valve (see 3.1.10, under 'Pressure regulator', and chart 3.1).

HOW INSTRUMENTATION IS IDENTIFIED 5.5.3

The most-used instruments are pressure and temperature gages ('indicators') and are shown as in figure 5.18 ia) and lb). An example 'instrument identification number' lor 'tag number') IS shown in figure 5.18 (c). The balloon around the number is usually drawn 7116-inch diameter.

INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS FIGURE 5.18

In figure 5.18, 'P', 'T', and 'F' denote process variables pressure, temperature, end flow respectively. 'I' and 'G' show the type ot instrument; indicator and gage respectively. Table 5.3 glves other letters denoting process variable, type of instrument, etc. The number '8', labeled 'loop number', is an example sequential number (allocated by an instrumentatlon engineer).

INST. - -NT R TING & MULTIPLE-FUNCTION INSTRUMENTS

A horizontal line in the ISA balloon shows that the ~nstroment performing the tunc t~on IS to be 'board mounted' in a console, etc. Absence o t this line shows 'local mounting'. in or near the piping, vessel, etc.

BOARD MOUNTING LOCAL MOUNTING

^'""AL I C " " S 3.3.0

Elements, transmitters, recorders. indrcaiorsand controlierscommunrcate wlth each other by means o t signal leads -wh i ch are represented by lines on the

drawing The s~gnalcan be a voltage. the pressure o t a fluid, etc -these are the most common signals . Symbols tor instrument signal leads are given in chart 5 1 -

INSTRUMENTATION CODING. ISA CODING TABLE 5 3

The ISA scheme shows instrument tunctions, not instruments. However, a multipie-tunction instrument can be indicated b y drawing rhe balloonsshow- Ing the separate tunctions so that the circles touch.

Sometimes, a multiple-tunction instrument will be indicated by a srngle

balloon symbol. wi th a lunc t~on identification, such as 'TRC' tor a temp- IF \

erature recorder-controller. This practice is not preferred-it i s better t o

draw ( in this example) separate 'TR' and 'TC' balloons, touching. I i INTERCONNECTED INSTRUMENTS ['LOOPS') 5.5.5

PROCESS VARIABLE

The ISA standard use: the term 'loop' to describe an interconnected group

o i instruments, which is not necessarily a closed-loop arrangement: that IS.

lnstrumentat~on used in a teedback lor feedforward) arrangement.

I t several Instruments are interconnected, they may be all allocated the same

number tor 'loop' identificatlon. Figure 5.19 shows a process line served by

one group o l instruments (loop number 73) to sense, transmit and Indicate

temperature, and a second group (loop number 74) t o sense, transmit. indi-

cate, record and control f low rate.

EXAMPLE INSTRUMENT 'LOOPS' FIGURE 5.19

................. ,NALYSIS.. A URNER [Flamel .......-..... 6 OMBUSTION.. .............. B

.............. ISER'S CHOICE C ISER'S CHOICE .............. D

................... 'OLTAGE E ................. LOW RATE F

ISERSCHOICE .............. G :URRENT [Electrlci ........... 1

..................... 'OWER J 3ME [Time Contiol/Clock) . . . . . . K

.................... EVEL.. L SER'S CHOICE .............. M SER'S CHOICE .............. N SER'S CHOICE .............. 0 RESSURE/VACUUM.. . . . . . . . . P

................. ADlATlON R PEED (or Frequency) .......... S EMPERATURE . . . . . .- . . . . . . . IULTIVARIABLE ............ U

................. IBRATION V rElGHT tar Force) ............ W

.............. INCLASSIFIED X .......... VENT IRerponre to1 Y

OSITION, DIMENSION ........

DIFFERENTIAL. . D

. . . TOTAL Q

RATIO ~ ~ . F

SAFETY ITEM . . S

'HAND' ~. H

TYPE OF INSTRUMENT

...................... ALARM A ............... USER'S CHOICE 8 ................ CONTROLLER C

CONTROLVALVE ........... CV .................... TRAP.. CV

...... SENSOR IPrlmary Element) E RUPTURE DISC ............... E

......... SIGHT or GAGE GLASS G TELEVISION MONITOR ........ G INDICATOR .................. I CONTROLSTATION ........... K LIGHT IPilotIOperatlon) ......... L JSER'S CHOICE ............... N :LOW RESTRICTION ORIFICE.. . 0

...... TEST POINT [Sample Palntl P .................. iECORDER I3

WITCH ...................... 5 TRANSMITTER ............... T MULTIFUNCTION ............. U JALVEIDAMPER .............. V

........................ NELL W ............... JNCLASSIFIED . .

...................... RELAY Y ..................... DRIVER .................. ACTUATOR

When the difference between two values of the procerr vartable is znvolved

When the process variable is to be summed aver a perlad of tme. For example. flow rate can be summed t o gwe total volume

When the ratlo ot two valuer of varwble ,r !nvolved

the process

To denore an ,tern such ar a relief valve or ruptuie disc

To denote a hand.aperated or hand-started . ~ b . . ,

QUALIFYING LETTER AFTER THE'TYPE OF INSTRUMENP LETfiR

HIGH H To denote instrument actlon on 'high' set value ot the process vanable

INTERMEDIATE. To denote instrument actlon on 'intermediate' set value of the procerr vanable

LOW L To denote ~nrtrument action on 'low' set value of the process vanable

L I S T I N G PIPING M A T E R I E L O N D R A W I N G S 5.6

In the engineering construction industry, i t is usual tor piping components to be given a code number which appears in the piping specification. I n companies not primarily engaged in plant construction, materiel is tiequently listed on drawings

DIFFERENT FORMS OF LIST 5.6.1

This list is usually titled 'list ot material', or preterably, 'list of materiel', as items of hardware are referred to. 'Pans list' and 'Bill of materiel' are alternate headings.

Either a separate list can be made tor materiel on several drawings, or each drawing sheet can include a list tor items on the panicular drawing. Lists on drawings are written in the space above the title block. Column headings normally used tor the list are:

I I L I S T O F M A T E R I E L I lTEM NUMBER QUANTITY D E Y R l P i l O N REMARK' REoU'S'T'ON NUMBER'

ORCOMPANYCODE

SUGGESTED LISTING SCHEME 5.6.2

Vessels, pumps, machinery and instruments are normally listed separately trom piping hardware. However, it is not uncommon, on small proiects or revamp work, to list all materiel on a drawing.

CLASSIFICATION FOR PIPING COMPONENTS CHART 5.11

INTENDED DUTY OF HARDWARE I CLASS I WtTH RESPECT T O FLUlD E X A M P L E HARDWARE

& ' I

I I CONVEYANCE: To p r ~ ~ k f e r i ~ v l h Pipe, fimngr. ordinary flanges. bolt lor drid Ilmc and gasket rcir

FLOW CONTROL: valve, orifice piale, vcnlvii

MEASUREMENT: 7b ,,icamic 4 Gages l a i l typed rhermomctcrr l a i l I v i ,.dnd,a qi tiic p,,id, rl.cil or paw type% flow m h . denrltameter. r ~ w . ~ e ~ ~ ~ ~ c ~ ~ r ~ r . - , prcinm, dotnty, ~ ~ ~ a $ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ , l ~ ~ ~ ~ , ~ $ l ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ m s ~ o s ~ r , tlrrb;dirj, ro imr 8nnrumentf

Hanhazarrl listtng of i t m s mai.0. rakrenc" fc",'bleso-- The s-'--' sup 9ca~ed in -&to# L 5.1 1 ib uaied on liie outy of me nardware and can be extended to listing equipment if desired. Items of higher pressure rating and larger size can be listed first within each class.

LISTING SPECIFIC ITEMS 5.6.3

Under the heading DESCRIPTION, otten on drawings thesize ot the item is stated first. A typical order is: SIZE (NPS). RATING (class, schedule numher, etc.), NAME (ot item). MATERIAL [ASTM or other material specification), and FEATURE (design feature).

Descriptions ere best headed bythe NAME ot the item. followed by the SIZE. RATING, FEATUREN, and MATERIAL. Asmaterial listingsare commonly handled by data-processing equipment, beginning the description ot an item by name is ot asststance in handling the data. The descrtption tor 'pipe' is detailed.

EXAMPLE LISTING FOR PIPE

NAME. State 'PIPE'

SIZE. Specify nominal pipe size. See 2.1.3 and tables P-I

RATING. Specify wall thickness as either a schedule number, a manutacturers'weight,etc. See tables P-I. SCH=schedule, STD= standard, XS= extra-strong, XXS= doubleextra- strong, API= American Petroleum Institute.

FEATURE. Specify design teaturets) unless covered by a pipe specification tor the prolect.

Pipe is available seamless or with a welded seam- examples of designations are: SMLS = seamless, FEW = turnace-butt-welded, ERW = electric-resistancewelded GALV = galvanized. Specify ends: T&C = threaded and coupled, BE = beveled end, PE = plain end.

MATERIAL. Carbon-steel pipe is otten ordered to ASTM A53 or A106, Grade A or B. Other specifications are given in tables 7.5 and 2.1.

POINTS TO CHECK WHEN MAKING THE LlST 5.6.4

0 See that all items in the list have been given a sequential item number

n Label the items appearing on the piping drawings with the item number from the list. Write the item number in a circle wtth a fine line or arrow pointing to the item on the drawing. Each item in the list ot materiel is indicated in this way once on the plan or elevational piping drawings

n Verify that all data on the list agree with: (1 ) Requirements set out in piping drawings (2) Available hardware in the manufacturers' catalogs

A R R A N G I N G PIPING

GUIDELINES & NOTES

6.1 o Avoid burying steam lines that pocket, due to the difficully ot collect. ing condensate. Steam lines may be run below grade in trenches provided with covers or (for short runs) in sleeves

6.1.1 v Lines that are usually buried d u d e dra~ns and lines bringing in water

Simple arrangements and short lines mmfmfze pressure drops and lower pumpfng costs.

Designing piping so that the arrangement 1s 'flexible' reduces stresses due to mechanical or thermal movement-rater to figure 6.1 and 'Stresses on piptng', this section.

Inside buildings, plplng is usually arranged parallel to building steelwork to simplify supporting and improve appearance.

Outside buildings, piping can be arranged: ( 1 ) On piperacks. (21 Near grade on sleepers. (3) In trenches. (4) Vertically agalnst steelwork or large items 01 equipment.

PIPING ARRANGEMENT

B Use standard available items wherever possible

s Do not use miters unless directed to do so

a Do not run piping under toundat~ons. (Pipes may be run under grade beams)

o Piping may have to go thru concrete floors or walls. Establish these points ot penetration as early as possible and intorm the group concerned (architectural or civil) to avoid cutting existing reintorc~ng bars

a Preferably lay piping such as lines to outside storage, loading and receiving tacilit~es, at grade on pipe sleepers (see figure 6.3) if there is no possibility of future roads or site development

or gas. Where long cold winters treeze the soil, burying lines below the trost line may avoid the treezing ot water and solutions, saving the expense ot trecmg long horizontal parts ot the lines

Include removable flanged spools t o aid maintenance, especially at pumps, turbines, and other equipment that will have to be removed tor overhaul

e Take gas and vapor branch lines from tops ot headers where it is necessary to reduce the chance ot drawing off condensate (if present) or sediment which may damage rotating equipment

a Avoid pocket~ng lines-arrange piping so that lines drain back into equipment or into lines that can be drained

o Vent all high points and drain all low points on lines - see figure 6.47. Indicate vents and drains using symbols in chart 5.7. Caretully-placed drains and valved vents permit lines to be easily drained or purged during shutdown periods: this isespecially important in treezing climates and can reduce winterizing costs

ARRANGE FOR SUPPORTING

o Group lines in pipeways, where practicable 0 Support piping trom overhead, i n preterence to underneath o Run plping beneath plattorrns, rather than over them

REMOVING EQUIPMENT & CLEANING LINES

e Provide union- and flanged joints as necessary, and in addit~on use crosses instead of elbows, to permit removing material that may solidify

1871

C L F A R A N C E S & ACCESS

e Route piplng to obta~n adequate clearance tor maintaining and removing equipment

a Locate within reach, or make accessible, all equipment sub~ect to periodic operation or inspection - with special reterence to check valves. pressure r e k t valves, traps, strainen and instruments

o Take care to not obstruct access ways - doorways, escape panels, truckways, walkways, l i f t~ng wells, etc

0 Posrt~on equipment with adequate clearancp tor operation and maintenance Clearances otten adopted are given in tabla 6 1 I n some circumstances, these clearances may be inadequate-tor example, with shell-and-tube heat exchanoen, space must be provided to permit withdrawal ot the tubes trom the shell

MINIMUM CLEARANCES HORIZONTAL Operstmg space around equipment t CLEARANCES. Centerline of railroad to nearest

obnmenon: ( 1 ) Straight track (2) Curved track

Manhole to railing or ohnruction

VERTICAL Over walkway. platform, or operating area CLEARANCE^: Overstaway

Over high polnt ot plant roadway: (1) Minor roadway (2) Majsr roadway

Over railroad from top ot rail

MINIMUM HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS Width of walkway at floor level Width of elevated walkway or staltway Width ot rung of fixed ladder See charr P-2. Width of way for forklift truck

VERTICAL DIMENSIONS Railing. Top of floor. platform, or stair, to: (11 Lower rail

12) Upper rail Manhole centerline to floor Valves: See rable 6.2 andcharr P-2.

ABLE 6.1 - 2ft 6in.

Eft Sin. 9fl Sin. 3 h Din. 6ft Sin. 7ft Din.

17ft Oin. 2 0 h Oin. 22ft 6in.

3ft Din. 2 h Sin.

16in. 8h Din.

l f t gin. 3 f i Sin. 3fl Din.

B Ensure very hot lines are not run adiacent to lines carrying temperature sensitive fluids, or elsewhere, where heat might be undes~rable

0 Establish suffic~ent headroom tor ductwork, essential electr~cal runs. and at least two elevations tor pipe run north-south and east-west (based on clearance ot largest lines, steelwork, ductwork, etc.-see figure 6.49)

a Elevations ot lines are usually changed when chang~ng horizontal direction where lines are grouped together or are in a congested area, so as not to block space where tuture lines may have to be routed

P Steqqer flanges, with 12-inch minimum clearance trom stipporting steel

I Keep iield weio!, dnd oii it?~ mnts d i least 3 I I ILI I~ t r o n ~ >upportiny steel, building s~ding or other obstruction Allow room tor the p i n t to be made

a Allow room tor loops and other pipe arrangements to cope with expansion by early consultation with staff concerned w ~ t h pipe stressing. Notify the structural group of any additional steel required to support such loops

0.65 Expansion inches per 100 f t )

T H E R M A L M O V E M E N T

iviaximum and minimum lengths ot a pipe run wil l correspond to the temperature extremes to which it is subjected. The amount ot expansion or shrinkage In steel per degree change in temperature ('coefficient ot expansion') is ap- proxmately the same - that is, the expansion trow 40F to 41F isabout the same as from 132 F to 133 Fc or trow 179 F to 180 F, etc. Chart 6.1 gives changes in line length tor changes in temperature.

EXPANSION OF CARBON.STEEL PIPE CHART 6.1

TDL Urn limb in UiL more linibie arirnW3mi .!,.a grr.,., Virrmr, ma""mi b n r e n mmeh and run.

STRESSESON PIPING

THERMAL STRESSES Changes in temperature ot plping, due either to .... change in temperature of the environment or ot the conveyed fluid, cause - changes in length of the piping. This expanslon or contraction in turn causes strarns inpiping, supports and attached equipment.

SETTLEMENT STRAINS Foundat~ons at large tanks and heavy equipment may settle or tilt slightly in the course ot t~merConnected plping and equip-

ment not on a common toundat~on will be stressed by the displacement unless the plplng is arranged in a configuration flexible enough to accommodate mult~ole-olane movement. This problem should not arlse ln new constfuctlon , . but could occur in a modification to a plant unit or process.

FLEXIBILITY IN PIPING

To reduce strains in piping caused by substant~al thermal movement, flexible and expanslon joints may be used. However, the use ot these rolnts may be m~nimlzed by arrangmg piping in aflexible manner, as illustrated in figure 6.1. Pipe can flex in a direction perpendicular to its length: thus, the longer an offset, or the deeper a loop, the more flexibility 1s gained.

COLD SPRING

Cold springing of lines should be avoided i f an alternate method can be used. A line may be cold sprung to reduce the amplitude ot movement from thermal expansion or contraction in order: la) To reduce stress on connections. !b) To avoid an interterence. iCHnRT

Figure 6.2 schemat~cally illustrates the use ot cold springmg tor both pur- 16.1

poses. Cold springing in example (a) consists ot making the branch in the indicated cold position, which divides thermal movement between the cold and hot positrons. In example ( b ) the cold sprlng is made equal to the thermal movement.

COLD SPRINGING FIGURE 6.2

(a) TO REDUCESTRESS - HOT POSITION

COLD SPV.ING

,Dl TO AVOID A N fNTERFERENCE

COLD LlNE

---I I- Anchored end COLD SPXING

1891

. , . exar.,- F..--.- er-"..3dSOl-l...- redue.. .-. ess:

A l ong p l p e connected by a 90-degree elbow and flange to a nozzle may on heat ing expand so that i t imposes a load on the nozzle I n excess ot that recommended. Assume tha t p l p i n g to the nozzle has been installed at ambient temperature, and that the plpe expands 0.75 Inch when hot material flows t h r u it, p u t t i n g a lateral ls~deways) load ot 600 lb on the nozzle.

I f the pipe had 0.375 inch of its l eng th removed betore connection, the room- temperature lateral load on t h e n o z z l e w o u l d be about 300 lb ( instead at zero), and the hot load would be reduced to about 300 lb.

Th- .--ilest *-- -' pipe .,.- 7n a *."n,nek ws* i - , , ' addi-.-n-' SUj3pm-' '"

usually 2 inch. I t may be more economlc 10 change propose0 small lines to 2-inch plpe, or to suspend them trom 4-inch or larger lines, Instead ot providing additional support .

Table S-'I and charts S-2 gave stress and support data tor spans ot hor~zontal pipe.

-

K E Y FOR FIGURE 6.3

The t rac t i on o i the expans ion taken up can be varied. A coldspring ot 50% 0 1 t h e expansion between the temperature ex t remes glves the most benefit in reduc~ng stress. Cold spr ing ing IS n o t recommended if an alternate solution can be used. Reter to the Code torPressurePip~ng ANS! 831 and to rable7.2.

R E S I S T A N C E OF P I P I N G TO F L O W

All p l p l ng has res~stance to flow. The smaller the flow cross sectlon and the more abrupt the change in direction ot ilow, the greater 1s the res~stance and loss ot pressure. For a pa r t i cu l a r line s1ze the reslstance 1s proport~onal to the length ot plpe, and the resistance ot fitt~ngs, valves, etc. may be expressed as a length o f plpe having the same reslstance to flow. Table F-10 gives such equivalent lengths ot plpe tor fittings, valves, etc.

Table F-11 gives pressure drops tor water flowlng thru SCH 40 p l p e at var lous rates. Charts to determine the economlc slze (NPS) ot p l p l ng are g lven in the Chemical Eng~neer's Handbook and other sources.

SLIDERULE FOR FLOWPROBLEMS

Problems 01 resistance to flow can be qu~ck ly solved w~ th the ald ot the sl idemle calculator obiamable trom Tube Turns D iv~s~on ot Chemetron Corporation, PO B o x 32160. Lou~sville. K Y 40232.

A ' p ~ p e w a y ' is thespace a l located tor r o u t l n g several parallel adjacent lines. A 'plperack' i s a structure in the prpeway tor cairyrng p~pesand is usually tabw cated trom steel, or concrete end steel, conslstmg ot connected n-shaped trarnes termed 'bents' on top ot which the p lpes rest. The vertlcal members ot t h e bents are termed 'stanchions'. Figure 6.3 shows two p ~ p e r a c k s uslng this torm at construction, one at which 1s 'double-decked'. Piperacks tor only two or three plpes are made trom 'T'-shaped members, termed 'tee-head supports'.

Piperacks are expenswe, but are necessary tor airanglng t h e main processand servlce lines around the plant site. They are made use of in secondary ways. pr~nc~pal ly to provlde a protected locatlon tor ancillary equ ipmen t .

Pumps, utility stations, manifolds, iire-fightmg and f i r s l ad stat lons can be located under t h e p iperack , Llghtlng and other f i x t u res can be f i t t ed t o s t a m

chlons. Air-cooled heat exchangers can be suppo r ted above the piperack.

'11 WHEN USING A DOUBLE DECK. IT IS CONVENTIONAL TO PLACE UTILITY AND SERVICE PIPING ON THE UPPER LEVEL OF THE PIPERACK

121 0 0 NOT RUN PIPING OVER STANCHIONS AS THlS WILL PREVENT ADDING ANOTHER DECK

4 1 PROVIDE DISTRlaUTED SPACE FOR FUTURE PIPES-APPROXIMATELY AN ADDITIONAL 25 PERCENT ITHAT IS. 20 PERCENT OF FINAL WIDTH-SEE TABLES A - l l

15) HOT PIPES ARE USUALLY INSULATED AND MOUNTED ON SHOES

161 WARM PIPES MAY HAVE INSULATION LOCALLY REMOVED AT SUPPORTS

17) THE HEIGHT OF A RELIEF HEADER IS FIXED BY ITS POINT OF ORIGIN AN0 THE SLOPE REOUIREDTO DRAIN THE L INETOATANK. Eic.

10. E.ECTRlCA. A\O I \SIRL)I lEhT TRAYS IFOR COhDJlT AVO CABLES, ARF SCST P-ACED Oh OUTR GGtRS OR BRACKETS ASSnOlIN. TO PREStkT ThE -CAST PROB.EL! V/ Tn P.PES LEAWNG TdE PIPEi'VAY ALTERFIATELY. TRAYS hlAY 6E ATTACdEO TO TnE STANCrllOhS

191 WHEN CHANGE IN DIRECTION OF A HORIZONTAL LINE ISMADE. IT ISBEST ALSO TO MAKE A CHANGE OF ELEVATION [EITHER UP OR DOWN). THIS AVOIDS BLOCKING SPACE FOR FUTURE LINES. BO-DEGREE CHANGES IN DIRECTION OF THE WHOLE PIPEWAY OFFER THE OPPORTUNITY TO CHANGE THE ORDER OF LINES. A SINGLE DECK IS SHOWN AT AN INTER- MEDIATE ELEVATION - -

110 SOI.ICTIP!ES I I .TEHFACE~ ARE ESTABLISHED TO DEFINE BREAKPOI'.TS FOR CONTRACTED :.ORK i i . nER i O\E COhTHACTOR'S PIP NG HAS i0 JOIN 7 A T E A'. lfiTEr?FACE ISAX IZ!AGINARY P-AEIE \'.nlCh i 'AY BE ESTAB-ISrlEO FAR E*.OuGri FROIl A MALL. SlOlhG. PROCESS .h T OR STORAGE L!, T TO EhABLt COh\ECT ON5 TO BE hlAOE

I l l ) PIPES SHOULD BE RACKED ON ASINGLE DECK IF SPACEPERMITS

I121 PIP !.G ShOJLO BE SUPPORTEO Oh SLEtPERS AT GRADE IF ROAOS.$'.Al.K \a,AYS. E x . \$: -L hOT BE REOUIRED OVER ThE PPEWAY AT A LATER DATE PIP *.G AT ~ a ~ o E ' s d 0 0 BE 12 IVCnESOR MORE ABOVE GRA9E

. I 3 C-RREkT PRACTICE tS TO SPACE BEhTS 20--25 FEET APART THlS SPACllG IS A CO'dPROVfSC BETla,EEN TnE ACCFPTAB-E OEFLECTIO\S OF T r l t S\lAL-ER PIPES A\G TnE MOST ECONOVIC BEAh' SECTIO*. DESIRE0 FOR TnE PIPERACK. PPERACKS ARE USUALLY hOT OVER 25 FEET lh 'V. DTH. l r hlORE HODCl IS h tEOE0,Tr lE PIPERACK IS DOUBLEORTRIPLEDECKED

1141 MINIMUM CLEARANCE UNDERNEATH THE PIPERACK IS DETERMINED BY AVAILABLE MOBILE LIFTING EQUIPMENT REOUIRING ACCESS UNOERTHE PIPERACK. VERTICAL CLEARANCES SHOULO BE AS SET OUT IN TABLE 6.1. BUT CANNOT NECESSARILY BE ADHERED TO AS ELEVATIONS OF PIPES AT INTERFACES ARE SOMETIMES FIXED BY PLANT SUBCONTRACTORS. I F THlS SITUATION ARISES THE PlPlNG GROUP SHOULO ESTABLISH MAX. IMUM AND MINIMUM ELEV~TIONS WHICH THE PIPING SUBCONTRACTORS MUST WORK TO-THIS HELPS TO AVOID PROBLEMS AT A LATER DATE. CHECK THE MINIMUM HEIGHT REOUIRED FOR ACCESS WHERE THE PIPE. RACK RUNS PAST A UNIT OR PLANT ENTRANCE

I161 WHEN SETTING ELEVATIONS FOR THE PIPERACK. TRY TO AVO10 POCKETS IN THE PIPING. LINES SHOULD BE ABLE TO DRAIN INTO EQUIPMENT OR LiNES THAT CAN B E DRAINEO

116) GROUP HOT LINES REOUIRING EXPANSION LOOPS AT ONE SIDE OF THE PIPERACK FOR EASE OF SUPPORT-SEE FIGURE 6.1

117) LOCATE UTILITY STATIONS CONTROL IVALVEl STATIONS. AND FIREHOSE POINTS ADJACENTTO STANCHIONS FOR SUPPORTING

118) LEAVE SPACE FOR OOWNCOMERS TO PUMPS. EL.. BETWEEN PIPERACK AN0 ADJACENT BUILDING OR STRUCTURE

GRADE IELEVATIONI

. . . . . . . . . KEEP SPACE UNDER THE PIPERACK CLEAR FOR ACCESS. OR UTILIZE fOR PUMPS AND/OR ANCILLARY EOUIPIIIENT

* TllESEDIIIIENSIOI*SARE FOR GUIDAhCE ONLY -SUITABLE FOR hlOSTPRELlhllNARY DESIGNS

VALVES IN PIPING DESIGN

Vaii .. . . used . ... ese p -.,.. JS:

(1) Process control during operation

(2) Controlling sewicesand utilities-steam, water, air, gasand oi l

(3) lsolatmg equipment or instruments, tor maintenance

(4) Discharging gas, vapor or liquid

(5) Drainmg piping and equipment on shutdown

(6) Emergency shutdown in the event ot plant mishap or fire

WHICH SIZE VALVE TO USE 7

Nearly all valves will be line stze - one exception is control valves, which are usually one or two sizes smaller than line size; never larger.

A t control stat~ons and pumps it has been almost tradit~onal to use line-size isolating valves. However, some companies are now uslng isolating valves at control stations the same size as the control valve, and at pumps are using 'pump sue. tsolating valves at suction and discharge. The choice IS usually an economlc one made by a prolact engmeer.

The sizes ot bypass valves tor control stations are given in 6.1.4, under 'Control (valve) stations'.

WHERE TO PLACE VALVES

See 6.3.1 tor wiving pumps, under 'Pump emplacement & connections'.

a Pretarably, placevalves in lines from headers Ion plperacks) In horizontal rather than vertical runs, so that lines can drain when the valves are closed. (In cold climates, water held i n lines may treeze and rupture the piping: such lines should be traced - sea 6.8.2)

6 To avoid spooling unnecessary lengths ot pipe, mount valves directly onto flanged equipment, if the flange is correctly presurerated. See 6.5.1 under 'Nozzle loading'

e A reliet valve that discharges Into a header should be placed higher than the header in order to dram into it

o Locate heavy valves near suitable support points. Flanges should be not closer than 12 inches to the nearest support, so that ~nstallation is not hampered

a For appearance. i f practicable, keep centerlines of valves at the same he~ght above floor, end in-line on plan vlew

OPERATING ACCESS TO VALVES

a Consider trequency ot operation when locating manually-operated valves

a Locate trequantly-operatedvalves so they are accessible to an operator trom gradeor platform. Above this he~ght and up to 20 ft, use chain operators or extenston stem. Over 20 tt, consider a plattorm or remote operation

Intrequently-used valves can be reached by a ladder-but cons~der altei- natlves

Do not locate valves on piperacks, unless unavoidable

Group valves which would be out ot reach so that all can be operated by prov~ding a plattorm, i f automatic operators are not used

I f e chain is used on a horizontally-mounted valve, take the bottom of the loop to within 3 tt ot floor level tor satety, and provide a hook near- by to hold the chain out ot the way -sea 3.1.2, under 'Cham' Do not use chain operators on screwed valves, or on any valve l'/r~nches and smaller

With lines handling dangerous materials it 1s better to place valves at a suitably low level above grade, floor, plattorm, etc., so t h i t the operator does not have to reach above head height

ACCESSTO VALVES I N HAZARDOUS AREAS

Locate main isolating valves where they can be reached in an emergency such as an outbreak ot fire or a plant m~shap. Make sure that personnel will be able to reach valves easily by walkway or automobile

Locate manually-operated valves at the plant perimeter, or outs~de the hazardous area

Ensure that automatic operators and their control lines wil l be protected trom the effects ot fire

Make use ot brick or concrete walls as possible fire shields for valve stations

Inside a plant, place isolating valves in accessible positions to shut feed lines for equipment and processes having a fire risk

Cons~der the use ot automatic valves in fire-fight~ng systems to release water, toam and other firefighting agents, responding to heat-tusible links, smoke detectors, etc., triggered by fire or undue rise in temperature -advice may be obtained from the insurer and the local fire department

$"$ide aLLea5 lor muuiie itfting equipment to handle heavy valves

e Consider providing lifting davits tor heavy valves difficult to move by other means, if access is restricted

I I f possible, arrange valves so that supports will not be on removable spools:

T PREFERRED ARRANGEMENT

I

e A plug valve requiring lubr~cation must beeasily accessible, even though it may not be trequently operated

MAKE MAINTENANCE SAFE

o Use line-blind valves, spectacle plates or the 'double block and bleed' where positive shutoff i s requtred either for rnaintenance or process needs -see 2.7

ORIENTATION OF VALVE STEMS

o Do not point valve stems into walkways. truckways, ladder space, etc.

a Unless necessary, do not arrange gate and globevalves with their stems pointtng downward (at any angle below the horizontal), as:-

(1) Sediment may collect in the gland packing and score the stem.

(2) A prolecttng stem may be a hazard to personnel.

a If an inverted positlon is necessary, consider employing a dripshield.

. . 1.3

Lonsider valve-closing time in shutting down or throttltng large lines Rapid w1- closure of the valve requires rapid dissipat~on ot the liquid's kinettc energy, with a risk of rupturing the h e . Long-distance pipelines present an example ot this problem.

A liquid line fitted wlth a tast-closing valve should be provided with a standpipe upstream and close to the valve to absorb the kinetic energy ot the liquid. A standpipe is a closed vertical branch on a line: air or other gas is trapped in this branch to form a pneumatic cushion.

IF THERE IS NO P&ID .....

a Provide valves at headers, pumps, equipment, etc., to ensure that the system will be pressure-ttght tor hydrostat~c testing, and to allow equtpment to be removed for maintenance wtthout shutting down the system

P Provide isolattng valves in all small lines branching trom headers-for example, see figure 6.12

a Provtde tsolattng valves at all instrument pressure points tor removal ot Instruments under operating conditions

e Provide valved drains on all tanks, vessels, etc., and other equtpment which may contain or collect liquids

s Protect sensitive equtpmant by using a tast-closing check valve to stop backflow betore i t can gather momentum

o Consider butt-welding or ring-pnt flanged valves tor lines contatntng hazardous or 'searching' fluids. Hydrogen ts espectally liable to leak

s Consider seal welding screwed valves i f used in hydrocarbon service -see chart 2.3 (inset sketch)

a Provtde sufficient valves to control flows

I Constder provtding a concrete pit !usually about 4 t t x 4 ft) for a valve which is to be located below grade

s Consider use of temporary closures tor positive shutoff-see 2.7

8 Provide a bypass i f necessary for equipment which may be taken out of service

a Provide a bypass valve around control stations i f continuous flow is required. See 6.1.4 and figure 6.6. The bypass should be at least as large as the control valve, and is usually globe type, unless 6-inch or larger, when a gate valve is normally used (see 3.1.4.under 'Gatevalve')

a Provide an upstream isolattng valve wtth a small valved bypass to equtp- men1 which may be subiect to tracture i f heat ts too rapidly applied on opening the isolattng valve. Typical use is in steam systems to lessen the risk ot fracture ot such things as castings, v~treous-lined vessels, etc.

a Consider providing large gate valves with a valved bypass to equalize pressure on either side of the disc to reduce effort needed to open

pp~~- the valve j

1931

Extend safeh/-valve discharge r lsen tha t discharge t o atmosphere at least 10 ft above the roof line or p la t fo rm for safety. Support the vent plpe so as no t t o strain the valve or the pipmg t o the valve. Pointing the discharge line upward (see figure 6.4) imposes less stress when the valve discharges than does the horizontal arrangement

The downstream slde o f a satety valve should be unobstructed and involve the mlnlmum o t piplng. The downstream slde of a relief or satety-relief valve IS p ~ p e d t o a reliet header or knockout drum-see 6.11.3, under 'Venting gases', and 6.12, under 'Relieving pressure- liquids'

Pipe exhausting t o atmosphere IS cut square, not at a slant as formerly done, as no real advantage is gamed to r the cost involved

Normally, do n o t Instal a valve upstream of a pressurereliet valve protecting a vessel or system t rom excessive pressure. However, if an Isolating valve is used t o tacilitata maintenance of a pressure-reliet valve, the isolating valve is 'locked open'-sometimes termed 'car sealed open' (CSO)

In critical applications, t w o pressurereliet valves provided w i t h isolating valves can be used

d" n

FROM VESSEL OR SYSTEM

The lnrtallstlon of pr-rerellwing devices and the use of irolating valves in lines to and from rueh devises s governed by rhe Code for Prerrure Piping. ANSI 031 and the ASME Boiler and Preaure Venel Code.

INSTALLING BUTTERFLY VALVES

o Ensure that the disc has room t o rotate when the valve IS installed. as the disc enters the plplng i n the open posltlon

a Place butterfly valves w i t h Integral gaskets between waldinpneck or socket-welding flanges-see 3.1.6, under 'Butterf ly valve'. The usual method o f welding a slip-on flange (see figure 2.7) w i l l no t give an adequate seal, unless the plpe 1s f in~shed smooth w l th the face of tne flanoe

VAPOR TO ATMOSPHERE 10 FT MIN. ABOVE

\ PERSONNEL AREA

RELIEF VALVE. SAFETY VALVE, or SAFETY-RELIEF

\

4"-INCH DRAIN HOLE

ISOLATING VALVE------

DISCHARGE FOR RELIEF VALVE OR SAFEN-RELIEF VALVE

VAPOR TO ATMOSPHERE

VAPOR AND/OR LIOUID TO RELIEF LINE

11 REFER TO 6.1.3 UNDER 'PIPING SAFETY AND RELIEF VALVES' REGARDING USE OF AN ISOLATING VALVE IN THIS POSITION

21 I F AN ISOLATING VALVE IS PROVIDED. IT IS ALSO NECESSARY TO PROVIDE A BLEED VALVE TO RELIEVE PRESSURE BETWEEN THE ISOLATING VALVE AND THE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE IFOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES)

31 I F A SPOOL BETWEEN THE TWO VALVES IS NOT USED. THE BLEED VALVE MAY BE PLACED AS SHOWN IF THE VALVE'S BODY CAN aE TAPPED

A control statlon is an arrangement of piping in which a control valve is used to reduce and regulate the pressure or rate ot flow ot steam, gas, or liquid. - Control stations should be des~gned so that the control valve can be isolated and removed lor servicing. To facilitate this, the piping ot the stations should be as flexible as circumstances permit. Figure 6.5 shows ways ot permlttlng control valve removal in welded or screwed systems. Figure 6.6 shows the basic arrangement tor control statlon piping.

The two isolating valves permit servicing ot the control valve. The emergencv bypass valve is used tor manual regulatron if the control valve is out ot actron.

The bypass valve is usually a globe valve ot the same size and pressure rating as the control valve. For manual reoulation in lines 6-inch and larger, a gate valve is otten the more economic cho~ce tor the bypass line-reter to 3.1.4. under 'Gate valve'.

Figures 6.7-11 show other ways ot arranging control stations-many more designs than these are possible. These illustrations are all schematic and can be adapted to both welded and screwed systems.

DESIGN POINTS

For best control, place the control station close to the equipment it serves, and locate it at grade or operating plattorm level

Provide a pressure-gage connection downstream ot the station's valves. Depending on the operation of the plant, this connection may either be fitted w ~ t h a permanent pressure indicating gage, or be used to attach a gage temporarily (for checking purposes)

Preterably, do not 'sandwich' valves. Place at least one ot the isolating valves inavertical line so that a spool can be taken out allowing the control valve to be removed

I f the equipment and plping downstream ot the station is of lower pressure rating than piping upstream, it may be necessary to protect the downstream system with a pressure-reliet valve

Provide a valved drain near to and upstream at the control valve.Tosave space, thedrain is placed on the reducer. The drain valve allows pressure between the isolat~ng valveis) and control valve to be released. One drain isused i f thecontrolvalvetails open, and two dra~ns (one each side ot the control valve) i f the control valve tails closed

Locate stations in rack piping at grade, next to a bent or column tor easy supporting

DRAFTING THE STATION

I n plan view, instead ot drawing the valves, etc., the station is shown as a rectangle labeled 'SEE DETAIL "X" ' or 'DWG "Y"-DETAIL "X" ', it the elevational detail appears on another sheet. See chart 5.7.

r l L lT iTIO: "" 3:-

A util i ty station usually comprises three service lines carrying steam, corn- .- -..

pressed air and water. The steam line is normally %-inch minimum, and the other two services are usually carried in i-inch lines. These serwces are tor cleaning local equipment-and hosing floors. (Firewater is taken trom points ted trom an independent water supply .)

The steam line IS fitted with a globe valve andihe alr and water lines with gate valves. Al l are terminated with hose connections about 3% tt above floor or grade. A uti l i ty station should be located at some conven~ent steel column tor supporting, and all areas It 1s to serve should be reachable w ~ t h a 50-tt hose.

Most companies have a standard design tor a utility station. Figure 6.12 shows a design tor a standard station which canbe copied onto one ot the design drawings tor reterence, or otherwise supplied with the draw~ngs to the erectlng contractor who usually runs the necessary lines. A notatlon used on plan views to indicate the station and services requ~red is:

UTILITY STATION FIGURE 6.12

SERVICES:

STATION SYMBOL:

*,"m".,"-ms%.,>o". L - , E ~ " ~ ~ " s L o " " L " s s

~ ~ w " o ~ m # , D ~ ~ ~

11) GATE VALVE NPS 1 ( 2 ) GLOBE VALVE NPS 1 13) GLOBE VALVE NPS 314 14) HOSE COUPLING NPS 31.1 15) HOSE COUPLlNG NP5 1 16) PlPE NPS 1 SCH 80

17) PlPE NPS 314 SCH 80 C8l TRAP ioi l i ional l

If subiect to freezing condit~ons, uti l i ty station steam linesare usually trapped (otherwise, the trap can be omitted). Water issometimes run underground in cold climates using an additional underground cock or plug valve with an extended key tor operating, and a self-draining valve at the base ot the riser. Another method to prevent treezing, is to run the water and steam lines in a commoninsulation.

STEAM,AIR.WTER

S A W

AIRWATER

A W

STEANIMTER

S W

STEAM,AIR

S A

THREADED CONTROL VALVES

ARRANGEMENTS FOR ANGLE C V ' s

IOUlOS HARMFUL TO PERSONNEL

ARPAW'C~~N(: ct I D ~ ~ P T C COR DIDI~IG e -,

Pipe IS held either trom above by hangers or by supports ot various types on which i t rests. Hangers are also reterred to as supports. Reter to 2.12 tor typical hardware. - In the open, single pipes are usually routed so that they may be supported by fixtures to buildings or structures. A group at parallel pipes in the open is normally supported on a piperack-see 6.1.2.

Within a building, piping is routed primarily with regard to its process duty and secondarily with regard to existing structural steelwork, or to structural steel which may be conveniently added. Separat~ pipe-holding structures inside buildings are rare.

FUNCTIONS OF THE SYSTEM OF SUPPORT 6.2.1

The mechanical requirements ot the piping support system are:

( I ) To carry the weight ot the piprng filled with water lor other liquid involved) and insulation i f used, with an ample satety margin - use a tactor ot 3 (= ratio ot load lust causing failure ot support or hanger to actual load) or the satety tactor specified for the project. External loading tactors to be considered are the wind loads, the probable weight of ice buildup in cold climates, and seismic shock in some areas

(2) To ensure that the material trom which the plpe is made is not stressed beyond a sate l i m ~ t . l~cont inuous runs ot pipe, maximum tensile stress occurs in the pipe crosssections atthesupports.Table S-1 givesspans for water-filled steel and aluminum pipe at the respective stress limlts4000 and 2000 psi. Charts S-2 glve the maximum overhangs if a 3-tt riser IS

lncluded in the span. The system ot supports should minimlze the introductlon ot twlsting torces in the p w n g due to offset loads on the supports; the method ot cantilevered sections set out in 6.2.4 substantially eliminates tors~onal torces

(3) To allow tor draining. Holdup ot liquid can occur due to pipes sagging between supports. Complete drainmg is ensured by making adiacent supports adequately tilt the pipe-see 6.2.6

(4) To permit thermal expansion and contraction of the piping-see 6.1.1, under 'Stresses on piping'

(5) To withstand and dampen vibrational torces applied to the plping by compressors, pumps, etc.

PIPING SUPPORTGROUP RESPONSIBILITIES 6.2.2

A large company will usually have a specialist piping support group responsible tor des~gn~ng and arranging supports. This group will note all required supports on the piping draw~ngs (term~nal job) and wil l add drawings of any special details.

The piprng support group works m cooperation with a stress analysis group- or the two may be combined as one group-which mvestlgates areas ot stress due to thermal movement, vibration, etc., and makes recommendat~ons to the piping group.The stress group should be supplied with preliminary layouts tor this purpose by the piping group, as early as possible.

ports ' ' nes si " than " i and ritica' ' are o !tt to the 'field' t o arrange, by notlng 'FIELD SUPPORT' on the piping drawmgs

- LOADS ON SUPPORTS

Reter to tablesP-1, which-list the weights per toot ot pipe and contamed water [see 6.1 1.2). Weights of fittings, flanges, valves, boltsand insulation are given in tablesW-1, compiled from suppliers' data.

ARRANGING POINTS OF SUPPORT 6.2.3

Pipe supports should be arranged bearing in mind all five points in 6.2.1. Inside buildings, it is usually necessary to arrange supports relative to existing structural steelwork, and this restricts choice ot support points.

The method ot support set out in 6.2.4 is ideal: In practice, some compro- mize may be necessary. The use ot dummy legs and the addition ot pieces ot structural steel may be needed to obtain optimal support arrangements.

CALCULATING PREFERRED POINTS OF SUPPORT 6.2.4

Ideally, each point ot support would be at the center of gravlty ot an associated length ot piping. Carrying this scheme thru the entire piping system would substant~ally relieve the system trom twisting torces, and supports would be only stressed vertrcally. A method ot balancing sections ot pipe at single support pomts is illustrated tor a straight run ot plpe in figure 6.13.

BALANCING SECTIONS OF PIPE FIGURE 6.13

F I G U R ~

Consider hanger B associated with a length ot pipe b . This length ot pipe F l & 6 . l 3 , . - IS supported by B, located at its center ot gravity, which is at the midway point for a strarpht length o f uniform pipe. Hangers A, C, 0 and E are likewise placed at the respective centers ot gravity ot lengths at pipe a, c, d and e . I f any length of pipe is removed, the balance ot the rest at the line would be unaffected. Each of the hangers must be designed to adequately support the load ot the associated piping-see 6.2.1, point (1).

The presence of heavy flanges, valves, etc, in the plping wil l set the center ot gravity away trom the m~dpoint ot the associated length Calculation of support points and loadings 1s more quickly done uslng simple algebra Answers may be found by making trial-and-error calculations, but this IS

much more tedious. 1971

u-..- ". .--" ..-.. -. v ,y . . . z "" ryu.. -" -"." ", ... " ot force'. Multiolvinq a torcn bv the distance of it< l;n* ot ac*'"- +.om a ""--' g i v ~ r..r 'man,,.,, ~f th. , U G L ~ a b h at polu. H moment of force can be expressed in lb-tt (pounds weight times teet distance). The torces involved in support calculations either are the reactions at supports and nozzles, or are thedownward-acting forces due to the weight ot pipe, fittings, valves, etc.

In figure 6.14(a), the moment about the support o i the two flanges is (30 + 20)(16) = 800 lb-ft, counter-clockwise. The moment of the 100-lb valve about the support is (100)(8) = 800 lb-tt, clockw~se. As the lengths of pipe each side ot the support are about the same, they may be omitted trom the moment equation. The problem is simplified to balancing thevalve end flanges.

USE OF MOMENTS FIGURE 6.14

Suppose it was required t o balance this length ot plping with a 120 lb valve on the right-where should the 120 lb valve be placed?

Reterring to figure 6.14(b), i f x represents the unknown distance of the 120 lb valve from the support, the piping section would be in balance if:

l50)(16) = (120)(x). That is, i f x = l50)(16)/(120) = /800)/(120) = 6 t t 8 in. - A more involved example follows:-

Figure 6.15 shows a length ot Cinch piping held by the hangers F, G , and H, and support J. The lengths of associated pipmg are shown by dashed separation lines. The we~ghts ot pipe and fittings are shown on the drawing. The 4-inch pipe is assumed to weigh 15 lb per foot ot length. Welded elbows and tees are assumed to weigh the same as line pipe.

First consider the section assoc~ated with hanger F. The weight of pipe to the lett ot F is (15)(20 -x) Ib, and as its center ot gravity is at (20 -x)/(2) t t , its moment on the hanger is (15)(20 - x)'/(2) Ib-tt. The heavy valve and flanoes are assumed to have the~r mass center 5 t t from the end. and their moment i s ( x - 5)(360) Ib-ft. Ignoring the pipe 'replaced' by the valve, the weight ot pipe t o the right ot F is (15)(x) Ib and its moment about F is (15)(x)(x)1(2) Ib-tt. As the associated length is in balance

The x z terms canceled-this must be so, as there can physically be only one value tor x. The load on hanger F is /20)(15) + (360) or 660 ib.

The support J should be at the center of the associated length of pipe, as already shown in figure 6.15. and the load on the support is (30)(15), or 450 lb.

The hanger G is easily seen to be suitably placed, as there i s 5 f t ot 4-inch pipe overhanging each side. Only the load on the hanger need be calculated, which is ( 5 + 5 + 2 4 + 2)(15)+ (10). or 550 lb.

The locatlon ot hanger H has to be found by a calculation like that for hanger F, except that the heavy terminal flange has also to be taken into account. The moment equatlon in lb-ft is:

which givesy as nearly 2 t t 8 in.

The load on hanger H isabout (220)+(3)(40)+(15)(10), or490 lb.

QSOBLSM OF THE END

T h e suppor ted l eng th a t one e n d o t a r u n o t p ip ing m a y b e c a n r ~ ~ e v e r e d III

the same w a y as t h e o the r lengths, and this has the advantage t h a t if t h e p ip ing terminates a t a nozz le t h e l o a d o n t h e nozzle is m ~ n i m a l . However. it m a y be necessary t o use o r arrange a suppor t a t o r near t h e end of a p ip ing run. If the e n d o f t h e run is vertical, t h e end suppor t should b e designed t o carry the ver t ica l run. T h e problem is usual ly m o r e complex when t h e e n d o t t h e run i s hor izonta l . T h e locations o t f i t t i ngs and s u p p o r t po in ts w i l l usual ly b e already defined, and t h e p rob lem i s t o calculate t h e react ion o n the terminal support, and t o see t h a t t h e s u p p o r t i s des~gned t o w ~ t h s t a n d t h e l oad o n it. I n calculat ing t h e l oad o n t h e te rm ina l support, it should b e made cer ta in t h a t the l oad is d o w n w a r d - w ~ t h some arrangements, t h e p ip ing w o u l d t e n d t o raise i tse l f o f f t he te rm ina l suppor t (negative load) and i f t h i s t y p e of arrangement i s not changed, t h e terminal suppor t w i l l have t o anchor t h e piping. T h e sketch shows a ho r i zon ta l end arrangement. Tak ing moments in lb-it about t h e suppor t A:

(15)~10)0)2)(10) = (15)(18+2)(1h)(18+2) +(100)(18) - (R)(18+ 2)

wh ich glves A = 202% Ib.

T h e reaction, F, o n t h e s u p p o r t A can b e calculated by tak ing m o m e n t s a b o u t the suppor t B o r another axls, o r more s ~ m p l y b y equatmg v e r t ~ c a l forces:

F + 202% = (15)(1M18+2) + 1 0 0 = 550, w h i c h gives F = 347% Ib.

PROBLEM OF THE RISER

Suppor ts tor lines changing i n d i rec t i on can b e calculated b y t h e canti lever method. Sketch la) b e l o w shows t h a t t he weight of t h e vert ical p a r t o f t h e p ip ing can be d iv ided be tween t w o cantilevered sections in a n y p r o p o r t i o n s u ~ t e d t o t h e available suppor t polnts. Sketches (b) and ic) s h o w theve r t l ca l p l p i n g associated w h o l l y w~ th t h e le t t - or right-hand canti levered sections. T h e p l p m g m a y b e suppor ted b y means of a d u m m y leg, i f d i rect suppor t IS not practicable.

- DENOTES ENDS DF CaNTILEVERED SECTIONS OF

PIPING.

- - -

I GRAPHIC METHOO FOR FINDING LOADS ON SUPPORTS )

The followwg graphical msihod permits qvck d c u l a t m of harang i s d l lor 'corner' P ~ P W arranamms. - PROBLEM To find the load to be taken bv a r w p m to beplsred rt pomc '6 In the pipang

arrangement shown:

I11 DRW shs plan v w to any convenhent v a l e lar above1

121 ndd che axis line Aa lshismunpau thm pomoal rupponl

13) Divide the mn o l p i p w tnio panr. Piping between fhs uppa* (lomu A and B rr conridered in shrce prrtr: Ill The value. 121 The lcnglh o l pipe BC. I31 Thc length 01 prpe AC-the rhon plm of line om,n8d far the valve s ignared, and $he e f k t ot the elbow neglected.

141 DID^ pemendiculan from midpomu M, and MZ. the valve and tvppon po8ns E to t h ~ awl line.

151 Take mamenrr about he ax(% line, meurunns the lanms of pcipendimlam M2P; ES. 00 and MI R directly Com the plan view ithesc lengths am noted on h e tkerrhl:

W E LENGM liC PlPE LENGTH CB "&LYE S Y . L O W ON SUPPORT

(2011181(61 + 115l1181161 + 12Wll91 = IFll9.61

which g ivu h e laad an the ruppon 1 E a:

F = 581 1b

EXTENSION OF THE METHOD

he u m c method can be used i f the angle at she comer ir ditfercnt from 90 degrccr. or if v m a i lincf are included in lhc ~ipbng.

NOTES

Ill The axas line mun p r u thm porns of ~uppn. I f the a x s lioc a not hoozontal. the lengths of rhc pemendirvlrrr are nil1 mcaruilred directly from the plan view.

I21 This melhod d o e not take mfo z~touni additional moments doc to bending md tomon of pips. Howwer, i r a lcgitimarc to culsulrie #cads on ruppm as i t theoipe ,I rigid.

li' I nls prooiem onen occurs wnen running pipes rrom one plperacn to another, ,.., rh a -h---- In et-..-.. m, as -- "-ure f " '00 n ' m h a stre: tne materlal ot the pipe beyond a sate l i m ~ t near one ot the supportsadiacent to the bend, and the designer needs to know the allowable overhang.

The stresses set up in the material ot the pipe set practical limits on the overhangs allowed at corners. The problem is like that tor spans ot straight pipe allowable between supports. Overhangs permitted by stated limits tor stress are given in charts S-2.

PIPE SUPPORTS ALLOWING THERMAL MOVEMENT 6.2.5

Pip~ng subject to large temperature changes should be routed so as to flex under the changes in length-see figure 6.1. However, hangers and supports must permlt these changes in length. Figures 2.72 A & B show a selection ot hangers end supports able to accommodate movement. For single pipes hung trom rod or bar hangers, the hanger should be suffic~ently long to l imit total movement to 10 degrees ot arc.

SPRING SUPPORTS

There are two basic types ot spring support: (1) Variable load. (2) Constant load-reter to 2.12.2. Apart from cost, the choice between the two types depends on how crit~cel the circumstances are. For example, if a vertical line supported on a rigid support at floor level is subject to thermal movement, a variable-spring hanger or support at the top ot the line is suitable-see figure 6.16 {a) and (b).

If a hot line comes down to a nozzle connected to a vessel or machine, and it is necessary to keep the nozzle substantially tree from vertical loading, a constant-load hanger can be used-see figure 6.16(c). Cheaper alternate methods ot supporting the load are by a cable-held weight working over a pulley, as illustrated in figure 6.161d). or by a cantilevered weight.

VARIABLE- & CONSTANT-LOAD HANGERS & SUPPORTS FIGURE 6.16

lbl VARIABLE LC1 CONSTANT COUNTER. SPRING LOAD WEIGHT HANGER HANGER

,a ) VARlAr3LE SPRING SUPPORT

SLOPED LINES AVOID POCKETING A N 0 AID DRAINING

As plpe is not completely rigid, sagging between points ot support must occur. In many instances, sagging is acceptable, but in others i t must be restricted.

The nature-ot the conveyed meterlal, the orocess, and f l m ~ reqstwomqnts nine . luch .-,,... j can -, ~ d e p t e ~ . ~ . ~ j i n g is ieuuted by oringing

adjacent polnts of support closer. Pocketing of liquid due to sagging can be eliminated by sloping the line so that the difference in height between adjacent supports is at least equal t o triple the deflect~on (sag) at the mid- point. Lines which requlre sloping lnclude blowdown headers, pressure-relief lines, and some process, condensdte and alr lines. (Air lines are discussed in 6.3.2, and draining ot compressed-air lines in 6.1 1.4.) -

Complete dra~ning may be required for lines used in batch processing to avoid contamination, or where a product held in a line may degenerate or polymerize, or where solids may settle and become a problem.

In treezlng conditions, lines conveying condensate trom traps to drains are sloped; condensate headers may be sloped (as an alternative to steam trac~ng), depending on the rate of flow.

In the past, steam lines were sloped to asslst in clearing condensate, but the improved dralning is now not considered to be worth the difficulty and expense involved.

SLOPED LINES ON PIPERACKS

Sloped lines can be carrled on brackets attached to the piperack stanchions [see figure 6.3). To obta~n the required change in elevation at each bent, the brackets may be attached at the required elevat~ons; alternately, a sertes ot brackets can-be arranged at the same elevat~on and the slope obtained by using shoes of different s~zes-this method leads to fewer construction problems.

Shoes ot graded slzes are also the best method tor slopmg smaller lines on the plperack. It is not usual or dewable to hang lines from the piperack unless necessary vertical clearances can be maintained.

SLOPED LINES I N BUILDINGS

Inside a building, both large end small sloped lines can rest on steel brackets, or be held with hangers. Rods with turnbuckles are used for hangers on lines required to be sloped. Otherwise, drilled flat bar can be used. (Adjustable brackets are available trom the Unlstrut and Kindort ranges of support hardware.)

SUPPORTING PIPE MADE FROM PLASTICS OR GLASS 6.2.7

Pipe made either trom flexible or r i g~d plastics cannot sustaln thesamespan loads as metal pipe, and requires a greater number o t support points. One way ot providing support is to lay the pipe upon lengths ot steel channel sections or half sections ot plpe, or by suspending it from other steel pipes. The choice of steel sectlon would depend on the span loads and the size and type of plastic pipe.

For glass process and drain lines, hangers tor steel pipeare used, provlded that they hold the plpe without causing local stralns and are padded so as not to crack the pipe. Rubber and asbestos paddings are suitable. Uninsulated horizontal lines trom 1 to 6 inch in sue containing gas or liquid at specific gravlty less than 1.3 should be supported at 8 to 10 t t intervals. Couplings and fittings should be about 1 i t trom a point ot support.

Terms such as 'dummy leg', 'anchor'. 'shoe', etc., used in detailing supporting hardware are explained in 2.12.2. Refer to chart 5.7 for symbols.

GENERAL

Design hangers tor 2 k n c h and larger plpe to permlt adiustment after installation

0 I f piping IS to be connected to equipment, a valve, etc., or plpmg assembly that w ~ l l require removal for maintenance, support the piping so that temporary supportsare not needed

Base load calculations tor var~able-spring and constant-load supports on the operating conditions ot the piphng (do not include the weight ot hydrostat~c test fluid1

8 If necessary, suspend pipes smaller than 2-inch nominal size trom 4inch and larger plpes

DUMMY LEGS

Table 6.3 suggests sizes tor dummy legs. The allowable stress on the wall ot the elbow or line pipe to which the dummy leg is attached sets a maximum length tor the leg. The advice ot the stress group should be sought.

APPROXIMATE SIZES FOR DUMMY LEGS TABLE 6.3

ANCHORS

Anchors are required as stated in the tollowing two points. However, advice trom the stress andlor plping support groups should be obtained:

s Prov~de anchors as necessary to prevent thermal or mechanical movement overloading nozzles on vessels or machinery, branch connections. cast-iron valves, etc.

B Provide anchors to control direction ot expansion; for example, at battery limits and on piping leaving units, so that movement is not transm~tted to plping on a piperack

SHOES, GUIDES, 5 SADDLES

o Do not use shoes on un~nsulated plpes, unless required for sloping purposes. For reduced t r ~ c t ~ o n where lines are long and subiect to movement, slide plates are an alternatwe-see 2.12.2.

o Use of wye-type shoes enables pipes to be placed on the shoe betore welding and makes construction easier - see figure 2.72A

e Welding the pipe directly to shoes is not alwaysacceptable; tor example w ~ t h rubber-lined pipe. Bolted or strapped shoes are more suitable

Chvk the co40 nprtinent t n the p r n w t as it mav prohihit 'nartial' .

welub jut suppu~rb-that 44 VYCI~S tlm uu not G I N L ~ ~ the p v a

e Provide slots in shoes to accept the straps or wires used to hold insulation to pipe

a Provide guides for long straight pipes sublect to thermal movement, either by guiding the shoe or by guiding pipe support saddles attached to the pipe, as shown: -

For bener stress distribution in the plpe wall, pipe support saddles are usually used on large lines. They can also be used tor lines that may twist over when moving

SUPPORTING VALVES

e Provide support as close as possible to heavy valves, or try to get valves moved close to a suitable point where support can be provided -

s Large valves and equipment such as meters located at grade will usually require a concrete toundation for support

WELDING PIPE.SUPPORT & PLATFORM BRACKETS TO VESSELS. Etc.

a Instruct the vendor to add brackets required on pressure vessels prior t o stress-relievmg and testing-otherwise, retesting and recertification may be obligatory

a I t is permissible to specify brackets to be welded to non-pressure vessels prov~ded that the strength of the vessel is not degraded

SUPPORTING PIPE A T NOZZLES

Ensure that nozzles on machinery, compressors, pumps, turbines, etc.. are F I G U R E

substantially tree trom loads transmitted by the pkpmg, which may be due to the weight ot the piping, or to movement in the piplng resulting trom con-

FI.- traction, expansion, twtstmg, vibration or surglng. Equipment suppliers will sometimes state maximum loadings permissible at nozzles. Excessfve loads applied to nozzles on machinery can force it from alignment and may cause damage.

Piping to pumps, turbines, etc., should be supported adequately, but should allow the equipment t o be removed. Supports tor this pipmg are best made integral with the concrete toundations, especially i f thermal movement occurs and should be on the same level as the base of the equipment, so that on heating or cooling, vertical different~al expansion and contraction between

TABLE

supports and equipment will be min~mized. E-- r7n11

PIPING T O PUMPS & COMPRESSORS

PUMP EMPLACEMENT & CONNECTIONS

fi 3 Most ---'-tfugal - -2s h~ - ieplai ' 11 col i y le from pump. Ihe baseplate will have a threaded connectton which ts ptped to the dram hub Waste seal water 1s also ptped to the dram hub-see figure 6.19.

6.3.1 - TYPICAL PIPING FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

Most pumps used in mdustry are ot the centrifugal type. Figures 6.17and 6.18 show typ~cal ptptng and fittmgs requtred at a centrifugal pump together w ~ t h the valves necessary to solate the pump trom the system.

The check valve 1s required to prevent possible flow reversal in the discharge line. A permanent in-line strainer 1s normally used for screwed suctlon pipmg and a temporary stratner for butt-welded/flanced ptptng. The temporary strainer is installed between flanges-see figure 2.69. A spool i s usually requlred to facilitate removal.

Although centrifugal pumps are provided wtth suctton end discharge ports ot cross-secttonal area large enough to cope wtth the tull rated capacitv ot the pump, tt 1s often necessary with thick fluids or wtth long suction lines to use an tnlet ptpe ot larger size than the inlet port, to avotd cavitat~on. Cavitation 1s the pulling by the pump ot vapor spaces in the pumped liqutd, caustng reduction of pumping efficiency, noisy runntng, and possible impellor and bearing damage. Reter to 6.1.3, under 'Which stze valve to use?'^

Most pumps have end suction and top discharge. Limitations on space may require another configuration, such as top suction with top discharge, side suction wtth side discharge, etc. Determination ot nozzle orientatton takes place when equtpment layout and pipmgstudiesare made.

AUXILIARY, TRIM, ar HARNESS PIPING

Pumps, compressors and turbines may require water for cooling bearings, tor mechanical seals, or tor quenching vapors to prevent their escape to atmosphere. Piptng for cooling water or seal fluid is usually reterred to as auxiliary, trim, or harness piping, and the requirement for this ptping is normally shown on the P&ID. This piping is usually shown in isometric view on one of the piping drawings.

In order to cool the gland or seal ot a centrifugal pump and ensure proper sealing, tt is usually supplied w ~ t h liqu~d trom the discharge of the pump, by a built-tn arrangement, or p~ped trom a connection on the pump's castng. The gland may be provtded wtth a cooling chamber, requtrtng ptped water. If a pump handles hot or volatile liqutd, seal liqutd may be ptped trom an external source.

DRAINING

Each pump 1s usually provided wtth a dram hub 4 to 6 tnches in diameter, postttoned about 9 tnches in tront ot the pump foundatton on the centerline ot the pump. The dram hub 1s p~ped to the correct sewer or effluent line-see 6.13. If two small pumps have a common foundatton, they can share the same drain hub.

o In outstde tnstallatms in tre'ez~ng climates, prov~de a valved dram from the pump's caslng

o Prov~de a short spool for a 314-inch dram between the onloif valve and the check valve, to dram the discharge line. I f the valve is large enough, the dra~n can be made by drilling and tappmg a boss on the check valve. as shown in figure 6.17, note (3). tn which Instance no spool i s requtred.

INSTALLATION

Do not route plplng over the pump, as this lnterteres wtth matntenance. It IS better to brtng the ptptng toward ot the pump as shown ~n figure 6.17

Leave vertical clearance over pumps to permtt removal tor servicing -sufficient headroom must be lett tor a mobile crane tor all but the smaller pumps, unless other handling IS planned

I f pumps posttioned close to supply tanks are on separate foundations. avoid rigtd piptng arrangements, as the tanks will 'settle' in the course ot ttme

Locate the pump as closely as practicable to the source of liquid to be pumped from storage tanks, sumps, etc., wtth due consideration for flexibility of the piping

a Posltton valves for ease ot operatton placmg them so they are unlikely to be damaged by traffic and will not be a hazard to personnel-see table 6.2 and chart P-2

8 The toundatlon may be ot any matertal that has rtgtdity suffic~ent to support the pump baseplate and wtthstand vibratm. A concrete foundatton built on solid ground or a concrete slab floor ts usual. The pump IS postttoned, the height fixed (ustng packing), and the grout is then poured. Grout thickness is not usually less than one tnch-see figure 6.17

8 A pit in which a pump is installed should have a drain, or have a sump that can be drained or pumped out

0 Make the concrete foundation at least as large as the baseplate, and ensure that concrete extends at least 3 inches from each bolt

VALVES

o Valves are 'line size' unless shown otherwtse on the P&ID. See 6.1.3 under 'Which stze valve to use?

a Use tilttng disc orswtng check valves tor preterence o Do not use globevalves tor tsolat~ng pumps Suct~on and discharge line

tsolatmg valves are usually gate valves, but may be other valves offertng low reststance to flow ,."".

PUMP WITH SIDE SUCTION

COMPRESSOR PIPING 6.3.2

Refer to 3.2.2 for a description of compressors and essoclated equipment. A Compressor supplies compressed alr or a gas to process or other equipment. A compressor is usually purchased as a 'package unit', which includes coolers, end the designer is lett with the problem of installing it and plplng auxiliaries to it. These various auxiliarces are shown in figure 6.23.

Compressors may be installed in the open, or within a plant or separate compressor house. An arrangement of compressor, ancillary equipment and distribution lines i s shown in figure 6.22 (derwed from an illustration by Atlas Copco).

COMPRESSOR HOUSE

I f the compressor 1s handling a gas heavier than air, eliminate p i n or trenches in the compressor house to avoid a suffocetlon or explosion risk

Provide elr entry louvers i f a compressor takes air trom within a compressor house or other building Provide maintenance tacilities, including a lifting rail or access tor mobile lifting equipment. Allow adequate floor space tor use during maintenance. Additional access may be required tor installation Prevent transmission ot vibration by providing a foundation tor the compressor, separate trom the compressor-house toundation Consider the use of noiseabsorbing materials end construction tor a comDressor house

The vendor's drawings should be exemlned t o determine whet auxiliary piping, valves and equipment covered in the following design points are to be supplied wlth the compressor by the vendor:

COMPRESSOR &PIPING LAYOUT m 7 -

Install the compressor on a concrete pad or elevated structure. Piling is often a necessary part of the toundation Large reciprocating compressors are otten installed on an elevated structure to allow access to valves and provide space tor piping. Provide a platform tor operatlon and maintenance-of such an instellat~on Keep piping clear ot cylinders ot reciprocating compressors and provide withdrawal space at cylinder heads Use long-radius elbows or bends, not short-radius elbows or miters I f the compressor and the pressurized gas are cooled wlth water, route cooling water first to the attercooler, then to the intercooler (for a two-stage machine), and lastly to the cylinder jackets (or casing jacket, i f present, in other types of compressor) Arrange an air compressor, associated equipment and piping so that water is able t o drain continuously trom the system Pipe a separate trapped dram tor each pressure stage. Ensure that the pressure into which any trap discharges will be lower than that of the system being drained-less the pressure drop over the trap and i t s associated piping. Do not pipe different pressure stages thru separate check valves to a common trap I f a toxic or otherwise hazardous gas is to be compressed, vent possible shatt seal leakage to the suction line to avoid a dangerous atmosphere forming around the compressor Do not overlook substantial space required for lube oil and seal oil control consoles for compressor; Discuss piping arrangement with the stress group

FIGURE 622

1 K E Y

-," ---. .. gases, lndustrlal operations, or bv traffic tor efficiency the air supply should be taken from the coolest Source such as the shaded s~de of a building, keeplng to building clearances shown i n figure 6.24

lf the supply is from outside the building, locate the SUCtlOn point above the roofline, and away trom walls to avoid excessive noise

K~~~ suction pipmg as short as possible. I f a line IS unavoidably long and condensate likely to form, provide a separator at the Compressor make Provide a ram cover and screen as shown i n figure 6.24

s Filters must have capacity to retain large quantities ot impurlties with low Drassure drop, and must be rugged enough to withstand pulsations

check when cleanlng or replacement IS neeoeo

, Use temporary screen at the compressor inlet at startup-we 2.lu.r

, low points i n suction lines where moisture and d in can collect. ( f low noins cannot be avoided, provide a clean-out -see figure 6.24

I if the suction line is taken trom a header, take it from the top of the header to reduce the chance of drawing off moisture or sediment

A linesize isolating valve is required for the suction line if the suction line draws from a header shared with other compresson

SUCTION LINESTO AIR COMPRESSORS

RAINCOVER &SCREEN

6 11 mm.

FIGURE 6.24

trom reclprocatlng compressors I

A iting' ' n the " ' lrge I' 'inesi-

Provide discharge piping with connections tor temperature and pressure

gages

Provide an unloading valve and bypass circuit connected upstream ot the discharge ~solatmg valve, and downstream ot the suction isolating valve, so as to ensure circulation thru the compressor durlng unloading, and to permit equalizmg pressure in the compressor-see 3.2.2, under 'Unloading'

Normally locate a receiver close t o the compressor. (Auxiliary receivers may be located near pomts of heavy use.)

For drarning compressed-a~r discharge lines, reter to 6.1 1.4

The use of dampeners and volume bottles in the discharge i s discussed in 3.2.2, under 'Equ~pment tor compressors'.

LOADS & VIBRATION

The design ot supports tor piping to large compressors (especially tor recrp- rocatrng machines) requires special knowledge. Usually, collaboration 1s necessary wlth the p p n g support group, the stress group, and the compressor manutacturer's represeritative. A malor problem 8s that the compressor may be torced trom alignment with its drrver if the piping and supports are not properly arranged.

I t a diesel or gasoline engine IS used as driver, a flexibleloint on the engine's exhaust pipe will reduce transmission ot vibration, and protect the exhaust nozzle. Flexible connections are sometimes needed on discharge and suctlon piping. Pulsation in discharge and-to a lesser extent-suctlon lines, tends to vibrate plping. This effect is reduced by using bellows, large bends and laterals, instead of elbows end tees.

INSTRUMENTATION & INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS

Figure 6.23 shows the more usetul locations ior pressure and temperature gages, but does not show tnstrumentatlon tor starting, stopphng and unloading the compressors. Simple compressor control arrangements using pressure switches have long been used, but result in trequent starting and stopping ot the compressor, causing unnecessary wear to equipment.

Automat~c control using an unloading valve is superior: table 3.6 gives the working princ~ples-see 3.2.2, under 'Unloading'. Further intormatinn can be tound in the 'Compressor rnstallat~on manual' (Atlas-Copco). Unloading valves are allocated instrument numbers.

The a~r-pressure signals tor unloading, starting, loading and stoppmg a compressor should be tree tram pulsations. It is best to take these signals from a connection on the receiver or a little downstream of it.

Details ot constructton of instrument connecttonsare given in 6.7. Instrument branches should be braced to withstand transmission of line vibration.

'Qnl 4TING VALVES FOR COMPRESSOR I n ii

Compressors operatlng in parallel should be provrded with rsolatrng valves arranged so that any compressor in the group may be shut down or removed. -

An lsolatmg valve at the discharge should be placed downstream ot the pressure-reliet valve and any bypass valve connectron. The rsolatrng valve at the suction should be upsfream of the bypass valve connection. Isolating valves are not requ~red for a single compressor in_stallation.

PRESSURE-RELIEF VALVES

Pressure-relief valves should be ~nstalled on interstage piping and on a discharge line trom a compressor to the first downstream lsolat~ng valve. A pressurereliet valve may be vented to the suctlon line-see figure 6.23. Each pressurereiiet valve should be able to discharge the tull capacity ot the compressor.

CHECK VALVE

Unless supplied w ~ t h (or ~ntegral with) a compressor, a check valve must be provided to prevent backflow of stored compressed air or other gas.

DISTRIBUTION OF COMPRESSED AIR

Headers larger than Binch are often butt welded. Distribution lines are screwed and usually incorporate malleable-iron fin~ngs, as explained in 2.5.1. Equipment used i n distribution piplng is described in 3.2.2.

A moreefficlent layout tor compressed air lines is the ring main with auxiliary receivers placed as near as possible to polnts of heavy intermittent demand. The loop provides two-way air flow to any user.

COMPRESSED AIR USAGE

The compressed arr prov~ded for use in plants i s designated 'instrument air', 'plant a d or 'process a d Instrument alr IS cleaned and dr~ed compressed air, used to prevent corrosion in some instruments. Plant air is compressed air but is usually neither cleaned nor dried, although most ot the moisture and oil, etc., can be collected by a separator close to the compressor, especially i f adequate cooling can take place. Plant air is used tor cleaning, power tools, blowmg out vessels, etc: i f used tor air-powered tools exclusively, some suspended oil 1s advantageous tor lubrication, although filterilube units are usually Installed in the alr line to the tool.

Process air is compressed air, cleaned and diled, which may be used in the process stream tor oxidizing or agitation. The trend is to supply cleaned and diled air for both general process and instrument purposes. This avoids run- nrng separate lines tor process and instrument air.

Process and instrument alr for some applications requrres to have an oil content less than 10 parts per million. As almost all oily contaminants are present as extremely small droplets (less than 1 micron in diameter) mechanical filtration may be rneffectrve, adsorption equipment can efficiently remove the oil.

A , e I "- line f wing mica' r (rot shetr' the expansion of a gas or vapor lusually alr or steam, in lndustrlal plants).

Steam turbines are Used where there is a readily-available source of steam, and are also used to drlve standby process pumps in critlcal service in the event of an electr~cal power failure, and emergency standby equipment such as firewater pumps and electric generators.

Figure 6.9 shows a schematic arrangement ot plplng tor automatic operallon. There are s~milarities belween steam-turbine and pump and compressor plping. Their common requirements are'-

(1) To limlt loads on nozzles from welght oi plping or trom thermal movement

(2) To provlde access and overhead clearance

(3) To prevent harmful materlai trom entering the machine

INLET [STEAM FEED) 6.4.1

In order to guard agalnst damage to a steam turbine, protective piping arrangements such as those mentioned in table 6.4 ere needed in the steam feed.

PROTECTIVE PIPING FOR FEEDING STEAM TO TURBINE

TABLE 6.4

FOREIGN MATTER & WATER DRIPLEG & STRAINER. or

IN THE STEAM FEED SEPARATOR, I N THE FEED LlNE lSee figure 6.9)

I EXCESSIVE PRESSURE IN PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE STEAM FEED CAUSING OVER-FAST RUNNING OR

&/OR CONTROL VALVE

CASING RUPTURE IN THE FEED LlNE I I THERMAL SHOCK. DUE TO I ORIFICE BYPASSTO

TOO RAPID HEATING ON FEE0 SMALL AMOUNT

STARTUP OF STEAM TO TURBINE AT ALL TIMES

EXHAUST (STEAM DISCHARGE) 6.4.2

Figure 6.25 shows three methods for dealing with the turbine's exhaust. Steam trom an intermittently operated turbine may be run to waste and all that IS required is a slmple run ot pipe to the nearest outside wall or up thru the root. Exhausts should be well clear of the building and arranged so as not to be hazardous to personnel. The turbine discharge will include drops of water and oil trom the turbine, which are best collected and run to dram. A devlce sultable tor this purpose is a Swartwout 'exhaust head' shown in figure 6.26. Alternately, steam discharged from a continuously running turbine may be utilized elsewhere, in a lower-pressure system.

KEY^

(1) Exhaust Is dlYhdlged dlrectiy to atmosphere. Sultablc lor rmrll turblne In mtermlticnt use.

121 Exnau~t B tsuen to a low-prprsurc header lor use elrewncrc. Su lOb l~ for ~ ~ n t l n u ~ ~ ~ i y - o p e r l l n g turbine, t o avoid wasting steam.

13) Exhaust 13 condensed to increase prcrrure drop vcrou tne turblnc.

BYPASS STEAM & OTHER PIPING FOR TURBINES 6.4.3

An orifice plate IS used as a 'bleed' bypass to ensure that steam constantly passes thru the turbine. An orifice plate is used rather than a stra~ght plpe, as a changeable constrrctlon is needed. Alternately, the small amount ot steam needed to keep the turbine warm can be admitted by a cracked.openvalve in a bypass-a wasteful and uncartaln practice.

A trap IS fitted to the casing of the turbine to remove condensate. Piping is provided to supply seal liquid to the turbine's bear~ngs-refer to 6.3.1. under 'Auxiliary, trlm, or harness ptplng'.

SWARTWOUT HEAD FIGURE 6.26

SWARTWOUT , EXHAUST HEAD

6 mini

VESSEL CONNECTIONS 6.5.1

Vessel connections are otten made with couplings [for smaller lines), flanged or welding nozzias, and pads fitted with studs, designed to mate with flanged piping. Nozzle outlets are also made by extrusion, to glve a shape like that ot the branch of a welding tee-this gives a good flow pattern, but is an expensive method usually reserved tor such items as manifolds and dished heads. Weldolets, sockolets and thredolets are suitable tor vessel connections and are available flat-based for dished heads, tanks, and large vessels.

Almost any type ot connection may be made to open vessels or vessels vented t o atmosphere, but tor pressure vessels, the applicable design code will dictate requirements tor connections (and possible reinforcement-see 2.11).

PRESSURE VESSELS

With exceptions and limitations stated in section 8 ot the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, vessels sublect to internal or external operating pressures not exceeding 15 PSI need not be considered to be pressure vessels. A vessel operating under full or partial vacuum and not subiect to an external pressure greater than 15 PSI would not require Code certification.

VESSEL DRAWING & REQUIRED NOZZLES

Preliminary piping layouts are made to determine a suitable nozzlasarrange- ment. A sketch of the vessel showing all pertinent intormatian is sent to the vessel tabricator, who then makes a detail drawing. The preliminary studies tor pressure vessel piping layouts should Indicate where pipe supports and platforms (if required) are to be located. In the event that the vessel has t o be stress-reliwed, the tabricator can provide clips or brackets-see 6.2.8, under 'Welding pipesupport and platform brackets to vessels, etc.'

Figure 5.14 shows the type ot drawing or sketch sent to a vessel tabricator.

NOZZLES NEEDED ON VESSELS

Nozzles needed on non-pressure vessels include inlet, outlet, vent (gas or air), manhole, dram, overflow, agitator, temperature element, level instrument, end a 'steamout' connection, sometimes arranged tangentially, for cleaning the vessel

Nozzles needed on pressurevessels include inlet, outlet, manhole, drain, pressure relief, agitator, level gage, pressure gage, temperature element, vent, and tor 'steamout', as above

Check whether nozzles are required tor an electric heater, coils for heating or cooling, or vessel jacket. A iacket requires a drain and vent

Check special nozzle needs, such as tor flush-bottom tank valves (see 3 1 9)

PlPF FLEXIRI V'TO Nn72i.ES ' n 1' Provide additional flexibility in lines to a vessel trom pumps and other , b 5.2 -- equipment mounted on a separate foundation [if liable to settle) -

6 Be cautious in making rigid straight connections between nozzles. Such connections may be acceptable if both Items of eouioment are on the . . same toundation, and are not subiect to more than normal atmospheric temperature changes lsee figure 6.1) -

NOZZLE LOADING

e Ensure that a nozzle can take the load imposed on it by connected piping-see 6.2.8, under 'Supporting pipe at nozzles'. Manufacturers otten can provide nozzle-loading data tor the~r standard equipment

0 Check all connections to ensure that stresses due to thermal movement, and shock pressures ('kicks') trom opening pressure reliet valves, etc., are sately handled

FRACTIONATION COLUMN PIPING (OR TOWER PIPING)

As columns and their associated equipment take different forms, according to process needs, the following text gives a simplified explanation of column operation, and outlLnes basic design considerations.

THE COLUMN'S JOB

A tractionation column i s a type ot still. A simple still starts with mixed liquids, such as alcohol and water produced by fermenting a gram, etc.. and by boiling produces a distillate in which the concentration ot alcohol is many times higher than in the teed. In the petroleum industry in particular, mixtures not of two but a great many components are dealt with. Crude oil IS a typical fead for a fractionation column, and from it the column can form simultaneously several distillates such as wax distillate, gas oil, heating oil, naphtha and fuel gases. These tractions are termed 'cuts'.

COLUMN OPERATION

The teed is heated (in a 'furnace' or exchanger) betore it entersthe column. As the fead enters the column, quantities ot vapor ere given off by 'flashing'. due to the release ot pressure on the teed.

As the vapors rise up the column. they come into intimate contact with downflowing liquid-see figure 6.29. During this contact, some ot the heavier components ot the vapor are condensed, and some ot the lighter components ot the downflowing liquid are vaporized. Thls process is termed 'refluxing'.

I f the composition of the teed remains the same and the column is kept in steady operation, a temperature distribution establishes in the column. The temperature at any tray is the boiling point of the liquid on the tray. 'Cuts' are not taken from every tray. The P&ID shows cutsthat are to be made, including alternatives-nozzles on selected treys ere piped, and nozzles for alternate operation are provided with line blinds or valves.

DAVIT (for hondling troyr, valves, etc. )

SAFEN-RELIEF VALVE

RELIEF LINE

INSTRUMENT SPACE GUIDE (gages for temperature I r;

LIGHT CUT (LIGHTER FRACTIONS)

'CUTS' ARE TAKEN FROM SELECTED TRAYS I N COLUMN

INTERMEDIATE CUT

ELEVATION FIGURE 6.27

-

t

2 n 6 C E FOR MANHOLES AND

'DROPOUT' (troy ond valve hodl ing)

~ r @ s are nf rmrious rlesinns. Their nurpose is to collect a certaln amount of ,,,id bu, . . ~ w vapu, UI pass ., .,!ru th.,., .. that ...w and WL. corn. I :: -2 Into contact. (Reter to figure 6.29, which shows simple bubblecap trays di-

-many tray designs are available.)

TRAYS & BUBBLECAPS - FIGURE 6.29

NOZZLE FOR REMOVING A FRACTION. or 'CUT lsr %.it1

TRAY 23

TRAY 22

To produce the requ~red 'cuts', a column operates under steady temperature. teed, and product removal conditions. Start~ng from cold, products are collected-atter steady conditions are reached, and the column is then operated continuously.

Al l materials enter and leave the column thru pipes; therefor columns are located close to piperacks. Figures 6.27 and 6.28 show an arrangement. Products trom the column are piped to collecting tanks (termed 'drums', - 'accumulators', etc.) and held tor turther processing, or storage.

I f the vapor trom the top ot the column IS condsnsihle, i t is piped to a condenser to torm a volatile liquid. The condenser may be mounted at grade, or sometimes on the side ot the column.

Product trom the top ot the column may be gaseousat atmospheric pressure atter cooling; if the product liquefies under moderate pressure, i t may be stored pressurized in containers.

In addition to the condenser tor the top product, a steam-heated heat exchanger, termed a 'reboiler', may be used to heat materlal drawn trom a selected level III a column; the heated materlal is returned to the column. Reboilers are requlred tor tall columns, and tor columns operated at high temperatures, which are subject to appreciable loss ot heat. Mounting the reboiler on the side of the column mmimlzes piping.

Material trom fhe bottom of a column is termed 'bopms', and must be I. -,., ,,.d an., ,a ti&-.. *.27)- .nater.-. --;lsists -. ..?avier ,...a. ler molecular weight) liquids which either did not vaporize, or had condensed, plus any highly viscous material and solids in the teed. -

COLUMN ORIENTATION &REQUIREMENTS

Srmultaneously with orientating nozzles and arranging plping to the column, the piping designer decides the positions of manholes, plattorms, ladders, davit, and instruments.

COLUMN ORIENTATION FIGURE 6.30

\ / PIPERACK- LADDER SPACE '

Manholes are necessary to allow installation and removal ot tray parts.

Plattorms and ladders are required for personnel access to valves on nozzles, t o manholes, and to column instruments.

A davit is needed to raise and lower column parts, and a dropout area has to be reserved.

MANHOLES & NOZZLES

For a particular prolect or column, manholes are preferably ot thesame type. They should be located away trom piping, and within range at the davit.

I f required, manholes can be placed off the column centerlines (plan view).

The manhole servlng the sparger unit (figure 6.31) should permit easy removal ot the unit, which may be angled to place the teed connection in a desired position.

The portlons ot the column wall available tor nozzles are determ~ned by the orientation and type ot tray-see figure 6.29. Elevations ot nozzles are taken trom the column data sheet (normally in the torm ot a vessel drawing).

SPARGER UNIT rv-un= ~7 .s~

If the cuts are to be taken either from even-numbered trays, or trom odd- numbered trays, all nozzles can be located on one side of the column, facing the piperack. It cuts are to come trom both even- and odd-numbered trays, ~t will almost certainly be impossible to arrange all nozzles toward the p~perack. (See 'Arranging column piping', thls section.)

PLATFORMS & LADDERS

Plaitorms are required under manholes, valves at nozzles, level gages, controllers if any, and pressure relief valves. Columns may be grouped and sometimes rnterconnecting plattorms between columns are used. Individual plattorms tor a column are usually shaped as circular segments, as shown in iigure 6.30. A plattorm is required at the top ot the column, tor operating a davit, a vent on shutdown, and tor access to the safety-reliet valve. This top plattorm is oiten rectangular.

Usual practice is to provide a separate ladder to go trom grade past the lowest plattorm. Ladders are arranged so that the operator steps sidevvays onto the plattorms.

Ladder length 1s usually restricted to 30 t t between landings. Some States allow 40 t t (check local codes). If operating plattorms are turther apart than the maximum perm~ssible ladder he~ght, a small intermediate plattorm is provided.

Ladders and cages should contorm to the company standard and satisty the requirements of the US Department ot Labor (OSHA), part 191010).

r i r i i u u - r u n nrHt c n t m n i u u c n a

Heat exchanoers are discussed in 3.3.5.

6.6 DESIGN POINTERS

rrngmeermg ,voter:

DATA NEEDED T O PLAN EXCHANGER PIPING 6.6.7 I

Preliminary exchanger intormation should be given early to the piping group. so that piping studies can be made with special reference to orientation ot nozzles. Betore arranging heat-exchanger piping, the tollowing intorrnation I

is needed a

PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM This will show the fluids that are to be handled by the exchangers, and will state their flow rates, temperatures and pressures.

EXCHANGER DATA SHEETS One of these sheets IS compiled tor each exchanger design by the prolect group. The piping group provides nozzle orientation sketches (resulting trom the piping studies). The data sheet in- n torms the rnanutacturer or vendor ot the exchanger concerning pertormance and code stamp requirements, maternis, and possible dimensional limitations

I

TEMA CODING FOR EXCHANGER TYPE

The Tubular Exchangers Manutacturers Association (TEMA) has devised a method tor designat~ng exchanger types, using a letter coding. The exchanger a shown in figure 6.32 would have the basic designation AEW. See chart H-1.

SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER WITH REMOVABLE TUBE BUNDLE

Provide the shell with a pressurerelieving device to protect against excessive shell-side pressure in the event ot internal failure

Put touling and/or corrosive fluids inside the tubes as these are (except U-type) easily cleaned, and cheaper to replace than the shell

Put the hotter fluid in the tubes to reduce heat loss to the surroundin@

However, if steam is used to heat a fluid in an exchanger, passing the steam thru the shell has advantages: tor example, condensate is far easier to handle shellside. Insulation of the shell is normally required to protect personnel, and to reduce the rates of condensate formation and heat loss

Pass refrigerant or cooling liquid thru the tubes, if the exchanger is not insulated, tor economic operation

I f heat transter i s between two liquids, a countercurrent flow pattern will usually give greeter overall heat transter than a paralleled flow pattern. other tactors being the same

Orientate single-tube spiral, helical and U-tube exchangers (with steam ted thru the tube) to permit outflow ot condensate

FIGURE 6.32

c Arrange nozzles to su~t the best plplng and plant layout. Nozzles may be positioned tangentially or on elbows, as well as on vertical Or horizontal centerlines (as usually offered at first by vendors). Although a tanaentlal or elbowed nozzle 1s more expensive, lt may permit econo- - .. mies in plping multiple heat exchangers

Make condensing vapor the descending stream

Make vaporizing fluid the ascending Stream

I Posltlon exchangers so that plping 1s as direct and simple as possible. TO achieve this, consider alternatives, such as reversing flows, arranging exchangers side-by-side or stacking them, to minimize PiPlng

s Elevate en exchanger to allow piping to the exchanger's nozzles to be arranged above grade or floor level, unless piping i s to be brought UP thru a floor or trom a trench

s Exchangers are sometimes ot necessiP/ mounted on structures, procen

columns and other equipment. Special arrangements tor maintenance and tube handling will be required

PIPING TO NOZZLES OF HEAT EXCHANGERS

I I i I I I I iiLLDWZPliCE FOR /

(b) ~~~h~~~~~~ arranged wtth 2 ti 0 in. mamtenance space between pasred u m and 2 ti 6 in. oeeratlng space between PIPW

opentins and Maintenance Rwluirsments:

I Access to operating valves and instruments (on one side only suffices)

s Operating space tor any davit, monorail or crane, etc., both for move-

ment and to set loads down

a Access to exchanger - space is needed tor tube-bundle removal, tor

cleaning, and around the exchanger's bolted ends (channelcover and rear head) and the bolted channel-to-shell clo~ure

0 Access for tube bundle removal is otten given on manufacturers' drawings, and 1s usually about 1% tlmes the bundle length. 15 to 20 i t oimr.nrp chnlM be allocated from the outer side ot the last exchang ,L" .o" ," , , "" .. ~

er in a row for mobile lifting equipment access and tube handling

Threaded Thermowells in Straight Runs

Threaded Thermowells in Elbows

Flanged Thermowells in Straight Runs

Flanged Thermowells in Elbows

Screwed Connections for Pressure Instruments

Socket-welded Connections for Pressure Instruments

Xaphragm Isolated Instrument Connections (for welded lines)

NIPPLE. I,,". Y

- PRIMARY CONNECTIONS TO LINES & EQUIPMENT 6.7.1

Connections will usually be specified by company standards or by the specifications tor the proiect. I f no specificat~on exists, tull- and half-couplings, swaged nipples, thredolets, nipolets and elbolets, etc., may be used. Chart 6.2 illustrates instrument connections used tor lines ot various sizes. The fittlngs shown in chart 6.2 afe described in chapter 2. Orifice flange connections are discussed in 6.7.5.

CHOOSING THE CONNECTION 6.7.2

The choice ot instrument connection wil l depend on the conveyed fluid and sometimes on the required penetration of the element into the vessel Or pipe. Instrument connectionsshould be designed so that servicing or replacement ot instruments can be carried out without interrupt~ng the process. Valves are needed to lsolate gages tor maintenance durlng plant operation and during hydrostatic testing at the piping system. These valves are shown in chart 6.2 and are referred to as 'root' or 'primaiy' valves.

TEMPERATURE &PRESSURE CONNECTIONS 6.7.3

Chart 6.2 illustrates various methods tor making temperature andpressure connections. ~t the bottom ot chart 6.2 a method ot connectlna a diaphragm flange assembly (diaphragm isolator) is shown. Corrosive, abrasive Or viscous

fluid i n the process line presses on one side ot the flexible diaphragm, and the neutral fluid (glycol, etc.) on the other side transmits the pressure.

I f the conveyed fluid is hazardous or under high pressure a branch fitted wlth a bleed valve is inserted between the gage and its isolating valve. to relieve pressure andlor dram the liquid betore servicing thegaga. The bleed valve can also be used t o sample, or tor adding a comparison gage.

Position connections tor instruments so that the instruments can be seen when operating associated valves, etc.

Pressure connections tor vessels containing l iqu~ds are usually best located above liquid level

D A temperature-measuring element is inserted into a metal housing termed a 'thermowell'. Place thermowells SO that they are i n contact wlth the fluid-an elbow IS a good location, due t o the Increased turbulence

THERMOWELL CONSTRUCTION (EXAMPLE)

ELEMENT, li4.inch diameter

0.260.inch bare

U L I Locate a liquid level controller (float type, tor example1 clear ot any -

turbulence trom nozzles

e More than one level'gage, level switch, etc., may be required on a vessel: consider installing a 'strongbackl to a horizontal vessel on which instrument connections have t o be made-see figure 6.34(c)

LEVEL.GAGE CONNECTIONS FIGURE 6 . s

(a) LEVEL GAGE {b) CONNECTIONS FOR A GAGE GLASS

ASSEMBLY , , [OR VALVE1

, I~ I ,Y , I *~~IO.DILP1. . * I I

- LEVELGLAS

TEE

x IX((SWG.TBE

X'( VI I IVE

PLUG

UNlON

CONNECTIONS ON STRONGBACK

SWG 21". x 3/41". BLE-TSE VALVE 3/41", PLUG 3/41",

Oral"

F I G U R E FI

MEASURING FLOW-ROTAMET~HS iY u n l r ~ ~ c ri-lro u . z . ~ .". --- ...... -

A rotameter consists ot a transparent tube with tapered and calibrated bore, arranged vertically, wide end up, supported in a casing or tramework with end connections. The instrument should be connected so that flow enters at the lower end and leaves at the top. A ball or spinner rides on the rising gas or liquid Inside the tapered tube - the greater the flow rate, the higher the ball or splnner rides. Isolating valves and a bypass should be provided, as in figure 6.35

ROTAMETER FIGURE 6.35

(a) PIPING TO ROTAMETER (b) lNOUSTRlAL ROTAMETER

ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY

An 'orifice plate' IS a flat disc with a preciseiy-made hole at its center. It offers a well-defined obstructlon to flow when Inserted in a linesee figure 6.36. The resistance of the orifice sets up a pressure difference in the fluid either side of the plate, which can be used to measure the rate of flow.

ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY &GAGE (MANOMETER) FIGURE 6.36

GAGE

The orifice plate IS heid between spec~al flanges havlng 'orifice taps'-these are tapped holes made in the flange rims, to wh~ch tubing and a pressure gage can be connected, as in figure 6.36. A pressure gage may be termed a 'manometer'

'iffarc ' lressu ' the rr ' cturi 'L' met, ithat '- ".e p ~ p ~ - - in which the orifice plate is to be installed1 must correspond with the piping used to calibrate the orifice plate-the readings will be In error i f there isvery much variation i n these two piping arrangements.

Sometimes the orifice assembly Includes adiacent piping, ready tor welding In place. Otherwise, lengths of stralght pipe, free tram welds, branches or obstructlon, should be provided upstream and downstream at the orifice assembly.

Table 6.6 shows lengths ot stralght pipe required upstream and downstream ot orifice flanges (for different plping arrangements) to sufficiently reduce turbulence m liquids tor reliable measurement.

PIPING TO FLANGE TAPS

Figure 6.37 shows a suitable tapping and valving arrangement at orifice flange taps. In horizontal runs, the taps are located at the tops of the flanges in gas, steam and vapor lines. An approximately horizontal pasition avoids vapor locks in liquid lines. Taps should not be pointed downward, as sediment may collect in pipes and tubes.

CONNECTIONS TO ORIFICE FLANGES &INSTRUMENT

FIGURE 6.37

Clear space should be lef t around an orifice assembly Figure 6.38 shows m m m u m clearances required f o r rnount!ng instruments, seal pots, etc.. and

The h, ,d~yamenr u~ urifice p d l e assenwea shouio oe made i n consular~on w l th the Instrument anglnaer. Usually. it 1s preterred t o locate orifice plate assemblies i n horizontal lines. t o r maintenance.

F l ow condi t~ons consistent w l t h those used t o calibrate the Instrument are ensured b y providing adequately long s t ra~ght sections o t pipe upstream and downstream ot the orifice. Table 6.6 gives lengths that have been found satisfactory t o r liqulds.

CLEARANCES TO ORIFICE ASSEMBLIES FIGURE 6.38

STRAIGHT PIPE UPSTREAM & DOWNSTREAM OF ORIFICE ASSEMBLY TABLE 6.6 I CLEARANCES FOR I

LINESCONVEYING I AIR OR OTHER GAS

PLANS -

ELEVATIONS =access space

To ensure continuity of plant operations it is necessary to maintain some process, servlce and utility lines within a desired temperature range in order to keep materials in a fluid state, to prevent degradatron, and to prevent damage caused by liqulds treezlng i n cold conditions. Piping can be kept warm by insulation, or by applying heat to the insulated prprng-this is 'iackating' or 'tracing', as discussed in 6.8.2 and 6.8.3.

THERMAL INSULATION 6.8.1

INSULATION

'Insulation' is covering material havrng poor thermal conductivity applied externally ta pipe and vessels, and is used: (1) To retain heat in a pipe or vessel SO as to marntain process temperature or prevent treezing. 12) To minimize transter ot heat trom the surroundings Into the line or vessel. (31 To sateguard personnel from hot lines. The choice of insulation is normally included with the piplng specification. The method ot show~ng insulatlon on piping draw~ngs i s included in chart 5.7.

Installed insulatlon normally consists ot three parts: (1) The thermal insulating mater~al. (2) The protect!ye covering for it. (3) The metal banding to tasten the covering. Most insulating materlals are supplied in tormed pieces to fit elbows, etc. Formed coverings are also available. Additionally, i t is customary to paint the installed insulation, and to weatherproot i t betore painting, if for external use.

The principal thermal rnsulating materials and their accepted approximate maximum line temperatures, where temperature cycling (repet~tive heating and cooling periods) occurs are: asbestos (1200 F), calcium silicate (1200 F), cellular glass [foamglasj (800 F), cellular silica (1600 F), diatomaceous silica plus asbestos (1600 F), mineral fiber (250-1200 F, depending on type), mineral wool (1200 F). magnesla (600 F),and polyurethane toam (250 F). Certaln toamed plastics have a very low conductivity, and are suitable tor lnsulatlng lines as cold as -400 F. Rock cork [bonded mineral fiber! is satislactory down to -250 F, and mineral wool down to -150 F.

HOW THICK SHOULD INSULATION BE 7

Most insulatlon in a plant will not exceed 2 inches In thickness A rough guide to insulation thicknesses ot the more common materlals required on plpe to 8-inch slze IS

GUIDE TO INSULATION THICKNESS TABLE 6.7

PPPLICATtON TYPICAL INSULATING MATERIAL USUAL TH'CKNESS

OF INSULATION

Car Py-n-?I prrrn-+q ~nplaf ' - ) shpd.' he prodd up tp 2 hqght nt

about ti tt above operating floor level Alternately, wire mesh guaros can be provided The tollowlng more detailed table gives insulation thickness for heat conservatron, based on 85% magnesia to 600 F, and calcium silicate above 600 F

INSULATION RE(1UIRED FOR PIPE AT VARIOUS TEMPERATURES TABLE 6.8

NOhlll&%L INCHES THICKNESS OF iNSULililON FOR S iA iEO iiMPERAiURE RWGE PIPE SIZE

Temuerature Ran e i n Degrees Fahrenheit I in. J oelav 400 400-549 150-689 700.899 900-1049 TWO-IZOO

JACKETING &TRACING 6.8.2

The common methods by which temperatures are maintained, other than by slmple insulation, are jacketing and tracing (with insulation).

JACKETING

Usually, 'iacketing'reter;todouble-walledconstruction ot pipe, valves, vessels, hose, etc.. deslgned so that a hot or cold fluid can circulate in the cavity between the walls. Heating media include water, oils, steam, or proprietary high-boiling-point fluids which can be circulated at low pressure, such as Dowtherm or Therminol. Cooling media include water, water mixtures and varlous alcohols.

Jacketed pipe can be made by the piping tabricator, but an eng~neered system bought from a speclalist manufacturer would be a more reliablechoice. The umpovvr lines connecting adjacent ~ackets, thru which the heatrng or cooling medium flows are factory-made by the specialist manufacturer wlth less jolnts than those made on-site, where as many as nrne screwed joints may be necessary to make one jumpover. Details ot the range of fittings, valves and equipment available and methods o t construction tor steel jacketed piping systems can be tound in Parks-Cramer's and other catalogs.

Another type of iacketing is 'Platecoil' (Tranter Manutacturing Inc.) which is a name given to heat transter unlts fabricated from embossed metal sheets, lolned together to form internal channeling thru which the heatrng lor cooling) fluid is passed. The term 'iacketlng' i s also applied to electric heating pads or mantles which are tormed to f i t equrpment. I t also sometrmes reters to the spiral winding ot electric tracing and fluid tracing lines around pipes, vessels, etc.

Thi? IF a w i d ~ l v - ~ ~ w l w w nf k e e p " i w s u\-.- r u rp l r -'--m is "y a v ~ w k r tor LIII:, purpose. rigure o . 4 ~ shows typical tracing arrangements A stearmaacing system consists of tracer lines separately fed from a steam sgpply header lor subheader), each tracer terminating with a separate trap. Horizontal pipes are commonly traced along the bottom by a single tracer. Multiply-traced pipe, with more than W o tracers, is unusual.

STEAM PRESSURE FOR TRACING

Steam pressures in the range 10 t o 200 PSIG are used. Sometimes steam will be available at a su~table pressure tor the tracing system, but if the available steam is at too high a pressure, it may be reduced by means ot a control (valve) station-see 6.1.4. Low steam pressures may be adequate i f tracers are fitted with traps discharging to atmospheric pressure. I f a pressurized condensate system 1s used, steam at 100 to 125 PSlG IS preferred.

SlZlNG HEADERS

The best way to size a steam subheader or condensate header serving several tracers is to calculate the total internal cross-sectional area ot all the tracers, and to select the header size offering about the same flow area.Table 6.9 allows quick selectm if the tracers are all ot the same size.

NUMBER OF TRACERS PER HEADER

.... TABLE 6.9

MAXIMUM LENGTHS & RISES

The rate at which condensate forms and fills the line determines the length ot the tracer in contact with the pipe. Too many variables are involved to give useful maximum tracer lengths. Most companies have their own design figure lor figures based on experience) for this: usually, length ot tracer in contact with pipe does not exceed 250 ft.

1 PSI steam will l i f t condensate about 2.3 ft. and theretor vertical rises will present no problem unless low-pressure steam is being used. Companies preier t o limit the vertical rise i n a tracer at any one place to 6 t t (for 25-49 PSIG steam) or 10 tt (for 50-100 PSlG steam). As a rough guide, the total height, in feet, ot all the rises in one tracer may be limited to one quarter o i the initial steam pressure, in PSIG. For example, i f the initial steam pressure is 100 PSIG, the total height of all risers in the tracer should be limited to 25 tt. The rise for a sloped tracer is the difference in elevations between the ends of the sloping part of the tracer.

Ixpai :an b~ .mmo--..- by ic-,.,., the toeb.~ dtelbovwa a~jdlor pru- viding horizontal expansion loops in the tracer. Vertical downward expan- sron loops obstruct draining and will cause trouble in treezing climates, unless the design includes a drain at the bottom of the loop, or a union to break the loop. I t is necessary to anchor $racers to control the amount of expansion that can be tolerated in any one direction. Straight tracers 100 it or longer are usually anchored at their midpoints.

Expansion at elbows must be l im~ted where no loop is used and excessive movement ot the tracer could l i f t the insulation. In such cases the tracer is anchored not more than 10 to 25 f t away trom an elbow which limitsstart-up expansion to 112 to 314 inch in most cases. The distance ot the anchor from the elbow is best calculated from the ambient and steam temperatures.

EXAMPLE: System traced with copper tubing: coefficient of linear expansion of copper = 0.000009 per deg F. Steam pressure to be used = 50 PSlG (equivalent steam temperature 298F). Lowest ambient temperature = 50 F. If the anchor is located 20 f t trorn the elbow, the maxlmum expansion in inches is (298-50)(0.000009)(20)~12) = 0.53 in. This expansion will usually be tolerable even for a small line with the tracer construction tor elbows shown in figure 6.40.

20<1 i \ 5OPSlG $TEN4 PRESSURE . , WCOPPERTRACER

0 % irrh EXPIINSION LOWEST MIBIENTTEMPERATURE - 50 F

PIPE,TUBE & FITTINGS FOR TRACING

SCH 80 carbon steel pipe, or copper or stainless steel tubing is used for tracers. Selection is based on steam pressure and required tracersize. In practice, tracers are either 112 or 318-inch size, as smaller sizesinvolve too much Pressure drop, and larger material does not bend well enough for customary field installation.

112-inch OD copper tube is the most economic material tor tracingstra~ght piping. 318-inch OD copper tubing is more usetul where small bends are required around valve bodies, etc. Copper tubing can be used for pressures up to 150 PSlG lor to 370 F). Table T-1 gives data for copper tube.

Supply lines trom the header are usually socket welded or screwed and seal- welded depending on the pressures involved and the company's practice. A pipeto-tube connector is used to make the connection between the steel pipe and tracer tube - see figure 2.41.

TRACING VALVES & EQUIPMENT

Different methods are used. Some companies require valves to be wrapped with tracer tubing. Others merely run the tubing in a vertical loop alongside and against the valve body. i n either method, room should be lett moving flange bolts, and unions should be placed in the tracer so valve or equipment can be removed.

I M SUPPLY I

TRACER AT F L A N G E S

f Y r i L L ruviorovarvrr,

TRACING VESSELS

Ensure that the temperature limit tor process materlal is not exceeded by the temperature of the steam supplytng the tracer. Hot spots occur at bands-see 6.8.2, under 'Getting heat to the process line'

Run a steam subheader from the most conventent source i f there isno suitable existtng steam supply that can be used etther directly or by reducing the pressure ot the available steam

Take tracer lines separately from the top ot the subheader, and provide an isolating valve in the hortzontal run

Feed steam first to the highest point of the system ot lines to be traced, so that gravity will assist the flow ot condensate to trap(s) and condensate header

Do not split (branch) a tracer and then re lowthe shorter limb would take most of the steam

Preferably, absorb expansion ot the tracer at elbows. I f loops are used in the line, arrange them to drain on shutdown

Keep loops around flanges horizontal or overhead, and provide unions so that tracers can be disconnected at flanges

I f possible, group supply points and traps. locattng traps at grade or plattorm level

Do not place a trap at every low point ot a tracer (as is the practice with steam lines) but provide a trap at the end ot the tracer

Do not run more than one tracer to a trap

Increased heating may be obtained: (1) By using more than one tracer (2) By winding the tracer in a spiral around the line (3) By applying heat-transfer cement to the tracer and line (4) By welding the tracer to the line-refer to 6.82, under 'Getting

heat to the process line'

Reserve spiral wlnding ot tracers for vertical lines where condensate can drain by gravity flow

In treezing conditions, provide drains at low pointsand at other points where condensate could collect during shutdown

Prov~de slots In insulation to accommodate expansion ot the tracer where i t loins and leaves the line to be traced

Indicate thickness of insulat~on to envelop line and tracer, and show whether insulat~on is also required at flanges

Indicate limits for insulatton tor personnel protection-see 6.8.1, under 'How thick should insulation be?', end chart 5.7

Provide crosses instead ot elbows and flanged joints at intervals in heated lines conveying materials which may solidify, to permit cleaning if the heatmg fails

STEAM & LOW-PRESSURE H E A T I N G M E D I A 6.9 SUPERHEATED STEAM - --

EXPLANATIONS OF STEAM TERMS 6.9.1

HOW STEAM IS FORMED

Steam is a convenient and easily handled medium tor heating, tor driving machinery, for cleaning, and for creating vacuum.

After water has reached the boiling point, turther additiort of heat will convert water into the vapor state: that is, steam. During boiling there is no further rise in temperature of the water, but the vaporization of the water uses up heat. This added heat energy, which is not shown by a rise in temperature, is termed 'latent heat of vaporization', and varies with pressure.

I n boiling one pound of wateratatmosphertc pressure 114.7 PSIA) 970.3 BTU is absorbed. I f the steam condenses back into water (still at the boiling temperature and 14.7 PSIA) it will release exactly the amount of heat i t absorbed on vaporizing.

The term 'saturated steam' refers to both drysteam and wetsteam, described below. Steam tables give pressure and temperature data applicable to dry and to wet steam. Small amounts of air, carbon dioxide, etc., are present in steam trom industrial boilers.

STEAMNVATERIICE DIAGRAM CHART 6.3

CHANGE OF STATE

DRY STEAM

Dry steam is a gas, consisting of water vapor only. Placed in contact with water at the same temperature, dry steam will not condense, nor will more steam torm-liquid and vapor are in equilibrtum.

WET STEAM

Wet steam consists of water vapor and suspended water particles at the same temperature as the vapor. Heating ability ('quality') vartes with the percentage ot dry steam in the mixture (the water particles contain no latent heat of vaporization). Like dry steam, wet steam is in equilibrium w ~ t h water at the same temperature.

11271

.8.3 I f heat is added to a quantity ot dry steam, the temperature of the steam will rise, and the number of degrees rise in temperature is the 'degrees of super-

lbil .92 : J -

heat' Thus, superheat is 'sensible' heat - that is. i t can be measured bv a thermometer.

EFFECT OF PRESSURE CHANGE - Under normal atmospheric pressure 114.7 PSIA) pure water boils at 212 F. Reductton ofthe pressure over the water will lower the boiling polnt. Increase in pressure raises the boiling point. Steam tables give boiling points corres ponding to particular pressures.

FLASH STEAM

Suppose a quantity of water is being boiled at 300 PSIA icorresponding to 417 F). I f the source ot heat is removed, boiling ceases. I f the pressure over the water is then reduced, say trom 300 to 250 PSIA, the water starts boiling on its own, without any outside heat applied, until the temperature drops t o 401 F (this temperature corresponds to 250 PSIA). Such spontaneous boiling due to reductton in pressure is termed 'flashing', and the steam produced, 'flash steamr.

The data provided i n steam tables enable calculation of the quantity and temperature of steam produced in 'flashing'.

CONDENSATE -WHAT IT IS & HOW IT FORMS

Steam in a line will give up heat to the piping and surroundings, and will gradually become 'wetter', its temperature remaining the same. The change ot state ot part ot the vapor to liquid gives heat t o the pipingwithout lowering the temperature in the line. The water that torms is termed 'condensate'. If the line initially contains superheated steam, heat lost to the piping and surroundings will first cause the steam to lose sensible heat until the steam temperature drops to that of dry steam at the line pressure.

AIR IN STEAM

With both dry and wet steam, a certain pressure will correspond to a certain temperature. The temperature ot the steam at various pressures can be found in steam tables. I f air is mixedwith steam, this relationship between pressure and temperature no longer holds. The more air that is admixed, the more the temperature is reduced below that of steam at the same pressure. There is no practicable way to separate air from steam (without condensation) once ~t is mixed.

LOW-PRESSURE HEATING MEDIA 6.9.2

Speaal liquid media such as Dowtherms (Dow Chemical Co.) and Therminols (Monsanto Co.) can be boiled like water, but thesamevapor temperatures as steam are obtained at lower pressures. Heating systems using these liquids are more complicated than steam systems, and experience wtth them is necessary in order to design an efficient installation. However, the basic principles ot steamheating systems apply.

.7, L - 8 . S P .* 0,"- ". ." REk.- ... JG Al.. . ..OMS.-. ... 1 L I N ~ ~ - 6. .

Air in steam lines lowers the temperature for a given pressure, and calculated rates of heating may not be met. See 6.9.1 under 'Air in steam'.

The most economic means for removing atr trom steam lines isautomatically thru temperature-sensitive traps or traps fitted with temperature-sensitive air- venting devices placed at points remote from the steam supply. When full line temperature is attained the vent valves will close completely. See 6.10.7 under 'Temperaturesensitive (or thermostattc) traps'.

WHY PLACE VENTS A T REMOTE POINTS 7

On start-up, cold lines will be filled w ~ t h air. Steam issutng trom thesource will mix w ~ t h some of this air, but will also act as a plston pushing air to the remote end ot each line.

WHY REMOVE CONDENSATE 7 6.10.2

In heating systems ustng steam with little or no superheat, steam condenses to torm water, termed 'condensate', which is essentially distilled water. Too valuable to waste, condensate is returned tor use as boiler feedwater unless i t is contaminated wtth oil iusually trom a steam engtne) or unless it i s uneconomic to do so, when tt can either be used locally as a source of hot water, or run to a drain. I f condensate i s not removed:-

a Steam with entratned watei'droplets will form a dense water film on heat transfer surfaces and interfere wtth heating

e Condensate can be swept along by the rapidly-moving steam (at 120 ftlsec or more) and the high-velocity impact ot slugs at water with fintngs, etc. (waterhammer) may cause erosion or damage

LFTlLIZlNG CONDENSATE FIGURE 6.41

RECEIVER I

1 1 1 "".., ".""... ",".",,,", .,.*,* .."" "VII I IYCIYUII . .Y l l r "I llr",,, Or," * Y I I " V I I I O L ~

dter thru ~c~=trnm coils 8s stmm ?was mpral%c tc9nted +n +h? opep atr. Later, rtle wasreiuiness ot rnts resulteo tn closed sream lines rrom which only the condensed steam was removed and then re-ted to the boiler. The removal of condensate to atmosphertc pressure was effected wtth traps-special automattc discharge valves-see 6.10.7.

This was a much more efficient sys tk , but tt still wasted flash steam. On passtng thru the traps, the depressurtzed condensate boiled, generatmg iower- pressure steam. In modern systems, this flash steam ts used and the residual condensate returned to the boiler.

STEAM SEPARATOR OR DRYER 6.10.3

This is an in-line device which provides better drying of steam betng immediately fed t o equtpment. A separator ts shown in figure 2.67. It separates droplets entrained in the steam which have been picked up trom condensate in the ptpe and from the pipe walls, by means of one or more baffles (which cause a large pressure drop). The collected liquid is ptped to a trap.

SLOPING &DRAINING STEAM & CONDENSATE LINES 6.10.4

Slop~ng of steam and condensate lines is discussed in 6.2.6, under 'Sloped lines avotd pocketing and aid draining'.

Condensate IS collected trom a steam line either by a steam separator (some times termed a 'dryer'ksee 6.10.3 above-or more cheaply by a drtpleg (drip pocket or well - see below) from where i t passes to a trap for pertodic discharge to a condensate return line or header which will be at a lower pressure than the steam line. The header is either taken to a boiler feedwater tank teeding makeup water to the boiler or to a hotwell tor pumping to the boiler feedwater tank.

DRIPLEGS COLLECT CONDENSATE 6.10.5

It is futile to provide a small drtpleg or drain pocket on large lines, as the condensate will not be collected efficiently.

Drtplegs are made from ptpe and fitttngs. Figure 6.42 shows three methods of construction, and table 6.10 suggests drtpleg and valve stzes.

DRIPLEG CONSTRUCTIONS FIGURE 6.42

SCREWED OR BUTT-WELDED PIPING SOCKET-WELDED PIPING

-

INE SIZE

PIPING TC TO TRAP

A Figure 2.70 shows dripleg construction

STEAM LINE P R E S S ~ ~ E FORCES CONDENSATE 6.10.6 INTO RECOVERY SYSTEM

In almost every steam-heattng system where condensate is recovered the trapped condensate has to be lifted to a condensate header and run to a boiler teedwater tank, either directly or vla a receiver. Each PSI of steam pressure behind a trap can lift the condensate about two feet vertically. The pressure available tor lifting the condensate ts the pressure difference between the steam and condensate lines less any pressure drop over pipe, valves, fitt~ngs, trap, etc.

STEAM TRAPS 6.10.7

The purpose ot fitting traps to steam lines is to obtain fast heatmg of systems and equipment by freemg the steam lines of condensate and atr. A steam trap i s a valve devtce able to discharge condensate from a steam line without also dischargtng steam. A secondary duty is to discharge atr-at start-up, lines are full of atr which has to be flushed out by the steam, and in continuous operation a small amount of air and non-condensible gases introduced in the boiler teedwater have also to be vented.

Some traps have built-in strainers to give protection from dirt and scale which may cause the trap to lam in an open position. Traps are also available with checking teatures to sateguard against backflow ot condensate. Reter to the manutacturers' catalogs tor details.

Choosing a trap trom the many des~gns should be based on the trap'sability to operate wtth m~nimal maintenance, and on its cost. To reduce inventory and atd maintenance, the minimum number ot types ot trap should be used tn a plant. The assistance of manutacturers' representativesshould be sought betore trap types and sizes are selected.

xeam rraps are oestgneo ro react ro cnangei lrl rernperarure, pressure or nll 10 1Slty

U il .l0.9 L J L

TEMPERATURE-SENSITIVE tor 'THERMOSTATIC') TRAPS are ot two - types: The first type operates by the movement ot a liquid-filled bellows, and the second uses a bimetal element. Both types are open when cold and readily discharge air and-condensate at start-up. Steam IS in direct contact with the closing valve and there is a ttme delay with both types in operating. A large dripleg allowing tlme tor condensaie to cool tmproves operation. AS these traps are actuated by temperature differential, they are economic at steam pressures greater than 6 PSIG.The temperature ratlng ot the bellows and the possibility ot damage by waterhammer should be cons~dered-refer to 6.10.8.

IMPULSE TRAPS are also reterred to as 'thermodynamic' and 'controlled disc'. These traps are most su~ted to applications where the pressure downstream ot the trap IS less than about half the upstream pressure. Waterhammer does not affect operation. They are su~table tor steam pressures over 8 PSIG.

DENSlTYSENSlTlVE TRAPS are made in 'float' and 'bucket' designs. The float trap is able to discharge condensate continuously, but this trap will not discharge air unless fitted with a ternperature-sensitive vent ithe temperature limitatton ot the vent should be checked). Float traps sometunes may fail trom severe waterhammer. The inverted bucket trap (see 3.1.9) IS probably the most-used type. The trap is open when cold, but will not discharge large quantities ot air at startup unless the bucket ts fitted w ~ t h a temperature sensitwe vent. The actton in discharging condensate IS rapid. Steam will be discharged if the trap loses its priming water due to an upstream valve being opened; reter to note (9) in the key to figure 6.43. Inverted bucket traps will operate at pressures down to 114 PSIG.

FLASHING 6.10.8

Reter to 6.9.1. When hot condensate under pressure IS released to a lower pressure return line. the condensate tmmediately boils. This IS referred t o as 'flashing' and the steam produced as 'flash steam'.

The hotter the steam line and the colder the condensate discharge line, the more flashing will take place; tt can be severe i f the condensate comes from high pressure steam. Only part of the condensate forms steam. However, if the header IS Inadequately stzed to cope w ~ t h the quantlty ot flash steam produced and backpressure builds up, waterhammer can result.

Often, where a trap is run to a drain, a lot of steamseems to be passing thru the trap, but this is usually only trom condensate flashing.

DRAINING SUPERHEATED STEAM LINES 6.10.9

Steam lines wtth more than a few degrees of superheat will not usuallyform condensate tn operatton. Dur~ng theharmtng-up permd etter stantng a cold clrcult, the large bulk ot metal in the ptptng will nearly always use up the TABLE -

degrees of superheat to produce a quanttty ot condensate. .

)FOR DRAINED COhOENSATE FIGURE 6.44

Start-ups are infrequent and with more than a few degrees of superheat it is unnei , to systi ich is iuou: , ., ? ram ?se s i , . heated steam lines can operate with driplegs only, and are usually fitted with a blowdown line havmg two wlves so that condensate can be manually released from the dripleg atter startup.

A superheated steam supply to an intermittently operated piece of equipment will require trapping directly betore the controlling valve tor the equipment, as the temperature will drop at times allowing condensate to form.

PREVENT TRAPS FROM FREEZING 6.10.10

ln~ulation and steam or electric tracing 01 the trap and its piping may also be required in treezing environments. Temperaturesensitiveand impulse traps are not subiect to treezing trouble i f mounted correctly, so that the trap can drain. Bucket traps are always mounted with the bucket vertical and a type with top inlet and bottom outlet should be chosen, unless the trap can be drained by fitting an automatic drain.

GUIDELINES TO STEAM TRAP PIPING 6.10.11

Figures 6.43 thru 6.45 are a guide to piping traps trom dr~plegs, lines, ,:.

vessels, etc.

Try to group traps to achieve an orderly arrangement

Unless instructed otherwise, pipe, valves and fittings will be the same size as the trap connections, but not smaller than 314 in.

Traps ere normally fitted at a level lower than the equipment or dripleg that they serve

Trap each item of equipment using steam separately, even if the steam pressure is common

Provide driplegs (and traps on all steam lines with little or no superheat) at low points before or at the bottom of risers, at pockets and other places where condensate collects on starting up a cold system. Table 6.10 gives dripleg sizes

Locate driplegs at the midpoints of exchanger shells, short headers, etc. If dual driplegs are provided it is better to locate them near each end

For installations in freezing conditions, where condensate is wasted. preferably choose traps that will not pocket water and which can be installed vertically, to allow draining by gravity. Otherwise, select a trap that can be fined with an automat~c draining device by the manufacturer

Avoid long horizontal discharge lines in treezing conditions, as ice can form in the line trom the trap. Keep discharge lines short and pitch them downward, unless they are returning condensate to a header

For efficient operation ot equipment such as heat exchangers using large amounts of steam, consider installing a separator in the steam feed

a 'Syphon' removal ot condensate In wnain instanr~c i t IS nnt nnssible to ...,., Je a rou.h~f dra& ~ . rn - lui sample, wmre cormensate is formed mside a rotating drum. The pressure of the steam is used to LC- - force ('syphon') the condensate up a tube and into a trap. Figure 6 45 shows such an arrangement

TRAPPING ARRANGEMENT FOR ROTATING DRUM FIGURE 6.45

ROTAnNG DRUM Stnun r +' a=cae ",- , ,

'Sparset -. -. - -

8 I f condensate is continuously discharging to an open drain i n an inside installation a personnel hazard or objectionable atmospheremay be created. To correct this, discharge piping can be connected to an exhaust stack venting to atmosphere and a connection to the main drain provided, as in figure 6.46

CONDENSATE VENT STACK FIGURE 6.46

RAINCOVER

of Condensate vent Stack

Condenlate tiom

VENTS & DRAINS ON LINE> & VcaaELa V..I I

WHY VENTS ARE NEEDED 6.11.3

Vents are needed to let gas (usually air) in and out ot systems. When a line or vessel cools, the pressure drops and creates a partial vacuum which can cause syphoning or prevent draining. When pressure rises in Sorage tanks due to an increase in temperature, ~t i s necessary to release excess pressure. Air must also bereleasedfrom tanks to allow filling, and admitted to permlt draining or pumplng out liqu~ds.

Ilnlprr alr I? r~mnved trnm fuel lines to burners. flame tadino can result. In

After piping has been erected, i t is often necessary to sub~ect the system to a hydrostatic test to see i f there i s any leakage. In compliance with the applicable code, this consists ot filling the lines with water or other liquid, closing the line, applying test piessure, and observing how well pressure is ma~ntained tor a specified time, while searchmg for Leaks.

As the test pressure is greater than the operating pressure of the system, i t is necessary to protect equipment and instruments by closing all relevant valves. Vessels and equipment usually are supplied with a certificate ot code compliance. After testinq, the valved drains are opened and the vent plugs temporar- ..

steam lines, air reduces heating efficiency. ily removed to allow air into the piping tor complete draining.

YENTI AND DRIIINS FOR HIDROSIATIC TEST ARE INOICAXO ON PiPlNC DRX-WINPI W THE SYMBOLS* II THE Y E W OR O R U N ILFORiWDiHER PURPOSE iT1SDRalLEIlONTIlL PlPiNDORliWiNG ORTHE DESiijN

rostttons or tne require0 vent ano oratn potnts are establtshed on tne piping drat - (P&In' ill sh lly pt vents as v brec and process dratns.) Refer to ftgure 6.47 for constructton details.

VENTING GASES 6.11.3

Cluick-opening vents of ample slze are needed for gases. Satety and safety- relief valves are the usual venting means. See 3.1.9 tor pressure-reliev~ng dev~ces, and 6.1.3, under 'Piptng satety and reliet valves'.

Gases which offer no serious hazard aiter some dilution wtth air may be vented to atmosphere by means ensurtng that no direct inhalation can occur. I f a (combustible) gas is toxic or has a bad odor, tt may be piped to an Incinerator or flarestack, and destroyed by burntng.

DRAINING COMPRESSED-AIR LINES 6.11.4

Air has a moisture content which is partially carrted thru the compressing and cooling stages. It is thts motsture that tends to separate, together with any oil, whtch may have been ptcked up by the alr in passing thru the compressor.

I t air for distribution has not been drted, distribution lines should beslaped toward points ot use and drams: lines carrying dried air need not be sloped. Sloptng is discussed in 6.2.6.

If the compressed-air supply is not dried, provide:-

(1) Traps at all drains trom equipment forming or collecting liquid-such as intercooler, aftercooler, separator, receiver.

(2) Driplegs with traps on distribution headers (at low points betore rises) and traps or manual drains at the ends ot distributton headers.

LlOUiD REMOVAL FROM AIR LINES FIGURE 6.48

RELIEVING PRESSURE-LIQUIDS 6.12

I ne buttoup ot pressure in a llquto is halted by discharging a small amount of liquid. Relievtng devtces having large ports are not required Reliet valves- see 3.1.9-are used, and need to be piped at the discharge side, but the piping should be kept short. See 6.1.3 under 'Piptng satetv & reltet valves'.

Rarely will the rel ie~ed' l i~uid be sufficiently non-hazardous to be piped directly to a sewer. Often the liquid IS simply to be reclaimed. Relieved liquid is trequently piped t o a 'knockout drum', or to a sump or other recetver tor recovery. The ?&ID should show what 1s to be done with the relieved liquid.

RELIEF HEADERS 6.12.1

Headers should be sized to handle adequately the large amounts of vapor and liquid that may be discharged during major mtshap. Relief headers taken to knockout drums, receivers or incinerators, are normally sloped, Refer to 6.2.6 and figure 6.3, showlng the preferred locatton ot a reliet header on a piperack.

WASTES & EFFLUENTS 6.13

Manutacturing processes may generate materials that cannot be recycled, and tor which there is no commerc~al use. These matertals are termed 'waste products', or 'wastes'. An 'effluent' is any material flowing trom a plant stte to the envtronment. Effluents need not be polluting tor example, properly-treated waste water may be discharged w~thout harmmg the envtronment or sewagetreatment plants.

Restrtctions on the quantities and nature ot effluents discharged into rivers. sewers or the atmosphere, necessitate treatment of wastes prtor to discharge. Waste treatment i s increasingly a factor in plant destgn, whether wastes are processed at the plant, or are transported tor treatment elsewhere. For In- plant treatment, wastetreatment facilittes are described on separate P&ID's (see 5.2.4) and should be designed in consultation with the responsible local authority.

Liquid wastes have to be collected wtthin a plant, usually by a spec~al dratnage system. Corrostve and hazardous properttes ot liqutd wastes will affect the choice and destgn of ptpe, fittings, open channels, sumps, holding tanks, settling tanks, etc. Because many watery wastes are acidic and corrosive to carbon steel, collectton and drainage piplng is often lined or made of alloy or plastic. Sulfates frequently appear In wastes, and spectal concretes may be necessary tor sewers, channels, sumps, etc., because sulfates deterlo- rate regular concretes.

Flammable wastes may be recovered andlor burned in smokeless tncinerators or tlarestacks. Vapors from flammable liquids present serious exploston hazards in collectton and drainage systems, especially i f the liqutd i s tnsoluble and floats.

Wastes may be held permanently at the manutacturing site. Solid wastes may be piled in dumps, or buried. Watery wastes contatning solids may be pumped into artificial 'ponds' or 'lagoons', where the solids settle.

S A F E T Y G U I D E L I N E S F O R F L A M M A B L E L IQUIDS . 6 14 SOME GUIDELINES

REFERENCES

'Fire hazard properties ot flammable liqulds, gases, volatile solids'. 1984. NFPA 325M

'Flammable and combustible liquid code'. 1987. NFPA 30

'Flammable and combustible liquld code handbook'. Tnird edition. 1987. NFPA

'Fire protection in refineries'. Sixth edition. 1984 American Petroleum Institute. APE RP 2001

'Protection agatnst ignitions arising out ot stattc, lightntng and stray currents'. Fourth editlon. 1982. API RP 2003

'Inspection tor fire protection'. First edition. 1984. API RP 2004

'Welding or hot-tapptng on equlpment containtng flammables'. 1985. API RP 2201

'Guide tor fighting fire in and around petroleum storage tanks'. 1980 API publication 2021

NFPA address: Batterymarch Park. (lutncy MA 02269

TANK SPACINGS INFPAI TABLE 6.11

CONDITIONS 88 MINIMUM INTER-TANK CLEARANCE 1

FLAMMABLE or Whichever 8s greater:- COMBUSTIBLE LIQUID 3ft STORAGE TANKS (Sum of diameters of adjacent tanks116 (Not exceedins 150 tt. dia.1

CRUDE PETROLEUM 126,000 gal max tank size Nonconsested locale I UNSTABLE FLAMMABLE and UNSTABLE COMBUSTIBLE I [Sum of diameters ot adjacent tanks112 LIQUID STORAGE TANKS

LIOUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS COhTAlNER from Flammabls or Combstible Liquid Storage Tank

LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS 10 ft from centerline of dike wall 'ONTAINER diked area NOTE: If LPG contamer is matter than

l ibk liquid Storage Tankc4 IS mai le r than 660 gal, exernpt~on applier -

i =ontalnw Flammable or Combus- 125 [US) and each liquid norage tank

Apply the recommendations relattng to the prolect ot the NFPA. API or other advisory body

Check insurer's requirements.

Isolate flammable liquid facilities so that they dc not endanger important buildings or equtpment. I n main buildings, tsolate trom other areas by firewalls or fire-reststive partitions, wtth fire doors or openings and wlth means ot drainage

Confine flammable liquid in closed containers, equipment, and ptping systems. Sate destgn of these should have three prlmary obiecttves: (11 To prevent uncontrolled escape ot vapor trom the liquid. (2) To provide rapid shut-off i f liquid accidentally escapes. (3) To confine the spread ot escaping liquid to the smallest practicable area

I f tanks containing flammable material are sited in the open, it is good practice to space them according t o the minimum separations set out in the NFPA Code (No. 395. 'Farm storage ot flammable 1iquids')and to provide dikes (liqutd-retaintng walls) around groups ot tanks. Additional methods tor dealing with tank fires are: (1) To transter the tank's contents to another tank. (2) To stir the contents to prevent a layer ot heated tuel tormtng

Locate valves tor emergency use in plant mtshap or fire-see 6.1.3

Valves tor emergency use should be ot fast-acting type

Provide pressure-reliet valves to tanks containing flammable liquid lor liquefied gas) if exposed t o strong sunlight andlor high ambient temperature, so that vapor under pressure can escape

Consider providing water sprays tor cooling tanks containtng flammable liquid which are exposed to sunlight

Provide ample ventilatton in buildings for all processtng operations so that vapor concentratton IS always below the lower flammability limit. Process ventilatloil should be interlocked so that the process cannot operate without tt

Install explosion panels in buildings to relieve exploSion pressure and reduce structural demege

Install crash panels tor psrsonnel i n hazardous areas

Ensure that the bastc protection, automatic sprtnklers, isto be installed

Some hazards require special fixed exttnguishing systems-foam, carbon dioxide, dry chemical or water spray-in additton to sprinklers. Seek advice trom the fire department responsible tor the area, end trom the tnsurers

DlNC - FTS I ERV

SPACE BETWEEN FLOORS 6.15.1

To avoid Interferences and to simplify design, adequate helght IS necessary between floors In buildings and plants tor plplng, electrical trays, and alr ducts i f required. Figure 6.49 suggests vertlcal spacings:

VERTICAL SPACING BETWEEN FLOOR & CEILING

SPACE FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL

---- SPACE FOR OUCTING

---- - SPACE FOR ELECTRIC CONDUIT, ctc. ----

a SPACE FOR PIPES

----

SPACE FOR EOUIPMENT. ACCESS & PERSONNEL

FIGURE 6.49

INSTALLATION OF LARGE SPOOLS & EQUIPMENT 6.15.2

Large openlngs In walls, floors or the root ot a building may be needed for installing equipment. Wall and roof openings are covered when not i n use, but sometlmes floor openmgs are permanent and guarded with railings, etc.

BUILDING LAYOUT 6.15.3

RELATION TO PROCESS

Different processes require different types ot buildings. Some processes are best housed in s~ngle-ston/ buildings with the process beglnnlng at one end and fin~shing at the other end. Other processes are better asslsted by gravlty, startlng at the top a t a building or structure and finlsh~ng at or near grade.

Provision ot a services shatt or 'chase' In multi-storied buildings greatly simplifies arrangement of vertlcal piping, ductlng and electric cables commu- nlcatlng between floors. Conceptual arrangements ot services and elevator shatts, w ~ t h tan room tor alr-condit~on~ng andlor process needs, are shown In figure 6.50. Servlces shatts can be located iriany positlon suitable to the process, and need not extend the whole helght of the building.

SUGGESTED BUILDING LAYOUTS FIGURE 6.50

FIGURES [11.(10

TABLE r--,

WHAT ARE STANDARDS & CODES ? . .- 7.1

Standards are documents which establish methods tor manutacruring and testing. Codes are documents which establish good destgn practices, including the tactors ot satety and effictency. The documents are prepared and periodically updated by commlnees whose members may include representatives from industry, government, univers~ties, institutes, protess~onal societies, trade associations, and labor unlons.

Proven engineering practices form the basts ot standards and codes, so that they embody mlnlmum requirements tor selection of material, dimensions, design, erection, testing, and tnspectton, to ensure the satety ot piping systems Periodic revisions are made to reflect developments in the industry

The terms 'standard' and 'code' have become almost interchangeable, but documents are termed codes when they cover a broad area, have govern- mental acceptance, and can torm a basts tor legal obligat~ons. 'Recommen- dations' document advisable practtce. 'Shall' in the wording of standards and codes denotes a requtrement or obligat~on, and 'should' implies recommendat~on.

FOUR REASONS FOR THEIR USE 7.2

( 1 ) Items ot hardware made according to a standard are tnterchangeable and of known dimensions and character~st~cs

(2) Compliance w ~ t h a relevant code or standard guarantees performance. reliability, quality, and provides a basts tor contract negotiations, tor obtaining insurance, etc.

13) A lawsu~t which may tollow a plant mishap, possibly due to tailureot some part of a system, is less likely to lead to a punltive tudgment if the system has been engineered and built to a code or standard

(4) Codes otten supply the substance tor Federal, State, and Municipal satety regulations. However, the US Federal Government may, as needed, devise its own regulat~ons, which are sometimes in the torm at a code.

WHO ISSUES STANDARDS ? 7.3

The American Standards Asociatton was founded in 1918 t o authorize national standards originating trom five malor engineering societies. Previously a chaotic sltuatlon had arisen as many societies and trade associations had been issuing individual standards which somettmes overlapped. In 1967, the name ot the ASA was changed to the USA Standards Institute, and in 1969 a second change was made, to Amertcan National Standards Institute. Standards previously issued under the prefixes 'ASK and 'USASI' are now prefixed 'ANSI'.

Not all USA standards end codes are issued directly by the Institute. The Amertcan Society of Mechan~cal Engineers, the Instrument Soctety ot Amer- ica, and several other organlzatlons Issue standards and codes that apply to piping Table 7.1 lists the princ~pal sources.

ANSI makes available manv such standards trom other standards.issuing organizations ("sponsors"). Each ot these standards is identified by the sponsor's designation (where one exists) preceded by ANSI's and the sponsor's acronym ---tor example, the ASME Code tor chem~cal plant and

r e i ~ r p m g ' gna t r ' ""'SI/Ac"' 331.3 " "le sp r - - - - does --' p r o v ~ d e a des!gnat~on. A N S I assigns one li an AmerlcanStandardscomm~ttee developed the standard, t h e c o m m ~ t t e e des~gnat lon IS used

The A N S l catalog IS available t r o m the A m e r ~ c a n Nat ional Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, N e w York, N Y 10018

Other countries also issue standards. T h e B r i t ~ s h Standards Ins t i t u t i on (BSI) I n the U K , the Deutscher Normanausschuss ( D I N ) i n Germany, a n d c t h e Swedish na t~ona l organization (SIS) Issue many standards. Copies o f fore lgn standards can be obtained direct ly, o r f r o m the Amer ican Nat ional Standards Institute. I D E N T I F Y I N G THE S O U R C E S OF S T A N D A R D S 7.4

T h e tables i n 7.5.6 give the ~ n ~ t i a l letters o t t he standards-issu~ng organ~zat ions precaeding the number o t t h e standard, thus: 'ASTM N28'. Table 7.1 ~nc ludes the ~ n ~ t i a l s used i n tables 7.3 t h r u 7.14, and glves the t u l l t i t les o t t h e organ- Izatlons. (Table 7.1 IS n o t a comprehensive listmg.)

PRI 1%

NCiPAL ORGANIZATIONS TABLE 7.1 UlNG STANDARDS

I N I T I A L S

AIA A N S l A P I ASME A S T M AWS AWWA FCI G S A I S A MSS

N F P A PFI USDC

F U L L T I T L E O F O R G A N I Z A T I O N

Amer ican Insurance As roc~a t ion ' Amer ican Nat ional Standards Inst i tu te t A m e n c a n Petro leum Jnstrtute Amencan S o c ~ e t y of Mechanical Engmeers Amencan S o c ~ e t y t a r Test ing and Materials Amencan Welding Soclety Amencan Waterworks A s s o c m o n F l u i d Contro ls Inst i tu te General Serv~ce A d m ~ n i s t r a t l o n Ins t rumen t Soctety of A m e r ~ c a Manutacturers' Standardizat ion Society ot the Valve and F i t tmgs Industry Nat ional F i re Protect ion Associat ion Pipc Fabrvcation Inst i tu te U n i t e d States Depar tment of Commerce

P R I N C I P A L D E S I G N - O R I E N T A T E D C O D E S

A N S I CODE 831 7.5.7

T h e most impor tant code t o r land-based pressure-pip~ng systems 8s A N S l 831. Parts o t th is code w h i c h app ly t o v a r ~ o u s types o t p lant p lp lng are listed i n table 7.2.

ANSI CODE 831 FOR PRESSURE PIPING TABLE 7.2

corrosion cantrot

power Piping

A M E R I C A N P E T R O L E U M INSTITUTE'S S T A N D A R D 2510 7.5.2

This Standard covers design a n d construction o t l iquefied petroleum gas instal lat~ons at marlne and p ~ p e l i n e terminals, natural gas processing plants, rei iner~es, pet ro leum plants and tank farms -

APPLiCAiiON TITLE

Chenical Pian: and Petrowurn Refinery PlOing

Lioma Petroleun lT3"SpOTtd t l l l "

Refrl9rrat>an D l D i i i 9

Gas Transnlrrlon ma o i ~ t n ~ u t w n Piping Systems

auiiaing s w i c e s Piolng Code

s l u r p ation lransniirt- Piping

The t w o t o l l o w ~ n g codes are n o t d i rect ly related t o plplng, b u t trequently are ~nvo lved i n the p lp lng des~gner's work :

SECIION I

A P I 510, PRESSURE VESSEL INSPECTION C O D E 7.5.3

831 Guide -1984

831.3-1987

831.4-I989

831.5-1987

831.8-1989

831.9-7988

831.11-1986

This code applies t o repalrs and alterations made t o vessels I n petro-chemlcal serv~ce constructed t o the to rmer API -ASME Code for Unf i red Pressure Vessels t o r Petroleum L ~ q u ~ d s a n d Gases, S e c t ~ o n 8 o t t h e A S M E Bo i le rand Pressure Vessel Code, and t o o the r vessels.

Guidelines l o r protecting 831 DlDinQ systems f rom corrosion

.. . ~

Design of chemical and Detrochemlcai plants and re f lner les ~rocessln9 chemicals and h y a r m r t m s , water and steam

Liquid transnortation systems l o r hydrocarbons. LPG, anhydrous amnonu and alcohols P r i n ~ i ~ ~ i l ~ describes tne piolnii of DdEkWed Unit5

Principally describer overland conveyance o f rue! gases and feeartock gases

High-DTeZ6Ure connerclal/sanitarY pioln9

Design, construction. insnection, security rewiremenis of s lur ry ~ l p l n g ustenis

ASME B O I L E R &PRESSURE VESSEL C O D E 7.5.4

T h e A S M E Boi ler and Pressure Vessel Code 1s mandatory i n many states w i t h regard t o das~gn, ma te r~a l specification, f ab r i ca t~on , erection, and test ing procedures. Compliance is required i n t h e U S A and Canada t o qual i fy for insurance. T h e Code consists o i t h e t o l l o w m g eleven sections:

ASME BOILER & PRESSURE VESSEL CODE

831.1-1989

Power boi len . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ ~

Mateml rpecificetsonr . . ~ ' . ~ ~ , ~ . . . Nuclear power plant components . . . ~ . , . . . . ~ . Heatmg boilerr . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . Nondestructive exammation . , . , . , . . . Recommended ruler tor care snd operation of heating boilen. . . . ~

Recommended ruler for care of power boi len . . ~ ~ . . . ~

Preuureverselr . . . ~ , , , . . , . . . ~ . . ~ Welding quallficationr . . , , . . , , , . ~ . ~ . Fiberglarr-rctnforced plast~c~presure veneln . . . . . . . Rules tor hiemice lnrpection ot nuclear reactor coolant systems . . ~ .

~ i ~ i n g f o r inaust r ia i piants and marlne a m l i ~ a t i o n ~

section - . i . 2 . , 3 . . 4

. 5 , . 6 . . 7 , 8 . . 9 , . 10

~ 11

C O D I - - - R ML-" - PIPI"" 7 C E

Requlfemenis tor merchant and naval vessels are contained in the to l l ow lng

standards

(1 1 -Ameracan Bureau of Shtppmg: 'Rules t o r bu i ld ing and classing vessels

121 Lloyds' Register of Shipping: 'Rules'

13) US Coast Guard: 'Marme engmeerlng regulations and ma:er~al specl-

fica:ions

(4) US Navy, Bureau of Ships: 'General spec i i icat~ons to r bu i ld ing naval

vessels'. 'General machinery specificatlons'

SELECTED S T A N D A R D S 7.5.6

The to l l ow ing tables are not comprehensive: a selection has been made t f o m

standards relat~ng to p lp lng des~gn and technology. Sources of these standards

may be tound tram table 7.1. Addresses of the issulng organizations may be tound t r o m the current edit~on ot 'Encyclopedia of associations: Vol I, Nat~onal organzat lons ot the Un~ted States' (Gale Reseafch Company).

STANDARDS FOR SYMBOLS AND DRAFTING TABLE 7.3

ASTH A53

ASTH A106

ASTH A134

ASTH A135

ASTH A312

ASTH A335

ASTM A524 API 51

ee i or ,ran

STANDARDS FOR HANGERS AND SUPPORTS TABLE 7.6

S ~ e c l f ~ c a t l o n for r e l a m and sean~ess steei o w e soecif icatmn fo r senmwss car~on-stee l oloe

roc nigh-teanerature service s p e c ~ f ~ ~ a t l o n for electric-f~~ionldrci-ueioed steel m e . NPS 16 and aver

soeclf lcat lon for electrtc-res~stance-velded s t ~ e l pipe

Speclflcatton f o r seamleis and welded austenltlc s t a i n w s steel DID^

S p e ~ l f l ~ a t l o n fo r seamless r e r r l t l c alloy-steel plee fo r nlgh-temperature service -

S p e ~ l f ~ c a t l o n f o ~ seamless caroon-steel aloe for atsospherlc and lover temperatures

S ~ e c I f ? ~ a t m for ~ l n e DIPC 15L and SLXI

ANSI/ ASUE Y32.2.3 ANSI Y32.4 ANSI Y32.10 ANSI Y14.7

ANSI Y32.11

~ l p l n o

Process En9lneeilng

STANDARDS FOR PIPING (DESIGN A N 0 FABRICATION) TABLE7.4

G T ~ D ~ T C SWOOIS for pwe fittings. valves and p l ~ l n g

Grdenlc ~ m o o l s fo r ~ l u a o l n g f ix tures Graphic ZY~OOIS fcr f l u l a f over ~Iagrams F l m power alagramI

Grdmfc S Y ~ D O K fo r p r o c e ~ ~ flow Glagrams I n - petroieum and chemKai tnaustries

6 s SP-69 AilpllCdtion PlPe hangerr and suomrtz - seoectlon and

a p ~ 1 1 ~ a t l o n

I W~IGBP and seamless wrought-stell owe I ASME 836.1Cb st21n1ess stsilt pine NSI 836.19

ASNE 831

PFI ts-2 P i l ES-7

De51gn

oraft ln9

-

Teit lnl i

Cleanlno

Coior Coding

MSS SP-58 Production

POYW ~ l p l n g code l re fe r t o Taole 7.2)

netnoa fo r dlmenslonlng ~ i ~ l n g arsemblles Mlnlnum length and spdclng for welded nozzles

STANDARDS FOR GASKETS TABLE 7.7

mierrour \ l l oy

1astlcs

Plpe nangers and supports - materlais, deslon and manufacture

~ a b ~ l c a t l o n

H y d m ~ t a t i c test lng of fabricated PIP^

Cleanlng o f fabricated DIDIW

Scheme fo r the l den t l f l ca t l an of ~ i o l o g SYitemS R p r ~ p ~ : d eract lce fo r color codtns of DlDlnQ

euttveldlno ends for plpe. vasves. flanges .... F -., - an I!:

PFI ES-4

PFI ES-5

AliSI Al3.l

PFI ES-22

ouct l le molds o r Iron sana- l l hd pwe cent r i ruqal ly molds for water cast. and I n other l e t a i

l l w l d s

Ducti le l i o n olpe, cen t r l f u a l l " cast. I n metr'l molds or sand-lined molas ?or bas

Speci~ icat lon roc a',ilmlnum and ajunlnun-alloy seamlers proe and extruded seamless tube

Spec1f1cdtlof8 for seamiess comer m e . standard s ~ z e s

spedf lcat lon f o r seanlers red brass Dim. mnaard s1zes

s p e c l f m t l o n for seamless cower a l loy pipe and tuoe

Spe~ i f l ca t l i l n for SeUnieSS nickel oloe and tube

soeclftcatlon fo r cel luiose acetate butyrate ICABl Dld5tlC DIE. SCH 40

Speclricatlon for acrylonltrlle-butadlene- styrene 1 ~ 8 8 1 ~ l a s t f c p ~ p e . SCH 40 and 80

s p e c i f ~ a t l o n fo r DOIYYI~Y~ cnlorlde IPVCI i l ~ a s t i c DID^ SCH 40 80 and 120

spccir icat lon'ror ~ o i ~ e t h y l e n e IPE) p last ic plpe. SCH 40

Speclf lcatwn for acry~onltrlle-Outadlene- styrene IABS) p las t i c DID? ISOR-PRI

s p e ~ ~ f x a t m f o r n o l y ~ l n y i chlor lae IPVCI D I ~ S ~ I C DID^ csoa se r tes ,

Speclflcatfon fo r polyetnylene IPEI p l ~ t l c PlDe ISIOR-PRI tk35ed on control led inside diameter

POIYVIIIYI NPS 4 thru cnlor lde NPS 12 IPVCI pressure pine fo r water

PO'IyethYlene IPEI DrezSure pipe. tub1119 and ' f l t t l n g s f o r water NPS 112 tnru NPS 3

PO8ybUtYlene (Pa) pressure ~ l p e tuolng and r i t t ~ n g r fo r water NPS 112 tnrb NPS 3

GIW, f l o w reinforced pme

ANSIIAWA5l Cl5llAZl.5l

ANSI A21.52

ASTM 8241

ASTM 842

ASTM a43

ASTM 8315 1518 8161

ASTM 01503

ASTM 01527

ASTM 01785

ASTM 02104

ASTM 02282

ASTR 02241

AS111 02239

AWA C900

AwA c901

AWA C902 AWWA C950

AS% 816.20

&PI 601

AWE 816.21

Am4 C l l l

UL 194

ASTU C l l 15

ne td l l l c

Nanmetalllc

Ring-jolnt gaskets and grooves for steel Dine f lan e i

~ e t s ~ ? ~ gaskets to r ratsea-race pipe Tianger and flanged connecttons ldouble-jacket corrugated and S D I T ~ I - Y O U ~ ~ ~

Nonmetallic f l a t gaskets fo r pipe flanges amper gasket 301nt5 fo r duct l le- I ron and gray- trm pressure W e and f i t t l n g r

Gasketed jo ln t s fo r auct l le l ron and and orsY Iron pressure DIP^ and f i t t l n g s fo r f i r e erotectlon servlce

Standard spedf lcat lon fo r dense e lastwer sl l lcone rubber gaskets and accessories

I N D A OR F I i S I A l Tabla-." TABLE 7 n

STANDARDS FOR VALVES'. TABLE 7.9

S T ~ N D A R D S FOR UNF IRED VESSELS A N D TANKS TABLE 7 1 0

TABLE 7.11 ST~NDARDS FOR FLANGES At4sl 816,10

816,33

ASME 816.34

API 60 AGA 221.70

API 597 API 600 APl 602

APl 603 API 604

ArdA C500

C509

MSS SP-67 AWA C504 API 609

AWdA C508 API 594

NSS SP-71

API 608

MSS SP-72 AWA C507

AS1iE PIC25 API 526

ISA RP75.O

ISA S75.03

ISA 571.011

ISA 575.1)

GenWd'l

rjate v a ~ v e s

o ~ t t w r l y

check vawes

Ba i l v s ~ v e s

Rel ief

C O ~ ~ F O I

~ a c e - t o - f a ~ e and end-to-end dimensions of ferrous v a l v e s . classes 125 t h w 2500 (gate. globe. o ~ u g 1 and check valves1

~ ~ a n u s i l y operated me ta l l i c gas valves for use 3n gas o io lng systems up t o 125 PSIG i s l zes NPS 112 t h ru NPS 21

V ~ I Y ~ I flanged and but tve la ingend -- s tee l . n icke i a l loy . and other special a l l oys

s p e c i n c a t ~ o n f o r p i ec l i ne valves (s tee l gate. D I U ~ , o a l l m a check valves)

~ a r t n ~ ~ a k e ac t iva ted automatx gas shutoff s ys t l n

s t ee l ventur i gate valve%. flanged ana b u t t - ue ld lng enas

s tee l gate Y a ~ ~ e ~ . flanged and but t -ve ld lng ends chnpact s t ee l gate valves c lass 150 cast. c ~ r m s i o n - r e s i s t a n t flanged en0 9dW V a I V B S

~ u c t i l e - i r o n gate valves. flanged ends Gate vaivez. NPS 3 t h ru NPS 48. f o r water an0

s e w e systems Resilient seated gate valves. NPS 3 t h r u NPS 12,

f o r water and sewage systems

B u t t e r f l y valves Rubber seated b u t t e r f l y va lves Bu t t e r f l y valves, lug-type and wafer - t~Pe

swing check va l ves f o r vateruorks service. NPS 2 t h ru NPS 24

safer c h m valves cast - i ron swing check valves. flanged and

threaded ends

8 a l l values-flanged and butt-weldlng ends 8a11 vaive5 wi th flanged o r buttweldin9 ends

for general service Ba l l valves. NPS 6 t h ru NPS 48

safety m a relief valves Flanged s tee l sa fe t y - r e l i e f v a m s c o n t d g valve mdnlfold a e i i g n ~ - - recornended

prdc t lce face-torracp dimensions f o r flanged globe-style

~ o n t r o l w i v e boo le i (ANSI classes 125. 150. 250 300 and 6001

~ & t ~ - r a c ~ d ~ p e n ~ i o n ~ for f iange ie is controt valves $ANSI classes 150. 300 and 6001

face-to-face d7nenSlons f o r buttveld-end globe- s t y l e cont ro l va lves IAN51 c l a s s 45001

STANDARDS FOR SCREW THREADS FOR PIPING. NUTS A N D BOLTS TABLE 7.12

Dryseal pipe Threads

Hose Threads

MI 81.1 ANSI 1 ASNE 81.20.1

Genera I

screw threads and gaskets f o r f l r e hose connection;

un l f f ed tnch screw threads IUN h UNR thread form) Pipe threads. general purpose l i n c h l

Nomenclature. d e t l n l t i o n s and l e t t e r SMnbols f o r SCWY threads

Dryseal p i l ie threads 1 inch1 Dryseal o l ~ e threads ime t r i c t rans la t ion of

ANSI 81.20.31

Hose couv l lng screw threads f o r a l l connections having hose l i n i l a e r alaneters of 112. 518, 314. 1 . 1 114. 1 112. 2. 2 112. 3, 3 112 and 4 lnches l e x c e ~ t f i r e hose1

1 NFPA 1963-851

ASME B1.7,i

ANSI 81.20.3

ANSI 81.20.4

ASK 81.20.7

S T A N D A R D S F O R P R I M E MOVERS TABLE 7.14

sr I-TUDF' ir he, anger. emica 15 m s l 8 w . 1

API 660

ASTn A119lM

ASTM A l 9 9 l n

ASTM A2131N

ASW 8163

API 661 API 632

ASUE PTCI2.1 ASIIE PTC4.3 ARI 470-80

E~...~..,ers

~ i r Exchdngen

Heaters

GenWd i

cen t r f fugd ! P~PI

~011 t l ve 0 1 5 ~ l d ~ m n t

CDRW~SIO~S. ezhduster i an0 e l e c t o r s

.-- . lce Shel l -and-tune exchanger5 f o r general r e f i n e r y

se rv ices S v e c i f l c a t l o n f o r m m m s COIO-dram I O Y - C ~ ~ D O ~

s t e e l heat exchanger ana condenser tunes S ~ e c l f a ~ a t l i i n f o r s e m e i i c o l a - a r m in te rned-

l a t e a l l o y s t e e l neat exchanger and condenser tunes

S v e ~ i f i ~ a t l o n f o r reamiesr f e r r l t i c and aurten- l t i c a l l o y s t e e l Do l le r , suv t rhea te r an0 heat- exchanger tunes

S v e c l f l c a t i o n f o r seamiens nlcke l and n i c k e l a l l w c o n a e n ~ e r and heat exchanger tunes

AIT coolea nes t exchangers for genera! r e f i n e r y s e r v i c e

W l n t e r i i l n g o f a l r - cao ied heat erchangers

Closed feedwater heaters Performance t e s t cooe -- a i r heaters Deiuverheater /vdter heaters

S ~ e c l f l c a t i o n f01- v~!nving u n i t s P o s i t i v e a~sn ' la~ernen t vumvs -- r e c i v r o c a t l n g P o s i t i v e aisolacement v u m -- c o n t r o l l e a volume P U ~ S f o r o l l nurning anvl iances

C e n t y i f u m V U ~ P S S v e ~ l f l ~ a t l o n ~ for hor l lon ta ' l end suc t ion c e n t r i f u g u a l v u l v r f a r chemical process

SneClfiCatiOnS fop v e r t i c a l i n - l i n e c e n t r l f u g u s l vunvs f o r chemical vroces

c e n t n r u m t m m s f o r &dl r e f i n e r y se rv tce

D l ~ v l a c e m e n t D U ~ P S i v e r f a m a n ~ e t e s f cocel R e ~ i ~ r o ~ d t l n g ~ ~ t e a m ~ a r i v e n d l ~ v l d ~ e h e n t vumvs Dlsvlacement COnvreSSOrs. vacuum vumnr and O l w e r s

Safety standara f o r ~ o m v r e s ~ o r s f o r i imce~i i n a u s t r l e s

l n s t a l l a t l o n o f blowers and exhaust systems Centrifugal COnvreSSors f o r genera, refinery

SeTYlCBS C O ~ P T ~ S S O T S and e ~ h a ~ s t e r s - verformmce t e s t code E j e c t o r s - verformance t e s t cooe

APl 11E API 614 API 675 UL 343

ASME PTC8.2

ASElE 873.1M

AS~IE 873.2M API 610

ASNE PTC7. 1 ASllE Pic7 ASElE PIC9

ASME 819.3 IIFPA 91

API 617 Asi l i PTcto ASI~E ~ 1 ~ 2 4

ABBREVIATIONS USED ON PIPING DRAWINGS, DOCUMENTS, Etc. 8.1

A A

ABS AGA AlSl ANSI AP I ASTM AWS AWWA

B BBL BC BLE ELK BLVD BOP

BS BTU BW

C C

CENT CFM CHU CI CM Cr CS

CSC

CSO CTR CU

D DEG DIA DIN

00 DRG DWG

(11 Air (2) Absolute Absolute American Gas Association Amerlcan lron and Steel Institute Amertcan National Standards Institute Amerlcan Petroleum Institute American Soc~ety tor Testing and Materlals American Welding Soclety American Waterworks Associatlon

Barrel Bolt ctrcle Beveled large end Black - . - Beveled Bottom lo t outside] plpe support locatlon Brit~sh Standard British thermal Unlt (1) Bun weld (2) Bun welded

o t pipe. Used tor

(1) Centigrade. or Celsius 2 Condensate Cent~grade Cubtc teet per minute Centtgrade heat unlt Cast lron Centimeter Chromium (1) Carbon steel 121 Cold sprlng Car-sealed closed. Denotes a valve t o be locked in the closed posltton under all rmumstances other than repair to adjac- - -

ent piping Car-sealed open. See CSC Center Cubic

Degree Diameter Deutsche lndustr~e Norm IGerman standard 1 Drawmg office Drawing. lNot preterredl Drawing

E E East ECN Englneerlng change number EFW Electric-tus~on-welded ELL Elbow ERW Electric-resistance-welded

F F F&D FAHR FBW FCN FD&SF FE FF

F LG FLGD FOB

FOT

FRP FS FW

Fahrenhett Faced and drilled Fahrenheit Furnace-butt-welded Field change number Faced, drilled and Spotfaced Flanged end (I) Flat taceld) (2) Full face l o t gasket1 (3) Flange face Idimens~oningl Flange Flanged 111 Flat on bottom. llndicates orientatton ot eccentric reducer1 (2) Fre~ght on board. llndicates locatton ot supply of vendor's trelght at the stated price1 (31 Free on board. llndicates locatlon ot supply ot vendor's tre~ght] Flat on top. llndicates orwttatlon ot eccentric reducer] (Glass-] fiber reinforced plpe Forged steel Field weld

G G Ill Gas

121 Grade 131 Gram

GAL Gallon GALV Galvanized GPH Gallons per hour GPM Gallon per minute

H (1) Horizontal (21 Hour

HEX Hexagonlall Hg Mercury HPT Hose-pipe thread HR Hour

I IE invert elevation

11411

IMP IPS IS IS0 IS&Y

M

MACH MATL MAWP MAX MCC MIC MFR MI MIN

mm Mo MSS

(1) lnssde diameter (2) Internal diameter Imperial. IBritlsh unltl lron plpe size Inside screw. [Of valvesteml lsometr~c drawmg lns~de screw and yoke

Kilo, tunes one thousand, xlOOO Kilogram

Liqu~d Pound we~ght Light-wall lot Pipe] Long radius. [Of Elbow1

(1) Meter (2) Mega, tunes one million. 1 000000.

[On old drawings, xlOOO1 Machlned Material Maxvmum allowable working pressure Maximum Motor control center Machine Manutacturer Malleable lron (I) Minmum (2) Minute. lOf tlmel Millimeter Molybdenum Manufacturers' Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry

N N North NC Normally closed NEMA Natlonal Electrical Manutacturers' Assn. Ni Nickel NIC Not in contract NO Normally open NPSC 2.5.5 NPSF 2.5.5 NPSH 11 ) Net positlve suction head.13.2.11

(2) 2.5.5 NPSl 2.5.5 NPSL 2.5.5 NPSM 2.5.5

7.1 3 -7.1 4 I"""

NPTF I

0 0 OD 0s OS&Y

P P&ID PBE PE PFI POE PS

PSI PSlA PSIG

R RE0 RF RJ RPM RS

s S

SCH

SF S KT SM LS Si SO SP

SR SST ST STM STD STR SW SWG SWG ) NlPP I SWP

T T

T&C TEM A TGT TOE TOS TPI TSE TYP

-. . . - Schedule. [Of nlnel . . Sc. Spot-faced Socket Seamless Silicon

"

,,"+ 2.L.d UNF 2.6.3 UNS 2.6.3

v V - 11) Vertical

121 Vanadium

W W (1) West

121 Water WGT Wetght WLD Weldled) WN Welding neck WOG Water, oil and gas WP (1 1 Workpomt or reference point

(21 Markings wtth this prefix destgnate - certain steels and are used on ptpe, fin~ngs and plate. Example: 'WPB' marked on torged fiRings denotes A181 grade 2. Reter to ASME SA- 234, tables 1 and 2.

WT Weight

X XH Extra-heavy. [See Index! XS Extra-strong XXS Oouble-extra-strong

OTHER $ Centerline @ Diameter

Oil Outside diameter Outside screw. lValve stem1 Outside screw and yoke. lvalvesteml

Slip-on ( 1 ) Sample point 12) Standard practice. [MSS term) Short radius. [Of elbowi Stainless steel Steam trap Steam Pla~n end. IPipe, etc.1

Pipe Fabricatton lnstltute Standard ~tratght Socket welding Swage

Plaln one end. INip~le, etc.1 lli Pipe support. !Anchor, guide or shoe. OF items combined t o t o m the

Swaged nipple

Steam working pressure 12) Pre-sprtng Pound lwe~qhtl oerwruare ~nch. IPressurel Pound per &ware inch absolute Pound ber square inch gage

(1) Temperature (21 Trap Threaded and coupled. IPipel Tubular Exchanser Manufacturers' Assn.

Reducmg Ralserl face

Tanoent ~hreaded one end. [Nipple or Swagei Top of support Threads per inch Threaded small end Typml. IUsed t o avoid redrawing similar 1 South

(2) Steam

ABBREVIATIONS FOR COMMERCIAL CHEMICALS 8.2

ABBREVIATION CHEMICAL NAME AREA OF USE D OAP DCO DMC

Diammontum phosphate Agriculture Pant Refining

Dehydrated castor oil Dimethylammonium dimethyl

ADA AEA ANW

Acetone dicarboxylic acid Air-entratntng agent 83% ammonium nitrate !n water

Drugs Concrete

wrbamate Dimethyl tormamide Dimethylurea Oinonyladipate Dinonyi maleate Dinonyl phthalate Dinitrotoluene Dioctvl ohthalate

DMF DMU DNA DNM

Plastics Plastics Plastics Explosives Plastics General

Fuel Food General Food General

DNP DNT DDP

BHA BHC

Butyiated hydroxyanisole Benzene hexachloride

BHT BOV

Butylated hydroxytoluene 77.78% sulfuric acid ('blown oil of vitreol') Benzaldehyde Benzotc actd

OOV . .

96?& sulfurtc acid ('distilled oil ot v~treol'l Disodium ~hosphate DSP

DTBP DVB DPG DOPA

General Plastics Plastics Rubber Rubber

BzH BZOH

General General

~itert iaw-butyl peroxide Divinyl benzene Oiphenyl guanidine 3.4-dihydroxyphenylaniline

co cov

Carbon monoxide 95.96% sulfuric acid I'concentrated oil of vitreol') Carbon dioxide

General

General E A EOTA

Ethylidene aniline Ethylene diamine tetra-acetic acid

Rubber Food

F FA Furturyl alcohol General FG AN Ammonium nttrate Agriculture FPA Fluorophosphortc acid FREON One of a large number ot chloro- or Retrigeratlon.

fluoro- substituted hydrocarbons General

General

General

Rocketry Soaps Fuel

General Paint. General

Exploslves Food

- 'B OPE 0 2

P PAS PB PBNA PDB PE

HCN Hydrocyantc acid, hydrogen wanide Plating HET Hexa-ethyl tetraphosphate Agriculture HMDT Hexamethylene trtperoxide HMT Hexamethylene tetramtne HNM Mannitol hexanltrate Explosives HTP 100% hydrogen peroxide Rocketry.

('high test peroxide'). General Branched aliphattc alcohols of high b.pt.

HZ0 Water

IMS Commerctal ethyl alcohol tBrit.1 I PA Jsophthalic acid I PC lsopropyl n-phenyl carbonate IPS lsopropyl alcohol (Shell Oil CO.)

LOX Liquid oxygen LPC Lauryl pyridinium chloride LPG Liquefied petroleum gases, mainly

butane and propane

MBMC Monoteritary butyl-methyl-cresol MEK Methyl-ethyl-ketone

MEP 2-methyl. 5ethyl pyridine MlBC Methyl isobutyl carbinol MlBK Methyl-isobutyl-ketone MN A Methyl-nonyl acetaldehyde MNPT mmtro p-toluidine MNT Mononitro toluene MSG Monosodium glutamate

NBA n-brornacetamide NBS n-bromosucc~namide NCA n-chloracetamide

n-chlorosuccinamide NH powder Explosive powder

Nitrogen

PETN PTFE PVA or PVAL PVAc PVB PVC PVM

R RNV

S SAP SDA SO2

T TCA TCE TCP

TEG TE L TEP TFA TNA TNB TNG TNM TNT TNX TOF TPG TSP

Octamethvl ovrophosohoramide .. . robip ., Octylphenoxyethanol Oxygen Ozone

p-arnmosalicvlic acid Poiybutene Phenyl beta-naphthylamine p-dichlorobenzene Penta-erythrltol Penta-erythrttol tetranttrate Polvtetrafl~orethylene

~ol;vin;l chldrtde Polyvmyl methylbethel

Sulfurtc acid ['refined oil ot v~treol'l

Sulfur Sodium acid pyrophosphate Specially denatured alcohol Sulfur dioxide

Sodium tetrachloracetate 1,l .I-trtchlorethane Tricresyl phosphate

Triethylene glycol Tetraethyl lead Tetraethyl pyrophosphate Tetrahydroturturyl alcohol Trinttroaniline Trinttrobenzene Trin~troglycerlne Trinitromethane Trinetrotoluene Trinitroxylene Trioctyl phosphate Triphenyl guantdine Trisodium o-phosphate Tetrasodium phosphate

Vinyl acetate

Zinc methylarsenate

Agriclllture PI;..."" Refining General

Drugs Plastics Rubber Agrtculture

Exploslves Plasttcs

General

General

General General

Agriculture Dry cleaning Fuel. Plastics Refining Fuel Agriculture

Exploslves Explostves Explostves

Explosives Explosives Plastics Rubber

Timber

A BRA5iQCK URL'IUE. 3.1.11. Value machined from

a l l i d metai ASB~ViRllOPIS. B BXilERY LIMIT. a r b i t r a w l i n e shown on drau- R85LUTE TE~ERRTURE. lit absoiute zero ten- ~ n g s t o define an-plot and o f f - p i o t areas. perature a l l movemml of matter ceases. This nisn used to define l i m i t s of cant iactuai terreratuie is theo ie t icz l l y unattainable. i e rpnns ib l l i t v w i t h i n an on-plot area fibsolute zero: Celsius scale . . . . . . -273.lSC

Fahienheit scale... -459.677 nCCE55 TO VCLUE. E.1 .i nFwccoLin. 3.2.2 RGITRTOR. tabie 3.7 RIR IN siinin. 6.9.1. 6.10.h nIR LIME. L iqurd ieiravar 6.1i.b ALLOYS. For P i p e 2.7.4 R'iiIEMT. Pertaining t o the suriaundings. u . 1 ~ 1 1 ~ i e f e i s to temperature

WERICRN STRMJRROS R550CIRTIOEI 7.3 R ~ H I R . 2.12.2, 6.2.~. A pipe f i r t v i e used LO

m i d p ~ p i n g i i g xd i y a t r chrsen point . pos i t ion where prping i s res t ia ined i s tenred the 'anchor po:ntS

RRGLE VALVE. 3.1.5 na51. 7.3 nRCHIUE. Place where drawings. sp=cificir-

t i m s etc., may be perwnent ly stored

EENT. 6.1.2 BEVEL. The end. of pipe and bu t t - ue ldhg

, a id f i t t i n g s axe beveled (see chart 2.1) t i

EIEED VRLVE. 3.1.11. f i gu i e 2.60 BLEWER. 3.3.2. table 3.7 BLIRO FLRKE. 2.7.1. 2.7.2. f i g v i e 2.51. Flange without cen t i a l opening, used for c~asure of flanged terminations. Rated slmi laciy t o a the i types of flanges - see 'Flange Oata': Par t I1

BLOCK URLVE. 3.1.11 BLOinOW VRLVE. 3.7.11 BLoinown ~YSTEM. n (discharge) p ip ing

suit-welding. 2.3.3. f igure 2.20 Thceaeed. 2.5.4. f i gu i e 2.54 socket-welding. 2.4.h. f igu ie 2.36

CRREON STEELS are iron-based a l lovs having p i a p e i L i e ~ ch ie f l y determrmd bv t h e r i carban content

CRTCt3RSIN. Receptacle dssigned t o separate

CRTCl;Slll. Reaervoxr oc basin CIilhnOIC PiOlECTION. Buried prpe can be

pi0tecti.d from corrosion by v r r i ng bu i ied 5 u c r i i i m a i anodes (usual ly cyl inders of zrnc) LO the pipe. Garvanxc coiraaian then tends to C C C ~ in the zmr mstead o f the steel. Protect ion m y also b piavided by means of e l ec t r i c voltage* and ground current5

CRUITAIIOEI. 6.3.1 CONIROL URLE. 3.1.10. f igure 3.1: CELSIUS = C~ntigrade. Rt etmosphcnc p r e i s u i i COESEYED FLUID. This t e rn is used in the

l a t sea level) , an the Celsxus scale, zero Guide for l i q u i d or gas c a r r i ~ d by Prplng

i s thi! t w e r z t u z e a: which rce Foims; water COOLER. Heat exchanger used t o coor praccss bo i l 5 a t 100. table R-6. tab le fl-7 f l u l d

CENTRIFUGE. 3.3.5. table 3.8 COOLING MUTER. Uater used t o csol process CERTIFIED DRAUlCGfPRIPII. F i n a l vendor's p r i n t f l u i d or equipmnt

o f eempnent shou~ng dinens~ons which v i l l COOROINRIE. 5.3.1 be maintained d u r ~ n g manuractuie COPYING PROCESEE5. 4.b.11

CitlTlERIHG. 3.8 .ri CORRDSIOil. Conveyed f l u i d inav attack mater- CSCK V R L V ~ . 3.1.7 L E ~ S f r m which p ~ p z and f i t t i n g s are wde. CH~CKER. u.,.z. 5.Y.i i h e deoreee o f corioaian w i l l dewno on the

. ,- R5n. 7.3 - arrangerrent roc iermumg mater ia l from a LTIRIIIOPI. See 'Change of P a i t i c l e Size', p ro~ess. vessel, bo i l e r , etc. 3.3.U BLOL".R. 3.2.2

RUTOCLRV~ uessci in which material or icact- BLO~WF SYSlER. P ip lng hookup v ~ e d f o r mt+ are he ld under cant ro l ied conditions blowma scale end foreion matter f r m tanks, CHIEF ORRFlSWN. 4.8.2

BRCX SLD. I n piping, a Continuous Weld nade ?it the back o f a butt-meid. Possible only if there 15 access t o the i ' n t e r i o i

enu(ctDCK. 5.u.i BRCKING RING = C h i l l i m g . c h ~ r t 2.1.

f igure 2.') BRLL FLOAT unLwi. 3.1.9 BRLL UCLUE. Check u a u e . 3.1.7 RCI UIIIUE. Rotaiv. 3.1.6 . .. -

BnR. i r a d i t i o n a l r r t r i c u n i t of Pressvie a p p r o x i w ~ e l ~ equal to 't atmosphere. 5ee l ~ l ~ I C ' - introduct ion, Par t 11. table M-7

enawlnrc LEG. I f a pracsas uhich takes

plIce below stmospher~c piessuie requi ies wter or other i i q u l d t o be continuously diainpd from it, t h i s m y be achieved bv cavlect ing the d ra i n t o a v e r t i c a l PIC?

termed a 'baraaetr i r re;'. the lover end of &ich rs l naer tcd in n seal pot. When the Leg and sea, are p r i e d w i t h l i qu i d , dm inmg from r mu-piesauzc process can

confinuousiy. 1 f the pressure or the

pzoccss approaches zero iabsoiute), the leg st be a t ,cast 34 f t i n height

BNISTOCK PLUG. 2.S.U. f igure 2.55

boi lers, etc. BLDLCFF VnLuE. :.1.9 6OILER FEEDMATER. 6.10.2 EONFEI. 3.1.2 BOTiDmi. See ' C o l t m Opeiatian'. 6.5.2 BSEEC~UXX. 5ee 'Bonnet', 3.i.2 BREUKING ~Ih'r5. f igure 5.10 BRERTH~R wnLvE. ~ 1 . 1 1 BRIIISH S i n m n m IEISTITU~IOEI. 7.3 BRUEIING 0.4.11 BUILDING LAYOUT. 6.15.: BUILDING5. I n r e l a t i on Lo piping. 6.15.

f igures 6.49 6 5.50 BMLHERO TEE. 2.3.2 m u . see 'DIKE' EURIED PIPE. Dimnsromng. table 5.2 BURSTING DISC = i u i l t u i e disc. 3.1.9

BUSHING, HEXQGON. Threaded. 2.5.1.

f igure 2.&2 BUTT-ELOED PIPE IDINTS. 2.3 BUTTERFLY URLUE. 3.1.6 BWRC5. Valved length o f p l p m g that allows

f u l l ni p a r t i a l flaw, arranged around a wive, vaive assembly, equipment, etc. See f igures 5.6 t h i u 6.11 fo r exampies

GYPRSS wnLuE. :.~.ii

c cnp

~ s e d i n s m e globe values COWRESSCR. 3.2.2 Piplog. 6.3.2

C o m m s q n I R LINES. Drainmg of. S.it.6 COMENSXTE. 5.9.1. 6.10.2 CONMCIOR

pipe-to-twe. 2.5.1. f igure 2.bl Ovrci comecto;. 2.6.1

CO~!~OLE. iin arrangeasnt of gages and controls mmnted i n z desk or cabinet, ficm which a process may be mcnitored and cont ro l led

CONZlRNi LORD HRPIGER. 2.12.2 COElTINURTIOIl SKEI. 5.e 'Process S Service

~ i n e s on Piping Oraumgsr, 5.2.8. nny theat an which i n f o m t i o o i s cont i rued

COEIIROL 5TRiION. 6.1.4. f igures 6.6 t h i v 5.11

5wb01. chart 5.7

CHILL RING = Backing r ing . chart 2.1. f i g 2.7 CIVIL PIPlIG. 'b.1 CLEAVOUT. Rirangenant far creanlng out e l i n e

0: vessel CLERSRNE. 6.1.1. tabie 6.i. chart P-2 CL05IBG DOLBi LINES. 6.7.3 CLOSURES. PerwnwnL. f igure 2.20 Butt-welding. 2.3.: Threaded. 2.5.4 Socket-welding. 2.4.b

CLOSURES. Impoiary. 2.7. tab le 2.E COR51 ti GEOOEIIC SURVEY. 5.3.1 CORIIKGS. For pwe. 2.i.b COCK. S i rp ie piug valve in the smaller sizes COOE5. 7.5.

REIS1 837. Cod. f o r pressure prpmg. 7.5.1 R5PZ Bai ler and pressvie ues4ei code. 7.5.u

COLD 5PRIE:G. 6.1 f igure 6.2 COLOR COOING Nodei. L.4.32 Piping. nNSI R13.1

COLWN, F i a c t i a n a t i o n l O i s t i I i ~ t i i i . 6.5.2. tabie 3.8

CDLWSI PIPING. 6.5.2 CDmRCITIL PIPIEIG. l .i COPPRAlOli FLRIXE. H flange, or a f ianglng

arrangerent, custom-fabricated t o a t e wit,, a mn-standard f l a m e an a i tem o f e a v ~ o ~ n t . .

COPPOSITIDII DISC. 5.1.5. Nan-metallic disc COIlTCIWENI. 5ee DIKE

. . temperatvie and concentration, time of exposme, possible pieaence of water or a x , and ehethei galvanic ac t ion is arso present

CORROiION RLLOULltCE. Rddit ianai thickness o f metal i n excess of that culcvlated fox

stien;th COWLIRG

Threaded. FML-. 2.5.1, 2.5.3. f igures 2.37. 2.09

Threadad. HRLF- 2.5.3. f igure 2.69 i h i eabd . REOUCER-. 2.5.1. f i gme 2.38 5 e k e ~ - ~ l d i n ~ . FULL-. 2.li.l. f i r u re 2.21 - - ~

Socket-veiding. HRLF-. 2.11.3. f igure 2.31 5mket-ueidirg. REDUCER. 2.4.1. f igu ie 2.22

CRRZH PRkEL. BieakBble panel t h i u uhich peis- amel nay escape rim a hazard in a bu i ld ing

CROSS Butt-welding. 2.3.2. f igure 2.17 Threaded. 2.5.2. f igure 2.48 socket-welding. 2.4.2. f i gu i e 2.30

CRYOGENIC. ~ e f e r s t o very raw teapeiatures and eqv rp rn t used a t these twpeiatures. Tem usuallv app l ie i t o -2OOF and co ide i

CYCLONE. 3.3.:-tabic 3.6

DRI'PECR.

For cmpressoi. 3.2.2 Hydiaulic. 2.i2.2

ORSrPUi. Piston-Lype ifevlce use0 Tor oaaping PIP' mi" l i r i i i i y ; L..,aLnL. , -.,-. *-....-. m.cnnn~cai rroumrnt oolirmwa. a lin= ,,diirh T D ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i l do- "*my i m - ?2.2. *:-..-- 2 . 7 2 ~ L-l-,. 6.: ' ta t icn - ' -

OUTL 'Ver e fe re i , .:.I ward .:ELI=. .... i i I I,~EIPTEII. ~ ~ u e p e n d e m a w p l y o f varer f o r ORUIT. 6.5.2. f i g u i e 6.27 OOiliHERPi. 6.9.:. See 'Jacketing' . 6.6.2

E f i r e f i g h t i q

DAY TANK. Term used f o r s t o i a g e tan*, hoiding ORRFlIhG FIRST-RIO STRTION. Location. 6.1.2

l i m i t e d SUPPLY of f u e l , e tc . Ccntioi s ta t ions . 6.1.4. c h a r t 5.7 FITlIAG MEWELP. 5.3.3 DEAD WEIGHTING. method of msasurmg pressuie material*. 4.a EDLCTDR. 3.3.2. t a b l e 3.7 Dimensioulmg foi . 5.:.5

of f l u e i n a l i n e . Oevrce havlng a platform Pinlno 5.2.6 EFFLUENT. 6.13 FITTINGS. 2.2.6 on which weights can be placed. t e n ~ o i a r i l y f i t t e d Lo v e r t i c a l valved branch; e i g h t s balance l i n e p rc l su ie . Used for c a l i b r a t i o n

DEUOPVIN. R ~ h m permanently l e t m t o ground f o r e r e c t i o n ourooles. Used f o r securmo . . c a b l s s

OERERRTOR. 3.3.3. t a b l e 3.6 OEFLECTIO$! OF PIPE. 6.2.6. See 'SPANS. For

Pipes ' , P a r t I1 DEFOAPER. 3.3.3. t a b l e 3.6 DEmiNERRLIZEO WATER. Uater v i t h a l l f a r m at hardness i d i s s o ~ v e d m i n e i a s l T ~ P L I Y E ~

DESICCUFII. R d r v ~ n g agent , such a s cnncen- t r a t e d s u l f u n c a c ~ d or s i l i c a g e l

OESICCATOR. Equrpmnt f o r renaumg water or o t h e r l i w r d f i m a process i n a t s i a i by a p p ~ y m g uacuun, hea t , or bv chenicai means

OESUPERhZRTER. Device f o r reduclng suacrheat lo steam. uauz l ly bv adding watei t o the steam

DEIAIL. s e e 'Eleuations ( S e c t i a m j &

D e t a i l s ' , 5.2.6 OEIIQOINT. Temperature a t which a vapor f o r m

l i q u l d ( 'dm' ) on cooling DIAPtWAGW VALUE. 3.1.11 .,

-. ~ <

Synb0ll. 5.1 DRMTING PVICHINES. 4.4.6 DRAFlSR4N. 4 2 . 2 ORAIN Location. 6.1.1. f i g u i e 6.67 On PbIO. 5.2.4 On p w . 6.3.1 synboi. char t 5.7. c h a r t 5.26

DR.318 HUB. F m w i f i t t e d m f loor and cnn- netted t o a dram l i n e

D R A I N UULVE. 3.1.11 On~iNncE. 11) System of diarns. ( 2 ) Act or process of d iamlng

ORRINI% R i i l ine . 6.11.U 5Lsm l ine . 6.10.4. 6.10.9

0RRWIl:G ENmER. 4.2.4 OERLiItS PRPER. 4.4.1 Sizes. See 'Paper', 4.4.1. char t S-6m

DRAWING REGISTER. Se= 'Draumg Control' 4.2.4

ORRUING SEE15 5 i r ra . s e e 'Paper', 6.Y.r. char t S-6W

ORRUING5 Breaking l i n e s t o show 'hidden pxpmg' an

OIRZO. 4.4.11 OIKE. Shaped wal l oi errbankment surirunding

draumgs. f i g u i e 5.10 Elevation. 5.2.6, 5.2.6. f i g u i e s 5.5 & 5.7

one or moie s t o r a g e tanks t o form a basin Flov l i n e s on f l o v diagram. 5.2.3 a b l e t o hold t h e con ten ts of tankls) , m the Flaw l i n e s on PhID. 5.2.4 event o f rupture. I n t h s US, usvally 100% of Grid system. See 'P51D Lavaut': 5.2.4 t h e l a r g e s t tan* or 10% of the t o t a i , uhich- I r i ~ t r m e n t conni)ctiona an piping drauings. ever 13 g r e a t e r 5.2.6

DIENSIONIhZ. 5.3. f i g u r e 5.13. t ab le 5.2 Iao. 5.2.6. f igures 5.6. 5.7 h 5.15 Buried plpe. t a b l e 5.2 Issiiing. 5.4.3 E isva t ions . 5 c c 'Plan Vieu P i p m g O r i l ~ i ~ g s ' . Key plan. 5.2.7. f igure 5.6

5.2.8, 5.3.3. f i g u r e 5.12. t a b l e 5.2 Oblique. 5.2.6. f igure 5.7 F i t t i n g nukeup. 5.3.3 Orthographic. 5.2.6 Gasket. 5ec 'Dimensionmg t o Joints'. 5.3.3 P i c t a i l a l . 5.2.6 15s. 5.3.4. f i g u r e 5.15 Pipxng and instrvrrintat ion diagram. 5.2.4 O i f s e t s f o r i s o . f i g u r e 5.16 Plan. 5.2.6, 5.2.6 Piping draumg. 5.3.2 P lo t plan. 5.2.7 Reference l i n e . f igvce 5.13 Process flow diagram. 5.2.3 Spool. 5.3.5. f i g u r e 5.17 matchline. s e e 'Piocess 6 Serulce L i m s on

To j o m t . 5.3.3 Piping 0rauingsr, 5.2.8. f i g v i e 5.8

10 n o z z l e 5.3.3. t a b l e 5.2 ~ u r b ~ i i n g . 4.2.4, 5.2.9 10 p m . See ' P l o t p lan ' , 5.2.7. f i g u i e 6.17 S c h e w t i c diagram. 5.2.2 To value. 5.3.3 S i t e plan. 5.2.7 Vessel. f i g u r e 5.14 Spbols . 5.1

DIRECTIDN OF FLDU LINE. See 'Flow Lines', Vessel. 5.2.7. f igure 5.14 5.2.3 DRESSER COLPLIXG. 2.6.2

OISCHRRGE VALVES. 3.1.9 DRIP VALUE. 3.1.11. R d r a m valve used on DISREO HERO. 2.3.3. d i lp legs uo lur r . c h a r t 1-2 5 izes on diipleps. t ab le 6.10

DISTILLATION COLUFN. 3.3.3. t a b l e 3.6 ORIPLEG. 2.10.5. f igure 2.70 Pipmg. 6.5.2 On PkID. 5.2.4

DIVERTING VRLVE. 3.1.8 On piping draumgs. 5.2.8 DOUBLE-BLOCK-RNU-BLEED. 2.7.1. f igure 2.60. 5izes. t z b l s 6.10 s e e 'makc e m t e n s o c c S s f e ' , 6.1.3 DRIPSHIELD. 6.3.:

DOUELE EXTRR 5TfiOS. 2.1.3. manufacturers' DRY 5TER"I 6.9.1. c h a r t 6.3 wekght des rgna t ion f o r wal l thickness of DRYER. 3.3.3, 6.10.3. t a b l e 3.8

ELBOLE1 Butt-ueiding. :.3.2. f i g u r e 2.14 Threaded. 2.5.3. f i g m e 2.51 Socket-welding. 2.4.3. f igure 2.33

ELBOW = E l i Butt-welding. :.:.I. f i g u r e 2.2 mitered. 2.3.1. f i g u i e 2.5. t e b i e m-2 Threaded. 2.5.1. f igure 2.M Sackot-welding. 2.b.l. f i g u i e 2.26

ELEURTIOW D h e w i a n s . 5.3.2. t a b l a 5.2 Uiews. 5.2.6. See 'Elevations (Sections) h ~ c t a i ~ s ' , 5 . 2 . ~

ELL. See ELBOW EJECTOR. R type of porp i n vhich a p a r t i a l wcum is crea ted by passing steam or other f l u d Under oressuie t h i v a neck o i venturi v i t h a brailch a t the narrowest pazt . Suc- t i o n rs crea ted i n the b r e x h

EOUIPENl I d a n t i f w l p cn f l c v diagram. 5.2.: Identifying an P5IO. 5.2.b

~

Butt-,elding. 2.3. c h a r t 2.1 Ordering. 5.6.3 Thiesded. 2.5. c h a r t 2.3 Sccket-welding. 2.4. c h a r t 2.2

FLAG. l o i d e n t i f y , or t o d rau a t t e n t i o n to , an i t m on a d r a w ~ n g by means of a svndl~i . note, panei ar other w i k

FLAC RflRESTW.. R device t o prevent a flame f r r n t f m n rmvmg upstream m a l i n e o i vessei. For small l i n e s , m y c o n s i s t of a vrir screen. For l a r g e r l i n e s , arrangements of r u l t i p i e p a r a l i e i p l a t e s or tubes are used. Pr inc ipa l lv used on vent l i n e s f i a t2nks. SWdOl. c h a r t 5.7

FLRm*fiBLE LIIIUIO. Safety guidelines. 6.14 FLRllCE. 2.2.3. 2.3.1. f i g u r e s 2.6 th rv 2.10. Bolt and s t u t b o l t fo r . 2.6.3. f igure 2.57.

t ab lcs F Bolt hole. 2.6.2. t a b l e s F Eipmdei. 2.3.8. f i g u i e 2.9 Facing. 2.6.1. f igure 2.56 Gasket. 2.6.4. f i q u i e 2.56. t a b l e 2.5

L i s t . 4.2.2 Lap jo in t . 2.3.2. f i g u r e 2.10. t a b i e s F EOUIPPENT RRRANCERNT DRAWING. 5.2.7 Pressme/T~npera ture r a t i n g s . t a b l e F-9 EOUIPPENllINOEX. 4.2.2 Re&cmg. 2.3.1. f i g u r e 2.6 ERRSING. 0.4.b Thraaded. 2.5.1. f i g m e 2.45. t a b l e s F EVUPIKIRTOR. 3.3.:. t a b l e 3.6 Slip-on. 2.3.1. f i g u r e 2.7. t a b l e s F EXPAWER FLRffiE. 2.3.1. f i g u i e 2.9 Sacket-melding. 2.4.1. f i g u i e 2.27. t a b l e s F EXPAEl5ION. Tnermai m u e m n t . 6.b.1 Welding-neck. 2.3.1. f i g u r e 2.6. t a b l e s F Of s t e e l . c h a r t 6.1 FLAP VALUE. 3.1.11 LOOP. f igure 6.1 FLUESTACK. A s t ack loca ted avav fram the

EXPUNSION JOINT. 2.9.1. f i g v i c s 2.63 t h i v praeessmg erea, t o vhich re1i.r headers mav 2.66 be run f o r buinlng waste hydroceibons or

EXTRR HEAVY. T r i d i t i o n a l term used f o r Class o thg i f l a m a b l e vapors. 6.11.3 250 cas t - i ron f i t t i n g s FLRSN STEPm. 6.9.1

EXTRR STROh%. mnufac ture rs ' deslgnabion f o r FLUSHING wall t h i c k ~ s s of plpe and f i t t i n g s . '2.1.3 S t e m . 6.10.8

EXTRUDED NUZZLE. Hot-formed o u t l e t iwde m Building cans tmct ian . R p iece of metal or pipe oi vessei by pu l l ing shaped d i e s th ru o ther i w t e r i a i used t o cover or p r o t e c t a hold made m the wall fertam j o i n t s f r m t h e upather, such as

& w e a ch ime" jo rns a roof FLRSNPOINT of flamnable l iqu ld . T c w e i a t u r e

a t which the asount of vapor grven of f II FRN. t a b l e 3.3 s v f f i c ~ e n t t o form an l c n i t a b l e nvxtvre v i t h FAHRENHEIT. Scale of temperatwe formerly a i i . Highly f l v m a b l e l i q u i d s have l o u

used i n the English-speaking count r ies , ncu f l a a h p a ~ n t s v ide iv replaced by th* m t e r n a t i o n a l Celsius FLAT FREE. Flange. 2.6.1 l o r Centigiads) .scale. A t atrmspherrc Press- FLEXIBILITY. f igure 6.1 uir 1st sea leue l ) , on t h e Fahrenheit scale, FLEXIBLE PIPINU. 2.9.2 32 is the t e m m t u i e a t uhich i c e fox-: Expansmn jo in t . 2.9.1 water b o i l s a t 212. t a b l e m-6. t a b l e R-7 FLOTRTIDN TANK. t a b l e 3.8

FIELD. ( 1 ) Ccnstructian s i t e ( ' job s i t e ' ) FLOOR STRW. 5ce 'stem', 3.1.2 where p ~ p r n g r* e rec ted . ( 2 ) F i e l d engincei- FLOW OIRGRRPI. 5.2.3 m g o f f i c e FLDU L I E

FIELD ELO. We~g made a t t h e time of e rec t ion on f l a j diagram. 5.2.: of p ip ing a t the s i t e On PkIO. 5.2.b Svntiol for . c h a r t 5.3. f i g u r e 5.15 FLUID. nny m r t e n a l capable of f louing. I n

FILING DRAWINGS. U.3, 4.4.10 the Gmde, term is used t o denote e i t h e r a FILLET MLD. c h e r t 5.9 l i q u ~ d o r a gas. Pouders nay also be FINISHED GRUOE. 5.3.1 considered f l u i d s

,L":"-ou% 3 u . r #",." ""LVC.. -. ,.= ---.~> ~-~ - ~ -

FOOT VALUS. 3.1.7 HEXAGDN BUSHING 2.5.1. f igure 2.42

! NRTT , -a i t e r i a H' :a1 FI. G R ~ E Vertic enters a system fiem outsrde e t e w e T , 5.3. s

FOREIGN PRINT. P r i n t of a drawlno o r m i n r t i n q HOLDING TUFIK. Tank in uhich l i q u i d l o r qul) - - i n another group, dcsartment or canpany

FOREIGN STANDARDS. 7.: FRRCTIONATION COLW. 3.3.3. table 3.8 Pipmg. 6.5.2

FROST L I E . The laves t depth i n the ground which c h i l l s t o 32F IOC)

FULL-COLQLIRG. See COWLING

G GAGE. a deuice f o r meassing or registering ~ e ~ e i , pieasuie, tenpeiatuie, etc.

GAGE GLASS. ~ 1 4 s ~ ~ s e d t o show l i q u l d ieue i , U S U ~ ~ ~ Y m the form o f a ve r t i ca l glass tube u i t n end connections

GULUAIIIIIIIG. The coating of metal w i th rim bv e iec t iap la t ing or hot-dipmog

GRSKET. 2.5.b. table 2.5 ~irrensianmg. Sea 'Oimenslcning t o Joints ' ,

5.3.: GATE VALVE. 3.1.4 GIRT. R ho i zzon ta~ menber of a bu i l d i ng t o

vhich tho panris facrmq the sides of the Liv i ld ing are F i t t e d

GLAND. H sieeve wi th i n a s tu f f i ng box f i t t e d auer a shaft or valve stex and tiahtened agrmst compressible packing so as t o

le:kage i rn i le ai$aulng.he sha f t - o i stcm t o iroue

GLnss PIPE. 2.1.4 Supparting. 6.2.7

GLOBE VRLUE. 3.1.5 GRAOE. s$e 'Ue r t i ca i Rcfererse', 5.3.1 GRADE BEAN. Beam vhich rs used t o support a

r i ao r a t ground level GSOU60 JOINT. Fine f i rush on two metal SuZ-

faces foirmng face-to-face leak- t igh t j o rn t GROW LEUDER. 4:t .2 GROUT. R t h i n i a ~ e r o f concrete poured on s

set concrete foundation, betvecn the found- a t i on and the baseprate of the equipment ~ h i c h w i l l r e s t on i t . The baseplate 19

r i rmiy b d t c d davn on the l e v e l surface of the grout a f t e r i t has hardened

GUIOE. 2.12.2. 6.2.8. f igure 2.721 GUTLINE. See 'Trecmg', 6.8.2

WILF-COWLING Threaded. 2.5.:. f i gu i e 2.49 socket-ueiding. 2.4.3. f igure 2.31

HRhORRIL. See RAILING IIREiGER. 2.12.2 canstant-laad hang2r. 2.12.2 spr ing hanger. 2.12.:

HARNE55 PIPING. 6.3.1 ISAD. Pressure. 3.2.1 HEUOER. n pipe sc iv ing as a p r i nc l pa i DLPPIY or re turn l i n e

HEADER VULVE. 3.1.11 HEAT EXCHRElGER. 3.3.5. f igure 6.32. chart H-8

1s he ld Fending f u i t hc i processing or t rea t - irent

HOmCGENIZER. 3.3.U E 0 9 CONNECTOR. 2.B.i HOSE UILVE. 3.1.11 HOT TAP. H technlwe for branching znto a

l i n e under pressure v i thav t having t o close the l i n e dovn - ~

HDTuELL. u smp, tan*, n i other receptacie f o r h?idinQ dischaqes o f hot l i ~ " ~ d * . 8.10.11

HYORAELIC ACCUWLRTOR. S to i= l l i q u l d under P P ~ ~ S Y Z ~ . ~ y p x a l l v a device consisting o f a cv i inder and p ls tan which is actuatcd by a weight, spring, or empressed gas. On the appod t r s ide o f tho p~stan, the drrven f lu ld, s u h as water or o i l , IS stored

HYORAULIC OUfFEbER. 2.12.2 Synbu. chart 5.28

HYDRAULIC RESISlRh'E of pipe and f i t t i n g s

HYOROSTRTIC TESTIKG. 5.11.2 HYGIENIC CONSTRUCTION. Pipe, uarves, pmps and other equipment used to handle food- s tu f fs and drugs shauid be hygrenlcal ly con~ t r~ r - t ed : v h i ~ h -an* that a l l surfaces cantacting the materrai nust be smooth. "on-toxic and corrosion piaof. P l as t i c s and rubbers should not incorporate (as f i l l e r s ) substances tha t mey ~antarmwtc . matersats f ree from s ~ h contminants WY be re fer red t o as 'uhi te ' ZubbDr, etc.

IFICOI*EL. A high-mckei a l l ov contamrog chio- urn and xan. Resistant to o i l da t i on and

COrnlIlO"

INCREASER = Suaqe or reducer INSTRUI'ENT UIR. See 'C~p ressed A i i Usage',

table 7.3 INSTfiUmNTATIDN. 5.5 Coding. table 5.3 Function. 5.5.2 Rounting. 5.5.4 On flow diagram. 5.2.3 On P610. 5.2.4 s igna i lead. 5.5.6. chart 5.b

INSULRTION. Thermal On Ph10. 5.2.6 P e r ~ m n e ~ p m t ~ c t i o n . 6.8.1 Thickness. 5.8.1. tables 8.7 6 6.8

INTERCOOLER. 3.2.2 INTEfiCOtiNECTIIG PkID. 5.2.0 INTERFRCE. Baundary cornsan t o two eystels. see figsic 6.3 p m t s [ i o l 6 (161

INUERT ELEVRTION ( ' IE ' ) i s the e levat ion of the botton o f the m t e i n a i surface of a bur led pipe. tabla 5.2

. . 01 nariwoie m i n t a i r e d in stack LIM E ~ l h 0 . 2.7.1 f ~ g v i e 2.39

I f i . 2.1 Syl har t IRON PIFE 5125. 2.i.3. L I M BLIEO VALUE. 2.7.7. :.l.&

1 5 0 l n t e rm t i ana i Sbndards Orgamiation. LlhE DESIGNATION 5i.EET. P.2.3. 5.2.5 see 'PETRIC' - mtraductian. p a r t 11 LINE NUmER

150 = 1ametr:c. 5.2.6, 5.2.9. f igu ies 5.15 6 P6IO. 5.2.6 5.16. Piping diaumgs. lee 'Process l Scrvicr

Ctecking. 5.4.4 ~ i n e ~ on ~ i p l n g ocauings'. 5.2.8

JACK SCREW. 5 c i w pravlded m o i i f i c e flanges the ~ ~ F P o i t s of tsnk5, etc.

and scmatimea flanges for l i n e b l inds for LDW-PRE55UPE tEATIhS PZOIA. 8.9.2

the purpose of tc rnorar i l y holding flanges LUG. Project ing prece an a vesrel, frzne.

apart in oider t o mseitl iemoue o r i f i c e etc., by ~ h i c h i t mav be he ld or l i f t e d or

p la te or l i n z blind. Two scrcwl me pro- used for an attachment

vrded (one per f lange) piaced 180 degrees apart. r i gme 2 .9

JACKETING. 5.8.2 308 FUNCTIOPIS. 4.1.2 WIN. A p r inc ipa l section of pipe swply lng

106 NUFBER. Cmqany account rider t o which service oi praceas f lu id . I n a RlhS mRIN the

ui i ik 19 charged. ~ppea ia on p~pe iuo rk f l u r d rs continuouslv c lrcurated around a

f o r a p i o ~ e c t closed mop of p ip ing and w y be d ram off

JOIRL The uaik done hen the p a n t of app i i - a t any pomt. Usefm for hot/coid line., or

cat ion of a force o f i rs displaced for siuirrcs and other f l u i d s w i th suspended

thravch a dktence of i meter m the d i rec t - so l ids tha t may semrate i o n of the force

IW'u?OWER. table A- i

NRKELP WATER. Mater i s l o s t i n many processes and operations. uater inventory rs restored by adding mkeup vater

WLLERBLE-IRON. A dcc t i l e casf iron pioituced by cont ro l led annealing o f white cast l i on

kelvin. 51 un i t o f tempe;atu:e. Defined as MANWLE. table 5.1

"the f i ac t i on 11273.18 af the thermodynamic I n coiwn. 6.5.2 tempcrrtuie o f the t i i p l e pmn t of water." MANIFOLD. A chanber or pipe iheaderj havlng (Tna t r i p r e pomt o f ua t c i is the soi id, several biamhes

l i qu i d , vapor phase, as i c e begrns t o form W~QETER. see ' o r i f i c e P la te Rssenblv',

on cooiino.l zero on th. thermdvmnic scale 6.7.5 . . is 273.15 keivms b e l w zeio on the Ce l sus

scale. h ke lu ln 21 a teopcratuie ' in te rva l ' or diffeience. ke i v i n i s not expressed m degrees. One ke ium :I equal t o one 'degree' c c ~ s ~ u s . ~ h u s t i m t v degices on the Celsius scaie 14 291.1%. table N-7

KNIFE-EDGE VULWE. 3.1.11 KNDCK-OUI DRWPDT. A stieam o f gas contan-

i n g drops o f l i qu rd is passed t h ru a knock- ou t dcm in order t o s lou dam the f l ov and a l a u thi. l i q n d to separate and co l l ec t

LAND an beveled end. chart 2.1 LANTERN RIhG. See 'Bonnet', 3.I.2 LRP-3OINT FLANGE. 2.3.1. f igure 2.10 LATERAL Butt-uciding. 2.3.2. f igure 2.16 Thrgaded 2.5.2. f i g v re 2.47 socket-welding. 2.4.2. f i g v i e 2.29

LRTROLET 8utt-uelding. 2.3.:. f igure 2.15 Threaded 2.5.:. f igure i.SZ Socket-"siding. 2.U.3. f igu ie 2.34

LEROY. 4.li.5 LETTERIK. b.b.6

WNWACTURERS' EIGHT. 2.1.3 InATCWIhC. See 'Process h Service Lines on ~ i p m g Oraumgs', 5.2.8. f igure 5.8

WlERIUL BALUNCE. R detai led tabviet ion of process materxai f lav lng in to , t h i v and out o f the process, shoung the d i - t r i bu t i on m i a l l s ign i f i cant cornonents, including m w r i t i e s

NNERIUL TAKEOFF. Estinat=d quant i t ies f o i

matenas, taken from dravmgs mxL. 5 w o r chart 5.283 IIITER. 2.3.1. f igure 2.5 MIXER. 3.3.2. tEble 3.7 NIXING. 3.3.2 RIXlElG VALVE. 3.3.11 EL of plant. 6.U.12 ~ X L . n l loys consist ing mamry of nrckei and

copper, which have good resrstancs t o corro- smn. abrasion and heat

PWNWEMT. 5.3.1. f igure 5.12 IIILTIPORT VULUE. 3.1.8 RYLAR FILN. 4.4.1

EEEOLE VRLUE. 3.1.5 REUICN. net;lc un i t . he force t o acceleiate

B m: kilci -. t h r.L" ?' 1

Fnr sectisw, per 51 m.. ,-.rzved;.

NIPDIET. I n t e g r a l nipl i lelueldolet pisin. 2.U.:. f igure 2.35 inreaded. 2.5.:. f igure 2.53

NIPPLE 7hiesded 2.5.1. f i g u i e 2.39 ~ w p e d . 2.i.2. f igvre 2.19

wmI-RETURN VALVE. 3.1.7. 3.2.11 NOW-RISING 5TER. See 'Sten ' . 3.7.2. Type of yeme s t e n uhich r o t a t e s but does not r1.e ~ r c n vaive ~5 operated

~ R T H . ' P lan t north ' s ' t r u e north ' . 5ee 'Hor i ion ta i Reference', 5.3.1 and 'R i loca t ing Space cn the 5h9:tL, 5.2.0. f igure 5.11

~IOZZLE, k pratruding por t of a vesser, tank, pmp, e tc . t o ~ i c h piping i s connected. Column. 6.5.2 Hear exihmger. 6.6.2 pmp. 5e. 'Typical Piprng f o r Centrifugal P u r ~ i ' , 5.3.7

S q p o r t l n g pipe a t . 6.2.0 Vessel. 6.5.1

wa. spacer b r o t w s r a n ) on a backing i m g or m s e r t .

NWSER or LIP&. See 'Flaw Lines on P ~ I D ' s ' ~ 5.2.b

..- OBLIQUF. ORRWIEG. 5.2.6 - OFF-PLOT. Refers t o arcs outs ide the an-plot

r iea . or t o area betveen on- lot a i e r l . 5es ~ ~ - ~ . BRTTERY LIPlIT

ON-PLOI Refers t o the area of a par t i cu la r u n i t o i campiex. These can be nore

than one on-plot aiea m the sane mnufae tur lng s i t e . See EATTERY LIPlIT

ON-SITE . !n the f i e i d . OperntionI c a i r l e d the c o n s t r ~ t i o n s i t e are t e m r d

on-s i t e apera t icns OPEHRTOR f o r vaiue. 3.l .2 OPERRTIh% HEIGHT5 FOR VRLUES. 6 . 1 2 .

t a b l c 6.2. c h r t P-2 ORIFICE PLATE R55EPBLY. 5.7.5. Figuie 6.35 Clearance around. f igure 6.30

ORIFICE PIPE RUN. tab le 6.5 DRJFICE Tili. See 'Pipmg t o Flange Taps':

P ~ I O = ~ i p r n g and i n s t r m e n t a t i o n d iagrm. 5.2.6

PACKIHG. CcrprcIsible m t e r i a i held i n the s t u f f i n g box of a sea i

PACKLESS URLVE. See 'Ser ie ' . 3.1.2 PUNTOGRAPH. U.4.0 PIIPER Used i n d t u f t i r q . 0.4.7. c h a r t 5-€m PWER STOCK VRLUE. 3.1.11 PmT5 LIST. 5.6.3 Paschi. m t n c I511 u n i t of piessure. Tho

pascal 3s the pre.swe produced by a force

of i r.n..llnn over 20 '?.. 'I 9maie "%tar E ~ Z I L . .. t i . . .. .2

PEN5TOCK. R c b ~ r n e i leading water t o a tu r - bine or uateiufleel

pH. R m a l u r e of khe ac id or .alkaline 5 t ieng th of aweous sowt ions . Neutrar so lu t ions have e pH of 7. Acids have a pH beim 7. ~ i k a i i n e / c ~ u s t i c l i q v ~ d s have a pH .bow 7.

PliOlOGRWHIC AI05. U.d.13 PICTORIAL UIEd5. 5.2.6 PiECEcWK = nark mker. 5cc 'Nmbeimg I s a s ,

Spool Sheets, b Speois ' , 5.2.9 PINCH URLVE. j . i .5 C i l i . .. .

Areas. t ab les P-i eurs t ing pressures. t ab les P-1 Data. t a b l e s P-l Defini t ion. 2.1.1 Oeilect icn. tubles P-, D i a e t e r s . Z.i.3. tublcs P-l F i t t ings . 2.2.4. t ab les 0 Hanger. 2.12 ncu t o specify. 5.6.: 3oints . 2.2 Lengths. 2.l.2. ~ i n i n g s . 2.7." Lugs r l d e d anta. 2.12.3 Ra te r ia i s . 2.1.4. S tee l s : t a b l e 2.1 marmnwa seiulce presswe . t a b l e s P-b manant of i r a t i u . t ab les P-'# Drdenng. 5.6.3 Piperack. 6.l.2. f igure 6.3 Pressure l imi t s . 2.1.5. t a b l e s P-6 Rcdius o f gyration. t a b l e s P-1 5ag. t a b l e s P-i 5che0,le n ~ e * . 2.i .3 Section nad"lu5. t ab les P-1 Sizes. 2.1.2. t ab les P-1

5pacmg. t ab les h 5pans. t a b l r s P-i. t ab le 5-1. c h a r t s 5-2 S tee l s . t ab le 2.1 Stock Iongths. 2.1.2 Suaoort. 2.12. 5.2 lempsratuie limit;. 2.1.5 Thieads. 2.5.5 Wall thickness. 2.1.3. t a b l e s P-l Weights. t ab les P-, Welding to. 2.12.3

PIPE COPE. 5euling camound used f o r making screned comectians. Teflon-based coapounds are MU usually spec i f ied uniess t e r l o n tape 2% Used on the threads

PIPE SUPPORT. 2.12. 6.2 Cs iwia t ian4 . 6.2.d O e s q n functions. 5.2.i Expannon. 6.2.5 Loading. 6.2.2 5pri"g hanger and support. 6.2.5

PIPE-TO-TUBE COWECTOR. f igvri l 2.41 PIPERPTK. 6.1.2. f i g u i e 6.3 PIPESAY. 6.1.2. t a b l e s R-1 PIPIE>G

Butt-welded. 2.3. c h r i t 2.'I 5 c r e e d . 2.5. char t 2.3 Socket-welded. 2.h . c h a r t 2.2

PIPING S INSTRUENIPITION OIRGRRm. 5.2.4

PIP:t& DfiRUIMX. 5 . 2 2 , 5.2.0 i-:*yoi ..a

Cenlerl inc. 5.3.:. chart 5.8 Checking. 5.4.2 Diwnslanmg. 5.: I e n t i f y i n g sections. 5ee 'Eleuatia"3

I 5 e c t i a w ) 6 Oeta i l s ' , 5.2.8. c h a r t 5.8 I o s t r m n t connections. 5.2.0. c h a i t L 2 1siuiog. 5.4.3 Line nu-er. 5% 'Ficu Lines on PSIO' : 5.2.4. 5.2.8

Paints t o check. 5.34.6

T i t l e b10ck. 5.2.0. figv:e 5.9 PIPIP:G FR0RICRTIGtl (IRACIS. 5.2.9 PIDINT. CRCID & . I ~ . . .. PIPIhs LRYOUT. Oasign notes. 5.i PIPING SPECIFICATION. 6.2.6

PIPILG U5E5. 1 . i

PLRM. Vie* for drawing. 5.2.6, 5.2.5 FLRFIIPETER. 4.6.5 PLRNT. Building of. i .2. char t 1.1 PLANT RIR. 5 rc ' C q i e a s e d Rir Usage', 6.3.2 PLRNT CDEI5TRLICTIOtl. char t 1.1

PUNT EiCRTH. 5 e 'Hoil;m?tal Refeicme'. 5.3.1. f i g v i e 5.11

PLASTIC PIPE. 2.i.b Supporting. 5.2.7

PLEh'LiV. Dis t r ibu t ion ccrmnent of a irechamc- a i system of vcn t i i a t i an . Fresh alr is fa ic - ed i n t o a box or chaobei f ' p ie run ' ) f o r d i s t r i b u t i c n m a building

PLOT PLRN. 5.2.7 PLUG. B a i s ~ a c k . f igu ie 2.55 PLUG GAIE VRLUE. 3.8.U PLUG UALLVE. 3.7.4 PLWING. $ . I

PGCKETING I n l ines . 6.2.5 POLYERIZRTION. Generally, chemical reac t ion

~n i h i c n iroiecvles co-sine t o f o m i a r g e r wole~u~es . Term myrrtly applied t o reac t ions foin:ng p n t cham-iike irorecules, as m t h e pradvctian of p i a s t i c s

'POP' SAFETY URLUE. 3.1.3 POTAeLE WRIER = Orirking water PORT of vaiue. Refeis t o the s e a t aper tu re of

a vawe, but s o e t w s t o the vaive's ends PRESSWE, RBSDLUTE and CAGE. Pressure

expressed r e i a t i v e t o absoiute vacwn: pavnd per sqvaie rnsh absolute, ubbieviuted P51R or P S ~ R , 1s the i n i t nor ra i iy used m the USA. P I ~ I S U I ~ above a tmspher ic 2% t e rned

piessuie, usually erpisssed aa P51C or psq . Noma a t rmphsr rc pressure 1s 14.7 P5iA. ~ d d i n g 14.7 t o the gage p i e s w i e grves t h e absorute pressure

PRE5SURE REGLUTOR. 3.7.10 PRES5UaE 5EL. Valve. 52? 'Barnet', 3.1.2 PRESiimE VE55EL. 6.5.1 PRlmARI VALVE. 3.1.11 PRIE = ~ r ~ m i n g water, etc. PROCE55 EOUIPaENT. E q u l p r n t bv which lor i n

uhich) rs ef fec ted a physical or chermral

VhUilORTIOhlhb YULUE. d . ~ . r . t ab le ,., PUP. 3.2.1 Piping 6.3.1 5erec t ion . c h a r t 3.3

P W PIPING. 6.3.1 PUKGIMZ. The f lushing o u t of "wanted w t e r -

rai from a s y s t ~ n . Examie: flooding p ipmg with n i t rogen t o r e a m atm';fheiic oxygen

PURLIFI. R m ~ i t u d i n a ~ w d e r f ixed exteroal- 3" t o t h e laof frame of a building t o vhich the roofing panels are f i t t e d

oracmim. a device used roc measuiing highcr t e w e r a t u r e s

QUICK-RCTINZ WERUTWS. For values. 3.1.2 WICK COWECTOR. 2.6.7 QUICK CDLFLIMG. 2.0.2

RRILIbG Dimensianmg. t a b l e 6.1. c h a r t P-2 5yndoi. c h a r t 5.8

RRI5EO FACE (of flange]. 2.5.1 RRkVOR LEffiTH la f pips). 2.1.2 RAWINE. The R a a i o s scale assures ternera-

t u r e from abso lu te reio. One degree Rankine [R) ; one degree Fahremei t . t ab le PI-?

RRPIDOGRPPH. Pen. 6.4.6 RRTINGS OF FITTIEG5. t a b l c 2.2 RERCTION VESSEL. 3.3.5 REACTOR. Unit m vhich a cont ro l led cheucai

reac t ion or process occurs REBOILER. See 'Coluno Opetation', 6.5.2 RECEIVER. 3.2.2 REDUCER Eut t -wsding . 2.3.1. f i g u i e 2.3 Threaded. 2.5.1. f i g u m 2.30 Socke t - r id ing . 2.4.1. f igure 2.22

REOUER INSERT. 2.U.i. f igure 2.23 REDUCING ELBOW. 2.3.1. f igure 2.2 REDUCING FLUKE. 2.3.',. f igvre 2.0 REDUCING TEE. Hou t o order. 2.3.2. t a b l e 0-6 REGKRTINC URLUE. 3.7 . l1 REFERENCE ORRUNG. Rny disulng iwde bv the

deslgn gmups t o vhich r e f e r e m e rs made. The c m p l e t e list of reference diavlng nvlbeis I* b e s t wr i t t en on the Nm arrangement d i a w q

REFERENCE POINT. 5.3.1. f igure 5.11 REFLUXING. 5ee 'Calm Dp*ration', 6.5.: REINFORCEPENT. 2.11

5ymbors. c h a r t 5.3 REIEaF3RCIbG RIhC. Shaped w t a i r l n g f o r rem-

fe rc lng stub-ma, vessel razrlrs, e tc . A W d metal cormensates f o i m t a l iamaved from pipe or vessel wall

RELIEF HERDER. 0.12.b. f igu ie 6.3 pornt ( 7 ) RELIEF URLUE. 3.1.9, 6.1.3 RELIEVING PRE55URE. Of l iqurds . 6.12 R ~ V R E L E SPOOL. 2.7.1. f igvre 2.61 RESISTRKE TO FLOW. I n prping. 6.1.1 RETLWN. 2.3.1. f i g u i e 2.2 REVRW. To ie -mzk oi m d i f y an e x l s t i n g

on PSIO. 5.2.u TRAN~PORTRTIO'I PIPING. i., TRW. 3.1.9. 6.10.7 nn PliO. 5.2.4 ..~ Piplng to. 6.10.11. f iguzes 6.63 8 6.4h

IRWPI% 51ERR L I E S 6.10.11 rmm. c r i r ~ c r i mteina: su ; fzce~ of a valve bod? are s c e z t m s r mace of ~ p e c l a i mate r la i ~ ~ c h as s t a i n i e s s s t e r i . These wits nay ~ ~ ~ i u d e the d i sc and s e a t , s tm ox other mteinal surfaces

iRim PIPING. 6.3.1 iaffis. s t r ~ c t u r e ~ f r e m based on the genn=t- ix rigid it^ a? the t r i a n g i e , cawqosed of C~mpresslcn and tension mnbers t e r rcd s t r u t s and t i e s

TUBE. 2.1.1 TUiiEINE PIPING. 6.4 TURFWY PLAtIT. A p lan t cons t i ix t sd and mads ready for c i i e n t ' s i m d i a t e operat ion

WIFIED S C ~ i i i m o . 2.6.3 UmRncE. 5en ' ~ r a m n g ' : 6.8.2 WIION

Thieaded. 2.5.1. f igure 2.40 5acket-uel~ing. 2.4.i. f igure1 .24 "

url1ON BONNET. Valve constiuction a l l o r r n g quick ~ a u p l i n g and incoupling of uarve body and bonnef

UPiIOli FITTIGG. R f i t t i n g with a unron a t one n i mre ends

uNLW3IMG. 3.2.2 "5 OEPRaTENT O i COimiRCE. Coast and Geadctir survey. 5.3.1

"SA5I. 7.3 UTILITY PIPIbIG. 'I .'I

UTILITY 5rniioN. 6.1.5. f igure 6.12 Syihai. 6.1.5

VnCm. The d q r e e of vucum can be quoted i n PSI^, but more of ten e i t h e r the p r e s w m er the removed pressure is quoted as e 'head' ; usvsllv the height of a c o u m of m i c u i ~ (HQ) m Ri l l imete i s of r c r r v r y I n n H?). N O X ~ ~ L atnospheric piessure 1s 760 om Hg

wncwn BEAKER. 3.1.11 v n L 6 3.7

hirangmg. 6.1.3, 6.1.L R m e s 6.1.3 6 e ~ w grade. s e e ' I f the re i s no PUO'

BrnhDt. 5.k.2 Cmm operator. 3.1.2. c h a i t s 5.6 & P-2 Disc. 3.1.2. chart 3.1 Gear. 3:s .2 Hanbheel. 3.1.2 On flow diaoran. 5.2.3

Pezts. 3.s.i > lac% 3.:

Port . 3.,.2 sea:. 3.1.2 Seat . 3.1.2 S e l e ~ t i a n . 3.1.3. c h a r t 3.2 Size. 6.1.3

VRLVE STEm. 3.1.2 arranging. See ' o r i e n t a t i n n of Valve Stems'

6.1.: B:n-rrslrg. 3.1.2. f i g u r e 3.3 O p e r a t i ~ g h e q n t . 6.1.3. t a b l e 6.2. c h m P-2

Piping sa fe ty 6 r e l i e f valves. 5.1.3 Risirg. Outsrdr screw & yoke. f i g u r e 3.1

and f igure 3.2 VRti STOM FLANGE. 2.3.l. f igure 2.10 VRRIP3LE 5FRIE:G HRNGER or SUPPORT. 2.12.2.

f igures 2.726 6 6.15 VENT ~ a c a t i o n . 5ee ' p i p m g nrrangement'r 6.1.1.

f igure 6.47 on i i n e s and uesscii. 6.11 On prplng. 6.11. f i g u r e 6.47 On P6IO. 5.2.b On tan*. Svmoi. c h a r t 5.7

VESCL COM6CTIOEI. 6.5.1 VESSEL ORBMIUG. 5.2.7. f i a u r e 5.1b

VICTnULIc COL~LIEX. A ' q ~ t c k - ~ o n n e c t ' mthad of ~ o i n m g pipe, f i t t i n g s , vrives, and equipmnt; vanufactured by the Vic tau l ic cmpun" of nrezica. 2.5.2. f i g u i ~ 2.62

~ l i l E a ~ m " R . k cailcuss~rn due to: ( 1 ) Pressure saves t r a v e l i n g i n piplng and me4ting with obs t ruc t ions . A unrve ciosing tam ;rpldiy u i i i c r e a t e a p ressure wave ( 2 ) ~ o ~ d e n s a t z hur led a g a m s t obs t ruc t ians bv hish-ueiaci ty steam. 5ee 6.10.2. 6.10.6

ELD GnP. s.:.$ c h a r t s 2.1 6 2.2 SIOIFIG-PECK FLRNGE. 5 e e 'Flanges'., 2.3.1.

f i g w e 2.6. t a b l e s F ELDING 5YWOL. 5.1.6. chart 5.9 SIDING t o p l p e 2.12.3 LELWLEI. 2.3.:. f i g u r e 2.13 LET 5TEm. 6.9.1. c h a r t 5.3

o the i f l u l d s exposed t o lou teirperatures. Insulat ion. 6.8.1. t ab les 6.7 6 6.8 Iarketing. 6.8.2. f i g u i e 6.39. c h a r t 5.7 Ti-acing. 6.8.2. f i g u r e 6.411. c h a r t 5.7

WISE DRRCIIIIG. Term descr ib ing t h e eloslon of vnwe s e a t s , usua l ly due t o t h e cu t t ing ac t ion of fa re ign p a r t i c l e s in hiah-ueiocitv flux& occuiing when flaw 15 t h r o t t l e d

LWilK POINT. An a r b i t r a r v r e f e r e m e from which dimanslans are taken

YARD PIPIP!G. ~ip:ng wi th in t h s s i t e and ex- t e r n a l t o bu i ld ings

YOKE. 5ee '5tem'; 3.1.2

irc1 l a j FLRNGES: WELDING NECK, SLIP-ON.

REDUCING SLIP-ON - T a v l o r Forge 1% EXPANDER FLRIlGE - Tube Turn. ( D i v of Ch$nt ian I r c )

I 3) LRP-JOINT F L n m - ~ a d i s h c q a n y TEES - f&e T u i n s (Dl" of Cbsqtrcn IN) ELDOLET - Benney Focgz

110) SWEPDiET - Bannev Forge BUTT-LELOiNG CROSS, LRTERRL. NIPPLE - T ibe Tv ins (Oi" o f Chemtron i m )

I 1 1 1 BUTT-UiLOING CAP - Crane Ccrpany 1121 FULL-COLPrLING, REDUCER - Csane Cmpany

SOCKET-btLOiNG REDLCER IIlSCRTS - Led ish Ccmpa""

11311 SDCKET-SLUING FLRNGE - T a y l o r Fozg. 1% SOCKET MLDIFIG: ELBOWS, TEE, LATERRL and CROSS - Crane C m o m y

110) SOCKET-MLDING HALF-COLPLIEIG - C r m e Conpan" SOCKOLET - Bonney Fo rge SEKET-LELDING cnp - H ~ ~ ~ Y ~ o g t machine c o

l l s l FULL-COWLING - Crane C r p a n y

116) REomItiG COWLING - Crane Cmqeny UNION - S tun lev G. F laoo 6 Co i n c .<

HEXRGON BUSHING - Crane Cmpany

117) THREADED ELBDM5. 05 and 90 DEGREE

Crane C w a n y IH-nEAOD FLRFIGE - T a y l o r Forgi. Inc

l l B l lHREADED LRTERAL, THREADED CROSS - c rane ccrpany THREDOLET, THREADEO ELBOLET, THREADED LATROLET - Bonney Fo rge THRERMD CRP - Hen iy Vogt Machine t o THREADED BRRSTCCK PLUG - L a d i s h Cmpany III~CHIR e m 6 EBJT. and STUDBOLT 6 I I ~ - cran. c o r p m y VICTRUIC C O W i i i l l O N SLEEVE COWLING - V i c t a v l i c Cmpany RE~MFORCINC snooms - crane cawany CUTE VRLVE 10S61, b o l t e d bonnet, i l s i n g

sten). GLOBE VRLVE IOSkY, b o l t e d bonnet. r i s i n g &en). GRTE VRLVE ( IS , b o l t e d bonnet, ncn-;>sing stem) - 3erkinc. Bros. V a u r Olarufactu ie is

lp:~ Larii;Ra RING - urn. ~ c v e l l c o PACKLESS VRLVE - Crane Ca SELLUUS-SEKL UPLUE - Renrv Uogt Arch ine Co COCKS - ~ ; n . Powa l l Ca WIIPPER-ELOU HANDWEEL - Urn. P-11 Co

/ 33 1 SiiUR-ERR OPERRiDR and BEVEL-GEAR OFERnTOR - Crane Cmpanv

1311 ELECTRIC AOTDR OPERATOR. PNElllATlC OFERRTOR - Wm. Powe l l Co WICK-RCTING UPLUES:

RDTRTiNG STEn ON GLOBE VALVE - Je* inn Bros. v a v e Manufacturers S L I o i f f i STEm ON GATE VALVE - L a e n - h i i l i r e i cmpanv

/ I S ] SOLID EDGE GATE VALVE - Urn. Pave11 Co SIIIGLE-DISC PRRRLLEL-SERTS GRTE VRLVE - Henry vog t machine CO PLUG GRTE V k U E - Crane C m z n v . .

13% GLOBE VALVES - Henry Vagt Machin. Co, WE-BODY GLOBE VALVE ( i n c o i p o i a t i n g c m p a s i t i o n d i s c ) - J e r k i n s Bras. waive Asnvfacturers EEOLE VRLVE. ROTRSI-BRLL VRLVE5 - L m k e n h e l ~ r con pan^

1371 BUTTERFLY VRLVE IWDFER TYPE) - LmkeiViel inar Conpanv SWIIlG CFICK VALVES - Jenkins Ems. Valve O lau fac tu re rs , Walvor th Co. PISTON-CI-ECK VRLVE & STOP CKCK VRLVE - Rack*e l l m f g c o

I%] SRFETY VALVE, RELiEF VALUE, BRLL FLORT VRLVE. B L O W F VALVE - Crane Co FLUSH-EOTTDA TAM VRLVE IGLOBE TYPE) - U71. P o ~ e l l CD

1 % ) INUERTEO-BLEKET TRW A r m t r o n g Machine works

I s l ] 08iPSHIELD - Ua. P a w l 1 Co I l l O ) SURRTkOUT HERD - C r a m Co 1116) SELL-AhV-TUaE HEAT EXCHANGER MITH

REmVABLE TUBE BIINOLE - B e l l h Gaaset and C a l i f o r i u a Hyd ron rc l co rpa ra t i ons

1119) LEVEL GRGE RSSEWLY - Wm. Pmuel l Co 1120) ROTRETER - I n s t r e n t s O i v s i o n o f

S r 5 u t t e 6 K a e r t i n g C q a w I1231 JRCKETED PIPE 6 HOSE - Paikea-Cramel

conpany

ALVE DATA - RUN LENGTHS

iobled Dimcnsian

FOR FLANGED VALVES THE TABLE DIMENSION INCLUDES ALLOWANC FOR BOTH RAISED FACES OF TH VALVE. FOR CLASSES 150 AND 301 VALVES. 1.6mm HAS BEEN INCLUD- ED FOR EACH RAISED FACE AN[ FOR VALVES OF CLASS 6 0 0 AN[ ABOVE. 6.4mm HAS BEEN INCLUDE1 FOR EACH RAISE0 FACE.

H a l f Tabled Dimension

' [REPRESENTATIVE] SHEET S I Z E AO: 8 4 1 -

NOTE: EACH SMALLER SHEET I S HALF THE LENGTH AND HALF THE WIDTH OF THE PRECEDING SHEET

I S 0 "A" SERIES

API 501 20 xi Am S(ll30 API

API

M I API M I

sa1 20 s API SCli 30 MI

MI

SClllW sai 120

MI sffi 30 MI

MI YS MI

s a i 40 MI API

sa1 w MI Sal 80 MI SM 1W sol 120 s a i 140 %I 160

s a i l 0 MI MI MI MI

s a i 20 sm MI API API MI

s a i 30 YS MI m i 40

MI SCl* 60 MI sai 80 SCll l W Sffi 120 Sa1 140 s a i 160

sac 20 MI l 273.1 260.3 6.3%

M I 273.1 2M.8 ll.U sai 60 w API 273.1 247.7 12.70 SC2I 80 273.1 242.9 15.09 SffI 1 W M I 273.1 236.5 18.26 S M '120 273.1 230.2 21.44 sat 140 xxs MI 273.1 222.2 25.40 Sot 160 273.1 215.9 28.58

S M 20 API 323.9 311.2 6.3% M I 323.9 m9.6 7 3 7 API 323.9 308.0 7.925

sat 30 MI 323.9 307.1 8.382 API 323.9 306.4 8.73

SID M I 323.9 M4.8 9.525 SO1 40 MI. 323.9 303.2 10.31

M I 323.9 301.6 ll.U W API 323.9 298.5 12.7C

SM 60 API 323.9 295.3 14.27 API 323.9 292.1 15.88

SM 80 M I 323.9 288.9 17.4 API 323.9 285.8 19.05

Sol loo 323.9 281.0 21.4 S M lu) XXS M I 323.9 273.1 25.K SM 140 API 323.9 266.7 28.K S M 160 M I 323.9 257.2 33.31

W API 355.6 33.2 12.71 SM60 / 355.6 325.4 15.01

API 355.6 323.9 15.a S M 80 I 355.6 317.5 19.01 SM 1~ MI 355.6 307.9 23.8: SM 120 355.6 MO.0 27.7: S M 140 M I 355.6 292.1 31.7: $3 160 355.6 284.2 35.7:

Thru ON 250, wall thicknesses for 5CH 405 and 5CH 805 .nlcsa s tee l pipes are the same as for SCH 40 and 5CH 80 carbon steel pipes

[991

SM 40 SID M I 73.03 62.71 5.156 8.608 ll.70 SM 80 XS M I 73.03 59.W 7.010 ll.38 14.12 S M 160 73.03 53.98 9.525 14.88 17.17

Sdi 80 XS API 88.90 73.66 7.620 15.24 19.50 SM 160 / 88.90 66.65 ll.U I 21.28 24.77

sai 40 SID MI 114.3 102.3 6.020 16.03 24.25 M I 114.3 101.6 6.3% 16.86 24.97 M I ll4.3 lW.O 7.U7 18.81 26.67

- - A

au ON 250, wall Llnclmesses fo r 5CH 405 and SCii 803 stamless steel plpes are the same a5 fo r SCH 40 and SCH 80 carbon steel plpes

Tables P-1M present calculated data as a guide only. Spans are for pipe arranged in pipeways with the following assumptions: Bare pipe - continuous straight run with welded joints and two or more straight spans at each end.

SPANS - calculated with lines full of water and a maximum bending stress of 4 000 PSI SAG - (deflection) calculated with lines empty (drained condition)

The following factors were not considered in calculating spans for these tables: Concentrated mechanical loads from flanges, valves, strainers, filters, and other. inline equipment - weights of connecting branch lines - torsional loading from thermal movement - sudden reaction from lines(s) discharging contents - vibration - flattening effect of weight of contents in larger liquid filled lines - weight of insulation and pipe covering - weight of ice and snow - wind loads - seismic shock - reduction in wall thickness of pipe from threading or grooving.

DESIGN PRESSURE - calculated per ANSI 831.1 using allowable stress value of 9 000 PSI for seamless carbon steel pipe

BURSTING PRESSURE is approximate, calculated on yield strength of 30 000 PSI

[C i n these Lables is For 'Exponentt, the power of 10 t o which the number must be raised. Example: 1.OE5 = 100 0001

RPI = Racricm Petrolewl I n s t i t u l c ' s s tandard SL, for 'Line p ips ' . RPI pipe s izes : manufacturers' weights: Double-extra-stron (XXS). Cxtra-strong (XS). and Standard (STO), are included with schedule numbers i n s tandard nNSI 836.lOPl. Also refer t o 2.1.Q

.375 s a i 80 xs NIL

s a i I,O sm MI

SUi 160

s a i 160

i Thru ON 250, wall thicknesses f o r SCH 405 ond SCH 605 s t a i n l e s s s t e e l pipes arc the same as for SCH 40 an,

197 1

iCH 80 carbon s t e c l pipes

maximm iutings fur flanges conforming Lo I50 Slandard 222% dimensions and material specification n5TR n-105

r E w P E m N R E ~

CELSIUS

GAGE PRESSURE I N ki lopascals (kPa) FOR FLANGE CLASSES 1 5 0 - 2500

F L A N G E C L A S S E S

IS0 2229 f lange dimensions a re s imilar t o those of standard ANSI 816.5. Both standards l i m i t tfie prolonged use of f langes manufactured ??om carbon s t e e l s made t o material spec i f i ca t ion ASTM A-105 a t elevated temperatures. ANSI 616.5 a l s o makes recommendations regarding the use of threaded and socket-welding flanges. Refer. t o footnote: Table F-9.

Ratings a re f o r non-shock prevaii over. l i m i t a t i o n s impqsgd by codes, s t a n d a ~ d s , regulat ions o r other obl igat ions which may per ta in t o projects . ---

I FOll USE ON OUTT-WELDING CLQOWS hS PERNITTEO BY THE P IP ING SPECIFICATION FOR THE PRWECT

4 5 O ELBOW

LR = LONG RADIUS SR = SHORT RADIUS * INDICATES NUMBER OF FLANGES WITHOUT INTERFERENCE

DATA FOR WELDING-NECK FLANGES

L = LENGTH THRU HUB OF WELDING- NECK FLANGE WITH RING JOINT

G = GAP BETWEEN FLANGE FACES UNDER NORMAL COMPRESSION

FOR OUTSIDE DIAMETERS OF I * FLANGES AND B D L T l l G REFER TO TABLES F-1M THRU F-6M

1 F L A N G E C L A S S E S

I 1 5 0 3 0 0 600 900 1 5 0 0 2 5 0 0

DN

1 5

20

-

-

-

- 5 8

6 3

RING No

- -

5 8

6 3 4

RING No

3 . 2 R 1 1

R 1 3 4

RING No

R 1 2

R 1 4

666

7 6

RING No

3 . 2 R 1 1

R 13

66

7 6

4

4

- 4

4

RING No

R 1 3

R 1 6

79

8 5

RING No

R 1 2

R 1 4

4

4

1 5 2 0 75 4 0 50 8 0 1 0 0 1 5 0 200 250 300 350 4 0 0 450 500 600

, OUTSIDE DIAMETER I 1 2 1 1 3 0 1 1 4 9 I 7 8 1 216 267 1 3 1 1 394 1 4 8 3 584 1 673 7 4 9 1 826 914 984 1 1 6 8

I I 1 1 I I 9 I

1 2 1 1 3 3 1 4 0 1 7 1 1 9 0 254 286 337 375 406 444 489 533 610

Inn-joint: N o t e 5 R J ~ 102 1 0 8 1 1 2 1 1 3 3 1 1 4 6 1 7 8 1 197 260 1 298 3 4 3 1 387 425 1 4 7 0 514 1 565 6 4 8

I S 0 STANDARD 2229 IDENTIFIES FLANGES I N

CLASSES 1 5 0 THRU 2500.

DIMENSIONAL DATA ARE SIMILAR TO FLANGES

SPECIFIED BY ANSI STANDARD 816.5 EXCEPT

FOR BOLT LENGTHS.

ANSI 816.5 SPECIFIES LONGER BOLTS. SHORTER BOLTS ARE ACCEPTABLE

PROVIOING FULL THREAD ENGAGEMENT I S OBTAINED

WHEN FLANGES ARE ASSEMBLED.

I S 0 2229 SPECIFIES BOLT DIAMETERS I N INCHES,,

1 6 1 6

704.8 7 7 4 . 7

2 112 2 3 /4

1 6 1 6

571.5 635

2 2 1 1 4

1 6 1 6

8 3 1 . 8 990 6

3 3 1 1 2

8 1 2

241.3 317 5 .

1 1/4 1 3 / 8

1 2 1 2

393.7 4 8 2 . 6

1 518 1 7 1 8

4 4

101.6 1 2 3 . 8

7 1 8 1

4 4

8 2 6 8 8 . 9

314 3 / 4

I L T

8 8

1 6 5 . 1 2 0 3 . 2

7 1 8 1 1 1 8

BOLTS PER FLANGE

BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER

DIAMETER OF BOLT ( I N )

NOI~lINAL 0IAI.lETER: ON 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

OUTSIDE DIAMETER 1 95 117 1 124 156 1 165 210 1 273 356 1 419 508 1 559 603 1 686 743 1 813 940

EN0 OF SLIP-ON Wall th i ckness o f p i p e + 2 mm PIPE TO FACE OF I SOCKET I 21 22 1 23 24 1 28 , 34 1 I I 1 1 I

JOINT I I

STUB L-J ANSI 76 76 102 102 152 152 152 203 203 254 254 305 305 305 305 305 Ell0 STUB

EN0 MSS 5 1 5 1 5 1 51 64 64 76 89 102 127 152 152 152 152 152 152

i: WELD-NECK & SOCKET Order t o match I n t e r n a l Diameter o f P ipe

NOMINAL OIAMETER: ON 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

mi I I

I OUTSIDE DIAMETER 1 121 130 1 149 178 1 216 241 1 292 381 1 470 546 1 610 641 1 705 787 1 857 1041 1 I : I $g I WELD-NECK 1 66 76 1 79 89 1 108 108 1 120 146 1 168 190 1 206 219 1 222 235 1 254 298 1

24 24

723.9 838.2

1 5/8 1 7/8

286 324

292 337

8 0 L T I N G

I : I ?5F 1 TtlnEADEo i 15 17 19 21 27 12 16 22 24 24 26

END OF N PIPE TO 1 2 1 FACE OF

8 8

127 168 3

5/8 3/4

102 121

108 127

I I DOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER / 82 6 88 9 / 1 0 1 6 123 8 i 165 1 190 51 235 317 5 /393 7 469 91533 4 558.81 616 685 81749 3 901 7 1

12 16

349.2 431.8

1 8 1 1

190 210

197 216

4 4

8 8 9 114.3

5/8 3/4

89 102

89 102

8 12

215.9 292 1

7/8 1

140 165

146 171

SLIP-ON

Y P E

L T DIAMETER OF DOLT ( IN) 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 7/8 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 3/8 1 1/2 1 5/8 1 7/8 2 2 1/2 I N STUDBOLTTHREAD RF 102 108 121 133 140 140 165 190 216 229 248 267 279 324 343 432 G l e n g t h - except -

l a o - i o i n t : N o t e 5 RJ 102 108 121 133 146 146 171 190 222 235 254 279 292 337 356 457

4 4

66 7 8 2 6

1/2 5/8

76 83

76 83

BOLTS PER FLANGE

BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETEII

DIAMETER OF BOLT ( I N )

Wall th i ckness of p i p e t 2 mm

20 20

489 527

1 1 1 8

216 229

222 235

STUOBOLTTHREAO l e n g t h - except 1 3 0 - i 0 i n t : N o t e S

--. STUB END *

20 20

603.2 654

1 1/2 1 5/8

248 267

254 273

RF

RJ

SOCKET

DORE: WELD-NECK

Not a v a i l a b l e i n t h i s c l a s s

L-J sruo EN0

Order t o match I n t e r n a l Diameter of P ipe

I DOLTS PER FLANGE 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 8 8 1 8 12 1 1 2 16 1 2 0 20 1 20 20 1 20 20

ANSI

MSS

76 76 102 102 152 152

51 51 51 5 1

152 203

152 152 6 4 , 64

203 254

102 127 76 89

254 305

152 152 152 152

305 305 305 305

NO1,lINAL DIAMETER: ON 15 20 ( 25 40 1 50 80 1 100 150 1 200 250 1 300 350 400 450 1 500 600

- - 1 n EN0 OF SLIP-ON U a l l th i ckness o f p i p e + 2 mm

N PIPE TO G FACE OF SOCKET 9 7 7 8 10 12 E FLANGE

1 or LAP THREADED 2 2 0 5 7 4 5 9 11 12 15 T JOINT Y STUB L-J ANSI 76 76 102 102 152 152 152 203 203 254 254 305 305 305 305 305 P END STUB E EN0 MSS 51 5 1 51 51 64 64 76 89 102 127 152 152 152 152 152 152

BORE: WELO-HECK & SOCKET 15.8 21 26.2 40.9 52.5 77.9 102.3 154.1 202.7 254.5 304.9 [Order t o match p i p e 101

DOLTS PER FLANGE 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 16 20 20 I BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER 60.3 6 9 8 79.4 98.4 120.6 152.4 1 9 0 5 2 4 1 3 298.4 362 4 3 1 8 4 7 6 2 5 3 9 8 577 8 635 7 4 9 3 L T DIAMETER OF BOLT ( IN) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 518 314 3/4 7/8 718 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1/4

N STUDBOLT THREAD RF 57 57 64 70 76 89 89 95 102 114 114 127 133 146 152 171 I l e n g t h - except 1 l a p - j o i n t : Note 5 RJ - - 76 83 89 102 102 108 114 127 127 140 146 159 165 184

PN reiercnccs are discussed under 'FLRNGE CLRSSES end PRE55URE N m E R 5 ' - page 15 (Part I11

a NOI4INAL DIAMETER: DN 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

OUTSIDE OIAMETER 1 95 117 1 124 156 1 165 210 1 254 318 1 381 444 1 521 584 / 648 711 775 914

WELD-NECK 52 57 62 68 70 79 86 98 111 117 130 143 146 159 162 168

I I I END OF SLIP-ON I Wall t h ~ c k n e s s o f plee + 2 mm N PIPE TO G FACE OF SOCKET 15 16 17 16 18 25 E FLANGE 1 pr LAP THREAOED 2 2 0 5 1 1 6 9 15 18 19 19 T lniNT . - . . . . . Y STUB L-J ANSI 76 76 102 102 152 152 152 203 203 254 254 305 1 3 0 5 305 1 3 0 5 305 P END ' STUB E END MSS 5 1 51 5 1 5 1 64 64 76 89 102 127 152 152 152 152 152 152

BORE: WELD-NECK & SOCKET 15 .8 21 26.2 40.9 52.5 j7 .9 102.3 1 5 4 1 202.7 254.5 304.9 [Order t o match p i p e ID1

OOLTS PER FLANGE 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 12 12 16 16 20 20 24 24 24 I LWLT CIRCLE 0,AMETER 66.7 8 2 6 8 8 9 1 1 4 3 127 1 6 8 3 200 269.9 330,Z 3 8 7 4 450.8 514.4 5 7 1 5 628 6 685.8 812.8 L - T DIAMETER OF DOLT ( I N ) 1/2 518 5/8 3/4 518 314 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 114 1 114 1 114 1 114

DIMENSIONS I N MILLIMETERS - THREADED LAP-JOINT SOCKET WELDING

1- OUTSIDE DIAMETER 1

4.8 AND 12 BOLTS WELDING-NECK

FOR RINGJOJKT FLANGES SEE TABLE F-7M SLIP-ON WELDING

NOTES

[ I ] FLANGE DIMENSIONS: INTERNATIONAL STANDARD IS0 2229, ANSI STANDARD 816.5 AND MANUFACTURERS' DATA

[21 BLIND FLANGES: DATA FOR FLANGE DIAMETERS AND BOLTING I N THESE TABLES ALSO APPLIES TO BLIND FLANGES

t31 REDUCING FLANGES: AVAILABLE I N SLIP-ON, THREADED AND WELDING-NECK TYPES

[ a ] LAP-JOINT STUB-ENDS: ANSI 016.9 (Long P a t t e r n ) & MSS SP-43 (Shor t P a t t e r n )

STUDBOLT THREAD LENGTHS FOR LAP-JOINTS -> -- .--.- FLANGE COMBINATION FLANGE pLASS INCREASE I N STUDBOLT LENGTH OVER

LENGTHS I N TRBLES F-IN thru F-6N

150 o r 300 Thickness o f l a p Lapped t o non-lapped

Over 300 Thickness o f l a p minus 6.4 mm

Lapped t o lapped 150 - 2500 Thickness o f two l a p s

Thickness o f l a p = Thickness o f p i p e w a l l + D mm + 1 .6 mm

THREADED FITIMGS - MALL

PRESSURECLASS

N O M I N A L D I A M E T E R CON]

'T RETURN BEND (:::;I-

OF SHORT AND RNK NIPPLE nnE 13rm LONG LONG NIPPLES

ARBON STEEL

EDUCER " IREAD ENGAGEMENT rn

AVAILABLE I N 50, 65, 75, 90, 100, 115, 125, 140 150, 180, 200, 230, 255, 280 & 305 mm LENGTHS

(DN 15 and DN 20 n i p p l e s a r e a l s o a v a i l a b l e 40 mm long)

70 76 89 114 165 203 70 76 89 114 165 203

32 37 43 59 7 1 94 43 44 5 1 68 81 103

13 14 <I7 17 19 25 13 14 17 17 19 25

i

DIMENSIONS I N Tl l lS TABLE ARE FOR BANDED FITTINGS AND CONFORM TO ANSI STANDARD 816.3. AND FEDERRL SPECIFICATION WW-P-521. UNIONS CONFORM TO ANSI 016.39. DATA FROM ITT GRINNELL CORPORATION AND STOCKHAM VALVES AND FITTINGS

DATA: SWITH VALVE CORPORATION GATE VRLVES: FULL PORT GLOBE VRLVES: CONVENTIONAL PORT

BOLTED 'Ti+ R:::r

' R ' is the 'REWVED RUN' of pipe occupied by the valve

DN 15 20 25 40 50 - D 102 102 140 168 168

G H 162 184 217 27 9 3 17 A T L 8 9 98 108 140 144 E

R 64 '7 0 7 3 105 106

o ' ontal l i f t -check valves

DN 15 20 25 40 50 - D 102 102 140 168 168

G H 162 184 21'7 279 317 A T L 8 9 98 108 140 144 E -

R 5 2 5 8 71 8 0 9 6

'R' dimensions include 2 mm expanslon gaps

HALF-COUPLING

REDUCER l-2

LATERAL

[Eonney Fo rge h L a d i s h ]

DIAMETER

THREUOLET (REOUCING)

[Eonney Forge] H

UNION

Eonney Fo rge ]

HEX BUSH

SWAGE

- THREAO ENGAGEXENT

( 1 ) 'R' DINENSIONS ('REmVEO IIUN' OF PIPE) ARE BASE0 ON NORR'RL THREAD ENGAGERNI BETWEEN RRLE AND FEmRLE THREADS I 0 RAKE TIGHl IOINTS - ROUNDED TO 1 .OO m

( 2 ) OIRENSIONS FOR FITTINGS ARE FROPI THE FOLLOWING SUPPLIERS' ORTR: BDNNEY FORGE, I T 1 GRINNEL. LROISH AN0 VOGT (3 ) UNLESS THE SUPPLIER I S STATED, 'L ' & 'D' OIRNSIONS RRE THE LRRGEST QUOTED BY EDNNEY FORGE, I T T GRINNELL, LAOISH AND VOGT ( 4 ) FITTINGS CONFORN TO RNSI 816.11, EXCEPT LRTERALS, WHICH RRE NAOE TO RRNUFACTURERS' STANORROS. UNIONS CONFORN TO NSS-SP-03 (5) FOR SIZES RND AVRILRBILITIES OF PIPE NIPPLES, REFER TO 'RRLLERBLE-IRON PIPE FITTINGS' - TRELE 0 - l l N (6) DIRNSIONS FOR XNSTllLLEO THREOOLEIS EXCLUDE THE 'ROOT GRP' - REFER TO 'OIRENSIONINC SPOOLS (WELDED RSSEIBLIES)' - 5.3.5

FULL-COUPLING

(REDUCINOI

HEXAGON LI

BUSHING / I-----R1-'

LATERAL

I

HALF-COUPLING

PRESSURECLASS

NOMINAL DIAMETER

45 ELL

FULL-COUPLING

L R - I UNION

FULL-COUPLING 3 R

HALF-COUPLING - L

15 - REDUCER 20 INSERT, R

25 - Bonney F o r g e ] 40

R1 - R2 -

LATERAL R3 -

L 1 -

Bonney F o r g e 6 L a d i s h ] L2

DIAMETER l o

1 5 B - R 20

SOCKOLET A - (REDUCING) N 25

c - Bonney F o r g e ] H 4 0

UNION k Banney F o r g e ] A

SWAGE

(1) 'R ' DIRENSIONS ('REROUED RUN' OF PIPE) HAVE BEEN ROUNDED TO 1.0 mn AN0 INCLUDE 2 m EXPANSION GAP(S) FOR WELDING. REFER . . TO 'SOCKET-WELDING PIPING' - CHART 2.2 .,I

( 2 ) DIRENSIDNS ARE FROR THE FOLLOWING SUPPLIERS' DATA: BONNEY FORGE, I T T GRINNEL, LAOISH AND VOGT ( 3 ) UNLESS THE SUPPLIER I S STATED, ' L ' & ' 0 ' DIRENSIONS ARE THE LARGEST QUOTED BY BDNNEY FORGE, I T T GRINNELL, LADISH AND VOGT ( 4 ) FITTINGS CONFORR TO ANSI 018.11, EXCEPT LATERALS AND REDUCER INSERTS, WHICH ARE MADE TO MANUFACTURERS' STANDRROS ( 5 ) FOR INFORRATION ON TtlE BORE DIAMETER AND RATING OF FITTINGS, REFER TO 'SOCKET-WELDED PIPING' - CHART 2.2 (6) UNIONS CONFORm TO R S S - 9 - 0 3 (7) DIRENSIONS FOR INSTALLED SOCI(0LETS EXCLUDE THE 'ROOT GAP' - REFER TD 'DIRENSIONING SPOOLS (WELDED ASSERBLIES)' - 5.3.5

F L A N G E C L A S S E S

SINGLE AND DUAL PLATES

I LENGTHS: 165 1

I LENGTHS: 203 1

1 LENGTHS: 203 1

LENGTHS: 229 w

I N O M I N A L D I A M E T E R O F M A I N R U N [DNl I

O i n m s i o n ~ conucrtcd from OONEY FORGE da ta . Oi~iicnsioiis f o r E i b o i e t s arc nominal. S i z e ON 50 E l b o i c l s arc dcsigned Lo f i t Lhc Ll i f fc icn t s i z e s of run pipe; i n s i l c s l a r g e r than ON 50, cnch s i z e of E l b o l e t is designed t o f i t a runrjc nf run p ipe s i z e s . " Threaded and sockct-welding E l b o l e i s are not o v s i i a b l c i n s i z e s ON 150 and l a r g e r .

LENGTHS: 279 ' W I N O M I N A L D I A M E T E R O F M A I N R U N [ON] I

LENGTHS: 305

LCNGTHS: 330

LENGTHS: 381

LARGE SMALL

Oimensions i n t h i s t a b l e are fur Niil . Iron WOTI<S S"IlgC5.

a v a i l a b l e with ends p l a i n , threaded,

beve l led , Uict i lui ic grooved, and i n any

co*in.tion of theas terminvti0n1

D I M E N S I O N ' A ' 86 143 105 254 178 216 279 305 343 3 8 1 432

P I P DIMENSIONS FROM A!lSI

kW ES 6.10 All0 MANUFACTURERS DATA DINE!, 3118 FROM ANSI 816.5. B

VALVES IONS FROM At iSI

;RANCH DIAMETER

X I S FROM R - - eg5 0,-

m m =- m

+ 7 w - O. 7 w m F 7 -

45" JUMPOVEAS

45" RUNUNDERS

450 RUNUNUER a/

B A S I C S P A C I N G '3'

JUMPOVER LINE

B A S I C S P A C I N G 'R'

RUNUNOER LINE I lN

-- NOTES FOR TABLES A-2M & A-3M

(1) SPACING SHOWN IN THE DIAGRAMS ALLOWS A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 50mm. COMPARE BASIC SPACING J ' or 'R' WITH APPROPRIATE 'C1 or 'CF' SPACING IN TABLE A-1M AND USE THE LARGER DIMENSION

(2) 'Ha IS THE EFFECTIVE SHOE HEIGHT AND 'To IS THE THICKNESS OF INSULATION (WITH COVERING)

(3) FOR SIMPLICITY, THE VALUE 1.5 HAS BEEN SUBSTITUTED FOR THE COEFFICIENT l/sin 45 ( 1 . 4 1 4 . . )

TABLES A-1M

TABLES GIVE THE MINIMUM SPACING INCREASE DIMENSIONS: 1 FOR INSULATION

I D I M E N S I O N -

PlPE WITHOUT FLANGES

PlPE WITH FLANGES

CLASS 300 & CLASS 300 FLANGES

NOMINAL DIRMETER (ON) OF FLANGED PIPE

50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

INSULATION OIblENSIONS IN THESE TABLES ARE SPACINGS FOR BARE PIPE. FOR INSULATED I INFZ A00 THF THICKNESS OF INSULATION AN0 COVERING TO THESE FIGURES

NOMINAL LINES SIZES

Sizes of p ipe , f i t t i n g s , flanges, and va lves a re g iven i n nominal diameters - i n i n c h u n i t s as NPS (Nominal Pipe Size) and i n m e t r i c u n i t s as DN (Diametre Nominale [Nominal Diameter]) , , The f o l l o w i n g t a b l e g ives equ iva len t diameters i n nominal i nch u n i t s and nominal m i l l i m e t e r u n i t s :

CUSTOMARY NPS ( i n c h )

3/4

L * These s i z e s may be used i n speci

no rma l l y used i n new i n d u s t r i a l

METRIC DN (mm)

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700

appl i c r m s t r u c t :

CUSTOMARY NPS ( i n c h )

METRIC ON (mm)

ons; they a re no t

FLANGE CLASSES and PRESSURE NUMBERS

E a r l i e r c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s of f langes f o r s t e e l p i p e (and f langed f i t t i n g s ) : 150- lb , 300-lb, 400-lb, 600-lb, e tc . , r e f e r r e d t o 'Pr imary Serv ice Pressure Rat ings i n pounds (pounds-force) per square- inch ' . (Flanges, however, a re s u i t a b l e f o r s e r v i c e over a range of pressure, w i t h actual pressures depending on opera t ing temperatures, and m a t e r i a l s o f cons t ruc t ion . ) These c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s have been supplanted by Pressure r a t i n g c l a s s des ignat ions: Class 150, Class 300, e t c . , i n which each c l a s s i d e n t i f i e s a group of f langes conforming t o es tab l i shed dimensions, f o r a range of p i p e s i zes .

Standards p u b l i s h 'Pressure-Temperature Rat ings ' f o r each c l a s s of f lange. These r a t i n g s a re maximum a l lowab le non-shock (gage), wovking ( o r s e r v i c e ) pressures over a range o f temperature f o r d i f f e r e n t m a t e r i a l s of cons t ruc t ion , i n c l u d i n g b o l t s and gaskets.

I n a d d i t i o n t o c l a s s des ignat ions, f l a n g e tab les i n t h i s s e c t i o n o f t h e 'PIPING GUIDE' a l s o show 'PN' des ignat ions accord ins t o ANSI 816.5-1981 ( u n t i l reissued 1988). and MSS-SP-86-1981 i r e - i s s u e d 1987).

~~ - .~ ~ - - ~ - , . which s t a t e s " . . . . the recommendation for m e t r i c pressure des ignat ions i s the use of t h e p r e f i x PN, which may be thought o f as 'Pressure Number'."

Pressure Numbers (PN), s i m i l a r t o c l a s s des ignat ions, i d e n t i f y groups of f l anges conforming t o estab- l i s h e d dimensions, and f o r each c l a s s of f lange express t h e pressure r a t i n g w i t h i n the temperature range -20 t o +100F ( r e f e r t o Table F-9), as a nominal bar* value.

Class and corresponding PN des igna t ions a re shown i n t h e f o l l o w i n g t a b l e :

CLASS 150 300 400 600 900 1500 2500

PN 20 50 68 100 150 250 420

C* Bar i s n o t an S I u n i t ; pascal (Pa) i s t h e S I u n i t f o r pressure (and s t r e s s ) . The pascal i s a small u n i t . For s t a t i n g process o r s e r v i c e pressure i t i s used w i t h a p r e f i x such as kPa f o r k i l o p a s c a l (1000 pascals) , o r MPa for megapascal ( 1 000 000 pascals) , a l though megapascal i s more s u i t a b l e f o r t h e g rea te r va lues o f s t ress . Bar, equal t o 100 000 pascals , i s a t r a d i t i o n a l m e t r i c u n i t i n widespread use i n t e r n a t i o n a l l y i n i n d u s t r y and technology. U n t i l i t i s displaced, bar i s i n temporary use w i t h S I u n i t s . (Temporary u n i t s a re s p e c i f i c , w ide ly used, t r a d i t i o n a l m e t r i c u n i t s whose use i n f u t u r e work i s discouraged ) J

Contemporary references and s u p p l i e r s ' l i t e r a t u r e r e f e r t o bar values and PN des ignat ions. Flange t a b l e s i n t h i s s e c t i o n of t h e 'PIPING GUIDE' i n c l u d e PN references f o r in fo rmat ion only .

I n t h e f o l l o w i n g pages, se lec ted data from PT 11 of t h e 'PIPING GUIDE' are presented i n S I u n i t s . For i d e n t i f i c a t i o n , these t a b l e s and c h a r t s a re g iven t h e s u f f i x 'M' .

The USA uses two systems o f weight and measures: the Un i ted St+s system of E n g l i s h o r i g i n , and the m e t r i c system of French o r i g i n .

The Eng l i sh o r I m p e r i a l system was a customary system w i t h o r i g i n s i n Babylonian, Egypt ian, Greek, Roman, Anglo-Saxon, French (Norman) and o the r c i v i l i z a t i o n s and c u l t u r e s . The Eng l i sh system evolved over c b n t u r i e s from s imp le measures and p r a c t i c e s , e v e n t u a l l y a t t a i n i n g p r e c i s i o n through l e g i s l a t i o n and s tandard iza t ion . Although some s t a n d a r d i z a t i o n r e s u l t e d from reform (sometimes a r o y a l dec ree) , the overwhelming pressure came from expansion i n i n d u s t r y and commerce

Imper ia l Rome e s t a b l i s h e d a system of weights and measures used f rom England t o A s i a . But, w i t h t h e d e c l i n e o f t h e Roman Empire, what was once an almost u n i v e r s a l system degenerated i n t o l o c a l customary systems i n c o n t i n e n t a l Europe and England.

By the 17 th and 1 8 t h cen tu r ies , through c o l o n i z a t i o n and dominance i n commerce, the Eng l i sh system had developed t o a p o i n t where i t was i n use i n many p a r t s of t h e wor ld , i n c l u d i n g t h e American c o l o n i e s , The French, however, decided t o abandon t h e con fus ion of European customary u n i t s (which v a r i e d n o t o n l y from coun t ry t o coun t ry , b u t from p rov ince t o p w v i n c e and sometimes, from c i t y t o c i t y ) , and t o c rea te an e n t i r e l y new system t o r a t i o n a l i z e weights and measures - t h e M e t r i c System,.

The m e t r i c system was the r e s u l t o f years o f s c i e n t i f i c i n v e s t i g a t i o n and recommendations f o r reform I t was adopted i n t h e l a t e 1 8 t h cen tu ry by the p o s t - r e v o l u t i o n a r y government o f France and, subse- quen t l y , by o the r n a t i o n s The s tandard ized u n i t s and decimal base were p a r t i c u l a r l y w e l l s u i t e d f o r sc ience and eng ineer ing .

By t h e middle o f t h e 20 th century , p r i n c i p a l manufactur ing c o u n t r i e s n o t us ing the m e t r i c system were B r i t a i n , the B r i t i s h Commonwealth c o u n t r i e s and the Un i ted States. Although i n 1866 t h e U.S,. Congress l e g a l i z e d t h e m e t r i c system f o r use throughout the Un i ted S ta tes and, i n 1975 passed t h e M e t r i c Conversion Act, t h e Un i ted S ta tes i s t h e o n l y major i n d u s t r i a l n a t i o n today, n e i t h e r t o have adopted nor mandated use o f t h e m e t r i c system as i t s p r imary system o f measurement.

I n 1960, a t t h e General Conference of Weights and Measures (Conference Generale des Poids e t Mesures [CGPM]), the modern v e r s i o n o f the m e t r i c system was des ignated the I n t e r n a t i o n a l System o f U n i t s (Le Svsteme I n t e r n a t i o n a l d a U n i t e s l . and endorsed bv t h e I n t e r n a t i o n a l Oruan iza t ion f o r S t a n d a r d i z a t i o n SO) - a f e d e r a t i o n of n a t i o n i i s t a n d a r d i z a t i o n - b o d i e s r e p r e s e n t i n g most c o u n t r i e s of the w o r l d The i n t e r n a t i o n a l symbol for t h i s system i s S I .

S I , now the p r imary w o r l d system o f u n i t s o f measurement, i s a r a t i o n a l i z e d s e l e c t i o n of u n i t s f rom the m e t r i c system w i t h which IS0 seeks t o e s t a b l i s h i n t e r n a t i o n a l standards, e s p e c i a l l y those f o r u n i v e r s a l i n t e r c h a n g e a b i l i t y of components. S I s i m p l i f i e s measurement by l o g i c a l l y coord ina t ing unique u n i t s f o r l e n g t h , mass, temperature, t ime, e t c . , i n a decimal system i n which the magnitude o f a u n i t i s changed by moving the decimal p o i n t ( o r , f o r example, by us ing a p r e f i x such as l l i w i t h meter f o r t h e f a c t o r 0.001)

The customary system i s more complicated as it uses t h r e e types o f subd iv i s ion : duodecimal ( t w e l f t h s ) , decimal ( t e n t h s ) , and b i n a r y (ha lves ) , and r e q u i r e s convers ion, f o r example, between d i f f e r e n t u n i t s of l e n g t h (such as inches, f e e t and ya rds ) , o r o f mass (such as ounces, pounds and tons ) , ,

Changing f rom customary u n i t s t o S l u n i t s i s s t r a i g h t f o r w a r d , b u t changing f rom t r a d i t i o n a l m e t r i c u n i t s t o S1 u n i t s i s more d i f f i c u l t i n c o u n t r i e s a l ready us ing t h e m e t r i c sys tem Because o f t h i s d i f f i c u l t y , a l though n o t i n keeping w i t h the goa ls o f ISO, a l i m i t e d number o f t r a d i t i o n a l m e t r i c u n i t s are t e m p o r a r i l y b e i n g used w i t h S I ; one such u n i t i s bar, the u n i t f o r pressure, r e f e r r e d t o below under 'F lange Classes and Pressure Numbers'

Wi thout a l e g i s l a t i v e mandate, f u l l implementat ion o f SI i n the Un i ted States i s u n l i k e l y ; however, t e c h n i c a l and economic requi rements o f American companies opera t ing i n t e r n a t i o n a l l y a r e encouraging v o l u n t a r y t r a n s i t i o n ; f o r example, manufacturers of equipment and components are now p r e s e n t i n g dimensional and o t h e r da ta i n S I u n i t s (and temporary m e t r i c u n i t s i n use w i t h S I ) i n a d d i t i o n t o U S . customary u n i t s

Ib - f t 3 -

169 481

546 541 532 524 552 556 450 461 480 710 551 554 490 495

59 42 t h r u 47 56 51 62.3 64

153 15.0 11.0 11.0

5.0 thru 6.5 -

120 144 150 76 95 78 96

156 100 120 100 120

8

Ib - f t Z "in - 14.1 40.1

45.5 45.1 44.3 43.7 46.0 46.3 37.5 38.4 40.0 59.2 45.9 46.2 40.8 41.3 -

- 12.8

1.25 0.92 0.92 0.42 thru 0.54

- tb

US 9.1 -

- 7.9 5 6 thru 5.3 7.5 5"8 9.33 9.6 -

MATERIAL

Aluminum f 2s)

KR - m - 2710 7700

8750 8670 8520 8390 8840 8900 7210 7380 7690

11370 8830 8870 7850 7930 -

- 2450 240 176 176 80

thru 104

Ib - Imp gal -

- 9.5 6.7

thru 7.5 9.0 8.2

10.0 10.3 -

Aluminum krohze Brasses : %Cu %Zn Red brass 85 15 Low brass 80 20 Cartridge brass 70 30 Muntz metal 60 40 Bronze, %Cu=80-95, %Sn=20-5 Copper Iron, gray-cast

malleable

METALS & ALLOYS

Lead Monel Nickel S t e e l ,

wrought

carbon s t a i n l e s s

Fuel o i l Gasoline

0.95 0.67 t h r u 0.75 0.90 0.82 1 .oo 1 .O3

LIQUIDS Lube o i l J e t fuel Water, f resh

s a l t (seawater)

Abestos 2.45 0.24 0.176 0.18 0.08 thru 0.10

1.92 2.31 2.40 l "22 1.52 1 .25 1.54 2.50 1.60

1.60 1.92 0.13

0.0885 0.0087 0.0064 0.0064 0.0029 thru 0.0038 - 0.069 0.083 0.088 0.044 0.055 0.045 0.056 0.090 0.058 0.069 0.058 0.069 0.0046

Cork Fiberglas (Owens/Corning "Kaylo" Magnesia (85%) P l a s t i c foam

INSULATING MATERIALS

Brick, comon Concrete, plain

reinforced Earth, dry , loose

dry, packed moist , loose moist , packed

Glass Gravel, dry

wet Sand, drv

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

. w e t Snow, loose

BUTT-WELDING FITTINGS

SCHEDULE No.: 20 3 0 20 -- MFR'S WEIGHT: STD XS STD XS

I I I LR 90 ELBOW 320 420 460 600 SR 90 ELBOW 210 275 298 392 LR 45 ELBOW 160 206 238 300 TEE REDUCER *** WELDOLET **

FLANGES

FORGED STEEL CLASS CLASS 150 300 600 1500 150 300 600 1500

WELDING NECK 197 369 690 (refer (refer SLIP-ON 148 307 612 to THREADED 155 325 612 Mfr) 210 490 876 Mfr) LAP JOINT 159 375 604 195 530 866

VALVES

CAST STEEL CLASS 150 300 600 1500 2500

CLASS 150 300 600 1500 2500

INSULATION

TEMPERATURE 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 90U 1000 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 I00 RANGE deg F I I I I I I I I I I 199 299 399 499 599 699 799 899 999 1199 I I I I t I I I I / I 199 299 399 499 599 699 799 899 999 !I9

CalSil. in. 1.51.5 2 2.5 3 3 3.5 4 4 5 1.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 3 3.5 4 Weight lb/ft 8.5 8.5 12 15 18 18 21 25 25 34 10 10 13 17 21 21 25 29 29 39

H. T. C. in. 3 3.5 '>4 4 5 85% Mag in. 1.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 1.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 Weightlb/ft 8.58.5 12 15 18 25 31 37 37 50 10 10 13 1'7 21 29 36 43 43 58

BOLTS* 52 105 242 I 7 1 174 360

I *Weights for bolts are for one complete flange set. **Weights are for reducing Weldolets. ***Weights for reducers are for one pipe size reduction. PSB indicates valves having pressure seal bonnets. All other weights for valves are for valves having flanged bonnets.


SCHEDULE No.: MFR'S WEIGHT: I 30

STD

LR 90 ELQOW SR 90 ELBOW LR 45 ELBOW TEE I REDUCER *** WELDOLET *"

FLANGES

FORGED STEEL CLASS 1 5 0 300 600 .. , 1500

WELDING NECK 1 4 2 249 4 8 1 (refer SLIP-ON 1 0 6 210 366 to THREADED 9 3 220 366 Mfr) LAP JOINT 1 0 4 234 400

VALVES

CAST STEEL CLASS 1 1 5 0 300 600 1 5 0 0 2500

GATE-FLGD 1 1 2 0 1 9 6 0 4375 GLOBE-FLGD CHECK-FLGD 1 4 5 0 1 6 5 0 GATE-BW 960 1620 3675 GLOBE-BW CHECK-BW 1 1250 1220 GATE PSB-FLGD GATE PSB-BW 2575 GLOBE PSB

INSULATION

TEYPERATURE 100 200 300 1 0 0 500 GOU 700 800 900 lOOU RANGE dcg F I - I l I H I ( ( I ' 9 9 299 399 499 599 G99 799 899 999 1199 1

I I I I I I , H. T. C. in. I 1 3 13.51

I . . - 85% Mag in. 1 . 5 1 . 5 2 2 .5 3 Weight lblft 6 . 9 6 . 9 9.3 1 2 1 5 20 25 '31 3 1 42

- - STD XS

CLASS 1 1 5 0 300 600 1 5 0 0

1 6 5 306 555 (refer 253 476 to 280 4'7 6 Mfrl

CLASS 1 1 5 0 300 600 1 5 0 0 2500

BOLTS* 3 1 83 1 5 2 4 1 1 0 1 193 a for bolts are for one complete flange set. **Weights are for reducing Weldolets.

***Weights for reducers are for one pipe size reduction. PSB indicates valves having oressure seal bonnets. All other weights for valves are for valves having flanged bonnets.


SCHEDULE WO.: - - 160 - 3 0 - 160 MFR'S WEIGHT: STD XS - XXS STD XS - XXS

LR 90 ELBOW SR 90 ELBOW LR 45 ELBOW TEE 120 160 REDUCER **" 43.5 WELDOLET ** 59 6 1 (refer to Mfr) 7 0 (refer to Mfrl

FLANGES

FORGED STEEL 150 CLASS CLASS 300 600 1500 2500 300 600 1500

- WELDING NECK 206 347 (refer

159 259 to THREADED 1300 8 5 164 259 Mfr) LAP JOINT 139 240 749 1262 77 184 290

VALVES

CAST STEEL

GATE-FLGD GLOBE-FLGD CHECK-FLGD GATE-BW GLOBE-BW CHECK-BW GATE PSB-FLGD GATE PSB-BW GLOBE PSB-BW

CLASS 150 300 600 1500 2500

CLASS 1 150 300 600 1500 2500

INSULATION

TEXPERATURE RAliGE deg F

Cal Sil. in. 1.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 3 3.5 4 4 5 Weight lblft 6 6 8 11 13 13 15 1.8 18 24

H. T. C. in. 3 3.5 4 4 5 85% Mag in. 1.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 Weightlb/ft 6 6 8.1 11 13 18 22 27 2'7 35

BOLTS* 49 9 1 306 622 22 62 118

I *Weights for bolts are for one complete flange set. **Weights are for reducing Weldolets. ***Weights for reducers are for one pipe size reduction. PSB indicates valves having I eressure seal bonnets. All other weiqhts for valves are for valves havina flansed bonnets.


SCHEDULE No.: 40 80 1 6 0 - MFR' S WEIGHT: STD XS - XXS

LR 90 ELBOW SR 90 ELBOW

TEE REDUCER LR 45 ELBOW * * * -- 55 13.3 1 8 . 8 1 1 0 3 1 3 1 2 0 6

WELDOLET ** 23 3 7 (refer t o Mfr)

FLANGES

40 ] 1 STD 60 1 6 0 xs - XXS

FORGED STEEL 150 CLASS CLASS

300 600 1 5 0 0 2500 1 5 0 300 600 1500 2500

WELDING NECK 4 2 69 1 1 2 273 SLIP-ON 2 8 5 6 97 - -

576 1 7 7

THREADED 3 0 5 6 97 258 , 485 4 1 8 0 1 7 7 436 925 LAP JOINT 2 8 5 5 1 1 2 286 4 7 1 3 6 8 8 1 9 5 485 897

VALVES

CAST STEEL

GATE-FLGD GLOBE-FLGD CHECK-FLGD GATE-BW GLOBE-BW CHECK-BW GATE PSB-FLGD GATE PSB-BW GLOBE PSB-BW

INSULATION

CLASS 300 600 1 5 0 0 2500

CLASS 1 150 300 6 0 0 1 5 0 0 2500 I


SCHEDULE No.: 4 0 8 0 160 - MFR'S WEIGHT: I STD XS - XXS I I

I

LR 9 0 ELBOW 9.00 13.5 SR 90 ELBOW 6.25 R.50

18-0 - 2 0 . 0 7 1 - . ~ - -

LR 45 ELBOW 4.50 6.10 8.75 10.8 TEE 12.0 15.8 25.0 25.0 REDUCER * A * 3.38 4.50 6.40 9.00 WELDOLET ** 6.30 6.40 10.5 10.5

4 0 8 0 160 - STD XS - xxs

I I I "

FLANGES

FORGED STEEL 150 CLASS CLASS

300 600 1500 2500 150 300 600 1500 2500

WELDING NECK 16.5 26.5 37 69 146 2 6 45 7 3 164 3 78 SLIP-ON 13 23.5 33 - - 17 3 6 80 - - THREADED 13 24 33 7 3 12'7 19.5 36 80 164 323 LAP JOINT 12 2 4 31 7 5 122 18 38 7 8 170 314

VALVES

CAST STEEL

GATE-FLGD GLOBE-FLGD CHECK-FLGD GATE-BW GLOBE-BW CHECK BW GATE PSB-FLGD GATE PSB-BW GLOBE PSB-BW

INSULATION

CLASS 600 1500 2500 11 150

CLASS 150 300 300 600 1500 2500

BOLTS* 4 '7 . 5 12.5 34 61 6 11.5 30 76 145

*Weights f o r b o l t s a r e f o r one complete f lange s e t . ** Weights a r e f o r reducing Weldolets. ***Weights f o r reducers a r e f o r one pipe s i z e reduction. PSB i nd ica t e s valves having pressure s e a l bonnets. All other weights f o r valves a r e f o r valves having flanged bonnets.

LR 90 ELBOW SR 90 ELBOW LR 45 ELBOW TEE REDUFER *** WELDOLET * *

FORGED STEEL SOCKET WELD: 90 ELBOW 45 ELBOW TEE COUP/RED *** SOCKOLET ** FORGED STEEL THREADED: 90 ELBOW 45 ELBOW TEE COUP/RED * * * THmDOLET * * MALL. IRON THREADED: 90 ELBOW 45 ELBOW TEE COUPLING REDUCER *** FORGED STEEL: WELDING NECK SLIP-ON THREADED LAP JOINT SOCKET

CAST STEEL: GATE-FLGD GLOBE-FLGD CHECK-FLGD GATE-BW GLOBE-BW CHECK-BW GATE PSB- - -~

GATE PSB-BW GLOBE PSB-

TEMPERATURE RANGE deg F

Cal S i l . in. Weight lb/Et

H. T. C. in. 85% Mag in. Weight lb/Et

BOLTS*

-

STD XS - XXS

1.60 2.20 3.25 3.50

PRESSURE CLASS 2000 3000 6000

PRESSURE CLASS 150 300 2.16 4.00 1.82 3 .7Y1 2.81 5.35 1.48 3.60 1.47 2.88

CLASS 150 300 600 1500 2500 6 8 10 24 42

CLASS 600 84 90 70 '7 2 '78 55

40 80 160 - STD XS - XXS

PRESSURE CLASS 3000 6000 10.9 19.3 10.5 14.3 12.5 23.5 3.88 6.63 3.80 "-

PRESSURE c m s 150 300 5.3'7 9.46 4.75 8.54

PRESSIIRLi CLASS SOCKET WELD: 90 ELBOW 1.00 2.35 3.19 2.13 5.25 6.69 45 ELBOW 0.94 1.91 2.50 1.63 4.31 4.81

1.31 3.31 3.75 2.64 7.48 7.88 COUPIRED * * * 0.56 1.00 1.69 1.00 2.00 2.19 SOCKOLET * * 0.60 1.30 1.30 1.04 2.00 2.00

FORGED STEEL PRESSURE CLASS PRESSURE CLASS THREADED: ,90 ELBOW 1.13 2. 2'7 3.50 2.18 45 ELBOW 1.06 1.99 2.79 1.74 3.00 5.75

1.36 3.03 4.63 2.80 7.04 9.63 COUPIRED * * * 0.63 2.13 2.19 4,.38 THREDOLET * * 0.62 1.23 1.00 1.96

MALL. IRON PRESSURE CLASS PRESSURO CLASS THREADED: 90 ELBOW 0.67 1.15 1.36 2.57 45 ELBOW 0.59 1.07 1.17 2.30 TEE 0.93 1.62 1.85 3.46 COUPLING 0.46 1.03 0.93 2.10 REDUCER *"* 0.44 0.82 0..85 1.69

WELDING NECK SLIP-ON 3.5 7.5 6.5 6.5 THREADED 3.5 7.5 6.5 6.5 14

3.5 7.5 12 6.5 6.5 14 24 2 15

FORGED & CAST C W S CLASS STEEL: 150 300 600 1500 2500 150 300 600 1500 2500

V GATE-FLGD 12.1 15.4 17.2 41.3 21.5 29.2 30.0 80 A GLOBE-FLGD 11.9 15.6 17 43.6 25 29.9 33.5 80 L CHECK-FLGD 9 13.7 16.3 30 20.7 27.9 33 57 V GATE-THRDISW 24.7 58.4 E GLOBE-THRD/SW 26.9 59 S CHECK-THRD/SW VOGT VALVES 12.7 15 VOGTVALVES 12.7 49.1

GATE PSB-SW CRANE VALVES 2 2 CRANE VALVES 3 9 GATE PSB-BW 21 37 GLOBE PSB-SW 20 4 5

BOLTS *

*Weights for bolts are for one complete flange set. **Weights are for reducing Sockolets and Thredolets. ***Weights for reducers are for one pipe size reduction. PSB indicates Valves h a ~ r i n n n ~ r r ; ~ , , ~ ~ sral honnc+s. other weiohts for valves are for valves havinq flanged bunnets.

NOTES

A fac to r i n the design of p i p i n g supports i s t he weight o f the p i p i n g t o be supported. Ca lcu la t i on o f t he load ings i n v o l v e t h e weights o f p ipe, f i t t i n g s , f langes, valves, i n s u l a t i o n , t h e conveyed f l u i d , and o ther r e l a t e d i tems t h a t a re a l so t o be supported as p a r t of t he p i p i n g system.

Tables show weights of p i p i n g components. Data are sub jec t t o v a r i a t i o n from manufacturing to1 erances.

PIPE

For Schedule numbers, Manufacturers' weights ( t r a d i t i o n a l designations: STD, X S , e tc . ) , weight per u n i t length, weight f i l l e d w i t h water, th ickness o f w a l l - r e f e r t o Tables P-1.

VALVES

Weights fo r valves do n o t i nc lude weSghts of powered operators o r o ther devices s p e c i f i e d f o r p a r t i c u l a r valves. Weights shown f o r valves i n these tab les are from data a v a i l a b l e as i nd i ca ted from t h e Henry Vogt Machine Co. and from the Crane Company. In format ion he re in i s no t intended t o i n d i c a t e the complete range o f valves a v a i l a b l e from e i t h e r manufacturer. Weights shown are f o r valves having convent ional po r t s .

As va lve fea tu res vary between manufacturers, ac tua l weights o f valves should be obtained from t h e s p e c i f i e d manufacturer o r supp l i e r .

INSULATION

Weights of i n s u l a t i o n are shown f o r both calc ium s i l i c a t e and f o r conventional 85% magnesia (a lone - o r i n combination w i t h diatomaceous s i l i c a ) . The assumed d e n s i t i e s are 11 pounds per cubic f o o t f o r caic ium s i l i c a t e and 85% magnesia, and 2 1 pounds per cub ic foot f o r diatomaceous s i l i c a .

I n s u l a t i o n weights assumed inc lude est imated weights o f canvas, cement, pa in t , w i r e and bands, bu t no t weatherproof ing o r o ther spec ia l p ro tec t i on . Pipe cover ings o f o ther composit ions ?ill have d i f f e r e n t dens i t ies . Data f o r i n s u l a t i o n are based on conventional th ickness recommendations and may n o t correspond w i t h i n s u l a t i o n spec i f i ca t i ons for a p a r t i c u l a r p ro jec t .

UNITS OF WEIGHT

Weights i n the fo l l ow ing tab les are i n pounds - avoirdupois

: NPS 1

N O T E S

DIMENSIONS IN THIS TABLE CON. FORM TO ANSI 816.10 AND APPL' TO'FLANGED VALVES AND VALVE: WITH ENDS BEVELLED FOR WELDINI AS SHOWN:

Tabled Dimension

FOR FLANGED VALVES THE TABLE DIMENSION INCLUDES ALLOWANC FOR ROTH RAI5FD FACES OF TH . -. . - - . . . VALVE. FOR C L ~ ~ E S 150 AN0 30 VALVES, 0.06-inch HAS BEEN IN CLUDED FOR EACH RAISED FAC AND FOR VALVES OF CLASS 60 AND ABOVE. 0.25-inch HAS BEE INCLUDED FOR EACH RAISED FACE

W Half Tablcd Dimension

FOR ANGLE GLOBE & ANGLE LIFT CHECK VALVES. HALVE THE TABLE DIMENSION TO OBTAIN CENTER-TO FACE DIMENSIONS. -

(US GALLONS] I B a

I The foilowing dimensional data for copper tube conform to ASTN 8-88, which specifies general requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper Alloy Pipe and Tube

TYPE K TUBE Heavy ha l l thickness, hard or soft, i s furnished for interior plumbingand underground service; steam and hot water heating systems; fuel oi l lines; industrial process applications carrying liquids, air and gases; air conditioning, refrigeration, and low pressure hydraulic lines. Hard copper tube is used for gas service lines because its rigidity eliminates traps caused by sagging iines.

I NOMINAL DIMENSIONS I THEOI: ON N .~~ .~

, ~aminai Cross Sire Outside insida Wall Sectional

Diameter Diameter Thickness Aroa of Bore (Inches) (Inches) (lnchos) (Sq. Inches)

% 3 7 5 ,305 ,035 "073 % ,500 ,402 .049 ,127 'h ,625 ,527 .049 2 1 8 lh ,875 .745 "065 ,436

1 1.125 ,995 ,065 ,778

1 Y4 1.375 1.245 065 1.22 1 % 1.625 1.481 ,072 1.72 2 2 125 1.959 "083 3 0 1 2% 2.625 2.435 ,095 4.66 3 3.125 2.907 ,109 6.64 --.--

TYPE L TUBE Medium wall thickness, hard or soft, is used for medium pressure interior plumbing and for steam and hot water house-heating systems, panel heating, plumbingvent systems, industrial and process applications. --

NOMINAL DIMENSiONS THEORETICAL AREAS BASED ON NOMINAL DIMENSIONS Theoretical

Nominal Sirc Cross External Internal Weight

Outside Inside Wall Sectional Surface Surface (Pounds Diameter Diameter Thlcknoss Area of Bare (Sq. Ft. (Sq. Ft. Per Foot) (Inches) (inches) (Inches) (Sq. Inches) Per Lin. Ft.) Por Lin. Ft.)

:2 ,375 ,315 ,030 ,078 "098 ,082 0.126 5 0 0 ,430 ,035 145 ,131 ,113 0 198

'h "625 ,545 .040 ,233 ,164 "143 0 285 =A ,875 "785 .045 ,484 2 2 9 2 0 6 0.455

1 1.125 1.025 .050 .825 ,294 ,268 0.655

1 S/n 1375 1.265 "055 1 26 "360 "331 0.884 1 % 1.625 1 505 .060 1.78 ,425 ,394 1.14 2 2.125 1.985 .070 3.09 ,556 520 175 2'h 2,625 2.465 "080 4.77 5 8 7 3 4 5 2.48 3 3.125 2.945 .090 6.81 ,818 ,771 3.33 - 1

TYPE M TUBE Light wail thickness, hard only, furnished fot applications requiring l i t t leor no pressure or tensions on the lines

n

m x * x ... ... m 0 u

e+ rn - m m m 0 0 0 000

.-NN

m o - rn- N

000

WWW .......-

0 ... m

x x x W a r n W O O

w

... ... .- "7 "7 rn ~. 000 000

WWW

W m -, m o r n

009 . m m m NNN

... ... - +.-

kg - 1 -a N N N W WWW

S a z Z 1 Z Z K

PPP 0 0 NNN 1 k k mrnm

000 0 0 0 0 0 0

w W W mmrn 1 III. ffi

nm*,rr,oir ron . l r l 'E l i ,<O"IIEINTII Lihl" IW THE P1111115 A l ln lNElh l l l l l BROW4 ANY

LENGTH O F UPPER L l M B (FT.) 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

LENGTH O F UPPER L l M B (FT.)

LENGTH O F LOWER LIMB (FT.)

m .., 0

.. L, h, 0 h, "2 b, 0 u "2 a 0 m m 0 m 0 m

L E N G T H O F L O W E R LIMB (FT.1

Lo rn - 0 c.4 ," c.4 0 ,, Lo " Lo

LE lG0

PIPE SPAN.

6,. I".

1 5 8 7 7 1 9 3 . 2 8 2 1 6 . 7 9

STEEL PIPE. SCHEDULE 20 EEL PIPE.SCHE1

NOMINI\L PIPE51ZE

2 5 - I l l C I l 3 0-I INCH 11. 0 - 1 NCII 6 . O - I I I C l l 8 . 0 -1 EIC11

1 0 . 0 - I N C I I 1 2 . 0 - I N C l l

LE 10

PIPE WAN"

FI. In.

1 5 11. 1 4 1 8 5 . 6 2 1 9 1 1 . 7 7 2 1 7.211 2 2 1 0 . 6 3

iEEL PIPE. SCHEI

NOMINAL PIPE SlLE

- W l l G l i i OF

I&TER.FIlLEI PIPE WAN

ILbI - 2 9 5 6 8 1,

1 2 7 1 8 2 2 8 8 6 3 2

1 , 1 0 3 1, 7 8 2 2, 5 9 2 3 , 8 0 9 4, 8 8 6 6, 0 8 7 7,1154

1 0 , 5 3 0 -

1 O - I N C H 1 5 - I N C H 2 0 - I N C I l 2 . 5 - I N C i l 3 . 0 - I N C H 4 . 0 - I N C I I 6 . 0 - I NCt l 8 . 0 - 1 l4Ctl

1 0 , 0 - l l 4 C I l 1 2 . 0 - 1 I 4 C t l 111.0-INCH 1 6 . 0 -1 NCH 1 8 . 0 - I N C I i 2 0 . O - I N C H 2 4 . 0 - I N C H

STEEL PIPE. SCHE

NOMINAL PIPESIZE

.E 80

PIPE SPAN.

F,. I".

1 6 1 . 0 5 1 . 0 - I N C I I 1. 5 - 1 NCI I 2 . 0 - I ElCtl 2 . 5 - IE ICH 3 . 0 - I E I C I I 1,. 0 - I F I C I I 6 . 0 - I EICII 8 . 0 - 1 INCH

1 0 O - I N C H 1 2 . 0 - I N C H 1 4 " 0 - I N C I I 1 6 O - I I I C H

iEDULE 80

PIPE SPAN.

.UMINUM PIPE,:

NOMINAL PIPESIZE

MAXIMUM IPLECTION'

11n.1 - 0 1014 0 3 8 6 0 . 3 6 7 0 . 3711 0 . 3 5 7 0 . 3 3 6 0 3111 0.2911 0. 2 6 4 -

I 1 8 . 0 - 1 NCH

EEL PIPE.SCHE1

NOMINAL PIPESIZE

6 . O - I N C H 8 . 0 - 1 NCH

1 0 . 0 - I N C H MAXIMUM E€LECTlON'

llno 0.2184 0 . 2 3 7 0 . 2 3 0 0 . 2311 0 . 2 2 7 0 . 2 1 8 0 . 2 0 2 0 . 1 3 3 0 . 1 8 5 0 . 1 8 0 0 . 1 7 3 0 . 1 7 8 0 . 1 7 9 0.1711 0 . 1 7 1 -

1. 0 - I N C H l , 5 - l t l c l l 2. 0 - IE ICI I 2 . 5 - I N C H 3 . 0 - I N C I I 11. 0 - , I NCI I G . 0 - I I i C I I

ALUMINUM PIPE,

NOMINAL PIPESIZE

EDULE 40 WEIGHT OF

PIPE SPAN

MAXIMUM lEFLECllON

11n.1 - 0 . 3 8 1 0 . 3 3 9 0 . 3 1 3 0 . 3 2 7 0 . 3 0 5 0 . 2 7 8 0 . 2 ' 4 2 0 . 2 2 3 0 . 2 0 8

CLEARANCES TO M A N U A L VALVES AND SUGGESTED OPERATING HEIGHTS

3VERHEAD VALVES INYERTEDYAIVEI: REFERTOG.1.1, UNDER

FOR VALVE OPERATION ABOVE 'X IENTATION OF I G'G or 2 m. REFER TO 6.1.3. VllLVE ITEM- UNDER 'OPERATING ACCESS TO VALVES

G G'orZm----- 7- MINIMUM ABOVE FLOOR or PLATFORM

VERTICAL VALVES ............................................................................................ HORIZONTAL VALVES

ZONES NOTES

0 PREFERRED ELEVATIONS I11 TAKE CHAINS TO 3 . 0 (OR 900 mml FROM OPERATIN<

I31 IF A RAILING IS PRESENT. COMFORTABLE OPERATIN<

131 5 5 - lpitoh unnlol301 If lbl 1.68 -(pitch unnlol1001 m

TABLE 6.1 GIVES ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONS

CLEARANCES AROUND STAIRWAYS & LADDERS

COEFFICIENTS OF EXPANSION OF DIFFERENT PIPING MATERIALS (In lnchesldegreellnch of length)

I I b b b b b b b b & b b b b b b b b b b b o & & B k b b b b b b b b b k k b b b b b b b ~ b t ~ t ~ % C g t ; S C l . ~ g % g g ~ E : : ~ g t ; g p u r r g g z F E b i G ~ g " 7 r ~ l i ~ ~ C S l i l b t ~ ~ ~

sai 10 MI , MI

m MI

sai 20 m MI MI MI MI

SCll120 sai 1411 SM 160

sat 10 MI

MI sat 20 sm Am

MI MI

sai 160

MI sai m xs MI

M I sai 20 MI

M I m API

SCIl40 /IPI API

XS API saI M MI

M I S M 80 API

M I sai IW SM 120 )C(S M I S M 140 API 331 160 API

API M I

M I sat 30 m MI SM 40 API

r\Pr XS M I

S M M M I

SM 80 M I SM 1 W API SQI 1lo SM 140 M I SQI 160

Thru NPS 10, w a l l thicknesses for SCH 1

189.6 232.2

and SCH 805 L I i

ainless steel pipes are the same as for SCH 40 and SCH 80 carbon steel pipes

U L C C C ' G G C ; G % z Y 5 s % B

Tables P-1 present ca lcu la ted data as a guide only. Spans are f o r p ipe arranged i n pipeways w i t h the fo l l ow ing assumptions: Bare p ipe - continuous s t r a i g h t run w i t h welded j o i n t s and two o r more s t r a i g h t spans a t each end.

SPANS - ca lcu la ted w i t h l i n e s f u l l o f water and a maximum bending s t ress o f 4 000 PSI

SAG - ( d e f l e c t i o n ) ca lcu la ted w i t h l i n e s empty (drained cond i t ion)

The fo l lowing fac tors were n o t considered i n ca l cu la t i ng spans f o r these tables: Concentrated mechanical loads from flanges, valves, s t ra ine rs , f i l t e r s , and other. i n 1 i ne equipment - weights of connecting branch l i n e s - to rs iona l loading from thermal movement - sudden react ion from l i n e s ( s ) d ischarging contents - v i b r a t i o n - f l a t t e n i n g e f f e c t of weight of contents i n l a rge r l i q u i d f i l l e d l i n e s - weight of i n s u l a t i o n and pipe covering - weight of i c e and snow - wind loads - seismic shock - reduct ion i n wa l l thickness of p ipe from threading or ,grooving.

DESIGN PRESSURE - ca lcu la ted per ANSI 031.1 using al lowable s t ress value o f 9 000 PSI f o r seamless carbon s tee l p ipe

BURSTING PRESSURE i s approximate, ca lcu la ted on y i e l d s t rength o f 30 000 PSI

API = Alnericvn Petrolem Institute's standard SL. fo r 'Line pipe'. API pipe sizes; manufacturers' weights: Oouble-extra-strong (XXS), Extra-strong (XS). and Standard (STD), are included with schedule numbers in standard ANSI 836.11)m. Also rcfsr to 2.1.3

XXT Am 1.050

1.~1 SM 40 SIDAPI I 1.315

2.00 1 SM 40 Sm API / 2.375 2.067 . I30 / sai 80 xs MI 2.375 1.939 .a80 M I 2.375 1.875 .wx)

XYS 1 2,375 1.503 ,4360

Thru NPS 10, wall thicknesses f o r SCH 41

9.051 9.820 --- and SCH 805

89.54 56.66 1.774 2.656 1.3U 1.104 .7027

ainlese steel pipes are the saw as for SCH 40 an

ll.5 .W ll.3 .217

12.9 .212 12.7 ,217 12.3 213 ll.5 .I94

14.4 .203 14.3 .215 13.9 215 13.3 2.03

16.1 .199 16.1 .W 15.7 216 15.0 .206

17.9 "187 18.1 207 18.0 2 6 17.3 .212

19.0 .I79 19.3 .202 19.3 .215 18.7 .W

20.9 .I64 21.5 .I93 21.6 .202 21.5 .W 21.2 23.7

jCH a0 cart steel pipes

Aluminum 0.214 Asbestos 0.20 Asphalt 0.40

Chromium Coal Coke Concrete Copper Cork

Carbon 0.165 Carborpndum 0.16 Cast i r o n 0.12 - 0.13 Cel lu lose 0.37 Cement, dry 0.37 Cement, powder 0.20 Chalk 0.215 Charcoal 0.20 - 0.24

0.12 0,.24 - 0.37

Dowtherm A 0.50 Dural umin 0.23

Ear th , dry 0.30

Fuel o i 1 : s p g r 96 0 . 4 0 s p g r 9 1 0.44 s p g r 8 6 0.45 s p gr 81 0.51

Glass , p l a t e 0.12 Glass , pyrex 0.20

GASES

Air Ammonia Argon

Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Carbon d i s u l f i d e Chlorine

Ethylene

Helium Hydrogen Hydrogen s u l f i d e

Glass , wool 0.16 Grani te 0.19 Graphite 0..201

Ice : . ,

Kerosene 0.48 - 0.50

Lead 0.031 Limestone 0.217 Luci te 0.35

Magnesia 0.20 - 0.22 Malleable i ron 0.12 Masonry, br ick 0.20 - 0.22 Mineral wool 0.20 Mercury 0.033 Molybdenum 0.06

Nickel Nylon

Olive o i l 0.35 - 0.47

Paper 0.33 P l a s t e r of P a r i s 1.14 Platinum 0.03 - 0.039 Polythene 0.53

t Constant Pressure

t Constant Volume

Quartz 0.17 - 0.21

Rocksal t 0 .. 22 Rubber 0..27 - 0.48

S a l t , granula ted 0 .21 Sand 0.195 Sandstone 0.22 Seawater, sp g r 1.023 0.94 S i l i c a 0.191 S i l i c o n 0.123 Soda Sodi urn S tee l Sucrose Sugar, bulk Stone Su l fu r

Tar , bitumin Tef 1 on T i l e Tin Tungsten

Water Wood, f i r

oak

GASES

o u s 0.35 0 .25 0.15 0.056 0.04

pine 0.467 Wood shavings 0 .. 52

Zinc 0.095

Methane

Nitrogen Ni t rous oxide

Oxygen

Steam: @ 1 .0 w i a @ 14.7 p s i a @ 150.0 p s i a

Su l fu r d ioxide

t Constant A t Constanl Pressure Volume ---I---

ILTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN

~d ( su rvey I 16.5" f e e t 5.029 2" meter s

wa re cm 0.155 square i n c h

iuare meter 0.000 247 1 acre 1.195 99 square yards 10.763 9 square f e e t 10 000 square cen t ime te rs

I k i l ome te r 0.386 102 2 square m i l e 247.105 383 acres

luare i n c h 645.16'5 square m i l l i m e t e r s

luat'e f oo t 0.092 903 04" square meter 144 square inches

i ua re ya rd 0.836 127 36" square meter

w a r e m i l e 640 acres 2.589 988 sq k i l o l ne te r s 258.998 8 hec ta res

!em: 100 000 B t u Lurope (EEC) 105 506 000 j o u l e s Jn l t ed S ta tes 105 480 400 j o u l e s

~n (shor t -US, 907.184 74" k i lograms I s o n e t t on1 2 0 0 0 pounds

0.907 184 7435 m e t r i c t o n 0.892 857 1 l ong t o n (UKI

~n (long-UK, 1 016.046 91 k i lograms I s o gross t on1 2 240 pounds

1.016 046 91 m e t r i c tons 1.12" s h o r t tons (US)

MULT I PLY BY TO OBTAIN

t o n ( m e t r i c ) 1 000 k i 1 ogr.ams o r tonne 2 204.623 pounds

0.984 206 5 l o n g t o n (UKI 1.102 311 s h o r t t ons (US1

ton o f r e f r i g - 12 000 Btu lhour e r a t i o n 200 B tu lm inu te

3 517 w a t t s

w a t t [ w ] 3.412 141 3 Btu lhour. 0.737 562 2 foot-poundlsec 1 Joule lsecond

wat t -hour 3.412 141 3 B t u

Yard [ y d l 0.914 4" meter

TEMPERATURE CONVERSION:

Fahrenhe i t t o Ce l s i us C = (F - 32) I 1.8 Ce l s i us t o Fahrenhe i t F = (C x 1.8) t 32 Fahrenhe i t t o k e l v i n K = ( F t 459.671 / 1.8 Ce l s i us t o k e l v i n K = c t 273.15 k e l v i n t o Ce l s i us C = K - 273.15 Rankine t o k e l v i n K = R I 1.8

VISCOSITY:

c e n t i p o i s e 0.001 pascal second (Pa 5 ) (dynamic I

c e n t i s t o k e s 0.000 001 sq meter pe r second ( k i n e m a t i c )

Non-Sl u n i t s : Th is table con ta ins u n i t s combining k i log ram i n u n i t s o f force and pressure. I n 81. k i l o g r a m i s t h e u n i t o f mess, 'newton' i s the u n i t o f fo rce , and 'pasca l ' i s tho u n i t of pressurc

R U L E S F O R R O U N D I N G V A L U E S

Reference: ASTM E 380

F I R S T DISCARDED D I G I T LAST RETAINED D I G I T ---?- If less than 5 1 NO CHANGE

i t OTtlER tho" 0 INCREASE BY ONE UNIT

I f greater than 5 I I I I F ODD: INCREASE BY ONE U N l T

Equal t o 5 and fa l l owed ONLY by zeros I F EVEN: NO CHANGE

FERENCES: US Department of CommercelNational Ins t i tu te of Standards & Technology: National Aeronautics & Space Adrnini5tr.a- on; American Soc ie ty far Testing M a t e r i a l s : The American Society o f Mechanical Engineers: Nat iona l Physical Laboratory-UK

lULT I PLY BY TO OBTAIN

gal lon (UK) - l i q u i d

gram

g rav i t y : s t d f r e e f a l l

g ra in

hectare t h a l

horsepower

horsepower ( b o i l e r )

horsepower ( m e t r i c )

horsepower ( e l e c t r i c )

i nch

231 cubic inches 8 p i n t s 4 quarts 0.832 674 18 ga l l on (UK) 8.336 7 pounds of water

@ 15.6C 160F1

1.200 949 9 ga l lons (US) 4.546 09' 1 i t e r s 4.546 09" cubic decimeters 277.419 43 cubic inches 8 p i n t s 4 quarts 10.012 pounds o f water

@15.6C[60F1 ,

O.OOI* k i logram 0.035 273 96 ounce 15.432 36 gra ins

32.174 feetlsecondlsecon 9.806 65' m/second/second

0.064 798 91 gram 11700 0 pound

2.471 053 8 acres 10 000 square meters 107 639.1 square f e e t 0.003 861 square m i l e

42.407 219 Btulminute 2 544.433 1 Btulhour 33 000 foot-pounds/minute 5 50 foot-poundslsecond 745.699 87 watts

33 471.439 8 Btulhour 9 809.5 watts

735.499 watts

746 watts

25.4" m i l l i m e t e r s 2.54" cent imeters 0.025 4% meter

i nch (head) o f 1.130 863 9 f e e t of water mercury @ 60F 3 376.85 pascals

i nch (head) o f 248.84 pascals water @ 60F

j o u l e t J 1 0.000 947 8 Btu 0.737 562 18 foot-pound 1 watt-second

ki logram [kg1 2.204 623 pounds 1 000 grams

k g f l s q cm 98 066.5" pascals , 14.223 344 l b f l s q i n

k i p 1 000 1 b f 4 448.221 615 newtons

k s i ( k i p 6 894 757 pascals per sq i n ) 6.894 757 megapascals [MPal

ULT I PLY BY TO OBTAIN

t i lometer tkml 0.621 371 2 m i l e

t i l owa t t -hour 3 412.141 3 Btu

l i t e r . t ~ 1 1 000 cubic cent imeters 1 cubic decimeter 0.001" cubic meter 61.023 744 1 cublc inches 0.035 314 67 cublc foot 0.264 172 1 ga l l on ( l i q . US) 2.113 376 42 p i n t s ( l i q . US) 33.814 022 7 f l u i d ounces (US)

neter tml 39.370 079 inches 3.280 839 9 f e e t 1.093 613 3 yards 0.000 621 4 m i l e 1 000 m i l l i m e t e r s 100 cent imeters 0.001" k i lometer

micrometer 0.001* m i l l ime te r (micron) 0.000 039 37 inch

O . O O l I + inch 0.025 4" m i l l i m e t e r 0.000 025 4 ' meter

m i l e 1.609 344" k i lometers 1 609.344" meters 5 280 f e e t 1 760 yards 8 fur longs

m i l l ime te r t m m l 0.1" cerltimeter 0.001+' meter 0.039 370 79 inch

newton (N) 0.101 971 62 k i logram-force 0.224 808 93 pound-force

newtonlsq meter 1 pascal

ounce

pascal [Pa l

p i n t

pound

poundlsq i n ( p s i )

poundlsq f t

poundslcu i n

poundslcu f t

rad ian t r a d l

28.349 523 12 grams 0.028 349 5 kilog.ram 0.278 013 85 newton

1 newtonfsq meter 0.000 145 04 poundlsq inch

16 f l u i d ounces (US) 20 f l u i d ounces (UK)

16 ounces 453.592 37" grams 0.453 592 373 ki logram 4.448 221 615 newtons 7 000 gra ins

6 894.757 2 pascals 2.308 966 f t o f water @ 60F 2.041 772 inches o f Hg @ 60F

47.880 258 pascals 4.882 428 kglsq meter

27 679.905 kglcu meter

16.018 463 kg lcub ic meter

57.295 779 degrees

* ind icd tes va lue i s exact . U n i t s i n pounds are avoirupois. Abbrev ia t ions include: B t u = Br i t ish thermal un i t ; C = Centigrade E lo r . Ce ls ius : Chu = Cent igrade heat u n i t : cu = cubic; EEC = European Economic Camm- un i ty ; F = Fahrenheit: f t = feet o r foot; Hg = Elercury; i n = inch(es): k = k e l v i n : kg f = kilogram-force: lb f = oound-force: l i o = l i o u i d : R = Rmkioe: so = rouare: UK = U n i t e d Kinadom: US - Un i ted S ta tes .

WLT I PLY BY TO OBTAIN MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN

square f e e t square yards sauare meters

cubic decimeter 1 1 000

cubic i n c h 16.387 064't 0.016 387 064

l i t e r cubic cm

cubic cm l i t e r

hectare square m i l e

w e f o o t

i r e l a 1

i t m o s ~ h e r e

cubic f e e t cub ic meters ga l l ons (US)

cubic f o o t 28 316.846 6 0.028 316 85 1 728 0.037 037 04 28.316 846 6 7.480 519 5 6.228 835 6

cubic cm cubic meter cubic inches cub ic yard 1 i t e r s ga l lons (US) ga l lons (uK)

square meters square Yards acre

bar pascals mm of Hg @ 32F inches of ~g @ 32F ft of water @ 60F ~ounds lsquare i nch

cub ic f t l a c r e 0.069 972 3

cubic f o o t 62.365 578 o f water

Pounds @ 15.6C 160F1

cub ic meter 35.314 667 1.307 950 6 264.172 052 1 000 2 113.376 42

cubic fee t cubic yards ga l l ons (US) 1 i t e r s p i n t s (US)

pascals newtonslsq meter newtonlsq mm poundslsq i nch

cub ic yard 0.764 554 9 764.554 86 201.974 03

cubic meter l i t e r s s a l l o n s ( u s )

inches m i l l i m e t e r s cent imeters

rad ian

(meters

f e e t meters

meter lsecond meter lminute

meter mi 11 imeters inches

jou les

pascals poundlsq i n c h p o ~ n d s l s q f o o t

ga l lons (US) cub ic feet cub ic meter

decimeter Cdml 3.937 007 9 100 10

foot-pounds ki logram-meters k i l l o w a t t - h o u r j ou les j ou les

foot-POUndlSeCO~d wat t

degree (ang le ) 0.017 453 29

dekameter [dam] 10 Btu lhour

bushel [ b u l (US1

bushel [ b u l (UK)

cab le (US)

Cels ius

Centigrade

cent imeter [cn

cub ic f e e t cub ic meter

bushels (US) f o o t 0.304 811

304.8'1 12 fathoms

f e e t meters i

f o o t (head) o f 2 986.08 water @ 15.6C 0.433 094 C60F1 62.365 578

Centigrade

Cels ius

i nch m i l l i m e t e r s

f u r l o n g 660 201.168" 220 0.125"

f e e t meters yards m i l e cha in (gunter 66

o r surveyors) 22 20.116 8"

f e e t yards meters g a l l o n (US) 3.785 411 78

- l i q u i d 3 785.411 78 0.003 785 4 0.133 680 56

1 i t e r s cubic cms cubic meter cubic f o o t

chu (obso le te 1.8 u n i t

-459.4 TO 0

Given "C. Temp. 'F.

-273 -4594 - -268 -450 -

Given oC. Temp. 'F. -17R O 27

Given "C. Temp. "F.

10.0 50 122.0 1 0 6 51 1238 I l l 52 1256

Reproduced by couttoly of Jenklns Bror.. valve manufacturarr. Flnd 11 10 doqroe~ F, tho contlqrada aquwlont h in the lest column; If I

Given "C. Temp. "F. PB i l n 730

Given "C. Temp. 'F. 371 filO 1130

Given "C. Temp. 'F.

504 1120 2048

tomperatwe i t lr rcqulrcd to convert In tho cental column. I f thlr temperature tomnoratura ir in dogreor C, tho tahranhelt oqulvalont is In the right column,

[431

AC- >N5 AN CH - 4 4

h2

!44

%a

%4

%A

1364

%6

'3611

Yn

%4

DEClMAl IUIVALENTS - 0052 0104

01 5625 0208 0260

03125 0365 0417

046875 ,0521 ,0573

,0625 ,0677 ,0729

,078125 .0833 "0885

.09375 "0990 ,1042

"109375 ,1146 ,1198

,1250 1 302 ,1354

,140625 ,1458 ,1510

.I 5625 "1615 "1667

.I71 875

.I771 1823

1 875 ,1927 .I979

,203125 ,2083 ,2135

.21875 "2240 ,2292

,234375 .2396 ,2448

,2500

'AC- 3NS :AN 1CH -

?h

%a

?44

1 'h

'364

'3.1

'%a

%6

'%4

"h

3364

Yl

DECIMAL UIVALENT! - 2552 2604

265625 2708 2760

28125 2865 2917

296875 3021 3073

3125 3177 3229

328125 3333 3385

34375 3490 3542

359375 ,3646 ,3698

3750 ,3802 ,3854

,390625 ,3958 ,4010

,40625 ,4115 .4 167

.42 1875

.4271 ,4328

,4375 .4427 "4479

.453125 ,4583 ,4635

,46875 "4740 "4792

,484375 "4896 "4948

,5000

RAC- ONS I F A 307 - 1 %6'

3%

11/16 3% 3%6

3 % 3x6 3 %

3 8 6 3 % 3lM1

3 % 3% 3 %

3 % 4 4x6

4 !/a 4%a 4 %

4%6 4 =/a 456

4% 4%a 4%

41% 4% 4%

4% 4?4 5

5% 5% 5%

5 % 5% 5%

5% 5 % 586

5% 5 v 5%

519 5%

6

?AC- ON5 F AN YCH - ''A

1 'h

' 3 4

%a

1 9 h

3%4

%

'364

?h

'364

4 3 4

4%

DECIMAL WIVALENT - 5052 5104

515625 5208 5260

53125 5365 5417

,546875 ,5521 5573

,5625 ,5677 ,5729

,578125 ,5833 ,5885

,59375 ,5990 ,6042

.609375 ,6146 ,6198

"6250 ,6302 "6354

,640625 "6458 ,65 10

,65625 "66 1 5 "6667

"671 875 ,6771 ,6823

,6875 "6927 .6979

"703125 7083 ,7135

,71875 7240 "7292

734375 ,7396 "7448

.7500

RAC- IONS 31 A 0 0 7 - 6%6" 6%

6% 6 % 6%

6 ]/a 686 6%

6% 6% 6'%a

6% 6% 6%

6% 7 7x6

7 % 7% 7 %

7% 7 % 7%6

7 % 7% 7 %

7'86 7 % 7'%6

7 % 7% 8

8x6 8% 8%

8% 8% 8%

8 %a 8% 8%

8 =/a 8IM1 8 '/a

8'%1 8% 8Y4,

9

RAC. ION! IF AE NCH -

?44

'%6

'$64

17h

"MI

%

J%4

'%6

1

DECIMAL WIVALENT! - 7552 7604

,765625 ,7708 ,7760

,78125 ,7865 ,7917

"796875 ,8021 8073

,8125 "8177 ,8229

.828125 3333 "8385

"84375 ,8490 "8542

,859375 "8646 .a698

,8750 ,8802 "8854

,890625 "8958 .9010

.90625 ,9115 "91 67

"92 1875 ,9271 "9323

,9375 "9427 "9479

"953125 ,9583 .9635

"96875 .9740 ,9792

.984375 "9896 .9948

1.000

XAC. 'IONS OF A 'OOT - 9%6' 9%

9% 9% 9%

9% 936 9 %

9% 9% 91%

9 3/a 91% 9%

9% 0 0%6

0 % 0x6 0 %

0x6 0 % O%a

0 Yz 0%6 0 7 8

0 % 0 % 0 %

0 % o v , 1

1 % ~ 1 % 1%6

1 % 1 %a

1 %

I % a 1 % 1 l % 6

; I % I 1 I%, 11 %

I l'%, 11% I i '94

12

COMPOUND ANGLES

Tiopcroid: A lour sided tigUlC will - two lisrollcl sidos, and lllc oillo

iivo rides 81 m y angic T o m i

a - hl6 'IIB~CT~UI I~ ill UK

A R C A = r b + U R -

i-f-i I1 J = 6 ibis loimula irpplioi i any pal i l l l~ iogr~tn or rnclanglu

TR IANGLE

ZIRCLE ic lm to irblol+4 lor numuviral vsluoi 01 circumlorcncoi mil orovi u l full circles

F U L L CIRCLE

CIRCUMFERENCE = 2 n r =62831053r

A R E A = n r x = 3 1415927r2

SECTOR (as shown)

LENGTH OF ARC = I = = nrL1/180 = 0 0174533rO

AREA= nr2L1/360 = 0 00872664rZ0

S E G M E N T O F CIRCLE OIAMETER=s t (bv44u) RADIUS-r = (a/2) 1. ib2/8al LENGTH OF ARC ' = I

= (nr/90).arccad 1 - iah l l = (nd90l.ursinl612rI w iwo "190 = 0 03490659

\REA.= ( r l - r b t a 6 ) / 2 NOTE: uiccosf 0 1 = ''3ndO in dqjresi whase cosine is 0". und arcrin[Of = "unnlc in degrccr d,oio rinc i s 0'' 'Vulid fo ia paiilivaand loss lhan 2,.

ELLIPSE A R E A - i ~ ~ ~ a 6 I

= 0 7053982ia61 CIRCUMFERENCE = n[(az t 6 2 ) / 2 ] ~ 2 vppioximatl

PRISM BASE O F A N Y SHAPE: UPRIGHT OR SLOPING

AREAOF SECTIDN=A DISTANCE BETWEEN PARALLEL ,, SECTIONS'A' AND 'A' = b VOLUME = IIA

k O T E l n l S f-0iihlLi.A CIAY LIE AP?- E D TO CY.II.DH.C A h 0 RECTAhG-LAR T A R 6

C O N E BASE O F A N Y SHAPE: UPRIGHT OR SLOPING

AREA OF BASE-A 11 HElGliT (mcaiuicd a1 iighl onglcs

l o b a d = 11 VOLUME = h A / 3

FRUSTUM O F C O N E SECTION O F A N Y SHAPE: UPRIGHT O R SLOPING

1, DISTANCE BETWEEN SURFACE 'A'AND'B = h VOLUME = (lr/3) [ A I B + i A B l '

FRONT END 'ATIONARY HEAD TYPES

-*=a-* 0 CHANNEL

AND REMOVABLE COVER

BONNET INTEGRAL COVER

CHAIIIIEL IIITCGRAL VIlTll TUBE- SltEET A l l 0 ICt.lOVAELt COVER

F I X T O

CHANNEL INTEGRAL WITH TUBE- SHEET AND REMOVABLE COVER

SPECIAL HIGH PRESSURE CLOSUR

SHELL TYPES I

nvOPASSSHELL WITH L O ~ ~ G ~ T U D ~ N A L BAFFLE

DOUBLESPLIT FLOW I

DIVIDED FLOW

-r

KETTLE TYPE REBOILER

- FIXED TUBESHEET

LIKE "8" STATIONARY HEAD

FIXED TUBESHEET LIKE ti" STATIOtIARY HEAD

OUTSIDE PACKED FLOATING HEAD

-- FLOATING HEAD

WITH BACKING DEVICE

PULL THROUGH FLOATING HEAD

U-TUBE BUNDLE I

maxiinurn Ratings For flanges conforming to RNSI Standard 816.5 dimensions and material specification nSTm A-105

GAGE WORKING PRESSURE I N psi FOR FLANGE CLASSES 150 - 2500 TEMPEWTURE

FAHRENHEIT F L A N G E C L A S S E S

Standard ANSI 016.5 does not recommend using flanges manufactured from carbon steels made to ASTM specification A-105 at temperatures in excess of lO0DF (538C) at any time, or their prolonged usage at temperatures ,over 800F (42712). [ASTM A-105 carbon steel i s included in material group 1.1. of ANSI 016.5.1

THERMAL GRADIENTS, THERMAL CYCLING and E X ~ E R N A L LUAUS The suitability of slip-on, socket-welding and threaded flange attachments at 540F (282C) and -50F (-46C) is discussed in ANSI 816.5, which also makes recommendations to prevent leakage from Class 150 flanged joints at 400F (204C), and other classes at higher temp- atures, if the above operating conditions are anticipated, and expected to be severe.

Ratings are for non-shock conditions. Values in this table do not prevail over limitations imposed by codes, standards, regulations or other obligations which may pertain to projects.

FOR USE ON BUTT-MLOING ELBOWS RS PERRITTEO BY THE PIPING SPECIFICRTION FOR THE PROJECT

4 5 O ELBOW

X

LR = LONG RADIUS SR = SHORT RADIUS * INDICATES NUMBER OF FLANGES WITHOUT INTERFERENCE

- MPS --

2

I CUSS 150 FLANGES 1

OIEN5IONS IN INCHES

O I W N S I O N S I N I N C H E S

DATA FOR WELDING-NECK FLANGES

L = LENGTH THRU HUB OF WELOING- NECK FLANGE WITH R I N G J O I N T

G = GAP BETWEEN FLANGE FACES WITH R I N G I N COMPRESSION

I F L A N G E G L A S S E S I

NPS/ I RING^ 1 RING^ 1 R I N G I R ING I R I N G I N o NO N o NO N o

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE: NPS 1 112 314 1 1 1 112 1 2 3 1 4 6 1 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

I OUTSIDE DIAMETER 1 4 75 5 12 1 5 88 7 1 8 5 10 5 112 25 15 5 1 19 23 126 5 29 5 132 5 36 138 75 46 1

1 BOR

I I I I I I I I

END OF PlPE TO FACE OF FLANGE or LAP JOINT STUB END ' - E: WELD-I

:

/ 1 BOLTS PER FLANGE 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 8 8 1 8 12 1 12 12 1 16 16 1 16 16 / 16 16 1 / I BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER / 3.25 3 5 / 4 4 88 / 6 5 8 / 9.5 12 5 / I 5 5 19 122 5 25 i27 75 30 5 / 3 2 75 39 /

&

l e n g t h - except I I I I I I I I

Note 5 RJI 4 25 4 . 5 1 5 5 5 1 5 7 5 7 1 7 7 5 10.5 112.75 13.5 115.25 16.75 118.5 20.75 122 25 25.5

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE: NPS 112 314 1 1 112 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

14 25 16 25 WELD-NECK

I BOLTS PER FLANGE 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 8 8 1 8 8 1 12 12 1 12 I I 1 BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER 3 5 3 75 4 25 5 75 6 75 9 10.75 14 5 17 25 21.25 24.38

DIAMETER OF DOLT 1 314 314 1 718 1 1/81 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 1 2 2 11212 314 I I

2 62 3

OUTSIDE DIAMETER

I I I I I I I I STUDBOLT THREAD I R F ~ 4 75 5 1 5 5 6 75 1 7 8.75 1 10 13 5 1 15 19 25121.25

5 .25 5 5

& END OF PlPE TO FACE OF FLANGE or LAP JOINT STUB END '

l e n g t h - except I I I I I I I I Note 5 RJ( 4 75 5 1 5.5 6.75 1 7 9 110'25 14 115 5 20 1 22

3 12 3 5

6 25 8

BORE: WELD-NECK

WELD-NECK

SLIP-ON

SOCKET

THREADED

4 25 4 88

3 .12 3.38

L-J

9 .25 12

ANSI

5.12 7

3 75 4.62

14 19

Wall t h i ckness o f p i p e + 0 06- inch


STUB END

8 62 10.25

5 .25 6 8 8

0 3 1 0 4 4

3 3

2 2 MSS

2 1 75 26 5

11 38 12

30

7 7 5 11

'Order t o match I n t e r n a l Diameter o f ~ i ~ e

0.31 0 .69

4 4

2 2

12 5 13 12

12.75 16.75

0 . 8 8 0.5

6 6

2 5 2 . 5

18.5

0.62 0.88

6 8

3 3 . 5

0.94 1.06

8 10

4 5

1

10

6

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE: NPS 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

OUTSIDE DIAMETER 1 3 7 5 4 6 2 1 4 0 8 6 1 2 1 6 5 8 2 5 1 1 0 7 5 14 1 1 6 5 20 1 2 2 2 3 7 5 1 2 7 2 9 2 5 1 3 2 37 1

, I I I I I

A END OF SLIP-ON / P1,TO / Wall th i ckness o f p i p e t 0 06- inch

G FACE OF SOCKET " I 0 8 1 0 88 1 0.88 0 94 1 1 06 1 3 1 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I I

or LAP THREADED 0 38 0 31 0 3 1 0 44 0 69 0 50 0 62 0.88 0.94 0 94 1

L-J ANSI 3 3 4 4 6 6 1 6 8 1 8 10 1 1 0 12 1 1 2 12 I 1 2 12 P END . STUB I I I I I E EN0 MSS 2 2 2 2 2 , 5 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 6

BORE: WELD-NECK & SOCKET I Order t o match I n t e r n a l Diameter of o i o e

-

BOLTS PER FLANGE 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 12 12 16 20 20 20 20 24 24 1 1 8 0 CIRCLE D I E T E R 2 62 3 25 1 3 5 4 5 5 6 6 1 8 5 11 5 3 . 7 17 119 25 20 75 123 75 25 75 128 5 7

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE: NPS 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 I 8 20 24

OUTSIDE DIAMETER 4 75 5 12 5 88 7 8 5 9 5 11.5 15 18 5 21 5 1 24 25 25 127 75 3 1 133 75 41

L T I N G

F L A N G E

T Y P E

DIAMETER OF BOLT

8 0 L T I N

1/2 5/B

3 3.5

3 3 . 5

STUDBOLTTHREAD l e n g t h - except l a p - j o i n t : Note 5

& EN0 OF PIPE TO FACE OF FLANGE o r L A P JOINT STUB END '

RF

RJ

BORE: WELD-NECK

I I l e n g t h - except l a p - j o i n t : Note 5 RJ 4 .25 4 . 5 5 5 . 5 5.75 5.75 6.75 7.75 8 .75 9 25 10 11 11.5 13.25 114.25 18

Order t o match I n t e r n a l Diameter of p i p e

BOLTS PER FLANGE


DIAMETER OF BOLT

I

WELD-NECK

SLIP-ON

SOCKET

THREADED

4 4

3 .25 3.5

3/4 3/4

4.25 4.5 STUDBOLTTHREAD

7/8 1

5.75 6.75

5.75 6.75

5/8 3/4

3.5 4 2 5

3.5 4.25

2.62 3

L-J STUB END

RF

5/8 3/4

4.25 5

4 25 5

ANSI

MSS

4 4

4 4 8 8

7/8 1

5 5.5

1 1/8 1 4

7.5 8.5

7.75 8 . 5

3 1 2 3.5

Wall th ickness o f p i p e + 0 06- inch


8 B .. , 6.5 7 5

7/8 7/8

5.75 5.75

1 4 1 3/8

8.75 9 .25

8.75 9 2 5

4.25 4.25

0.62 0.69

3 3

2 2

8 12

9.25 12.5

1 8 1 8

6.75 7.5

1 1/2 1 5/8

10 10.75

10 10.75

4.75 5.75

0 6 9 0 . 8 1

4 4

2 2

1 5/8 1 7/8

11.25 13

11.5 13 25

12 16

1 5 5 18 .5

1 3/8 1 3/8

8.75 9.25

6.62 7.5

1.06 0 5 0

6: 6

2 .5 2 . 5

20 20

21 22

1 3/8 1 1/2

10 10.75

8.12 8 .62

0.62 0 8 8

6 8

3 3 5

20 20

24.25 27

1 5/8 1 7/8

11.25 12.75

8.75 9.25

0.94 1

8 10

4 5

20 20

29 5 3 5 5

2 2 1/2

13.75 17.25

10 11.75

1

10 12

6 6

12 12

6 6

12 12

6 6

OUTSIDE DIAMETER 1 3 5 3 8 8 1 4 2 5 5 1 6 7 5 9 11 1135 16 1 1 9 21 1 2 3 5 25 I 2 7 5 32 1

d NOMINAL PIPE SIZE: NPS 1 1/2 3/4 1 1 1 1/2 1 2 3 1 4 6 I 8 10 1 12 14 1 16 18 20 24

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

THREADED I 0 06 0 06 1 0 0 25 1 0 31 0.19 1 0 25 0 38 1 0 44 0 50 1 0 56

1 : a - A END OF S;IP-ON

I 80CE: WELD:NECK E SOCKET 1 0 62 0 82 1 1 05 1 6 1 1 2 07 3.07 1 4 03 6 07 1 7 98 10 02 1 12 I I I I I I I I I I I

[Order t o match p i p e I 0 1

Wall th i ckness o f p i p e + 0 06- inch &

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE. NPS 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

OUTSIDE DIAMETER 1 3 75 4.62 1 4.88 6 12 1 6 5 8 25 / 10 12 5 1 15 17.5 120 5 23 125 5 28 130 5 36 /

WELD-NECK ( 1 . 8 8 2 . 0 6 ) 2 . 1 9 2 . 4 4 1 2 5 2 . 7 5 1 3 3.5 1 4 4 1 4 . 5 5 1 5 5 . 5 5.69 6

N / PIPE TO 1 G FACE OF SOCKET '* I 0 3 1 0 25 1 0 25 0 3 1 1 0 38 0.44 1 I

1 8 0 L , ; N

I

I I I I !

BOLTS PER FLANGE


DIANETER OF OOLT

STUDDOLTTHREAD IRF

1 : A N G E I T Y P E

20 20

25 29.5

1 8 1 1/4

6.25 6.75

% END OF PIPE TO FACE OF FLANGE or LAP JOINT STUB END '

16 16

21.25 22.75

1 1 I

5.25 5 7 5

4 4

2 .38 2 .75

112 112

2.25 2 . 5

BORE: WELD-NECK & SOCKET

4 4

4.75 6

518 51s

3.25 3.5

4 4

3 .12 3.88

112 112

2.5 2.75

WELD-NECK

SLIP-ON

SOCKET

TNREADED

8 0 L T

N

2 .06 2 . 2 5 1 2 4 4 2 6 9 1 2 . 7 5 3 . 1 2 1 3 . 3 8 3 8 8 ) 4 . 3 8 4 6 2 ) 5 . 1 2 5 . 6 2 1 5 7 5 6 2 5 1 6 . 3 8 6 6 2

Wall th i ckness o f p i p e + 0.06-inch

0 , 6 2 0 82

4 4

2.62 3.25

112 5/8

2 . 5 3

3 3.5

L-J STUB END

BOLTS PER FLANGE

OOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER

DlAElETER OF BOLT

STUDBOLT THREAD RF

8 8

7 . 5 9 . 5

51s 314

3 . 5 4

7 .98 10.02

12 16

13 15.25

7/8 1

5.5 6.25

6 6.75

ANSI

MSS

G l e n g t h - except I l a p j o i n t : Note 5 IM

12 12

6 6

1 .05 1 . 6 1

4 4

3.5 4.5

Sf8 314

3 3 . 5

3.5 4

8 12

11.75 14.25

314 718

4 , 2 5 4 . 5

0 .56 0.62

0 0 6 0 06

3 3

2 2

12 [Order t o match p i p e ID1

12 12

17 18.75

718 1

4.75 5.25

0 6 9 0 7 5

8 10

4 5

2 0 7 3.07

8 8' 5 6.62

5/0 3/4

3 . 5 4.25

4 4 .75

0.62 0.62

0 0 2 5

4 4

2 2

4.03 6.07

8 12

7.88 10.62

3/4 3/4

4.5 4.75

5 5.5

24 24

27 32

1 4 1 1/2

8 9

8.75 10

16 20

17.75 20.25

1 1/8 1 8

6.75 7

7 .25 7 5

0.75

10 12

6 6

20 24

22,.5 24.75

1 1 1 4

7.5 7.75

8 8.25

12 12

6 6

0.69 0.94

0.44 q.25

6 6

2.5 Zz5

0 38 0 62

6 8

3 3.5

THREADED FI'TTINGS - WIALLEABLE-IRON

CARBONSTEEL

THREAD ENGAGEMENT %%

DIMENSlONS I N THIS TABLE ARE FOR BANDED FITTINGS AND CONFORM TO ANSI STANDARD 816.3, AND FEDERAL SPECIFICATION WW-P-521. UNIONS CONFORM TO ANSI 816.39. DATA FROM I T T GRINNELL CORPORATION AND STOCKHAM VALVES AND FITTINGS

OAT^: SMITH VALVE CORPORATION GATE VALVES: FULL PORT GLOBE VALVES: CONVENTIONAL PORT

I ' R ' is the 'REMOVED RUN' o f

p i p e occupied by the valve I

I 'R' dimensions a r e based on normal thread engagement f o r t i g h t j o i n t s

x These dimensions a l so apply to horizontal lift-check valves

' R ' dimensions include 0.06-inch expansion gaps f o r welding. Refer t o t e x t : Chart 2.2

REDUCER

LATERAL

:Bonney Fo rge d L a d i s h ]

DIAMETER

B R A THREDOLET

(REOUCING)

Bonney Forge] /H UNION

,Bcnney Fo rge ] --

HEX BUSH

SWAGE

--

THREAD ENGAGEMENT

I) ARE BRS R ~ R L THRERO ENGRGEPZNT BETWEEN RRL? RNO FEMRLE THREROS TO MAKE TIGHT JOINTS - ROUNOCO 1 0 l f l 0 0 - i n c h

(2) OIKNSIONS FOR FITTINGS RRE FROM THE FOLLOWING SUPPLIERS' OATR: BONNEY FORGE, I T 1 GRINNEL, LROISII RNO VOGT ( 3 ) UNLESS THE SUPPLIER I S STATED. ' L ' 6 ' 0 ' OIPZNSIONS &RE THE LARGEST QUOTED BY BONNEY FORGE. I T 1 GRINNELL. LROISH RNO VCGT ( 4 ) FITTINGS CONFORR TO RNSI 816.11, EXCEPT LRTERALS. WHECH RRE MROE TO RRNUFRCTURERS' STRNOAROS. UNIONS CON&R 1 0 MSS-SP-83 (5 ) FOR SIZES AN0 RUAILABILITIES OF PIPE NIPPLES, REFER TO 'RRLLERBLE-IRON PIPE FITTINGS' - TRBLE 0-11 ( 6 ) OImENSIONS FOR INSlRLLEO THREOOLETS EXCLUDE THE 'ROOT GRP' - REFER TO 'DIMENSIONING SPOOLS (WELDED RSSEPBLIES)' - 5.3.5

HALF-COUPLING

LATERAL

( 5 ) FOR INFORRATION ON THE BORE OIRNETER AND RATING OF F ITT INGS, REFER TO 'SOCKET-WELOEO P I P I N G ' - CHRRT 2.2 (6) UNIONS CONFORR TO RSS-SP-83

-- FACE DIMENSIONS BY CLASS FOR VALVES CONFORMING TO API 594

-

F L A N G E C L A S S E S '" TOO 1500 1 1 7 600 p-

-.-

DUAL PLATES

LARGE SMALL I_/_/

LENGTHS: 6.5 d LENGTHS: 7.0 ---I LENGTHS: 8.0 1

1-34

LENGTHS: 9 . 0

I LENGTHS: 11 I

LENGTHS: 12

LENGTHS: 13

LENGTHS: 15

LARGE SMALL END I END I Dimensions i n t h i s Lsbie are for mi115 Iron Works swages,

uvaliabia " i lh ends p la in , threaded,

beveilad, Uictnuiic grooued. and i n any

coinbination o f these teiminations

1 N O M I N A L P I P E S I Z E O F M A I N R U N CNPSI I

at. provided by BONNEY FORGE. Oiinensions far Eibole t s are nominal. S i z e Z-Inch Elbo ie t s arc designed to f i t the d i f f e r e d

N O M I N A L P I P E S I Z E O F M A I N R U N CNPSl I N P S $ 1 3 1 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 6 18 20 24

DIMENSION 'A' 1 3 . 3 8 ] 4.12 1 5.62 1 7.00 1 8 50 1 10.00 ) 1 1 . 0 0 I 1 2 00 1 1 3 . 5 0 1 15 00 1 17 00 1

2 n

2 EXTRA-STRONG " u 3

I OIMEIISIONS Ill 1 l l l S TABLE ARE IIOI,lIEIAL All0 FOR COllB

I L S T L S T L S T - S T L S 6 9.5 11.5 14 19.5

-~~~~ ~~~ ~

10 WELOOLETS DO NOT ItlCLUOE TilE 'II' ~ T l O l l S OF FITTINGS ARE ROUllDEO TO OIIUALLY-OPERATED CAST-STEEL VALVE j WITH v n L v f s ARE GIVEN IN SECTIOH

GAP' - REFER TO TEXT: SECTIOtl 5 3 5

STANDARD AND EXTRA-STRONG

CONCENTRIC I-- r-4 1 REDUCERS , c c c E m t c CINPS C C ~ N P S

REGULAR 6 g~ "'1 90" LR ELLS mmm

RAISED-FACE FLANGE "LI'IW,, m T l l " l l r tP3 2-24

DIMENSIONS ALSO APPLY TO GATE

GLOBE DIMEtISIONS ALSO APPLY TO CLOBC VALVES WlTil BUTT- WELDING ENDS

D WELOOLETS 0 0 llOT INCLUDE THE 'WELO GAP' - REFER TO TEXT: SECTION TiONS OF FITT!llGS ARE ROUIIOED TO lIl00-inch

STANDARD AND EXTRA-STRONG

Z m a - n o m m z ~ r n m o a m

m a - C O W

+. ...a ... ,- C 0

,- ... N C

,- ?- P N ... ?- YIP ... C m m ... ,- 4 m

?- ?- Yi m

N ... o w

N N C 0

N N P W

PIPE WITH FLANGES

CLASS 1 5 0 & C U S S 1 5 0 FUINGES

L;'" I NOMINAL P I P E S I Z E (NPS) OF FLANGED P IPE

150 2 3 4 G 8 1 0 12 1 4 1 6 18 20 2 4

C U S S 3 0 0 & C U S S 300 FUNGES

INSULATION DIMENSIONS I N THESE TABLES ARE SPACINGS FOR BARE PIPE. FOR 14SULATEO LINES. ADO THE THICKNESS OF INSULATION AND COVERING TO THESE FIGURES

PIPE FITTINGS - But t -Weld ing

C lass 600 C lass '300 C lass 150

- E l b o l e t s - M a l l e a b l e - I r o n

Classes 150 & 300 - N ipp les : P ipe and Tank n i p p l e s - Socket-Welding. Forged S tee l

Classes 3000, 6000 & 9000 - Socko le ts . Reducing - Swages - Threaded. Forged S t e e l

Classes 2000, 3000 & 6000 - Th redo le t s . Reducina

Tab le 0 -1 Tab le 0-2 Tab le 0-3 Tab le 0-5

Tab le 0-11 Tab le 0-11

Tab le 0-8 Tab le 0-8 Tab le 0-4

Tab le 0-9 Tab le 0-9

Tab le 0-1M Table D-2M Table D-3M Table 0-5M

Tab le D-11M Tab le 0-11M

Tab le D-8M Tab le D-8M Tab le D-4M

Tab le 0-9M Tab le D-9M "

' - Weldo le ts . Reducing - r e f e r t o : 'PIPE FITTINGS - But t -Weld ing ' PIPEWAY - Spacing i n pipeways Tab le A-1

Jumpovers a t 45-degrees Tab le A-2 Rununders a t 45-degrees Tab le A-3

- Width. Formula f o r p l a n n i n g Tab le A-1

RING-JOINT GASKET DATA Tab le F-7 ROUNDING VALUES. Rules f o r Tab le M-7

SPANS. O f hor izona ' l p i p e Tab le S - 1 - w i t h 3 f t r i s e o r f a l l Char ts S-2

SPECIFIC HEAT. Var ious substances & gases Tab le M-8 STAIRWAYS Char t S-3 STRUCTURAL STEEL - Angle d a t a Tab les S-5 - Channel d a t a Tab les S-5 - W Shapes Tab le S-4

SWAGES Tab le 0-4

TANK & VESSEL VOLUMES C h a r t T-2 TEES - REDUCING. But t -Weld ing Tab le 0-6 THREAD ENGAGEMENT. For f i t t i n g s Tab le 0-9 TUBE DATA (Copper: Types K, L & M) Tab le T-1

VALVE DATA: ANSI Classes 150 - 2500 Tab le V - 1 - Check: L i f t , Swing & T i l t i n g - d i s c Tab le V - 1 - Gate 5 Tab le V - 1 - Globe Tab le V - 1 - API C lass 800 Gate, Globe & L i f t - c h e c k Tab le 0-10 - Opera t i ng h e i g h t s f o r va l ves Char t P-2

W SHAPES. S t r u c t u r a l shapes WEIGHTS OF MATERIALS WEIGHTS OF PIPING

Tab le S-4 Tab le W-2 Tab les W - 1

7 Tab le A-1M 8 Tab le A-2M 8 Tab le A-3M 7 Tab le A-1M

24 Tab le F-7M 46

61 Tab les S-5M 61 Tab les S-5M 60 Tab les S-4M 12 Tab le 0-4M

63 12 Table D-6M 17 Tab le D-9M 62

64 Tab le V - 1 M 64 Tab le V-1M 64 Tab le V-1M 64 Tab le V-1M 18 Tab le D-1OM 54

60 Tab le S-4M 7 3 65

CONTENTS OF PART I1 US uni t s Page METRIC un i t s Page

ANGLES. Structural shapes ARRANGING LINES IN PIPEWAYS

J3ENDS. Tangent length formula

CHANNELS. Structural shapes CHECK VALVES - L i f t , Swing & Til t ing-disc - Wafer-type

CIRCLES. Diameter, Circumference & Area CONVERSIONS - Customary & Metric un i t s - Decimals of an inch & of a foot - Millimeters/inches - Temperature: Fahrenheit/Celsius

Formula: Fahrenheit, Celsuis, kelvin

DECIMALS OF AN INCH & OF A FOOT DISHED H E A D S . Volumes

EXPANSION. Linear, of piping materials

FLANGE DATA: Flange Classes 150 - 2500 - Dimensions - Pressure/Temperature Ratings ' - Ring-joint da ta , Welding-neck - Sl ip-on f langes on 8/W el bows

FLDW O F WATER THROUGH SCHEDULE 40 PIPE FLOW RESISTANCE OF FITTINGS

HEAT-EXCHANGER NOMENCLATURE

LAP-JOINT STUB-END: ANSI & MSS

MEASUREMENTS - Areas & Volumes - Compound angles - Hypotenuse fo r 45-degree Triangles - Triangles. Formulas fo r

METRIC. Introduction MILLIMETERS TO FEET & INCHES - Tables in f rac t ions and decimals

MITERS. Angles for

PAPER SIZES. Metric & American PERSONNEL CLEARANCES P I P E DATA

Tables S-5 Tables A - 1

Tables M-2

Tables S-5

Table V - 1 Table 0-7 Table M-4

Table M-7 Table M-5 Table M-3 Table M-6 Table M-7

Table M-5 Chart T-2

Tables F Table F-9 Table F-7 Table F-8 Table F-11 Table F-10

Chart H - 1

Tables F

Chart M - 1 Chart M - 1 Tables M-2 Chart M - 1

Tables M-3 Tab1 es M-2

Chart P-2 Tables P - 1

rables S-5M rables A-1M

Tables S-5M

Table V - 1 M Table 0-7M

Tables FM Table F-9M Table F-7M Tables F-8M

Tables FM

Chart S-6M

Tables P-1M

PART I I CHARTS & TABLES BY PAGE NUMBERS I-- Tables A-1 Table A-2 Table A-3

Table D-1 Table D-2 Table D-3 Table 0-4 Table D-5 Table 0-6 Table D-7 Table D-8 Table D-9 Table D-10 Table D-11

Table F-1 Table F -2 Table F-3 Table F -4 Table F-5 Table F-6 Table F-7 Table F-8 Table F-9 Table F-10 Table F-11

Char t H-1

Char t M- I Tables M-2 Tables M-3 Table M-4 Table M-5 Table M-6 Table M-7 Table M-8

Tables P-1 Char t P-2

Table S-1 Char ts S-2 Chart 5-3 Table S-4 Tables S-5

Table T - 1 Char t T -2

Table V-1

Tables W-1 Table W-2

Tables A-1M 77 Tables A-2M 7 8 Tables A-3M 7 8

Table D-1M Table D-2M Table 0-1M Table D-4M Table D-5M Table D-6M Table D-7M Table D-8M Table D-9M Table D-1OM Table D-11M

Table F-1M Table F-2M Table F-3M Table F-4M Table F-5M Table F-6M Table F-7M Table F-8M Table F-9M

Tables P-1M 97-102

Table S-4M 103 Tables S-5M 104 Char t S-6M 105

Table V-1M 106

piping guid

Documents

piping guide

service piping

piping drawings

utility piping

usesof piping

design of piping systems

plant construction piping

tor industrial process